LINK: CONTENT & A-Z
The Ultimate Driving Machine
OWNER'S HANDBOOK. THE BMW 3 SERIES TOURING PLUG-IN- HYBRID.
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 WELCOME TO BMW. Owner's Handbook.
Congratulations on your choice of a BMW. The better you are acquainted with your vehicle, the easier you will find it is to operate. We would therefore like to offer you the following advice: Please read the Owner's Handbook before setting out in your new BMW. Also use the integrated Owner's Handbook in your vehicle. It contains impor‐ tant notes on how to operate the vehicle, enabling you to derive maximum benefit from the technical advantages of your BMW. It also contains informa‐ tion which will help you to maintain both the operating and road safety of your BMW as well as its full resale value. At the time of production in the factory, the printed Owner's Handbook is the most up-to-date medium. After a vehicle software update – for example, a Remote Software Upgrade – the integrated Owner's Handbook for the vehi‐ cle will contain updated information. Supplementary information is provided in the other documents of on-board literature. We wish you a safe and pleasant journey.
3 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 TABLE OF CONTENTS
After a vehicle software update – for example, a Remote Software Up‐ grade – the integrated Owner's Handbook for the vehicle will contain up‐ dated information.
NOTES Notes ...... 6 Safety of the hybrid system ...... 20 Owner's Handbook media ...... 21
QUICK REFERENCE Getting in ...... 24 Adjustment and operation ...... 28 On the move ...... 32
CONTROLS Driving area ...... 42 Sensors of the vehicle ...... 47 Vehicle operating state ...... 51 iDrive ...... 55 BMW Remote Software Upgrade ...... 72 General settings ...... 75 Personal settings ...... 79 Connections ...... 84 Opening and closing ...... 93 Seats, mirrors and steering wheel ...... 122 Carrying children safely ...... 136 Driving ...... 149 Displays ...... 171 Lights ...... 199 Safety ...... 208 Driving Stability Control Systems ...... 247 Driver Assistance Systems ...... 251 Driving comfort ...... 304 Air conditioning ...... 305
4 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Interior equipment ...... 319 Storage compartments ...... 325 Luggage compartment ...... 329
DRIVING HINTS Driving precautions ...... 336 Towing a trailer ...... 342 Saving fuel ...... 348
MOBILITY Charging vehicle ...... 356 Refuelling ...... 365 Wheels and tyres ...... 368 Engine compartment ...... 393 Operating fluids ...... 396 Maintenance ...... 403 Replacing parts ...... 406 Help in case of a breakdown ...... 412 General care ...... 422
REFERENCE Technical data ...... 428 Seats for child restraint systems ...... 433 Appendix ...... 436 Everything from A to Z ...... 438
© 2020 Bayerische Motoren Werke Aktiengesellschaft Munich, Germany Not to be reproduced, wholly or in part, without written permission from BMW AG, Munich. English ID7 X/20, 11 20 490 Printed on environmentally friendly paper, bleached without chlorine, suitable for recycling. 5 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 6
NOTES Notes
Notes
About this Owner's Additional sources of Handbook information
Orientation Service Partner The quickest way to find information on a partic‐ A Service Partner of the manufacturer will be ular topic or feature is to consult the alphabetical happy to answer any further questions. index. We recommend that you read through the first Internet chapter to obtain an initial overview of the vehi‐ Vehicle information and general information on cle. BMW – on technology, for example – are avail‐ able on the Internet: www.bmw.com. Validity of Owner's Handbook Integrated Owner's Handbook in Vehicle production the vehicle At the time of production in the factory, the prin‐ The integrated Owner's Handbook describes the ted Owner's Handbook provides up-to-date in‐ specific equipment and functions present in the formation. Updates following the copy deadline vehicle. The Integrated Owner's Handbook can can result in differences between the printed be shown in the Control Display. Owner's Handbook and the integrated Owner's Handbook in the vehicle. BMW Driver's Guide App You will find notes on any updates in the appen‐ The BMW Driver's Guide app specifically de‐ dix of the printed Owner's Handbook for the ve‐ scribes the equipment and functions included in hicle. the vehicle. The app can be displayed on smart‐ phones and tablets. After a software update in the vehicle BMW Driver’s Guide web version After a vehicle software update – for example, a The Driver’s Guide web version shows the most Remote Software Upgrade – the integrated appropriate information for the selected vehicle. Owner's Handbook for the vehicle will contain Where possible, only the equipment and func‐ updated information. tions actually installed in the vehicle will be de‐ scribed. The Driver’s Guide web version can be Owner's Handbook for displayed in any up-to-date browser. Navigation, Entertainment, Communication The Owner's Handbook for navigation, entertain‐ ment and communication is available as a printed book from Service. These topics are also covered in the integrated Owner's Handbook in the vehicle.
6 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 7
Notes NOTES
Symbols and displays
Symbols in the Owner's Handbook
Symbol Meaning
Precautions that must be followed in order to avoid the possibility of injury The symbols on parts of the vehicle indicate that to yourself and to others as well as life-threatening injury could occur as a result of serious damage to the vehicle. electric shock if the high-voltage technology or Measures that can be taken to help the orange-coloured high-voltage components protect the environment. are used inappropriately. "..." Texts on a display in the vehicle for selecting functions. Vehicle equipment ›...‹ Commands for the voice control system. This Owner's Handbook describes all models ››...‹‹ Replies by the voice control system. and all the standard, national and optional equip‐ ment available for the model series. As a result, this Owner's Handbook may also contain de‐ Actions scriptions and illustrations of equipment and Actions that need to be carried out are shown as functions which are not installed in your vehicle, a numbered list. The list of steps must be carried for example on account of the special equipment out in the specified sequence. selected or the country specification. 1. First action. This also applies to safety-relevant functions and systems. 2. Second action. Please comply with the relevant laws and regula‐ Lists tions when using the corresponding functions and systems. Alternative options and lists of items with no im‐ If certain equipment and models are not descri‐ plied sequence are shown as bullet point lists: bed in this Owner's Handbook, refer to the Sup‐ ▷ First option. plementary Owner's Handbooks provided. ▷ Second option. In right-hand drive vehicles, some controls are arranged differently from those shown in the il‐ Symbol on components and lustrations. assemblies This symbol on a vehicle component indicates that further information on the Production date component is available in the Owner's Handbook. The production date of your vehicle can be found at the bottom of the door pillar on the driv‐ er's door.
7 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 8
NOTES Notes
The production date is defined as the calendar Validity of Owner's Handbook month and the calendar year in which the vehicle body and the powertrain assemblies are joined Vehicle production and the vehicle is driven or moved from the pro‐ At the time of production in the factory, the prin‐ duction line. ted Owner's Handbook provides up-to-date in‐ formation. Updates following the copy deadline Status of the Owner's can result in differences between the printed Owner's Handbook and the integrated Owner's Handbook Handbook in the vehicle. You will find notes on any updates in the appen‐ General dix of the printed Owner's Handbook for the ve‐ The high standards of safety and quality that hicle. characterise the vehicles are ensured through ongoing development. On rare occasions, this After a software update in the may mean that the features described in this vehicle handbook will vary from those in your vehicle. After a vehicle software update – for example, a Remote Software Upgrade – the integrated For Australia/New Zealand: Owner's Handbook for the vehicle will contain general updated information. When reading this Owner's Handbook, please bear the following in mind: to ensure that our ve‐ Your own safety hicles continue to embody the highest quality and safety standards, we pursue a policy of con‐ tinuous, ongoing development. Because modifi‐ Intended use cations in the design of both vehicles and acces‐ Please comply with the following when using the sories may be introduced at any time, your own vehicle: vehicle's equipment may vary from that descri‐ ▷ Owner's Handbook. bed in this handbook. For the same reason, it is also impossible to guarantee that all descriptions ▷ Information attached to the vehicle. Do not will be completely accurate in all respects. remove stickers. We must therefore request your understanding ▷ Technical data of the vehicle. of the fact that the manufacturer of your vehicle ▷ The applicable laws and safety standards of is unable to recognise legal claims based on dis‐ the country in which the vehicle is used. crepancies between the data, illustrations and ▷ Vehicle papers and legal documents. descriptions in this Owner's Handbook and your own vehicle's equipment. Please note, too, that Warranty some of the optional equipment described in this manual is not available on Australian models due The vehicle is technically designed for the oper‐ to restrictions imposed by Australian Design ating conditions and approval (homologation) re‐ Rules and other requirements. quirements of the country to which it was first delivered. If the vehicle is to be driven in another Should you require any further information, country, it may need to be adapted beforehand please contact your Service centre, who will be to any different operating conditions and appro‐ pleased to advise you. val requirements prevailing in that country. If the vehicle does not comply with the homologation
8 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 9
Notes NOTES
requirements in a certain country, no warranty BMW accepts product responsibility for genuine claims can be lodged there for the vehicle. War‐ BMW parts and accessories. On the other hand, ranty claims can also be invalidated if the on- BMW cannot accept liability for parts or acces‐ board network has been modified, e.g. through sory products of any kind which it has not ap‐ the use of control units, hardware or software proved. that have been classified as unsuitable by the ve‐ BMW is unable to assess each individual product hicle manufacturer A Service Partner is able to of outside origin as to its suitability for use on provide further information. BMW vehicles without safety risk. Likewise no guarantee can be be assumed even if the prod‐ Maintenance and repairs uct has been granted official approval in a spe‐ The advanced technology used in your vehicle, cific country. Tests performed for such approvals for example the state-of-the-art materials and cannot always cover all operating conditions for high-performance electronics, requires appropri‐ BMW vehicles, and some of them therefore are ate maintenance and repair methods. insufficient. Consequently, the manufacturer of the vehicle recommends having corresponding work carried out by a BMW Service Partner. If another BMW Vehicle data and data authorised workshop is chosen, BMW recom‐ protection mends choosing one that performs work, for ex‐ ample maintenance and repair, according to Responsibility and rights BMW specifications with properly trained per‐ sonnel. In the Owner's Handbook, facilities of this Responsibility for data kind are referred to as "another qualified Service Partner or a specialist workshop". Within the scope of data protection directives and legislation, the manufacturer of the vehicle is If work such as maintenance and repair is carried responsible for the processing of personal data out incorrectly, it could result in consequential which is collected when the vehicle is used or damage with associated safety risks. from web pages, customer support, online serv‐ Work performed incorrectly on the vehicle paint‐ ices and marketing campaigns. work can cause components, for example the ra‐ dar sensors, to fail or malfunction, resulting in a Personal identification safety risk. Every vehicle has a unique vehicle identification Parts and accessories number. Depending on the country, a vehicle owner can be identified with the assistance of BMW recommends using parts and accessories the vehicle identification number, the number that are approved by BMW and are therefore plate and the relevant authorities. There are also suitable for this purpose. other ways of tracing data collected in the vehicle You are recommended to consult a BMW Serv‐ back to the driver or vehicle owner, for example ice Partner for advice on genuine BMW parts and via the ConnectedDrive account used. accessories, other BMW approved products and expert advice on all related matters. Data protection laws The safety and compatibility of these products in In accordance with current data protection law, conjunction with BMW vehicles have been vehicle users have certain rights they may assert checked by BMW. against the vehicle manufacturer or companies that collect or process their personal data.
9 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 10
NOTES Notes
Vehicle users have a free and comprehensive ▷ Fulfilling contractual obligations for the provi‐ right to information from organisations which sion of digital services relating to the vehicle, save their personal data. for example BMW ConnectedDrive. These organisations could be: ▷ Ensuring product quality, research and devel‐ ▷ Vehicle manufacturer. opment for new products, as well as optimis‐ ing service processes. ▷ Qualified Service Partners. ▷ Performing sales, service and administration ▷ Specialist workshops. processes, including branches and National ▷ Service providers. Sales Companies. Vehicle users may request information about ▷ Customer support, for example contract pro‐ what personal data has been saved, what it is cessing. used for and where it has come from. Proof of ▷ Advertising communication and market re‐ ownership or use is required in order to obtain search on the basis of personal consent. this information. ▷ Fulfilling legal obligations, for example infor‐ The right of access also extends to information mation regarding Technical Campaigns. about data that has been transferred to other companies or bodies. ▷ Processing warranty claims. Please refer to the vehicle manufacturer's web‐ site for the applicable data privacy policy. This Data collection data privacy policy contains information about the right to have data deleted or corrected. The Type of data collected vehicle manufacturer's website also provides its Depending on the situation, the following per‐ contact details and those of its data protection sonal data may be collected. officer. The vehicle owner can have the data that is Contact details stored in the vehicle read out by a Service Part‐ Name, address, phone number, email address. ner of the manufacturer or another qualified Service Partner or a specialist workshop, on pay‐ Personal data ment of a fee where applicable. ▷ Personal information provided by customers, The legally required on-board diagnosis OBD for example date of birth, education, house‐ socket in the vehicle is used to read out the vehi‐ hold size or occupation. cle data. ▷ Data to determine identity, for example driv‐ er's licence. Data processing The collection of personal data may be neces‐ Contract data sary to enable the manufacturer of the vehicle to ▷ Customer number, contract number, booked fulfil obligations to the customer or legislator or online services. to offer high-quality products and services. ▷ Stored payment information, for example These include, for example: credit card number. ▷ Fulfilling contractual obligations regarding the sale, servicing and repair of vehicles, for ex‐ Credit rating ample sales processes, maintenance. ▷ Information about transactions. ▷ Information about fraud or criminal offences.
10 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 11
Notes NOTES
Interests ▷ When the customer makes direct contact Information provided by the customer regarding with the manufacturer of the vehicle, for ex‐ areas of interest, for example product preferen‐ ample via the web page. ces, hobbies and other personal preferences. ▷ When requesting information on products and services or direct purchases, for example Use of web pages and communication on web pages or in apps. ▷ Information on how web pages are used and ▷ When making direct purchases, for example whether messages are opened or forwarded. on the web page. ▷ Account information regarding online serv‐ ▷ When purchasing services directly, for exam‐ ices, customer portals and prospective cus‐ ple online services. tomer portals. ▷ When responding to the customer regarding direct marketing activities, for example when Transaction and interaction data personal data is provided. Information on the purchasing of products and ▷ When using vehicles, products, services and services, interactions with customer support and digital offers, for example web pages, apps. participation in market research studies. ▷ When transferring personal data through qualified partners of the vehicle manufacturer Use of apps and services of the vehicle or through third-party providers, provided that manufacturer data protection requirements are met. Information on the use of apps on mobile devi‐ ▷ When providing personal data through certi‐ ces and online services. fied address providers, provided that data protection requirements are met. Information on vehicle functions and settings ▷ When reading out vehicle data, including the vehicle identification number, during service Information on functions and settings for the ve‐ and repair activities. hicle, for example when using online services.
Vehicle-related sensor data and usage Data in the vehicle data General Data which is generated and/or processed in the vehicle. A number of electronic control devices are instal‐ led in your vehicle. Electronic control units proc‐ ▷ Driver assistance systems: processing sensor ess data that they receive from vehicle sensors, data which is used to evaluate the vehicle generate themselves or exchange with one an‐ surroundings or the driver's behaviour. other, for example. A high number of control ▷ Personal settings: settings saved in the vehi‐ units are necessary for the vehicle to function cle profile, for example seat setting. safely or provide assistance during driving, for ex‐ ▷ Multimedia, navigation, for example destina‐ ample driver assistance systems. There are also tions. control devices which manage comfort or info‐ tainment functions. Time of data collection Data saved in the vehicle can be deleted at any Personal data may be collected at the following time. This data is only transmitted to third parties times: if expressly requested in the course of using on‐
11 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 12
NOTES Notes
line services. The transfer depends on the set‐ The data is required so that the control units can tings selected for using the services. perform their functions. It is also used for detect‐ ing and rectifying malfunctions, as well as to opti‐ Sensor data mise vehicle functions. Driver assistance systems, for example Active Most of this data is transient and is only pro‐ Cruise Control, collision warning or Attentiveness cessed within the vehicle itself. Only a small pro‐ Assistant, process sensor data which is used to portion of the data is stored in event or error evaluate the vehicle surroundings or the driver's memories in response to specific circumstances. behaviour. These include, for example: Personal settings ▷ Status reports relating to the vehicle and its Convenience functions, such as seat, climate or individual components, for example wheel light settings, make every journey even more speed, wheel circumferential velocity, decel‐ pleasant. The personal settings for these func‐ eration, lateral acceleration, fastened seat tions can be saved in a profile within the vehicle belts. and retrieved on request, for example if the set‐ tings have been changed by another driver. De‐ ▷ Ambient conditions, for example temperature, pending on the equipment, these profiles can be rain sensor signals. saved in the vehicle manufacturer's secure data The data is processed within the vehicle and is systems. When the driver changes vehicle, these usually transient. It is only saved for longer than saved profiles can simply be applied to a differ‐ the operating period if it is required in order to ent vehicle. provide services agreed with the customer. The vehicle settings saved in the vehicle profile can be changed or deleted at any time. Electronic components Electronic parts, for example control devices and Multimedia and navigation vehicle keys, contain components for storing Data can also be imported into the vehicle enter‐ technical information. Information about the vehi‐ tainment and communication system, for exam‐ cle's condition, component use and wear, main‐ ple via a smartphone or MP3 player. The impor‐ tenance requirements, events or errors can be ted data can be processed within the vehicle, for stored temporarily or permanently. example to play the user's favourite music. This information generally documents the condi‐ Depending on the vehicle equipment, this data tion of a component, a module, a system or the includes: vehicle surroundings, including: ▷ Multimedia data such as music, films or pho‐ ▷ Operating states of system components, tos for playback in an integrated multimedia for example fill levels, tyre inflation pressure, system. battery status. ▷ Address book data for use in conjunction with ▷ Malfunctions and faults of important system an integrated hands-free system or an components, for example lights and brakes. integrated navigation system. ▷ Responses of the vehicle to particular driving ▷ Destinations: depending on the equipment, situations, for example triggering of an airbag, route guidance can be started automatically activation of the drive stability control sys‐ with the aid of destinations which have been tems. taught in by the navigation system. ▷ Information on vehicle-damaging events. ▷ Data on usage of Internet services.
12 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 13
Notes NOTES
This data may be saved locally in the vehicle or Ensuring product quality stored on a device that has been connected to The data logs the technical conditions of the ve‐ the vehicle, for example a smartphone, USB stick hicle and helps in locating errors, complying with or MP3 player. warranty obligations and improving quality. Service data To ensure product quality and the development of new products, data on the usage of individual components and systems may be read out, for General example lights, brakes, power windows, displays. When service work is required, for example re‐ This data helps the vehicle manufacturer to opti‐ pairs, service operations, warranty work and qual‐ mise the design of components and systems. ity assurance measures, this technical informa‐ Data analysis also provides the basis for Techni‐ tion can be read out from the vehicle together cal Campaigns and statutory recalls. with the vehicle identification number. Furthermore, the manufacturer has product monitoring obligations to meet in line with prod‐ Stored data uct liability law. To fulfil these obligations, the ve‐ Electronic vehicle components may contain data hicle manufacturer requires technical data from storage media which store technical information the vehicle. relating to the vehicle condition, events and er‐ rors. The data required for service measures is Goodwill and warranty claims processed locally and is deleted automatically Data from the vehicle can also be used to check once the work is complete. A Service Partner of customer warranty claims. If goodwill or warranty the manufacturer or another qualified Service claims are asserted, the data is read out and Partner or a specialist workshop can read out the transferred to the vehicle manufacturer to re‐ information. As part of service and repair orders, solve the claims promptly. data is read out via the OBD diagnostic socket using special diagnosis systems and transferred Error and event memories in the vehicle can be to the vehicle manufacturer. The customer is en‐ reset when a Service Partner of the manufacturer titled to object to the data being read out and for‐ or another qualified Service Partner or a special‐ warded. ist workshop performs repair or servicing work.
Optimising service processes Control over data The vehicle manufacturer maintains documenta‐ Data transferred to the vehicle manufacturer for tion relating to each vehicle to ensure the best the purposes of ensuring product quality or opti‐ possible service is provided. Within the scope of mising service processes can be prevented upon legal requirements, this documentation may be request. made available to authorised third parties, for ex‐ ample specialist workshops. Legal requirements regarding The independent operators may only use this data disclosure data for the purposes of performing the service According to current law, the vehicle manufac‐ or repair order in question. This prevents work turer is obliged to provide the authorities with any from being duplicated unnecessarily on the vehi‐ data it has stored. Data is provided to the extent cle, for example. required and on a case-by-case basis, for exam‐ ple to investigate a criminal offence. The current law also gives state bodies authori‐ sation to read out data from the vehicle them‐ 13 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 14
NOTES Notes
selves for individual cases. This could include the services always requires legal permission, a reading out data from the airbag control device contractual agreement or consent of the user. to shed light on the circumstances of an acci‐ dent, for example. BMW ConnectedDrive BMW ConnectedDrive networks the vehicle with Mobile devices a whole host of digital services. When used, only Depending on the equipment, mobile devices the data saved in the vehicle that is required to such as smartphones can be connected to the perform the agreed service is transferred online, vehicle and used to control vehicle functions, for for example information on identifying and locat‐ example BMW Connected, Apple CarPlay. ing the vehicle. The basis is a contractual agree‐ Sound and images from the mobile device may ment with the user. be played back or displayed through the multi‐ In individual cases, the transfer of data is trig‐ media system in the vehicle, for example. gered as a result of predefined events, such as Selected information is transferred to the mobile an intelligent emergency call. The wireless net‐ device at the same time. Depending on the type work connection is established via an in-vehicle of integration, this includes position data and transmitter and receiver unit or via personal mo‐ other general vehicle information, for example. bile devices brought into the vehicle, for example This optimises the way in which selected apps, smartphones. Data transfer can be deactivated for example navigation or music playback, work. on request. How the data is processed further is determined The wireless network connection enables online by the provider of the particular app being used. functions to be used. These include online serv‐ ices and apps supplied by the vehicle manufac‐ Services turer or by other providers.
General Services from other providers If the vehicle has a wireless network connection, When using online services from other providers, this enables data to be exchanged between the these services are the responsibility of the rele‐ vehicle and other systems, for example with vant provider and subject to their data privacy BMW ConnectedDrive. conditions and terms of use. The vehicle manu‐ facturer has no influence over the data that is ex‐ Services from the vehicle changed. manufacturer Information as to how personal data is collected Where online services from the vehicle manufac‐ and used in relation to services from third parties, turer are concerned, the relevant functions are the scope of such data and its purpose, can be described in the appropriate place, for example obtained from the relevant provider. the Owner's Handbook or manufacturer's web‐ site. The relevant legal information pertaining to Personal decision data protection is also provided. Every user decides for themselves whether they Personal data may be used to provide online wish to enter into a contract for a service such as services. Data is exchanged over a secure con‐ BMW ConnectedDrive. Information is provided in nection, for example with the data systems of the writing regarding the scope and content of data vehicle manufacturer intended for this purpose. processing before the service is acquired and Any collection, processing and use of personal forms part of the vehicle handover. data above and beyond that needed to provide
14 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 15
Notes NOTES
The user has the option to deactivate the serv‐ The eCall service based on the 112 emergency ices at any time and, as a result, to stop the pro‐ call is a public service of general interest and is cessing of data required for the services. It is also provided free of charge. possible to have the entire data connection acti‐ If a serious accident occurs, the eCall statutory vated or deactivated. Excluded from this are emergency call system is activated automatically functions and services which are required by law, by on-board sensors as a standard feature. It is for example emergency call systems. also triggered automatically if the vehicle is equipped with an intelligent emergency call sys‐ Transparency concerning vehicle tem that fails to work in the event of a serious ac‐ data cident. BMW CarData provides transparency regarding The eCall statutory emergency call system can how vehicle data is handled when BMW Con‐ also be triggered manually if required. nectedDrive is used. BMW CarData enables If a critical system failure occurs that would put users to control whether vehicle data that is pro‐ the eCall statutory emergency call system out of cessed in the context of BMW ConnectedDrive operation, the passengers receive a warning. is transferred to third parties. Users can decide for each individual service offering whether data For further information: access is to be granted or refused for third par‐ ▷ Emergency call, see page 414. ties, for example for insurance companies. ▷ Malfunction, see page 415. An archive from BMW CarData can also be re‐ quested at any time. The archive provides infor‐ Information on data processing mation regarding the data that has been trans‐ The eCall statutory emergency call system pro‐ mitted and saved in the context of BMW cesses personal data in accordance with the ConnectedDrive. BMW CarData can only be ac‐ following regulations: cessed by third-party providers via servers of the ▷ Protection of personal data: regulation vehicle manufacturer. No direct access to the ve‐ 2016/679/EU of the European Parliament hicle and its data is granted. and of the Council. More information on BMW CarData is available ▷ Protection of personal data: directive on the BMW ConnectedDrive customer portal. 2002/58/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council. Statutory emergency call system Personal data is only processed for the purpose Principle of transmitting eCall emergency calls to the standardised European emergency call number The eCall emergency call system required by law 112. enables manual or automatic emergency calls to be issued in the event of accidents, for example. SIM card The emergency calls are answered by the public The eCall statutory emergency call system oper‐ rescue coordination centre. ates via mobile communications through the SIM card installed in the vehicle. The SIM card is not General permanently connected to the mobile telephone For information on the eCall statutory on-board network; rather, it remains connected only as emergency call system based on the 112 emer‐ long as the emergency call is active. gency call, as well as its operation and its func‐ tions, see the chapter on emergency calls.
15 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 16
NOTES Notes
Data types and their recipients The eCall statutory emergency call system en‐ The eCall statutory emergency call system may sures that the data in the internal system mem‐ only collect and process the following data: ory is deleted automatically and continuously. ▷ The vehicle identification number for rapidly The vehicle's location data is continuously over‐ identifying the vehicle, for example the model. written in the system's internal memory so that only the vehicle's last three locations - which the ▷ Vehicle type, for example passenger car. system needs for normal operation - are ever ▷ Type of vehicle drive, for example petrol or stored. diesel, for assessing the risks involved in a The activity data log of the eCall statutory emer‐ rescue, for example the risk of fire caused by gency call system is retained only for as long as fuel. is necessary to handle the eCall emergency call ▷ The vehicle's position at the time of the acci‐ and under no circumstances for any longer than dent, its last three locations and the driving 13 hours after the eCall emergency call was trig‐ direction in order to locate the vehicle more gered. quickly on very complex route sections, for example. Rights of individuals affected by ▷ A log of the automatic system activation, data processing along with the time stamp. The individual affected by data processing, ▷ Control information, which tells rescue serv‐ for example the vehicle owner, has the right to ices whether the emergency call was trig‐ access the data and can request that data con‐ gered automatically or manually, for example. cerning him or her that is not processed in ac‐ ▷ A time stamp for determining the time of the cordance with the statutory regulations be cor‐ accident in order to optimise the deployment rected, deleted or blocked as applicable. Each plans of the rescue services. time that data is corrected, deleted or blocked in line with these regulations, the third parties to ▷ The driving direction for establishing which whom the data was transmitted must be notified, side of a motorway carriageway is affected, insofar as this is reasonably practical. for example. The individual affected by data processing has The authorities of the state in whose territory the the right to complain to the relevant data protec‐ eCall system emergency call is made determine tion body if he or she believes that his or her which emergency call centres receive and proc‐ rights have been violated by having their that ess the statutory emergency call. personal data processed. Data processing configuration For matters relating to access rights, please con‐ tact a Service Partner of the manufacturer or an‐ The eCall statutory emergency call system en‐ other qualified Service Partner or a specialist sures that the data contained in the system workshop. memory cannot be accessed outside the system before an emergency call is triggered. Intelligent emergency call The data collected for the eCall statutory emer‐ system gency call system is only saved in the vehicle and sent to the rescue coordination centre when Principle an emergency call is triggered. The intelligent emergency call system enables The eCall statutory emergency call system en‐ manual or automatic emergency calls to be sures that it cannot be traced and there is no placed, for example in the event of an accident. permanent tracking during normal operation.
16 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 17
Notes NOTES
The emergency calls are answered by an emer‐ SIM card gency call centre appointed by the vehicle manu‐ The intelligent emergency call system operates facturer. via mobile communications through the SIM card In addition to the intelligent emergency call sys‐ installed in the vehicle. The SIM card is perma‐ tem, the eCall statutory emergency call system is nently logged into the mobile telephone network present in the vehicle and is active depending on so a connection can be established quickly. The the situation. data is sent to the vehicle manufacturer in the The vehicle owner has the right to use either the event of an emergency. intelligent emergency call system or the eCall statutory emergency call system. Improving quality For further information: The vehicle manufacturer also uses the data sent Emergency call, see page 414. as part of an emergency call to improve product and service quality. Legal basis Position determination The intelligent emergency call system processes personal data in accordance with the following Only the provider of the mobile telephone net‐ regulations: work is able to determine the position of the ve‐ hicle based on mobile telephone mast locations. ▷ Protection of personal data: directive The network operator is not able to link the vehi‐ 95/46/EC of the European Parliament and of cle identification number to the telephone num‐ the Council. ber of the installed SIM card. Only the vehicle ▷ Protection of personal data: directive manufacturer is able to link the vehicle identifica‐ 2002/58/EC of the European Parliament and tion number to the telephone number of the in‐ of the Council. stalled SIM card. The ConnectedDrive contract concluded for this function, as well as the relevant laws, ordinances Log data for emergency calls and directives of the European Parliament and The log data for emergency calls is saved in a the European Council provide the legal basis for vehicle memory. The oldest log data is regularly the activation and function of the intelligent deleted. The log data includes information on emergency call system. when and where an emergency call was placed, The relevant ordinances and directives govern for example in the event of an accident. the protection of individuals in terms of process‐ In exceptional cases, the log data can be read out ing personal data. from the vehicle memory. It is usually only possi‐ The intelligent emergency call system processes ble for log data to be read out with a court order personal data in accordance with European di‐ and if the corresponding devices are directly rectives on the protection of personal data. connected to the vehicle. The intelligent emergency call system processes personal data only with the vehicle owner's con‐ Automatic emergency call sent. The system has been designed so that an emer‐ The intelligent emergency call system and other gency call is triggered automatically following an added-value services may only process personal accident of a certain severity, which is detected data with the express consent of the individual by the sensors in the vehicle. affected by data processing, for example the ve‐ hicle owner.
17 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 18
NOTES Notes
Sent information Statutory emergency call system If an emergency call is made by the intelligent The owner of a vehicle equipped with an intelli‐ emergency call system, the same information is gent emergency call system and the eCall statu‐ conveyed to the appointed emergency call cen‐ tory emergency call system has the right to use tre as is normally conveyed to the public rescue the on-board eCall system instead of the intelli‐ coordination centre by the eCall statutory emer‐ gent emergency call function. gency call system. To request deactivation, please contact a Serv‐ Furthermore, the intelligent emergency call sys‐ ice Partner of the manufacturer or another quali‐ tem also conveys the following additional infor‐ fied Service Partner or a specialist workshop. mation to an emergency call centre appointed by The eCall statutory emergency call system is al‐ the vehicle manufacturer and, where applicable, ways on standby in addition to the intelligent to the public rescue coordination centre: emergency call system. The eCall statutory ▷ Accident data, for example the direction of emergency call system takes over the emer‐ the collision as detected by the vehicle sen‐ gency call function if the intelligent emergency sors in order to facilitate the deployment call system is not functional for technical rea‐ plans of the rescue services. sons, for example if the emergency call centre ▷ Contact data, for example the telephone appointed by the vehicle manufacturer cannot be number of the installed SIM card and the reached. driver's telephone number, if available, so that The eCall statutory emergency call system uses those involved in the accident can be contac‐ the infrastructure of the 112 public emergency ted quickly if necessary. call number. The system can be configured so that emer‐ Data storage gency calls are always made via the eCall statu‐ The data relating to an emergency call that has tory emergency call system and not via the intel‐ been triggered is saved in the vehicle. The data ligent emergency call system. Have the setting contains information about the emergency call, configured by a Service Partner of the manufac‐ for example the place and time it was issued. turer or another qualified Service Partner or a The emergency call centre saves audio record‐ specialist workshop. ings of the emergency call. Audio recordings of the customer are saved for Vehicle identification 24 hours, in case details of the emergency call need to be analysed. After that, the audio record‐ number ings are deleted. Audio recordings of the emer‐ gency call centre employee are saved for General 24 hours for quality assurance purposes. Depending on the national-market version, the vehicle identification number is located at differ‐ Disclosure of personal data ent positions in the vehicle. This chapter de‐ The data obtained in the context of an intelligent scribes all the positions that are possible for the emergency call is only used to process the model range. emergency call. If legally obliged to do so, the ve‐ hicle manufacturer will disclose the data it has processed and, where applicable, still has saved.
18 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 19
Notes NOTES
Engine compartment Windscreen
The vehicle identification number is engraved in The vehicle identification number is additionally the engine compartment, on the right-hand side located behind the windscreen. of the vehicle. iDrive Type plate on right-hand side It is also possible to display the vehicle identifica‐ tion number via iDrive. For further information: Viewing the vehicle identification number and software part number, see page 85.
The vehicle identification number is on the type plate on the right-hand side of the vehicle.
Type plate on left-hand side
The vehicle identification number is on the type plate, on the left-hand side of the vehicle.
19 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 20
NOTES Safety of the hybrid system
Safety of the hybrid system
Vehicle equipment Contact with water
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ The hybrid system is generally also safe in the cific and optional equipment available for the following example situations: model series. It may therefore describe equip‐ ▷ Water in the footwell, for example after a rain ment and functions which are not installed in shower with the window open. your vehicle, for example on account of the spe‐ ▷ Vehicle is in water up to the specified fording cial equipment selected or the country specifica‐ depth. tion. This also applies to safety-relevant func‐ tions and systems. Please comply with the ▷ Liquid spills in the boot. relevant laws and regulations when using the corresponding functions and systems. Automatic deactivation
Working on the vehicle In the event of an accident the hybrid system is shut down automatically, so as not to endanger vehicle occupants and other road users. General For further information: Therefore, changes and work on the vehicle, for example, even retrofitting of accessories must Conduct after an accident, see page 417. only be carried out by a Service Partner of the manufacturer or another qualified Service Partner or a specialist workshop that operates to BMW specifications with suitably trained personnel.
Safety note
DANGER An electric shock can occur if the work is not carried out correctly, in particular maintenance and repair of the high-voltage system. There is a risk of injury, fire or death. Work on the vehi‐ cle, especially maintenance, repair or modifica‐ tions, is only allowed to be carried out by a Service Partner of the manufacturer or another qualified Service Partner or a specialist work‐ shop.
20 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 21
Owner's Handbook media NOTES
Owner's Handbook media
Vehicle equipment Owner's Handbook for the vehicle will contain updated information. This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ cific and optional equipment available for the Printed Owner's Handbook model series. It may therefore describe equip‐ ment and functions which are not installed in your vehicle, for example on account of the spe‐ Principle cial equipment selected or the country specifica‐ The printed Owner's Handbook describes all tion. This also applies to safety-relevant func‐ standard, country-specific and optional equip‐ tions and systems. Please comply with the ment available for the model series. relevant laws and regulations when using the corresponding functions and systems. General The Owner's Handbook for navigation, entertain‐ General ment and communication is available as a printed book from Service.
Media overview Supplementary Owner's Content from the Owner's Handbook can be ac‐ Handbooks cessed in different formats. The following Own‐ Please also follow the supplementary Owner's er's Handbook media formats are available: Handbooks which are attached in addition to the ▷ Printed Owner's Handbook. on-board literature as necessary. ▷ Integrated Owner's Handbook in the vehicle.
Validity of Owner's Handbook Integrated Owner's Handbook in the vehicle Vehicle production At the time of production in the factory, the prin‐ Principle ted Owner's Handbook provides up-to-date in‐ formation. Updates following the copy deadline The integrated Owner's Handbook describes the can result in differences between the printed specific equipment and functions present in the Owner's Handbook and the integrated Owner's vehicle. Handbook in the vehicle. The Integrated Owner's Handbook can be You will find notes on any updates in the appen‐ shown in the Control Display. dix of the printed Owner's Handbook for the ve‐ hicle. Selecting the Owner's Handbook
After a software update in the 1. Press the button. vehicle 2. "CAR" After a vehicle software update – for example, a Remote Software Upgrade – the integrated
21 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 22
NOTES Owner's Handbook media
3. "Owner's Handbook" ▷ "Operating tips" 4. Select the required method of accessing the ▷ "Quick reference" contents. ▷ "Chapters" ▷ "Quicklist" Scrolling within the Owner's Handbook 2. Press and hold the desired button Turn the Controller until the next or previous until the bar shown on the control display has contents are displayed. fully loaded.
Context-sensitive help Calling up Press the appropriate button. General Owner's Handbook is displayed directly The integrated Owner's Handbook can be called with the selected shortcut. up from any menu. Depending on the selected function, the associated description or main menu of the integrated Owner's Handbook is displayed.
Calling up when using iDrive Switch to the Options menu directly from the function on the Control Display:
1. Press the button. 2. "Help"
Calling up when a Check Control message is displayed Directly from the Check Control message on the Control Display: "Owner's Handbook"
Favourites buttons
General Shortcuts to the Owner's Handbook can be saved to functional bookmarks and called up di‐ rectly.
Saving 1. Select the required jump using iDrive: ▷ "Keyword search" ▷ "Picture search"
22 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 23
Owner's Handbook media NOTES
23 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 24
QUICK REFERENCE Getting in
Getting in
Opening and closing All vehicle entrances are locked. Keep the button on the vehicle key Buttons on the vehicle key pressed after locking. The windows and the glass sunroof are closed for as long as the button on the vehicle key is pressed.
Central locking buttons
Overview
1 To unlock 2 Locking 3 To open/close the tailgate 4 Function adjustable: Headlight courtesy delay feature, standing air conditioning Central locking buttons. Unlocking the vehicle Press the button on the vehicle key. Locking Press the button with the front doors Depending on the settings, only the driver's door closed. or all vehicle access points are unlocked. If only the driver's door is unlocked, press the Unlocking button on the vehicle key again to unlock the other vehicle access points. Press the button. Keep the button on the vehicle key pressed after unlocking. Comfort Access The windows and the glass sunroof are opened for as long as the button on the vehicle key is Principle pressed. This feature allows you to access the vehicle without having to operate the vehicle key. Locking the vehicle Simply having the vehicle key with you, for exam‐ 1. Close the driver's door. ple in your trouser pocket, is sufficient.
2. Press the button on the vehicle key.
24 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 25
Getting in QUICK REFERENCE
The vehicle automatically recognises the vehicle 2. Kick your foot underneath the vehicle and im‐ key when it is in the immediate vicinity or inside mediately pull it back. Your leg must move the vehicle. across the ranges of both sensors.
Unlocking the vehicle
Tailgate Fully grip the handle of a vehicle door. Opening Locking the vehicle
▷ Unlock the vehicle, then press the button on the outside of the tailgate. With your finger, touch the grooved area on the handle of a closed vehicle door for approximately ▷ Press the button on the vehicle key 1 second, without gripping the door handle. for approximately 1 second. Doors are unlocked if appropriate. Opening and closing the tailgate contactlessly Closing ▷ Press and hold the button on the ve‐ Principle hicle key until the tailgate has The tailgate can be opened and closed contact‐ closed. lessly, provided you are carrying the vehicle key ▷ Press the button on the inside of the with you. tailgate.
Correct foot movement 1. Stand in the centre behind the vehicle, ap‐ proximately an arm's length away from the rear of the vehicle.
25 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 26
QUICK REFERENCE Getting in
Displays, control functions 5 To open/close the tailgate 6 Tank aeration Around the steering wheel Switch cluster
1 Light switch element 2 Turn indicator, high-beam headlights 1 Selector lever 3 Instrument cluster 2 Controller 4 Wipers 3 Parking brake, Automatic Hold 4 Driving Experience Control Indicator and warning lamps 5 Start/stop button 6 Assistance systems Instrument cluster Indicator and warning lamps can illuminate in a iDrive variety of combinations and colours. When drive-ready state is switched on, the func‐ Principle tionality of some lights is checked and they illu‐ iDrive brings together the functions of a number minate briefly. of switches. These functions can be operated using the Controller. Driver's door Buttons on the Controller
Button Function
To call up the main menu.
Go to the Apps menu.
To call up the Media/Radio menu. 1 Power window switches 2 Central locking system To call up the Communication menu. 3 Seats, comfort functions 4 Exterior mirror To call up the navigation map.
26 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 27
Getting in QUICK REFERENCE
Button Function
To call up the destination entry menu of the navigation system.
To call up the previous screen.
To call up the Options menu.
Voice control
Activating the voice control system
1. Press the button on the steering wheel. 2. Wait for the acoustic signal. 3. Say the command. This symbol indicates that the voice con‐ trol system is active.
It is possible that no further spoken commands are available for this function. In this case, switch to iDrive to operate the function.
Switching off the voice control system Press the button on the steering wheel or say ›Cancel‹.
This symbol indicates that the voice con‐ trol system is deactivated.
27 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 28
QUICK REFERENCE Adjustment and operation
Adjustment and operation
Seats, mirrors and steering To adjust the head restraint wheel Adjusting the height: manual head restraints Manually adjustable seats
▷ Down: press the button, arrow 1, and slide 1 Forward/back the head restraint downwards. 2 Thigh support ▷ Up: push the head restraint upwards. 3 Seat angle After adjusting the height, make sure that the 4 Backrest width head restraint engages correctly. 5 Lumbar support 6 Height Adjusting the height: electric head restraints 7 Backrest angle
Electrically adjustable seats
Press the switch up or down.
1 Backrest width 2 Forward/back, height, seat angle 3 Backrest tilt, head restraint 4 Lumbar support
28 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 29
Adjustment and operation QUICK REFERENCE
Distance from back of head To adjust the steering wheel
Manual steering wheel adjustment
▷ Back: press the button and slide the head re‐ straint towards the rear. ▷ Forward: pull the head restraint forwards. 1. Fold the lever downwards. After adjusting the distance, make sure that the 2. Move the steering wheel to the preferred head restraint engages correctly. height and angle to suit your seated position. 3. Swing the lever back up. Adjusting the distance: M sport seat Memory function The distance from the back of the head is adjus‐ ted by the seat backrest angle. Principle To adjust the exterior mirrors The memory function enables the following set‐ tings to be stored and retrieved when required: ▷ Seat position. ▷ Exterior mirror position. ▷ Height of the Head-Up Display.
Saving 1. Set the desired position.
2. Press the button on the door. The 1 To adjust lettering in the button is illuminated. 2 To select a mirror, automatic parking function 3. Press the desired button 1 or 2 at the door 3 To fold in and out while the lettering is illuminated. A signal sounds.
Retrieving settings Press the desired button 1 or 2.
29 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 30
QUICK REFERENCE Adjustment and operation
Infotainment Connecting mobile telephone General Depending on the national- market version: radio Once the mobile telephone has been connected in the vehicle, it can be operated using iDrive and the buttons on the steering wheel.
Connecting the mobile telephone via Bluetooth 1. "COM" 2. If applicable, set the following setting: "Telephone" 3. "Connect new telephone" 1 To change the entertainment source 4. To perform other operations on the mobile 2 Sound output on/off, volume telephone; see the user manual of the mobile telephone: for example finding/connecting 3 Favourites buttons Bluetooth device or new device. 4 Changing station/track The Bluetooth name of the vehicle is shown 5 Traffic information on the display of the mobile telephone. Se‐ Change waveband lect the vehicle's Bluetooth name. 5. Depending on the mobile device, either a Navigation destination entry control number is displayed, or you will have to enter the control number yourself. Entering the destination using the ▷ Compare the control number shown on quick-search function the Control Display with the control num‐ ber in the device display. 1. Press the button on the Controller. Confirm the control number in the device and on the Control Display. 2. "Search" ▷ Enter the same control number on the de‐ 3. Enter at least two letters or characters. vice and via iDrive then confirm. If applicable, the search term will be automati‐ The device is connected and displayed in the cally completed in grey text. device list. Press the Controller or tilt it upwards to ac‐ cept the suggested search term. Telephony 4. Select symbol as appropriate. The results are shown as a list. Accepting a call 5. "Search location": select search location if Depending on the vehicle equipment, incoming applicable. calls can be accepted in different ways. 6. Tilt the Controller to the right. ▷ Via iDrive: 7. Select the desired destination. "Accept"
▷ /
30 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 31
Adjustment and operation QUICK REFERENCE
Press the relevant button on the steering Pairing the iPhone with CarPlay wheel. 1. "COM" ▷ Via the selection list in the instrument cluster: 2. "Mobile devices" Select using the knurled wheel on the steer‐ 3. "New device" ing wheel: "Accept" 4. "Phone calls and audio" ▷ Via the touchscreen: tap the corresponding entry on the control display. The Bluetooth name of the vehicle is shown on the control display. ▷ By gestures: point towards the Control Dis‐ play using your index finger. 5. On the mobile device, search for Bluetooth devices in the vicinity and select the vehicle. Dialling a number A control number is displayed. 1. "COM" 6. Compare the control number shown on the control display with the control number on 2. If necessary, "Telephone" the mobile device display, and confirm that 3. "Dial number:" the two match. 4. Enter the numbers. 7. "Use Apple CarPlay" 5. Select the symbol. The call is made using The iPhone is connected to the vehicle and dis‐ the mobile telephone to which the telephone played in the device list. function is assigned. To make a call via the additional telephone:
1. Press the button. 2. "Call via"
Apple CarPlay preparation
Principle CarPlay makes it possible to operate certain functions of a compatible Apple iPhone by Siri voice operation and using iDrive.
Operating requirements ▷ Compatible iPhone, iPhone 5 or later with iOS 7.1 or later. ▷ Appropriate mobile radio contract. ▷ The setting for mobile data may need to be activated on the iPhone. ▷ Bluetooth, WLAN and Siri voice operation are activated on the iPhone. ▷ WLAN is activated in the vehicle.
31 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 32
QUICK REFERENCE On the move
On the move
Driving Buttons in the vehicle
Button Drive mode Drive-ready state In HYBRID STANDARD and HYBRID Switching on drive-ready state ECO PRO, the vehicle is propelled in hybrid mode; in other words, in com‐ bined propulsion with the internal combustion engine and electric mo‐ tor.
In ELECTRIC STANDARD and 1. Press the brake. ELECTRIC INDIVIDUAL, the vehicle 2. Press the start/stop button. is driven exclusively electrically. Drive-ready state is active: ELECTRIC INDIVIDUAL can be specified as the default mode. ▷ Starting the internal combustion engine. ▷ Drive-ready state for electric driving without With BATTERY CONTROL, the elec‐ starting the internal combustion engine. tric range can be retained and con‐ served for a later point in the journey Switching off drive-ready state or increased if necessary. 1. With the vehicle at a standstill, engage selec‐ tor lever position P. Automatic Start/Stop function 2. Press the start/stop button. The Automatic Start/Stop function helps you to The engine is switched off. save fuel. The system therefore shuts down the internal combustion engine, if the preconditions 3. Apply the parking brake. for electric driving are met. The standby state re‐ mains switched on. READY is shown in the in‐ Hybrid system driving modes strument cluster. If needed, the internal combus‐ tion engine starts automatically. Overview Parking brake
Engaging Pull the switch. The LED on the switch and the indicator lamp in the instrument cluster are illuminated.
Releasing With drive-ready state switched on:
32 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 33
On the move QUICK REFERENCE
Steptronic transmission: press the switch with Cancelling the selector lever lock the brakes applied or selector lever position P engaged. LED and indicator lamp turn off. The parking brake is released.
Steptronic transmission: parking The parking brake is automatically applied when the vehicle is held by Automatic Hold and the drive-ready state is switched off or the vehicle is Press the button. exited.
Steptronic transmission Engaging P Only engage selector lever position P when the Engaging selector lever positions D, vehicle is stationary. N, R
Press button P. ▷ D drive position. ▷ N neutral. Steptronic transmission, sport ▷ R reverse. programme and manual With the driver's seat belt fastened, briefly press operation the selector lever in the desired direction, possi‐ bly overcoming a resistance point. Selector lever returns to centre position in each case. Apply the brakes until ready to drive off, other‐ wise the vehicle will move when a drive position or reverse gear is selected. A selector lever lock prevents inadvertently shift‐ ing to selector lever position R or inadvertently shifting from selector lever position P. Only engage selector lever position R when the Activate sport programme/manual operation: vehicle is stationary. Press the selector lever out of selector lever po‐ sition D to the left.
33 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 34
QUICK REFERENCE On the move
Manual operation: High-beam headlights, headlight ▷ To shift down: press the selector lever for‐ flasher wards. ▷ To shift up: pull the selector lever backwards.
Deactivate sport programme/manual operation: Press the selector lever to the right.
Turn indicators, high-beam headlights, headlight flasher
Turn indicator Push the lever forwards or pull it back. ▷ High-beam headlights on, arrow 1. The high-beam headlights are illuminated when the low-beam headlights are switched on. ▷ High-beam headlights off/headlight flasher, arrow 2.
Lights and lighting ▷ On: press the lever beyond the resistance point. Light functions ▷ Off: press the lever in the opposite direction Symbol Function beyond the resistance point. ▷ Triple turn signal: lightly tip the lever up or Rear fog light. down. ▷ To indicate a turn briefly: press the lever as Front fog lights. far as the resistance point and hold it there for as long as you wish to indicate a turn. Lights off. Daytime running lights.
Side lights.
Automatic driving lights control. Adaptive light functions.
Low-beam headlights.
34 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 35
On the move QUICK REFERENCE
Symbol Function Switching off and flick-wiping
Instrument lighting.
Parking light, right.
Parking light, left.
Press the lever down. Wiper system ▷ To switch off: press the lever downwards to the home position. Switching the wipers on/off and ▷ To flick-wipe: press the lever downwards flick-wiping from the home position.
Switching on Rain sensor
Activating/deactivating
Press the lever upwards to the desired position. ▷ Rest position of the wipers: position 0. ▷ Rain sensor: position 1. To activate: press the lever up once from its ▷ Normal wiper speed: position 2. home position, arrow 1. ▷ Fast wiper speed: position 3. To deactivate: press the lever back to the home position.
35 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 36
QUICK REFERENCE On the move
To adjust the sensitivity To clean the rear window Turn the outer switch in the desired direction. ▷ In rest position: turn the switch downwards, arrow 3. The switch returns to the rest posi‐ tion when released. ▷ In intermittent operation: turn the switch fur‐ ther, arrow 2. The switch returns to the inter‐ mittent position when released.
Turn the knurled wheel on the wiper lever. Air conditioning
To clean the windscreen Automatic air conditioning
Button Function
Temperature.
Recirculated-air mode.
Maximum cooling.
Pull the wiper lever. AUTO programme.
Rear wiper Air distribution, manual.
Switching on Switch off.
Defrost the windscreen and re‐ move condensation.
Rear window heating.
Seat heating.
Air-conditioning mode. Turn the outer switch upwards. ▷ Rest position of the wiper, position 0. Air flow, manual. ▷ Intermittent mode, arrow 1. Engaging reverse gear activates continuous operation.
36 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 37
On the move QUICK REFERENCE
Automatic air conditioning with Pit stop extended functionality Charging vehicle Button Function Temperature. Connecting
Recirculated-air mode. Charge point flap
Maximum cooling.
AUTO programme.
Air flow, manual. Switch off.
Air distribution, manual. The charge point flap is located on the left of the vehicle. Defrost the windscreen and re‐ move condensation. Keep charge point flap clean and clear. Keep the charge point flap closed when the Rear window heating. charge point is not being used.
Seat heating. Connecting a charging cable To connect, engage selector lever position P, Air-conditioning mode. deactivate drive-ready state and unlock the vehi‐ To call up the air conditioning cle. Apply parking brake if necessary. menu. 1. To open the charge point flap, push on the For the following settings, for ex‐ upper edge, arrow. The charge point flap ample: upper body temperature opens. adjustment, independent venti‐ lation.
2. Connect the mode 2 charging cable to the domestic socket outlet or the mode 3 charg‐ ing cable to the connection point on the AC charging station.
37 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 38
QUICK REFERENCE On the move
3. Position the charging cable connector on the Plug in a fixed charging cable at a charging charging socket and push it in as far as it will station in the place provided for it. go. Refuelling Removing Aerating tank General An overpressure may form in the fuel tank as a During the charging process, the charging cable result of petrol vapours which is dissipated be‐ is automatically locked. Unlock the charging ca‐ fore fuel tank cap is opened. ble before removing. The button is located in the driver's door storage Before pulling off, clean the area between the compartment. charge point flap and charging connection, for example to remove snow. 1. Switch off drive-ready state.
Removing a charging cable 2. Press button to start aerating. 1. Press the release button on the vehicle key or The tank aeration status is shown in the in‐ operate the door handle. strument cluster. In rare cases, the tank aera‐ tion may take several minutes. Charging process is interrupted. When the tank aeration has finished, a mes‐ The charging cable is unlocked for a short sage is displayed in the instrument cluster. time. The fuel tank cap is released for opening. 2. Hold the charging cable by the gripping 3. Open fuel filler flap. areas. If it is not possible to open the fuel filler flap 3. Remove charging cable from the charge after tank aeration, press the button again. point, arrow. If it is still not possible to open the fuel filler flap even after the button has been pressed again, unlock the fuel filler flap manually.
Fuel tank cap 1. To open the fuel tank filler flap, push on the upper edge, arrow. The fuel tank filler flap opens.
4. Press on the charge point flap until it en‐ gages. 5. Fit cover on charging cable connector if nec‐ essary. 6. If necessary, disconnect the mode 2 charging cable from the domestic socket outlet or the mode 3 charging cable from the connection point on the AC charging station. 2. Turn the fuel tank cap anticlockwise. 7. Store charging cable.
38 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 39
On the move QUICK REFERENCE
3. Place the fuel tank cap in the holder on the Electronic oil measurement fuel filler flap. Operating requirements Petrol A current measurement is available after approxi‐ For optimal fuel consumption, the petrol should mately 30 minutes of normal driving with the in‐ be sulphur-free or have a low sulphur content. ternal combustion engine running. Fuels labelled on the pump as containing metal must not be used. Displaying the engine oil level 1. "CAR" Wheels and tyres 2. "Vehicle status" Tyre inflation pressure information 3. "Engine oil level" Different messages are shown on the control display, depending on the engine oil level. Pay attention to these messages.
Adding engine oil
General Safely stop the vehicle and switch off drive-ready state before topping up with engine oil. The tyre inflation pressure inscriptions can be found on the tyre pressure plate on the door pil‐ Adding engine oil lar.
After adjusting the tyre inflation pressure For runflat indicator RPA: Reinitialise the runflat indicator RPA. With the Tyre Pressure Monitor: The corrected tyre inflation pressures are applied automatically. Make sure that the correct tyre Do not top up engine oil unless a message is dis‐ settings have been made. played in the instrument cluster. For tyres that cannot be found in the tyre infla‐ Note the top-up quantity in the message. tion pressure information on the control display, Do not add too much engine oil. reset the Tyre Pressure Monitor. Note recommended engine oil types. Checking the tyre inflation pressure Check regularly and adjust as necessary: ▷ At least twice a month. ▷ Before a long journey.
39 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 40
QUICK REFERENCE On the move
How to get assistance Teleservices Teleservices are services that help to keep the Hazard warning lights vehicle mobile. Teleservices may include the following services: ▷ BMW Roadside Assistance. ▷ BMW Accident Assistance. ▷ Teleservice Call. ▷ Teleservice Report. ▷ Teleservice Battery Guard. ▷ Your Service Partner. ▷ Online logbook. The button is located in the centre console.
Help in case of a breakdown
BMW Roadside Assistance 1. "APPS" 2. "Installed apps" 3. "BMW Assistance" 4. If necessary, "BMW Roadside Assistance" A voice connection is established.
ConnectedDrive
Concierge Service The Concierge Service provides information about hotels, restaurants etc. and can send an SMS with the required information to the vehicle. Addresses can also be sent directly to the navi‐ gation system.
1. "COM" 2. "BMW Assistance" 3. Select the entry for the Concierge Service if applicable. A voice connection to the Concierge Service is established.
40 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 41
On the move QUICK REFERENCE
41 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 42
CONTROLS Driving area
Driving area
Vehicle equipment your vehicle, for example on account of the spe‐ cial equipment selected or the country specifica‐ tion. This also applies to safety-relevant func‐ This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ tions and systems. Please comply with the cific and optional equipment available for the relevant laws and regulations when using the model series. It may therefore describe equip‐ corresponding functions and systems. ment and functions which are not installed in
Around the steering wheel
1 Safety switch 118 To unlock
2 Power window switches 116 Locking
3 Exterior mirror operation 131 5 Seat comfort functions 4 Central locking system 104 Memory function 133
6 Lights
42 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 43
Driving area CONTROLS
Front fog lights 205 8 Shift paddles 165 9 Buttons on steering wheel, left Rear fog light 205 Manual Speed Limiter 251
Light switch 199 Depending on the equipment ver‐ sion: Cruise Control on/off 253 Lights off Daytime running lights 201 Side lights 200 Depending on the equipment ver‐ sion:
Automatic driving lights con‐ Active Cruise Control on/off 255 trol 199 With steering and lane control as‐ Adaptive light functions 202 sistant 268: High-beam assistance 203 Cruise Control, distance control and lane tracking on/off Low-beam headlights 200
Cruise Control: to store a speed Instrument lighting 206 Speed Limit Assist: accept the sug‐ gested speed 264 Right parking light 200 Interrupting Cruise Control
Left parking light 200 Resuming Cruise Control
7 Steering-column lever, left Active Cruise Control: to increase the distance Turn indicator 161 Active Cruise Control: to reduce the distance High-beam headlights, headlight flasher 161 Rocker switch for Cruise Control
High-beam assistance 203 10 Instrument cluster 171 11 Buttons on steering wheel, right Full Black Panel Display: Selection lists 193 Widgets 173 Instrument cluster without exten‐ Volume, see Owner's Handbook for ded functionality: Navigation, Entertainment, Com‐ Widgets 174 munication 6 Journey data 194
43 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 44
CONTROLS Driving area
Voice control system 63 Rear wiper 164
Changing the station/track, see the To clean the rear window 164 Owner's Handbook for Navigation, Entertainment, Communication 6 Telephone, see Owner's Handbook 13 Horn, entire area for Navigation, Entertainment, Communication 6 14 Steering wheel heating 133 Knurled wheel for selection lists 193 12 Steering-column lever, right 15 To adjust the steering wheel 133 Wipers 161 16 To release the bonnet 394
Rain sensor 162 17 To open and close the tail‐ gate 109 To clean the windscreen 163 18 Glove compartment 326 19 Tank aeration 365
44 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 45
Driving area CONTROLS
Around the centre console
1 Control Display 59 9 Driving Experience Control 155 2 Hazard warning lights 412 SPORT drive mode HYBRID driving mode Intelligent Safety 212 ELECTRIC driving mode 3 Ventilation 314 4 Glove compartment 325 ADAPTIVE drive mode 5 Automatic air conditioning 305
Automatic air conditioning with extended 10 To switch drive-ready state on/ functionality 309 off 151 6 Radio/multimedia, see Owner's Handbook for Navigation, Entertainment, Communica‐ 11 BATTERY CONTROL 156 driv‐ tion 6 ing mode 7 Controller with buttons 59 Parking assistance systems 278 8 Parking brake 158
Panorama View 298 Automatic Hold 159
Dynamic Stability Control, DSC 247
45 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 46
CONTROLS Driving area
12 Steptronic transmission: selector lever 165
Around the headliner
1 Emergency call, SOS 414 4 Reading lights 206
2 Operating the electric glass sun‐ 5 Interior light 206 roof 118
3 Front passenger airbag indicator lamp 211
46 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 47
Sensors of the vehicle CONTROLS
Sensors of the vehicle
Vehicle equipment Cameras
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ Front camera cific and optional equipment available for the model series. It may therefore describe equip‐ ment and functions which are not installed in your vehicle, for example on account of the spe‐ cial equipment selected or the country specifica‐ tion. This also applies to safety-relevant func‐ tions and systems. Please comply with the relevant laws and regulations when using the corresponding functions and systems.
Overview Front camera
Depending on the equipment, the following cam‐ Cameras behind the windscreen eras and sensors are installed in the vehicle: ▷ Front camera. ▷ Cameras behind the windscreen. ▷ Top view cameras. ▷ Rear-view camera. ▷ Front radar sensor. ▷ Side radar sensors, front. ▷ Side radar sensors, rear. The cameras are located near the interior mirror. ▷ Ultrasonic sensors in the front/rear bumpers. ▷ Side ultrasonic sensors. Keep the vehicle clean and unobstructed in the Top view cameras area of the cameras and sensors.
A camera is located under each exterior mirror housing.
47 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 48
CONTROLS Sensors of the vehicle
Rear-view camera Radar sensors
Front radar sensor
The camera is located in the handle strip of the tailgate.
The radar sensor is located in the front bumper. System limits of the cameras The camera may have limited functionality or in‐ Side radar sensors, front correct information may be displayed in the following situations, for example: ▷ In thick fog, wet conditions or snow. ▷ On steep crests or dips or on tight bends. ▷ If the camera field of view is obscured, for ex‐ ample due to windscreen fittings or stickers. ▷ If the camera lens is contaminated or dam‐ aged. ▷ With the exterior mirrors folded in. ▷ In the case of bright oncoming light or strong The radar sensors are located in the bumper. reflections, for example if the sun is low in the sky. Side radar sensors, rear ▷ In the dark. ▷ Camera behind the windscreen: if the camera has overheated due to excessively high tem‐ peratures and has been temporarily deactiva‐ ted. ▷ Camera behind the windscreen: during cam‐ era calibration immediately after vehicle deliv‐ ery. A Check Control message may be displayed if the system has failed. The radar sensors are located in the bumper.
48 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 49
Sensors of the vehicle CONTROLS
System limits of the radar Side ultrasonic sensors sensors The radar sensors may have limited functionality or may not be available at all in the following sit‐ uations, for example: ▷ If the sensors are contaminated, for example by icing. ▷ If the sensors are obscured, for example by stickers, foils or a number plate holder. ▷ If the sensor is not correctly aligned, for ex‐ The Park Assist ultrasonic sensors are located ample following parking damage. on the side of the vehicle. ▷ If the area covered by the sensors' radar beam is obscured, for example due to a pro‐ jecting load. System limits of the ultrasonic ▷ If the sensors' field of view is obscured, for sensors example due to garage walls, hedges or The physical limits of ultrasound measurement mounds of snow. may be reached when detecting objects in situa‐ ▷ After work performed incorrectly on the vehi‐ tions including the following: cle paintwork near to the sensors. ▷ If the sensors are contaminated. ▷ At steep crests/hilltops or dips. ▷ If the sensors are obscured, for example by A Check Control message may be displayed if stickers. the system has failed. ▷ If the sensor is not correctly aligned, for ex‐ ample following parking damage. ▷ After work performed incorrectly on the vehi‐ Ultrasonic sensors cle paintwork near to the sensors. ▷ Small children and animals. Ultrasonic sensors in the front/ ▷ Persons wearing certain types of clothing, for rear bumpers example a coat. The Park Distance Control PDC ▷ If there is external interference with the ultra‐ ultrasonic sensors are located in sonic sound, for example by passing vehicles, the bumpers. loud machines or other ultrasonic sources. ▷ Certain weather conditions; for example, high humidity, wet conditions, snowfall, cold, ex‐ treme heat or strong wind. ▷ Trailer drawbars and tow hitches of other ve‐ hicles. ▷ Thin or wedge-shaped objects. ▷ Moving objects. ▷ Higher protruding objects, for example pro‐ jecting walls.
49 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 50
CONTROLS Sensors of the vehicle
▷ Objects with corners, edges and smooth sur‐ faces. ▷ Objects with fine surfaces or structures, for example fences. ▷ Objects with porous surfaces. ▷ Small and low objects such as boxes. ▷ Soft obstacles or obstacles covered in foam. ▷ Plants or shrubs. ▷ In washing bays and car washes. ▷ On uneven surfaces, for example speed bumps. ▷ In the presence of dense exhaust fumes. ▷ The ultrasonic sensors do not take into ac‐ count loads projecting beyond the outline of the vehicle. ▷ If the cover of the trailer tow hitch is incor‐ rectly seated. A Check Control message may be displayed if the system has failed.
50 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 51
Vehicle operating state CONTROLS
Vehicle operating state
Vehicle equipment Safety notes
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ WARNING cific and optional equipment available for the An unsecured vehicle can start moving and roll‐ model series. It may therefore describe equip‐ ing away. There is a risk of accident. Before ment and functions which are not installed in leaving the vehicle, secure it to prevent it from your vehicle, for example on account of the spe‐ rolling away. cial equipment selected or the country specifica‐ tion. This also applies to safety-relevant func‐ Observe the following to ensure that the vehi‐ tions and systems. Please comply with the cle is secured against rolling away: relevant laws and regulations when using the ▷ Apply the parking brake. corresponding functions and systems. ▷ Turn the front wheels towards the kerb on upward or downward gradients. General ▷ Additionally secure the vehicle on upward or downward gradients, for example with a chock. Depending on the situation, the vehicle is in one of the three states:
▷ Rest state. WARNING ▷ Standby state. Unsupervised children or pets in the vehicle ▷ Drive-ready state. can set the vehicle in motion and endanger themselves or other road users, for example by the following actions: Rest state ▷ Pressing the start/stop button. ▷ Releasing the parking brake. Principle ▷ Opening and closing doors or windows. If the vehicle is in rest state, it is switched off. All ▷ Engaging selector lever position N. electrical consumers are deactivated. ▷ Operating vehicle equipment. General There is a risk of accident or injury. Do not leave children or pets unsupervised in the vehi‐ The vehicle is in rest state before you open it cle. When leaving the vehicle, take the vehicle from outside and once you have left the vehicle key with you and lock the vehicle. and locked it.
Automatic rest state The vehicle switches automatically to rest state, for example under the following conditions: ▷ After a few minutes, if no operation is per‐ formed on the vehicle.
51 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 52
CONTROLS Vehicle operating state
▷ When the battery state of charge is low. General ▷ Depending on the iDrive setting: if one or The vehicle switches to standby state after the both of the front doors is opened when exit‐ front doors are opened from the outside. ing the vehicle after a journey. In some situations, rest state will not be estab‐ Display in the instrument cluster lished automatically, for example during a tele‐ OFF is shown in the instrument phone call or if the low-beam headlights are cluster. The drive is switched off switched on. and standby state switched on. Establishing rest state on opening the front doors 1. "CAR" 2. "Settings" Drive-ready state 3. "Doors/ vehicle access" Principle 4. "Switch off after door opening" There are the following versions of drive-ready Manual rest state state: ▷ Electric drive-ready state. To establish rest state in the vehicle at the end of a journey: The vehicle is driven by the electric motor. ▷ Starting the internal combustion engine. The vehicle is driven by the internal combus‐ tion engine.
Safety notes
DANGER A blocked exhaust pipe or inadequate ventila‐ tion can allow harmful exhaust fumes to enter Press and hold the button, until the vehicle. The exhaust fumes contain pollu‐ the OFF display on the instru‐ tants which are colourless and odourless. In en‐ ment cluster turns off. closed spaces, exhaust fumes can also build up outside the vehicle. There is a risk of death. Keep the exhaust pipe clear and ensure suffi‐ cient ventilation. Standby state
WARNING Principle With electric driving, pedestrians and other When standby state is activated, most functions road-users might not detect the vehicle as well can be operated while the vehicle is still station‐ as usual due to the lack of engine noise. There ary. Any desired settings can be performed. is a risk of accident. Adapt your driving style to the traffic conditions. Observe the traffic situa‐
52 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 53
Vehicle operating state CONTROLS
tion and intervene actively if the situation war‐ ferent lengths of time, depending on the du‐ rants it. ration of the system check. Depending on the preconditions, electric drive- ready state or starting the internal combustion WARNING engine is possible. An unsecured vehicle can start moving and roll‐ ing away. There is a risk of accident. Before Electric drive-ready state leaving the vehicle, secure it to prevent it from rolling away. General Observe the following to ensure that the vehi‐ The vehicle is ready to drive without starting the cle is secured against rolling away: internal combustion engine. ▷ Apply the parking brake. Operating requirements ▷ Turn the front wheels towards the kerb on upward or downward gradients. Electric drive-ready state is possible if the pre‐ conditions for electric driving are met. ▷ Additionally secure the vehicle on upward or downward gradients, for example with a For further information: chock. BMW eDRIVE, see page 149.
Display in the instrument cluster WARNING When drive-ready state is Unsupervised children or pets in the vehicle switched on, READY is shown in can set the vehicle in motion and endanger the instrument cluster. themselves or other road users, for example by the following actions: ▷ Pressing the start/stop button. ▷ Releasing the parking brake. Internal combustion engine start ▷ Opening and closing doors or windows. Operating requirements ▷ Engaging selector lever position N. The internal combustion engine is started when ▷ Operating vehicle equipment. drive-ready state is switched on under the There is a risk of accident or injury. Do not following preconditions: leave children or pets unsupervised in the vehi‐ ▷ Temperature of the hybrid system is too high cle. When leaving the vehicle, take the vehicle or too low. key with you and lock the vehicle. ▷ Charge level of the high-voltage battery is too low. Switching on drive-ready state 1. Close driver's door. Switching off drive-ready state After stopping: 2. Press the brake pedal. 3. Press the start/stop button. 1. Engage the selector lever in position P. Most of the indicator and warning lamps in 2. Press the start/stop button. the instrument cluster are illuminated for dif‐ 3. Apply the parking brake.
53 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 54
CONTROLS Vehicle operating state
When shutting down the vehicle, operating noises of the hybrid system, for example, cooling of the high-voltage battery, may be audible.
54 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 55
iDrive CONTROLS
iDrive
Vehicle equipment Entry and display
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ Main menu cific and optional equipment available for the model series. It may therefore describe equip‐ General ment and functions which are not installed in The main menu is divided into two areas. The your vehicle, for example on account of the spe‐ left area contains menu items that can be used cial equipment selected or the country specifica‐ to call up all the iDrive functions. The right area tion. This also applies to safety-relevant func‐ contains widgets that provide quick access to tions and systems. Please comply with the certain functions. relevant laws and regulations when using the corresponding functions and systems.
Operating concept
Principle iDrive comprises a wide range of functions. These functions can be operated using the Con‐ troller and, depending on the equipment, the touchscreen, voice control system or Gesture Media/Radio Control. All of the entertainment system functions, for example radio stations, connection with external Safety note devices.
Communication WARNING Telephone and message functions, e-mail Operating integrated information systems and and calendar, as well as the connection and communication devices during a journey may management of mobile devices such as smart‐ distract you from the road. You could lose con‐ phones. trol of the vehicle. There is a risk of accident. Only operate the systems or devices if the traf‐ Navigation fic conditions allow you to do so. Stop if neces‐ sary and operate the systems or devices with Access to navigation system, destination en‐ the vehicle at a standstill. try and traffic information. Configurable map views as well as other functions such as Points of Interest and avoid areas.
My vehicle Information on vehicle status and journeys. Access to the integrated Owner's Handbook as
55 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 56
CONTROLS iDrive
well as management of driver profiles and setting ▷ Only letters and characters for which data is options for the vehicle and iDrive. available are offered when making an entry. ▷ Destination search: place names can be en‐ Apps tered in all languages available in iDrive. Management of apps, access to apps as well as vehicle functions. Additional apps and vehicle Enabling/disabling functions functions can be obtained from the BMW Store. Some menu items are preceded by a checkbox. The box indicates whether the function is ena‐ Widgets bled or disabled. Selecting the menu item ena‐ Widgets provide quick access to fre‐ bles or disables the function. quently used functions. The defined widgets dis‐ Function is enabled. play dynamic content – for example, the naviga‐ tion map – and also serve as buttons. Function is disabled.
Letters and numbers Status information
Letters and numbers can be selected when the General destination is entered, for example. The status field is located in the top area of the Letters and numbers can be entered using the Control Display. Status information is displayed Controller and, depending on the vehicle equip‐ in the form of symbols. ment, using the touchscreen or voice control system. The keyboard display changes automati‐ Symbols for telephone cally. Symbol Function Symbol Meaning
Switch between upper and Incoming or outgoing call. lower case. Missed call. To enter a space. Reception level of mobile telephone Switch between languages. network.
To use the voice control. Searching for network.
To confirm your entry. No mobile telephone network avail‐ able. Move the entry area to the left or right. Mobile telephone charge level is crit‐ ically low.
Entry comparison Data transfer not possible.
When entering names and addresses, the selec‐ Roaming active. tion is gradually narrowed down or may be sup‐ plemented with every subsequent letter and Location active. character entered. Text message received. Inputs are continuously compared with the data saved in the vehicle. Message received.
56 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 57
iDrive CONTROLS
Symbol Meaning shortcuts to the menu or pages of the integrated Owner's Handbook, can be saved to functional Reminder. bookmarks and called up directly. Sending not possible. The settings are saved for the current driver pro‐ file. Symbols for entertainment Overview Symbol Meaning
Bluetooth audio.
USB device.
Connected Music.
WLAN.
Apple CarPlay.
Favourites buttons Other symbols
Symbol Meaning Saving a function Check Control message. A function can be saved to a functional book‐ Sound output active. mark. A button that has already been assigned a function can be overwritten with a different func‐ Sound output deactivated. tion. Voice control system active. 1. Select function via iDrive, for example radio station. Current vehicle position.
Traffic information. 2. Press and hold the desired button until the bar shown on the control display has Driver profile. fully loaded. Notifications. Performing a function Service requirements. Press the button. Information.
Stop. The function is carried out immediately. If you have selected a telephone number for example, Data protection. the connection will also be established.
Favourites buttons Displaying the button assignment Touch the buttons with your finger. Do not wear General gloves or use objects. iDrive functions, for example radio stations, navi‐ The button assignment is displayed in the upper gation destinations, telephone numbers and area of the control display.
57 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 58
CONTROLS iDrive
Removing all button assignments Switching on/off automatically It is possible to remove the assignments of all The control display is switched on automatically buttons. when the vehicle is unlocked or as soon as the control display is required for operation. 1. Press and hold buttons 1 and 8 simultane‐ ously. In certain situations, the control display is switched off automatically, for example if no op‐ 2. "OK" eration is performed on the vehicle for several minutes. Control display and Switching on/off manually Controller The Control Display can also be switched off manually. Principle 1. Tilt the Controller up. The iDrive functions are shown on the Control 2. "Screen off" Display. The Control Display can be operated us‐ ing the Controller, touchpad and touch screen. Press the Controller or any button on the Con‐ troller to switch it back on again. Overview System limits If the Control Display is exposed to very high temperatures, for example because of strong sunlight, the brightness may be reduced and the Control Display may even switch itself off. Nor‐ mal functions will be restored when the tempera‐ ture is reduced, for example by shading or using the air conditioning system.
Controller 1 Control Display with touchscreen 2 Controller with buttons and touchpad General The buttons can be used to call up menus di‐ Control display rectly. The Controller can be used to select menu items and perform settings. Safety note Some of the functions of the iDrive can be oper‐ ated with the touchpad of the Controller.
NOTE Operation Objects located in front of the Control Display ▷ Turn to switch between menu items, for ex‐ may slip and damage the Control Display. ample. There is a risk of material damage. Do not place objects in front of the Control Display.
58 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 59
iDrive CONTROLS
Button Function
To call up the navigation map.
To call up the destination entry menu of the navigation system.
To call up the previous screen.
▷ Press to select a menu item, for example. To call up the Options menu.
Operation using the Controller
Calling up the main menu Press the button.
▷ Tilt in four directions to switch between screens, for example.
The main menu is displayed.
Buttons on the Controller Selecting menu
Button Function Selecting menu items 1. Turn the Controller until the desired menu To call up the main menu. item is highlighted. 2. Press the Controller. Go to the Apps menu. Selecting widgets To call up the Media/Radio menu. 1. Tilt the Controller to the right in the main menu. To call up the Communication menu. 2. Turn the Controller until the desired widget is selected.
59 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 60
CONTROLS iDrive
3. Press the Controller. Switching between screens It is also possible to select widgets in the instru‐ After a menu item has been selected, for exam‐ ment cluster. ple "Settings", a new screen is displayed. ▷ Tilt the Controller to the left. Adapting the menu The current screen is closed and the previ‐ ous screen is displayed. Adapting widgets You can adapt the widgets in the main menu. It is ▷ Press the button. possible to create multiple pages with widgets The previous screen is opened again. and switch between the pages. It is only possible to make adaptations with the vehicle at a stand‐ ▷ Tilt the Controller to the right. still. The new screen is opened. 1. Select the required page in the main menu. It An arrow indicates that further screens can be is only possible to adapt the page that is cur‐ called up. rently selected. 2. Tilt the Controller up. Calling up the Options menu 3. "Adjust main menu" Press the button. 4. Select the desired adaptation: The "Options" menu is displayed. ▷ Select the symbol and the desired widget: add new widget. The menu consists of various areas, such as: The desired widget will be added at the ▷ "MEDIA": operating options for the selected relevant position. It is possible to display a main menu. maximum of four widgets per page. ▷ "Help": help for the selected menu. ▷ Select the symbol: delete the selec‐ ▷ "Control display off": system settings. ted widget. ▷ Add a new page: "Add page". Entering letters and numbers ▷ Delete the selected page: "Delete page". Entry ▷ Adapt the widget content: select the widget. 1. Turn the Controller: to select a letter or num‐ ber. 5. "Done" 2. : to confirm your entry. Adapting the content Deleting Depending on the equipment, the content of the "MEDIA", "COM" and "NAV" menus can be Symbol Function adapted, for example to remove the entries for unused functions from the menu. Press the Controller: to delete a let‐ ter or number. 1. Select menu. 2. "Personalise menu" Press and hold the Controller: to de‐ 3. Select the desired setting. lete all letters or numbers.
60 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 61
iDrive CONTROLS
Using alphabetical lists Entering special characters For alphabetical lists with more than 30 entries, the letters for which entries exist can be dis‐ Entry Operation played in a letter field. To delete a char‐ Swipe to the left on the 1. Turn the Controller quickly to the left or right. acter. touchpad. 2. Select the initial letter of the desired entry. To enter a space. From the centre of the The first entry for the selected letter is dis‐ touchpad, swipe to the played in the list. right. To enter a hy‐ At the top of the touchpad, Operation via touchpad phen. swipe to the right. To enter an un‐ At the bottom of the General derscore. touchpad, swipe to the right. Some of the functions of the iDrive can be oper‐ ated with the touchpad of the Controller. Operating map Selecting functions The map of the navigation system can be moved using the touchpad. 1. "CAR" 2. "Settings" Function Operation 3. "General settings" To move the map. Swipe in the appropriate 4. "Touchpad" direction. 5. Select the desired setting: To enlarge/reduce On the touchpad, pinch ▷ "Character input": to enter letters and the map. together or move apart numbers. your fingers. ▷ "Map": to operate the map. To display the Tap once. ▷ "Search fields": to write letters without se‐ menu. lecting the list field. ▷ "Audio confirmation": to have the entered letters and numbers read out. Operation by touchscreen
Entering letters and numbers General ▷ Enter characters as they are displayed on the The Control Display is equipped with a touch‐ Control Display. screen. ▷ Always enter associated characters, for ex‐ It is possible to tap menu items and widgets. ample accents or dots, so that the letter can Touch the touchscreen with your fingers. Do not be clearly identified. use any objects. ▷ The input options depend on the language that has been set. You may need to enter Calling up the main menu special characters using the Controller. Tap the symbol.
61 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 62
CONTROLS iDrive
▷ To hide the display bar, pull up the display bar at the top edge of the screen.
Switching between screens After a menu item has been selected, a new screen is displayed. An arrow indicates that further screens can be called up.
The main menu is displayed. ▷ Swipe to the left. ▷ Tap the arrow. Adapting widgets The new screen is opened. You can adapt the widgets in the main menu. It is possible to create multiple pages with widgets Entering letters and numbers and switch between the pages. It is only possible to make adaptations with the vehicle at a stand‐ Entry still. 1. Depending on the equipment, tap the 1. Select the required page in the main menu. It symbol on the touchscreen or a keyboard will is only possible to adapt the page that is cur‐ appear on the control display when you ap‐ rently selected. proach the touchscreen. 2. Tap the symbol in the main menu. 2. Enter the required letters and numbers. 3. Select the desired adaptation: Deleting ▷ Tap the symbol and select the desired widget: add new widget. Symbol Function The desired widget will be added at the relevant position. It is possible to display a Tap the symbol: to delete letter or maximum of four widgets per page. number. ▷ Tap the symbol: delete selected Tap and hold the symbol: to delete widget. all letters or numbers. ▷ Add a new page: tap "Add page". ▷ Delete the selected page: tap "Delete Operating the map page". The navigation map can be moved via the touch‐ ▷ Adapt the content of the widget: tap the screen. centre of the widget. Function Operation 4. Tap "Done". To move the map. Swipe in the appropriate Showing/hiding the display bar direction. In the top part of the control display, it is possible To enlarge/reduce Pinch together or move to show or hide a display bar with additional func‐ the map. apart your fingers. tions. To display the menu. Tap once. ▷ To show the display bar, pull down the dis‐ play bar at the top edge of the screen.
62 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 63
iDrive CONTROLS
Operation via voice control function. In this case, switch to iDrive to operate the function. Voice control can be interrupted: Principle The voice activation system can be used to op‐ ▷ Press the button on the steering erate functions with spoken commands. The wheel again. system provides spoken announcements to as‐ ▷ ›Cancel‹ sist you with input. The voice control system and the feedback it This symbol indicates that the voice con‐ provides are not a substitute for the printed or trol system is deactivated. integrated Owner's Handbook. Button on the steering wheel General ▷ Functions that can only be used when the ve‐ 1. Press the button on the steering hicle is stationary can only be operated via wheel. the voice control system to a limited extent. 2. Wait for the acoustic signal. ▷ The system includes special microphones on 3. Say the command. the driver side and the front passenger side. ▷ ›...‹ indicates commands for the voice control Wake word system. General Operating requirements Saying the wake word ›Hello BMW‹ or the cus‐ ▷ A language must be set using iDrive that is tomised wake word starts the system. supported by the voice control system. Preset wake word To select the language, see page 76. The preset wake word "Hello BMW" can be acti‐ ▷ Always say the commands in the language of vated and deactivated. the voice control system. ›Hello BMW‹ activates the preset and personal Activating the voice control activation word. system 1. "CAR" 2. "Settings" General 3. "General settings" Voice control can be activated in various ways: 4. If necessary, "Personal assistant"
▷ Press the button on the steering 5. "Voice control" wheel. 6. "Activation word" ▷ Say the wake word ›Hello BMW‹ or the per‐ 7. "Say "Hello BMW" for activation" sonalised wake word. This symbol indicates that the voice con‐ trol system is active.
Then say the command. It is possible that no fur‐ ther spoken commands are available for this
63 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 64
CONTROLS iDrive
Personalised wake word 3. ›Saved stations‹ A personalised wake word can be set in addition The saved stations are displayed on the Control to the preset wake word "Hello BMW". Display. 1. "CAR" Navigation 2. "Settings" The voice control system can be used to enter 3. "General settings" destinations in the navigation. It is also possible 4. If necessary, "Personal assistant" to state Points of Interest or have traffic reports 5. "Voice control" read aloud. 6. "Activation word" ▷ ›Drive me to 1 High Street in Manchester‹ 7. "Personal activation word" ▷ ›Take me home‹ 8. "Start recording" ▷ ›Are there any traffic messages‹
For the "Start recording" option, offboard Communication voice processing must be available and acti‐ vated. Alternatively, the personal wake word When a mobile phone is connected, it is possible can be entered using the Controller. to start calls or send short messages, for exam‐ ple, using the voice control system. 9. Follow the instructions on the Control Dis‐ play. ▷ ›Call John Smith on the mobile phone‹ ▷ ›Dial the number 0370 505 0160‹ Possible commands ▷ ›New text message to John Smith: I'm on my way‹ General Most of the contents on the Control Display can Media and radio be said as commands; for example, menu items Most radio functions can be operated via the or list entries. When doing this, say the list en‐ voice control system. tries as they are shown in the list. ▷ ›Switch on music‹ Commands and numbers should be spoken flu‐ ▷ ›Music off‹ ently, with the usual emphasis and at a normal ▷ ›Next track‹ volume and speed. The voice recognition status is displayed in the Air conditioning upper area of the control display. Most air conditioning functions can be operated by voice commands. Functional examples ▷ ›Activate climate control‹ Menu items ▷ ›Deactivate air recirculation‹ The commands for the menu items are spoken ▷ ›Temperature [...] at ...‹ in the same way as they are selected using the Controller. Help with the voice control system ▷ ›Voice commands‹: to have voice command 1. Press the button on the steering options read aloud. wheel. 2. ›MEDIA‹
64 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 65
iDrive CONTROLS
▷ ›General information on voice control‹: to have 3. "General settings" information about the voice control system 4. If necessary, "Personal assistant" read aloud. 5. "Voice control" ▷ ›Help‹: to have help on the current menu read 6. "Speaking during voice output" aloud.
Information for emergency calls Online speech processing Online speech processing enables use of the The voice control system should not be used for dictation function, facilitates the natural input of emergency calls. Under stress, a person's destinations and improves the quality of voice speech and voice pitch can change. This could recognition. To use the function, data is sent unnecessarily delay connection of your call. across an encrypted connection to a service pro‐ Instead, use the SOS button located near the vider and stored locally there. rear-view mirror. 1. "CAR" For further information: 2. "Settings" Emergency call, see page 414. 3. "General settings" Settings 4. If necessary, "Personal assistant" 5. "Voice control" Selecting the speech dialogue 6. "Online speech processing" You can select whether the system uses the standard dialogue or the short variant. Adjusting the volume If the short variant is selected, the system an‐ Turn the volume control button during the spo‐ nouncements are played in shortened form. ken instructions until the desired volume is ob‐ 1. "CAR" tained. 2. "Settings" ▷ The volume setting is retained even if you change the volume of other audio sources. 3. "General settings" ▷ The volume setting is saved for the current 4. If necessary, "Personal assistant" driver profile. 5. "Voice control" 6. "Length of answers" Using the voice control system 7. Select the desired setting. on the smartphone Depending on the device, a smartphone connec‐ Speaking during voice output ted to the vehicle can be operated via voice con‐ It is possible to answer while the voice control trol. system is querying your previous spoken instruc‐ This requires voice control to be activated on the tion. The function can be deactivated if the quer‐ smartphone. ies are frequently cancelled inadvertently, for ex‐ ample due to background noise or conversations 1. Press and hold the button on the in the vehicle. steering wheel for approx. 3 seconds. 1. "CAR" Voice control on the smartphone is activated. 2. "Settings" 2. Release the button.
65 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 66
CONTROLS iDrive
If activation is successful, a confirmation ap‐ Driver profiles, see page 80. pears on the Control Display. 2. Press the button on the steering Voice assistants from third-party wheel and wait for the acoustic signal. providers 3. Say the specific activation word from the third-party provider and the required com‐ Principle mand. Various digital voice assistants are available from Information about the active function appears third-party providers. Supported voice assistants on the control display. can be used in the vehicle. Activating/deactivating the specific General activation word Some functions may only work to a limited extent The specific activation word of the third-party in the vehicle to ensure they do not create a provider can be activated or deactivated in addi‐ safety risk when driving. tion to the activation word of the voice control system. Operating requirements 1. "APPS" ▷ Connected Voice Services acquired via the 2. "Installed apps" ConnectedDrive Store. 3. "Personal assistant" ▷ The same ConnectedDrive account is used in the vehicle and in the BMW Connected 4. "Voice control" app. 5. "Activation word" ▷ Vehicle added in the BMW Connected app. 6. "Activation by speech" ▷ Third-party provider account and BMW ac‐ 7. Select the desired setting. count linked in the BMW Connected app. ▷ Smartphone connected to the vehicle via Malfunction Bluetooth. In the event of a malfunction, switch drive-ready state off and on again. Activation in the BMW Connected app System limits Systems from third-party providers are set up in ▷ Certain noises may be detected and could re‐ the BMW Connected app. sult in problems. Keep doors, windows and Follow the instructions in the app. the glass sunroof closed. ▷ Noise from passengers or the rear bench Activation in the vehicle may interfere with the system. Avoid back‐ Authorisation to use the voice assistant is re‐ ground noise in the vehicle while you are quired before the start of each journey. speaking. ▷ Strong dialects may prevent voice recognition 1. To authorise voice assistants from third-party from working properly. Speak loudly and providers: clearly. ▷ Connect the smartphone to the vehicle via Bluetooth. ▷ Select the appropriate driver profile.
66 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 67
iDrive CONTROLS
BMW Intelligent Personal ▷ "Synchronise driver profile" is activated under "Personalisation". Assistant Data protection, see page 79. ▷ All settings are activated under "BMW Principle ConnectedDrive". BMW Intelligent Personal Assistant expands the Data protection, see page 79. voice control system to include intelligent func‐ tions and improves interaction in the vehicle. Functional example General 1. Say the wake word ›Hello BMW‹ or the per‐ sonalised wake word. BMW Intelligent Personal Assistant is available 2. ›Is my tyre pressure still OK?‹ depending on the national-market version. The Personal Assistant is operated using spoken The Personal Assistant provides information commands. Voice control is supplemented with about the tyre inflation pressure. personalised recommendations and messages, as well as automated habits. Settings The Personal Assistant is connected to other digital services such as the Concierge Service Displaying notifications and is continually being developed. An active driver profile is required to access the full scope General of functions. Depending on the situation, various states can There are two versions of BMW Intelligent Per‐ be activated. sonal Assistant: State Description ▷ In the guest profile: this version is linked to a "Do not Incoming calls and some single vehicle and cannot be personalised. disturb" messages are not displayed. Not all the functions described are available in full. "Passenger on Private information such as ▷ With active driver profile: this version can be board" the sender and content of the used in various vehicles and can be personal‐ e-mails is not displayed. ised. All the functions described are available in full. Activating/deactivating 1. "APPS" Operating requirements 2. "Installed apps" Make the following settings for the full range of 3. "Personal assistant" functions: 4. "Notification display" ▷ The driver profile is activated. 5. Select the desired setting. ▷ Corresponding ConnectedDrive Services have been purchased via the ConnectedDrive Store. Automating habits
▷ Registered in the ConnectedDrive Store. General ▷ "Online speech processing" is activated. The Personal Assistant is able to learn habits; for example, automatically activating the seat heat‐
67 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 68
CONTROLS iDrive
ing once a certain outside temperature is 4. "Settings" reached. This involves creating rules that can be 5. Confirm the desired setting. activated and deactivated at any time. Caring Car Creating rules 1. "APPS" General 2. "Installed apps" A short program harmonises various vehicle 3. "Personal assistant" functions in the interior with one another for the driver. A program lasts for 3 minutes. 4. "Automate habits"
5. Select the desired setting. Activating/deactivating 1. "CAR" Functions 2. "Caring Car" Experience Modes 3. Select the desired channel. The program can be ended prematurely: General "End programme" Experience Modes combine a range of vehicle functions in the interior into an overall experi‐ Owner's Handbook by voice control ence. Selecting a mode harmonises the ambient light and seat climate control with one another, Principle for example. It is possible to ask simple questions about the vehicle functions and about operating the vehi‐ Operating requirements cle. ▷ The Experience Modes app is installed in the vehicle. General ▷ The drive-ready state is switched on. The voice control system and the feedback it provides are not a substitute for the printed or Selecting a mode integrated Owner's Handbook. The voice recog‐ 1. "CAR" nition function and the quality of the feedback 2. "Experience Modes" may vary. 3. Select the required mode. The system support questions starting with "How" or "What". Deactivating Functional example 1. "CAR" 1. ›Hello BMW‹ 2. "Experience Modes" 2. ›How do you disable the front passenger 3. "End" airbag‹
Adapting the mode The voice control system provides feedback. If applicable, the section of the integrated Owner's 1. "CAR" Handbook is displayed on the Control Display 2. "Experience Modes" while at a standstill. 3. Select the required mode.
68 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 69
iDrive CONTROLS
BMW Gesture Control 3. "General settings" 4. "Gesture control" Principle 5. "Gesture control" BMW Gesture Control enables some iDrive func‐ Settings tions to be operated simply by moving your hands. 1. "CAR" 2. "Settings" Overview 3. "General settings" 4. "Gesture control" 5. Select the desired setting.
Performing gestures ▷ Perform the gestures under the interior mirror and to the side of the steering wheel. ▷ Perform the gestures clearly. ▷ The gestures can also be performed by the The camera in the roof lining detects gestures front passenger. made in the area of the centre console at the height of the Control Display.
Activating/deactivating 1. "CAR" 2. "Settings"
Possible gestures
Gesture Operation Function
Move your index finger forward in the direction of Accept phone call. the screen and back again. Select highlighted entry of a list during voice control. Confirm the pop-up.
Move your hand across the width of the Control Reject phone call. Display in the direction of the front-passenger side. Close the pop-up. End voice control.
69 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 70
CONTROLS iDrive
Gesture Operation Function
Slowly move your hand in a clockwise circle with To increase the volume. your index finger pointing forward. Gesture is detected after approximately one circular movement.
Slowly move your hand in an anticlockwise circle To reduce the volume. with your index finger pointing forward. Gesture is detected after approximately one circular movement.
Pinch your thumb and index finger together and Surround View: rotate camera move your hand horizontally right or left. view. This gesture is only possible with the vehicle at standstill.
Move your index and middle fingers apart and ex‐ Individually assignable gesture. tend them forwards.
With your thumb stretched out to the left, move Skip function backwards. your fist back and forth. The previous music track is played.
With your thumb stretched out to the right, move Skip function forwards. your fist back and forth. The next music track is played.
Stretch out all five fingers, make a fist and then Individually assignable gesture. stretch out all five fingers again.
Assign gesture individually ▷ Route guidance to home address. ▷ Voice control. General ▷ Mute/playback. Depending on the equipment, gestures can be ▷ Recent calls. individually assigned to functions as follows: ▷ Control display on/off.
70 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 71
iDrive CONTROLS
▷ Messages. ▷ Music detection. ▷ No function.
Selecting the function 1. "CAR" 2. "Settings" 3. "General settings" 4. "Gesture control" 5. "Function assignment gesture 1" or "Function assignment gesture 2" 6. Select the desired setting.
System limits Detection of gestures by the camera in the head‐ liner can be disrupted under the following cir‐ cumstances: ▷ The camera lens is covered. ▷ There are objects on the rear-view mirror. ▷ The camera lens is contaminated, clean the camera lens. Sensors and camera lenses, see page 425. ▷ The gesture is performed outside the detec‐ tion area. ▷ Wearing of gloves or jewellery. ▷ Smoking in the interior.
71 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 72
CONTROLS BMW Remote Software Upgrade
BMW Remote Software Upgrade
Vehicle equipment ▷ The vehicle charging process is interrupted by the installation. This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ ▷ The vehicle charging process is not contin‐ cific and optional equipment available for the ued automatically after successful installation. model series. It may therefore describe equip‐ ment and functions which are not installed in Safety note your vehicle, for example on account of the spe‐ cial equipment selected or the country specifica‐ WARNING tion. This also applies to safety-relevant func‐ tions and systems. Please comply with the Unsupervised children or pets in the vehicle relevant laws and regulations when using the can set the vehicle in motion and endanger corresponding functions and systems. themselves or other road users, for example by the following actions: ▷ Pressing the start/stop button. BMW Remote Software ▷ Releasing the parking brake. Upgrade ▷ Opening and closing doors or windows. ▷ Engaging selector lever position N. Principle ▷ Operating vehicle equipment. The Remote Software Upgrade can be used to There is a risk of accident or injury. Do not update the vehicle software. The Remote Soft‐ leave children or pets unsupervised in the vehi‐ ware Upgrade provides new functions, functional cle. When leaving the vehicle, take the vehicle enhancements or quality improvements. key with you and lock the vehicle. General BMW recommends carrying out the Remote Validity of Owner's Handbook Software Upgrade as soon as it becomes avail‐ able. Vehicle production The data for the Remote Software Upgrade is At the time of production in the factory, the prin‐ automatically downloaded to the vehicle when ted Owner's Handbook provides up-to-date in‐ available. formation. For safety reasons, it is only possible to install the downloaded upgrade while at a standstill. After a software update in the The installation will not begin until it has been vehicle confirmed at the vehicle. After a vehicle software update – for example, a ▷ Installation can take around 20 minutes. Remote Software Upgrade – the integrated Owner's Handbook for the vehicle will contain ▷ Installation cannot be interrupted. updated information. ▷ The vehicle cannot be used during installa‐ tion. ▷ You may leave the vehicle during installation.
72 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 73
BMW Remote Software Upgrade CONTROLS
Operating requirements Via iDrive An active ConnectedDrive contract is required in 1. "CAR" order to use the Remote Software Upgrade. 2. "Settings" 3. "General settings" Version information 4. "Remote Software Upgrade" General 5. "Search for upgrades" The version information describes the updates 6. Follow the instructions on the Control Dis‐ contained in the Remote Software Upgrade. The play. version information can be shown on the Control Display during the download and following suc‐ Via BMW Connected app cessful completion of the installation. The infor‐ 1. Download the upgrade to your smartphone in mation is available at all times in the Connected‐ the BMW Connected app when available. Drive customer portal. 2. Follow the instructions in the BMW Connec‐ ted app. Displaying the version information 3. Establish the connection to the vehicle. 1. "CAR" ▷ iOS: Bluetooth audio and WLAN. 2. "Settings" ▷ Android: WLAN in the vehicle. 3. "General settings" The upgrade data will only transfer from the 4. "Remote Software Upgrade" smartphone to the vehicle while driving. 5. "Installed version:" 4. Follow the instructions on the Control Dis‐ Register with the ConnectedDrive customer por‐ play. tal on the Internet at: For further information: www.bmw-connecteddrive.com. Connecting mobile devices to the vehicle, see page 84. Searching for and downloading an upgrade Installing the upgrade immediately General There are various ways of searching for and General downloading an upgrade: If the upgrade has downloaded successfully, it ▷ Automatically. can be installed once the vehicle has been ▷ Via iDrive. parked. The installation can be carried out imme‐ diately after download. ▷ Via BMW Connected app. Follow the instructions on the control display. Automatic download Following a successful upgrade, booked services The data for the Remote Software Upgrade is – for example RTTI – are automatically activated automatically downloaded to the vehicle when again while driving. available. There is no need to approve the down‐ load. Operating requirements ▷ Adequate charge state of the battery.
73 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 74
CONTROLS BMW Remote Software Upgrade
▷ The outside temperature is above ▷ Central locking system. -10 ℃/14 ℉. ▷ Side lights. ▷ Vehicle is standing on level ground. ▷ Horn. ▷ Hazard warning lights switched off. ▷ Alarm system. ▷ Steptronic transmission: selector lever posi‐ ▷ Emergency call. tion P is engaged. ▷ Power window switches. ▷ Engine is sufficiently cooled. ▷ Glass sunroof. Preparing the vehicle ▷ Locking of the fuel filler flap. ▷ Park the vehicle in a safe place off the public The driver's door can be unlocked and locked roads. from outside with the integrated key. ▷ Mobile phone reception must be guaranteed so that an error message can be sent if the Malfunction installation is cancelled, for example. In the event of a malfunction, follow the instruc‐ ▷ Close the windows. tions on the Control Display or in the BMW Con‐ nected app. ▷ Close the glass sunroof. If the malfunction cannot be rectified, contact a ▷ Close the tailgate. Service Partner of the manufacturer or another ▷ Remove devices that consume energy, for qualified Service Partner or a specialist work‐ example mobile telephone. shop. ▷ Disconnect the trailer or load carrier. ▷ The vehicle key is in the vehicle to start the installation. ▷ Switch off the exterior lights. Other vehicle-dependent operating requirements are shown on the Control Display.
Installing an upgrade later The upgrade can be installed later on.
1. "CAR" 2. "Settings" 3. "General settings" 4. "Remote Software Upgrade" 5. "Start upgrade now" Follow the instructions on the control display.
Functional limitations During the upgrade, many of the functions are temporarily unavailable, for example: ▷ Hazard warning lights.
74 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 75
General settings CONTROLS
General settings
Vehicle equipment Setting the time format 1. "CAR" This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ 2. "Settings" cific and optional equipment available for the 3. "General settings" model series. It may therefore describe equip‐ ment and functions which are not installed in 4. "Date and time" your vehicle, for example on account of the spe‐ 5. "Time format:" cial equipment selected or the country specifica‐ 6. Select the desired setting. tion. This also applies to safety-relevant func‐ The setting is saved for the current driver profile. tions and systems. Please comply with the relevant laws and regulations when using the corresponding functions and systems. Automatic time setting Time Depending on the equipment, the time, date and, if necessary, time zone are updated automati‐ cally. Setting the time zone 1. "CAR" 1. "CAR" 2. "Settings" 2. "Settings" 3. "General settings" 3. "General settings" 4. "Date and time" 4. "Date and time" 5. "Automatic time setting" 5. "Time zone:" The setting is saved for the current driver profile. 6. Select the desired setting. The setting is saved for the current driver profile. Date Setting the time 1. "CAR" Setting the date 2. "Settings" 1. "CAR" 3. "General settings" 2. "Settings" 4. "Date and time" 3. "General settings" 5. "Time:" 4. "Date and time" 6. Turn the Controller until the desired hours are 5. "Date:" displayed. 6. Turn the Controller until the desired day is 7. Press the Controller. displayed. 8. Turn the Controller until the desired minutes 7. Press the Controller. are displayed. 8. Select the month and year. 9. "OK" 9. "OK"
75 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 76
CONTROLS General settings
Setting the date format Driver Attention Camera 1. "CAR" 2. "Settings" Principle 3. "General settings" The instrument cluster contains a camera which 4. "Date and time" monitors the driver's activity. The camera evalu‐ 5. "Date format:" ates the head position and opening of the eyes in order to analyse the attentiveness of the driver. 6. Select the desired setting. This system supports various vehicle assistance The setting is saved for the current driver profile. systems, for example: ▷ Attentiveness assistant. Language ▷ Steering and lane control assistant with As‐ sisted Driving Plus.
Selecting the language Activating/deactivating 1. "CAR" 1. "CAR" 2. "Settings" 2. "Settings" 3. "General settings" 3. "General settings" 4. "Language" 4. "Driver Attention Camera" 5. Select the desired setting. 5. Select the desired setting. The setting is saved for the current driver profile. System limits Selecting the units of The Driver Attention Camera may have limited functionality in the following situations, for exam‐ measurement ple: ▷ If the Driver Attention Camera is covered by Depending on the country specifications, it is the steering wheel rim. possible to select the units of measurement for ▷ If the driver is wearing sunglasses that block various values, for example consumption, distan‐ infrared light. ces and temperature.
1. "CAR" 2. "Settings" Journey data settings 3. "General settings" 4. "Units" Principle 5. Select the desired menu item. The intervals at which the journey data is reset can be adjusted. 6. Select the desired setting. The setting is saved for the current driver profile. Resetting journey data 1. "CAR" 2. "Settings" 3. "General settings"
76 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 77
General settings CONTROLS
4. "Reset journey data" Activating/deactivating 5. Select the desired setting. information windows Speed warning Information windows are automatically shown on the Control Display for some functions. Some of these information windows can be activated or Principle deactivated. The system can be used to set a speed limit 1. "CAR" which triggers a warning when it is exceeded. 2. "Settings" General 3. "General settings" The warning is repeated if the vehicle speed ex‐ 4. "Pop-ups" ceeds the set speed limit again, after it has drop‐ 5. Select the desired setting. ped below 5 km/h/3 mph. The setting is saved for the current driver profile. Adjusting 1. "CAR" Control display 2. "Settings" 3. "General settings" Brightness 4. "Speed warning" 1. "CAR" 5. "Warning at:" 2. "Settings" 6. Turn the Controller until the desired speed is 3. "Displays" displayed. 4. "Control display" 7. Press the Controller. 5. "Brightness at night" 6. Press the Controller. Activating/deactivating 7. Turn the Controller until the desired bright‐ 1. "CAR" ness is obtained. 2. "Settings" 8. Press the Controller. 3. "General settings" The setting is saved for the current driver profile. 4. "Speed warning" Depending on the lighting conditions, the bright‐ 5. "Speed warning" ness adjustment may not be immediately appa‐ rent. Setting the current speed as the speed warning 1. "CAR" 2. "Settings" 3. "General settings" 4. "Speed warning" 5. "Select current speed"
77 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 78
CONTROLS General settings
Resetting the vehicle Calling up notifications configuration 1. Tilt the Controller up. 2. "Notifications" All individual settings can be reset to the factory 3. Select the required notification. settings when the drive-ready state is switched off. Deleting notifications 1. "CAR" All notifications which are not Check Control 2. "Settings" messages or messages from the vehicle manu‐ facturer can be deleted from the list. 3. "General settings" Check Control messages or messages from the 4. "Reset vehicle data" vehicle manufacturer remain for as long as they 5. "Reset vehicle data" are relevant. If the settings saved in a driver profile are 1. Tilt the Controller up. synchronised with a ConnectedDrive account, these settings will be retained in the Connected‐ 2. "Notifications" Drive account. 3. Select the desired notification; for example, SMS.
Notifications 4. Press the button. 5. ▷ "Delete this notification" Principle ▷ "Delete all notifications" The menu shows all messages received by the vehicle, centrally in the form of a list. Settings The following settings can be performed: General ▷ Selection of applications from which mes‐ The following messages can be displayed: sages are permitted. ▷ Traffic messages. ▷ All messages or a limited period of received ▷ Check Control messages. messages. ▷ Service requirement messages. 1. Tilt the Controller up. ▷ Communication messages, for example e- 2. "Notifications" mail, SMS or reminders. 3. Tilt the Controller to the right. ▷ Messages from the Concierge Service or the 4. "Settings" BMW Connected app, for example. 5. Select the desired setting. ▷ Messages from the vehicle manufacturer. The number of notifications is also displayed in the status field. The Notifications menu can also be created as a widget.
78 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 79
Personal settings CONTROLS
Personal settings
Vehicle equipment Deleting personal data in the vehicle This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ cific and optional equipment available for the Principle model series. It may therefore describe equip‐ Depending on use, the vehicle stores personal ment and functions which are not installed in data such as saved radio stations. This personal your vehicle, for example on account of the spe‐ data can be permanently deleted using iDrive. cial equipment selected or the country specifica‐ tion. This also applies to safety-relevant func‐ General tions and systems. Please comply with the Depending on the equipment in your vehicle, relevant laws and regulations when using the data such as the following can be deleted: corresponding functions and systems. ▷ Driver profile settings. ▷ Saved radio stations. Data protection ▷ Saved functional bookmarks. ▷ Trip and on-board computer values. Data transfer ▷ Navigation, for example saved destinations. Principle ▷ Phone book. The vehicle offers various services which require ▷ Online data, for example Favourites, cookies. data to be transferred to BMW or a service pro‐ ▷ Office data, for example voice memos. vider. The transfer of data can be deactivated for ▷ Login accounts. some services. It may take up to 15 minutes in total to delete data. General If data transfer has been deactivated for a serv‐ Operating requirements ice, then that service cannot be used. Data can only be deleted with the vehicle at a Only perform settings with the vehicle at a stand‐ standstill. still. Deleting data Settings Personal data in the vehicle is deleted when the The data transfer can be configured individually vehicle is reset to its factory settings. in various stages or for individual services. For further information: 1. "CAR" Resetting the vehicle configuration, see page 78. 2. "Settings" 3. "General settings" 4. "Data privacy" 5. Select the desired setting.
79 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 80
CONTROLS Personal settings
Driver profiles This option is offered for a limited time in new vehicles. As soon as the drive-ready state has been Principle switched on or any button is pressed, the wel‐ Driver profiles can be created in order to store come screen disappears. personalised vehicle settings. If multiple drivers use a vehicle, each driver can create a personal‐ Setup assistant ised driver profile. If a driver profile is selected, The setup assistant is offered on the welcome the vehicle automatically adopts the settings screen in new vehicles for a limited time in order stored in the driver profile. to define the key settings for the vehicle. General Select "Getting started" to start the setup assis‐ tant. You can create three personal driver profiles. The setup assistant can be started at any time There is also a guest profile available which can using iDrive. be selected by any driver. The guest profile is ac‐ tive if no personal driver profile has been selec‐ 1. "CAR" ted. 2. "Settings" Changes to the vehicle settings are saved auto‐ 3. "General settings" matically in the active driver profile or in the guest 4. "Getting started" profile. The driver is guided through the following func‐ The vehicle settings can be adjusted to the rele‐ tions step by step: vant driver as soon as the vehicle is unlocked. To achieve this, recognition via a vehicle key and a ▷ Set the system language. digital key and via a digital key must be assigned ▷ ConnectedDrive countries: to a driver profile. If the setup assistant has been called up in ConnectedDrive countries: The settings saved in the guest profile: create the driver profile. the driver profile can be synchronised with the ▷ Register mobile devices with the vehicle. personal BMW ConnectedDrive account. This ▷ If the setup assistant has been called up from makes it possible to use these settings in other a previously defined driver profile: set up the BMW vehicles as well. Personal Assistant. Operating requirements ▷ Depending on whether the setup assistant has been called up from a previously defined If the driver profile is changed, the vehicle cannot driver profile or a guest profile: set up serv‐ move at any more than walking speed. ices or confirm the declaration regarding the transfer of vehicle data. Welcome screen ▷ Set up other operating methods. The welcome screen is shown once the Control The selected settings are saved in the active Display is switched on. driver profile. The following actions can be performed on the welcome screen: Guest profile ▷ Switch the driver profile. The guest profile can be activated by any driver. ▷ Start the setup assistant. Vehicle settings that are made when the guest profile is active are saved in the guest profile.
80 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 81
Personal settings CONTROLS
The guest profile is automatically active in the ▷ "Log in" following cases: The login details must be entered via iDrive. ▷ No driver profiles have been created yet. ▷ "New registration" ▷ No driver profile is assigned to the vehicle key If the driver does not have a ConnectedDrive used to unlock the vehicle. account, one can be created via iDrive. ▷ No driver profile is assigned to the digital key used to unlock the vehicle. Selecting recognition The following restrictions apply: 1. "CAR" ▷ The guest profile cannot be renamed. 2. "Driver profiles" ▷ Recognition cannot be assigned to the guest 3. Tilt the Controller to the right. profile. As an alternative to steps 1 to 3, it is possible ▷ It is not possible to assign a PIN to the guest to tap the profile picture in the upper status profile. bar. ▷ ConnectedDrive countries: Synchronisation 4. "Driver recognition" with a ConnectedDrive account is not possi‐ 5. Select the desired setting: ble. ▷ "with vehicle key" The guest profile is selected on the welcome screen or via iDrive: The vehicle key that is detected in the ve‐ hicle interior is assigned to the driver pro‐ 1. "CAR" file. If multiple vehicle keys are detected, 2. "Driver profiles" the unwanted vehicle keys must be re‐ As an alternative to steps 1 and 2, it is possi‐ moved from the vehicle interior. ble to tap the profile picture in the upper sta‐ ▷ "With Digital Key" tus bar. The digital key that is detected in the ve‐ 3. "Guest" hicle interior is assigned to the driver pro‐ 4. "OK" file. If multiple digital keys are detected, the unwanted digital keys must be re‐ Creating a driver profile moved from the vehicle interior. 6. "Activate linkage" 1. "CAR" As soon as the vehicle key or the digital key is 2. "Driver profiles" detected by the vehicle, the relevant driver profile 3. Tilt the Controller to the right. is activated. If the driver does not have the vehi‐ As an alternative to steps 1 to 3, it is possible cle key or the smartphone with the digital key to tap the profile picture in the upper status with him/her, or if the vehicle key or digital key is bar. not detected, the driver profile can only be selec‐ 4. "Add driver profile" ted on the welcome screen if PIN protection has been set up. Non-ConnectedDrive countries: A name must be entered for the driver profile. Setting up PIN protection ConnectedDrive countries: An existing Connec‐ A driver profile with recognition cannot be activa‐ tedDrive account must be assigned to a driver ted without a vehicle key and without a digital profile. There are several possible ways of doing key. In this case, it is possible to set up PIN pro‐ this:
81 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 82
CONTROLS Personal settings
tection that can be used to activate the driver ▷ Switch to the guest profile. profile. This means the vehicle key that is handed over Countries in which ConnectedDrive is not avail‐ can no longer be used to access the personal able: If PIN protection has not been set up or the driver profile. PIN is not known, the driver profile cannot be ac‐ tivated. Selecting a driver profile Countries in which ConnectedDrive is available: If The driver profile is selected automatically based PIN protection has not been set up or the PIN is on the recognition of the key/remote control. not known, the driver profile can be activated If the guest profile is active, the driver profile is with the login details for the relevant Connected‐ selected on the welcome screen or via iDrive. A Drive account. PIN may need to be entered. 1. "CAR" 1. "CAR" 2. "Driver profiles" 2. "Driver profiles" 3. Tilt the Controller to the right. As an alternative to steps 1 and 2, it is possi‐ As an alternative to steps 1 to 3, it is possible ble to tap the profile picture in the upper sta‐ to tap the profile picture in the upper status tus bar. bar. 3. Select a driver profile. 4. "Driver recognition" 4. "OK" 5. "using PIN" The settings saved in the selected driver profile are applied automatically. Changing/cancelling recognition If a different vehicle key or a different digital key Switching synchronisation with is assigned to a driver profile, the current assign‐ the ConnectedDrive account ment must be cancelled first. on/off 1. "CAR" ConnectedDrive countries: 2. "Driver profiles" The settings saved in the driver profile are 3. Tilt the Controller to the right. synchronised with the personal ConnectedDrive As an alternative to steps 1 to 3, it is possible account. This makes it possible to use the per‐ to tap the profile picture in the upper status sonal settings in other BMW vehicles with Con‐ bar. nectedDrive access as well, provided that this function is supported. 4. "Driver recognition" Synchronisation with the ConnectedDrive ac‐ 5. Select the desired setting: count is enabled when a driver profile is created ▷ "with vehicle key" or via iDrive: ▷ "With Digital Key" 1. "CAR" 6. "Activate linkage" 2. "Driver profiles" If the vehicle and the vehicle key are handed over 3. Tilt the Controller to the right. for a service, for example, carry out the following steps first: As an alternative to steps 1 to 3, it is possible to tap the profile picture in the upper status ▷ Set up PIN protection. bar. ▷ Cancel recognition via the vehicle key.
82 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 83
Personal settings CONTROLS
4. "Settings" 4. "Settings" 5. "Synchronise driver profile" 5. "Remove driver profile" 6. "Synchronise driver profile" 6. Select the desired driver profile. 7. "Remove now" Renaming the driver profile ConnectedDrive countries: If the driver profile Non-ConnectedDrive countries: has been synchronised with a ConnectedDrive account, the data saved in the ConnectedDrive 1. "CAR" account is retained. 2. "Driver profiles" As an alternative to steps 1 and 2, it is possi‐ System limits ble to tap the profile picture in the upper sta‐ It is not always possible to detect the desired ve‐ tus bar. hicle key uniquely. This may be the case in the 3. Select a driver profile. following scenarios, for example: 4. "Settings" ▷ The driver unlocks the vehicle via Comfort 5. Enter a profile name. Access. 6. Select the symbol. ▷ If there is a change of driver without the vehi‐ ConnectedDrive countries: cle being locked and unlocked. The name of the driver profile is transferred from ▷ If a number of vehicle keys are located in the the ConnectedDrive account. Changes to the area outside of the vehicle, on the driver's profile name must be made in the Connected‐ side. Drive account. ConnectedDrive countries: It is only possible to create a driver profile and Selecting a profile picture synchronise it with the ConnectedDrive account Non-ConnectedDrive countries: if mobile telephone reception is available. Using the personal settings saved in the Con‐ 1. "CAR" nectedDrive account in other vehicles is subject 2. "Driver profiles" to certain technical restrictions. For example, 3. Tilt the Controller to the right. there may be stored settings for a system that is As an alternative to steps 1 to 3, it is possible not available in other vehicles, or only in an in‐ to tap the profile picture in the upper status compatible version. bar. 4. "Avatar" 5. Select the desired profile picture.
Deleting a driver profile 1. "CAR" 2. "Driver profiles" 3. Tilt the Controller to the right. As an alternative to steps 1 to 3, it is possible to tap the profile picture in the upper status bar.
83 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 84
CONTROLS Connections
Connections
Vehicle equipment your vehicle, for example on account of the spe‐ cial equipment selected or the country specifica‐ tion. This also applies to safety-relevant func‐ This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ tions and systems. Please comply with the cific and optional equipment available for the relevant laws and regulations when using the model series. It may therefore describe equip‐ corresponding functions and systems. ment and functions which are not installed in
Connecting mobile devices to the vehicle Principle General Various types of connection are available in the The following list shows possible functions and vehicle for using mobile devices. Which connec‐ the appropriate connection types for them. The tion type to select depends on the mobile device level of functionality depends on the mobile de‐ and the function you wish to use. vice.
Function Connection type Symbol in the device list
Making calls using the hands-free sys‐ Bluetooth. tem. Operating telephone functions via iDrive or touchscreen. Other functions, for example contacts or SMS.
Play music from the smartphone or au‐ Bluetooth audio. dio system.
WLAN in the vehicle: WLAN. Use apps in the vehicle.
Wi-Fi hotspot: WLAN. Using the vehicle's Internet access.
Screen Mirroring: WLAN. Showing the smartphone display on the control display.
USB port: USB. Playing music or video from a USB de‐ vice.
84 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 85
Connections CONTROLS
Function Connection type Symbol in the device list
Apple CarPlay: Bluetooth and WLAN. Operating apps via iDrive and by voice commands.
Android Auto: Bluetooth and WLAN. Operating apps via iDrive and by voice commands.
The following connection types require a one-off Viewing the vehicle identification pairing process with the vehicle: number and software part number ▷ Bluetooth. When looking for compatible devices, the vehicle ▷ WLAN. identification number and software part number Paired devices are then automatically recognised may have to be stated. These numbers can be and connected to the vehicle. displayed in the vehicle. 1. "COM" Safety note 2. "Mobile devices" 3. Tilt the Controller to the right. WARNING 4. "Settings" Operating integrated information systems and 5. "Bluetooth information" communication devices during a journey may 6. "System information" distract you from the road. You could lose con‐ trol of the vehicle. There is a risk of accident. Only operate the systems or devices if the traf‐ fic conditions allow you to do so. Stop if neces‐ Managing mobile devices sary and operate the systems or devices with the vehicle at a standstill. General ▷ Following one-off pairing, the devices are au‐ tomatically detected and connected again Compatible devices when standby state is switched on. ▷ The data saved on the SIM card or in the mo‐ General bile telephone – for example, contacts – is Information about mobile devices compatible transferred to the vehicle following detection with the vehicle is available at www.bmw.com/ and can be used via iDrive. bluetooth. ▷ Some devices may require particular settings, Malfunctions may occur when using unlisted de‐ for example authorisation; see the user man‐ vices or different software versions. ual of the device.
Displaying the device list All devices paired or connected to the vehicle are displayed in the device list.
85 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 86
CONTROLS Connections
A maximum of four devices can be connected to ▷ "Disconnect device" the vehicle via Bluetooth and ten devices via The device remains paired and can be WLAN. A maximum of 20 devices can be detec‐ connected again. ted. ▷ "Delete device" 1. "COM" The device is disconnected and deleted 2. "Mobile devices" from the device list. A symbol to the right of the device name indi‐ ▷ "Connection mode" cates which function the device is used for. Select a connection mode, for example If the symbol is shown in white, there is an active Apple CarPlay. connection to the vehicle with this function. The ▷ "Telephone" symbol is shown in grey when the device func‐ Set the telephone. tion is inactive. ▷ "Bluetooth audio" Symbol Meaning Playback of music files via Bluetooth from Telephone. external devices, for example audio devi‐ ces or mobile telephones. Bluetooth audio. ▷ "Apps" WLAN in the vehicle, Wi-Fi hotspot. If the BMW Connected app is installed, Apps. smartphone apps can be displayed in the vehicle. Screen Mirroring. ▷ "Wi-Fi" Apple CarPlay. Connects the device to the WLAN in the Android Auto. vehicle. Telephone priority Configuring the device If several mobile phones are connected to the Functions can be activated or deactivated on a vehicle, it is possible to define reconnection pri‐ paired or connected device. orities for them. The level of functionality depends on the mobile device. 1. "COM" Observe the information on the control display. 2. "Mobile devices" 3. Tilt the Controller to the right. 1. "COM" 4. "Settings" 2. "Mobile devices" 5. "Priorities for telephony" 3. Select the required device. 6. Select the required device. 4. Select the desired setting: 7. Move to select the desired priority. ▷ "Connect device" Functions assigned to the device before disconnection are reassigned to the de‐ vice upon reconnection. If applicable, these functions are deactivated for an al‐ ready connected device.
86 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 87
Connections CONTROLS
Bluetooth connection Enabling/disabling telephone functions Operating requirements To be able to use all supported functions of a mobile telephone, the desired functions may ▷ Compatible device with Bluetooth interface. need to be activated in the vehicle before regis‐ Compatible devices, see page 85. tering the mobile telephone with the vehicle. ▷ The vehicle key is in the vehicle. 1. "COM" ▷ The device is operational. 2. "Personalise menu" ▷ Bluetooth is activated on the device and 3. Select the desired settings, for example "Text switched on in the vehicle. messages". ▷ The Control Display indicates that the system is ready for registration. Frequently Asked Questions ▷ The device may require certain Bluetooth de‐ For the mobile device to work correctly, the pre‐ fault settings, for example visibility; see the conditions have to be met and all the necessary user manual of the device. steps have to be carried out in the correct order. Even when this is done, however, there may still Activating Bluetooth be instances where the mobile device does not 1. "COM" function as expected. 2. "Mobile devices" In such cases, the following explanations may 3. Tilt the Controller to the right. provide assistance: 4. "Settings" Why could the mobile telephone not be paired or connected? 5. "Bluetooth" ▷ Too many Bluetooth devices are paired to 6. Select the setting. the mobile telephone or the vehicle. Connecting a device In the vehicle, delete Bluetooth connections with other devices. 1. "COM" Delete the Bluetooth connection from the de‐ 2. "Mobile devices" vice list on the mobile telephone and start a 3. Tilt the Controller to the right. new device search. 4. "New device" Too many Bluetooth devices with the same 5. "Phone calls and audio" function are registered. The Bluetooth name of the vehicle is dis‐ ▷ The mobile telephone is in power-save mode played in the Control Display. or the battery is low. 6. Compare the control number shown on the Charge the mobile telephone and deactivate control display with the control number on power-save mode if necessary. the mobile device display, and confirm that Why does the mobile telephone no longer re‐ the two match. spond? 7. A Bluetooth connection is established. ▷ The applications on the mobile telephone are The mobile device is connected to the vehicle no longer functioning. and displayed in the device list. Switch the mobile telephone off and on again.
87 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 88
CONTROLS Connections
▷ Ambient temperature too high or too low to ▷ Insert the mobile telephone in the wireless operate the mobile telephone. charging dock. Do not subject the mobile telephone to ex‐ ▷ Adjust the volume of the microphone sepa‐ treme ambient conditions. rately in the sound settings. Why can telephone functions not be operated via If all the points on the list have been reviewed iDrive? and the desired function cannot be performed, ▷ No telephone functions are configured for the contact the Hotline, a Service Partner of the mobile telephone. manufacturer or another qualified Service Partner or a specialist workshop. Connect the mobile telephone with the tele‐ phone function. Why are no phone book entries, not all entries or WLAN connection incomplete entries displayed? ▷ The transfer of the phone book entries is not General yet completed. For certain applications, for example apps, data is ▷ Under certain circumstances only the phone exchanged between the vehicle and a smart‐ book entries saved in the mobile telephone or phone via WLAN. on the SIM card are transferred. ▷ It may not be possible to display phone book Operating requirements entries containing special characters. ▷ Standby state is switched on. ▷ It may not be possible to transfer contacts ▷ Compatible device with activated WLAN in‐ from social networks. terface. ▷ The number of phone book entries to be transferred is too high. Activating WLAN in the vehicle ▷ The data volume of the contact is too large, 1. "COM" for example due to saved information such as memos. 2. "Mobile devices" Reduce the data volume of the contact. 3. Tilt the Controller to the right. ▷ A mobile telephone can only be connected as 4. "Settings" an audio source or as a telephone. 5. "Wi-Fi" Configure the mobile telephone and connect it to the telephone function. Wi-Fi hotspot ▷ A contact was created in the telephone con‐ tact list after the last synchronisation. Re-synchronise the contacts: "Reload Principle contacts" Compatible devices with a WLAN interface can use the vehicle's Internet connection via the Wi- How can the telephone connection quality be Fi hotspot. improved? ▷ Adjust the strength of the Bluetooth signal on General the mobile telephone; the procedure varies from mobile telephone to mobile telephone. Up to ten devices can be connected at the same time using the Wi-Fi hotspot.
88 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 89
Connections CONTROLS
Operating requirements A QR code is also displayed on the Control Dis‐ play. Alternatively, this QR code can be used to ▷ Compatible device with activated WLAN in‐ pair the mobile device with the hotspot. terface. This data volume is used by all devices connec‐ Compatible devices, see page 85. ted via the hotspot. ▷ WLAN is activated in the vehicle. ▷ Internet usage is activated in the vehicle. Deactivating Internet usage via ▷ Registration and, if necessary, data contract the Wi-Fi hotspot with a service provider. Internet usage may be deactivated if the data ▷ Standby state is switched on. volume is used up, for example.
Connecting a device to the 1. "COM" Internet via a Wi-Fi hotspot 2. "Mobile devices" 3. Tilt the Controller to the right. Registration will be required and a data volume may need to be purchased from a service pro‐ 4. "Settings" vider when you first connect to the Internet via 5. "Internet use" the Wi-Fi hotspot. 6. Select the desired setting. Data volumes can be purchased via the connec‐ ted mobile telephone or the ConnectedDrive Store, depending on the country version. Screen Mirroring 1. "COM" 2. "Mobile devices" General 3. Tilt the Controller to the right. Screen Mirroring enables you to display your smartphone screen on the Control Display. 4. "New device" 5. "Internet, apps" Operating requirements The hotspot name and hotspot code are dis‐ ▷ Compatible smartphone with Screen Mirror‐ played on the Control Display. ing interface. 6. Activate Internet usage via WLAN if neces‐ Compatible devices, see page 85. sary. ▷ Screen Mirroring is activated in the smart‐ "Open settings" phone. 7. Activate Internet usage. ▷ WLAN is activated in the vehicle. "Internet use" 8. Tilt the Controller to the left. Pairing the smartphone with 9. On the mobile device, search for WLAN net‐ Screen Mirroring works. Select the network name on the de‐ 1. "COM" vice. 2. "Mobile devices" 10.Enter the hotspot code on the device and 3. Tilt the Controller to the right. connect. 4. "New device" The device is displayed in the device list. 5. "Screen Mirroring"
89 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 90
CONTROLS Connections
The WLAN name of the vehicle is displayed The Bluetooth name of the vehicle is dis‐ in the Control Display. played in the Control Display. 6. On the smartphone, search for WLAN devi‐ 6. On the mobile device, search for Bluetooth ces in the vicinity. devices in the vicinity and select the vehicle. The vehicle's WLAN name is shown on the A control number is displayed. display of the device. Select the vehicle's 7. Compare the control number shown on the WLAN name. control display with the control number on 7. Confirm the connection via iDrive. the mobile device display, and confirm that The device is connected and displayed in the the two match. device list. 8. "Use Apple CarPlay" The iPhone is connected to the vehicle and dis‐ Apple CarPlay preparation played in the device list. Operation Principle For further information, see the integrated Own‐ CarPlay makes it possible to operate certain er's Handbook or the Owner's Handbook for functions of a compatible Apple iPhone by Siri Navigation, Entertainment and Communication. voice operation and using iDrive. Frequently Asked Questions Operating requirements For the mobile device to work correctly, the pre‐ ▷ Compatible iPhone, iPhone 5 or later with conditions have to be met and all the necessary iOS 7.1 or later. steps have to be carried out in the correct order. Compatible devices, see page 85. Even when this is done, however, there may still be instances where the mobile device does not ▷ Appropriate mobile radio contract. function as expected. ▷ Bluetooth, WLAN and Siri voice operation are In such cases, the following explanations may activated on the iPhone. provide assistance: ▷ The setting for mobile data may need to be The iPhone has already been paired with Apple activated on the iPhone. CarPlay. When a new connection is established, ▷ Booking of the ConnectedDrive service: CarPlay can no longer be selected. smartphone integration. ▷ Delete the iPhone concerned from the device ▷ WLAN and Bluetooth are activated in the ve‐ list. hicle. ▷ On the iPhone, delete the vehicle concerned from the list of saved connections under Pairing the iPhone with CarPlay Bluetooth and under WLAN. 1. "COM" ▷ Pair the iPhone as a new device. 2. "Mobile devices" If the steps listed have been carried out and the 3. Tilt the Controller to the right. desired function still cannot be run: contact the 4. "New device" hotline, a Service Partner of the manufacturer or another qualified Service Partner or a specialist 5. "Phone calls and audio" workshop.
90 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 91
Connections CONTROLS
Android Auto preparation 8. "Use Android Auto" 9. If applicable, complete setup on the mobile device. Principle The smartphone is connected to the vehicle and Android Auto makes it possible to operate cer‐ displayed in the device list. tain functions of a compatible smartphone via voice control and via iDrive. Operation Operating requirements For further information, see the integrated Own‐ er's Handbook or the Owner's Handbook for ▷ Compatible Android smartphone with Navigation, Entertainment and Communication. Android 9.0 or later. Compatible devices, see page 85. Frequently Asked Questions ▷ Appropriate mobile radio contract. For the mobile device to work correctly, the pre‐ ▷ Bluetooth and WLAN are activated on the conditions have to be met and all the necessary smartphone. steps have to be carried out in the correct order. ▷ The setting for mobile data may need to be Even when this is done, however, there may still activated on the smartphone. be instances where the mobile device does not function as expected. ▷ Booking of the ConnectedDrive service: smartphone integration. In such cases, the following explanations may provide assistance: ▷ The Android Auto app is installed on the smartphone. The smartphone has already been paired with Android Auto. When a new connection is estab‐ ▷ WLAN and Bluetooth are activated in the ve‐ lished, Android Auto can no longer be selected. hicle. ▷ Delete the smartphone concerned from the Pairing the smartphone with device list. Android Auto ▷ On the smartphone, delete the vehicle con‐ cerned from the list of saved connections un‐ 1. "COM" der Bluetooth and under WLAN. 2. "Mobile devices" ▷ Pair the smartphone as a new device. 3. Tilt the Controller to the right. If the steps listed have been carried out and the 4. "New device" desired function still cannot be run: contact the 5. "Phone calls and audio" hotline, a Service Partner of the manufacturer or another qualified Service Partner or a specialist The Bluetooth name of the vehicle is dis‐ workshop. played in the Control Display. 6. On the mobile device, search for Bluetooth devices in the vicinity and select the vehicle. USB connection A control number is displayed. 7. Compare the control number shown on the General control display with the control number on The following mobile devices can be connected the mobile device display, and confirm that to the USB port: the two match. ▷ Mobile telephones.
91 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 92
CONTROLS Connections
▷ Audio devices, for example MP3 players. ▷ Devices such as fans or lamps. ▷ USB storage devices. Common file systems are supported. For‐ Operating requirements mats FAT32 and exFAT are recommended. Compatible device with USB port. A connected USB device is charged via the USB For further information: port if the device supports this. Note the maxi‐ Compatible devices, see page 85. mum charge current of the USB port. The following can be done at USB ports sup‐ Connecting a device porting data transfer: Connect the USB device to a USB port using a ▷ Playback of music files. suitable adapter cable. ▷ Playback of video films. The USB device is displayed in the device list. When connecting, bear the following in mind: For further information: ▷ Do not use force when inserting the connec‐ USB port, see page 321. tor into the USB port. ▷ Use a flexible adapter cable. ▷ Protect the USB device from mechanical damage. ▷ Due to the large variety of USB devices avail‐ able on the market, operation via the vehicle cannot be ensured for every device. ▷ Do not expose the USB devices to extreme environmental conditions, for example very high temperatures; see the operating instruc‐ tions of the device. ▷ Due to the large variety of different compres‐ sion techniques, correct playback of the me‐ dia stored on the USB device cannot be guaranteed in every case. ▷ To ensure correct transmission of the stored data, do not charge a USB device from the 12 V power socket in the vehicle when the device is also connected to the USB port. ▷ Depending on how the USB device is being used, settings may need to be performed on the USB device; see the operating instruc‐ tions of the device. Unsuitable USB devices: ▷ USB hard drives. ▷ USB hubs. ▷ USB memory card reader with several slots. ▷ HFS-formatted USB devices.
92 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 93
Opening and closing CONTROLS
Opening and closing
Vehicle equipment injury. Carry the vehicle key with you so that you can open the vehicle from the outside. This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ cific and optional equipment available for the model series. It may therefore describe equip‐ WARNING ment and functions which are not installed in On some national-market versions, unlocking your vehicle, for example on account of the spe‐ from the inside is only possible with special cial equipment selected or the country specifica‐ knowledge. tion. This also applies to safety-relevant func‐ There is a risk of injury or danger to life if per‐ tions and systems. Please comply with the sons remain in the vehicle for extended periods relevant laws and regulations when using the and are exposed to extreme temperatures as a corresponding functions and systems. result. Do not lock the vehicle from the outside when there is someone inside it. Vehicle key
WARNING General Unsupervised children or pets in the vehicle The delivery specification includes two vehicle can set the vehicle in motion and endanger keys with integrated keys. themselves or other road users, for example by Each vehicle key contains a replaceable battery. the following actions: Various settings are possible for the button func‐ ▷ Pressing the start/stop button. tions, depending on the equipment and the na‐ ▷ Releasing the parking brake. tional-market version. ▷ Opening and closing doors or windows. A driver profile with personalised settings can be ▷ Engaging selector lever position N. assigned to a vehicle key. ▷ Operating vehicle equipment. To provide information on maintenance require‐ ments, the service data is saved in the vehicle There is a risk of accident or injury. Do not key. leave children or pets unsupervised in the vehi‐ cle. When leaving the vehicle, take the vehicle To prevent the vehicle key from being locked in, key with you and lock the vehicle. take it with you whenever you leave the vehicle.
Safety notes
WARNING Persons remaining in the vehicle or pets left in‐ side can lock the doors from the inside and lock themselves in. In this case, the vehicle cannot be opened from the outside. There is a risk of
93 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 94
CONTROLS Opening and closing
Overview ▷ If a driver profile has been assigned to the ve‐ hicle key, this driver profile is activated and the settings saved in it are configured. ▷ The interior light is switched on unless it was switched off manually. ▷ Folded-in exterior mirrors are folded out. If the exterior mirrors were folded in using the button in the interior, they are not folded out when the vehicle is unlocked. ▷ With anti-theft security system: The anti-theft 1 To unlock security system is switched off. 2 Locking ▷ With alarm system: The alarm system is 3 To open/close the tailgate switched off. 4 Function adjustable: The vehicle is operational after one of the front doors is opened. Headlight courtesy delay feature, standing air conditioning The lighting functions may depend on the ambi‐ ent brightness.
Unlocking Comfort opening General Keep the button on the vehicle key pressed after unlocking. The vehicle's response when unlocked with the vehicle key depends on the following settings: The windows and the glass sunroof with sun ▷ Whether only the driver's door or all vehicle guard are opened for as long as the button on access points are unlocked with the first the vehicle key is pressed. press of the button. ▷ Whether the unlocking of the vehicle is ac‐ Locking knowledged with a light signal or an acoustic signal. General ▷ Whether the welcome light is switched on The vehicle's response when locked with the ve‐ when the vehicle is unlocked. hicle key depends on the following settings: ▷ Whether locking of the vehicle is acknowl‐ Unlocking the vehicle edged with a light signal or an acoustic signal. Press the button on the vehicle key. ▷ Whether the exterior mirrors are automatically folded in when the vehicle is locked. If the If only the driver's door has been unlocked due hazard warning lights are switched on, the ex‐ to the settings, press the button on the vehicle terior mirrors are not folded in. key again to unlock the other vehicle access ▷ Whether the home lights are activated when points. the vehicle is locked. The following functions are also carried out: Locking the vehicle 1. Close the driver's door.
94 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 95
Opening and closing CONTROLS
The function is not available for the first 10 sec‐ 2. Press the button on the vehicle key. onds after locking. The following functions are carried out: ▷ The interior light is switched on unless it was ▷ All the doors and tailgate are locked. switched off manually. ▷ With anti-theft security system: The anti-theft Interior lighting, see page 206. security system is switched on. This prevents ▷ Depending on the settings, the exterior lights the doors from being unlocked using the are switched on. locking buttons or the door handles. Welcome light, see page 201. ▷ With alarm system: The alarm system is The lighting functions may depend on the ambi‐ switched on. ent brightness. If the drive-ready state is still switched on when locking, the vehicle horn sounds twice. In this Tailgate case, switch off the drive-ready state using start/ stop button. General Comfort closing To prevent the vehicle key from being locked in, do not place it in the luggage compartment. Safety note It is possible to set whether the doors are un‐ locked when the tailgate is opened with the vehi‐ cle key. WARNING When the trailer socket is in use, the tailgate can‐ Parts of the body can become trapped when not be opened with the vehicle key or with the the comfort closing feature is operated. There button in the interior. is a risk of injury. When the comfort closing fea‐ ture is operating, make sure that the area of Safety notes movement is kept clear.
WARNING Closing Operation of the tailgate/rear window can lead Keep the button on the vehicle key to parts of the body becoming trapped. There pressed after locking. is a risk of injury. When opening and closing, make sure that the area of movement of the The windows and the glass sunroof with sun tailgate/rear window is kept clear. guard are closed for as long as the button on the vehicle key is pressed. The exterior mirrors are folded in, provided that WARNING they were not folded in when the vehicle was The tailgate and rear window swing outwards locked. If the hazard warning lights are switched when opened. There is a risk of injury or mate‐ on, the exterior mirrors are not folded in. rial damage. When opening and closing, make sure that the area of movement of the tailgate Switching on the interior light and rear window is kept clear. and exterior lights With the vehicle locked, press the button on the vehicle key.
95 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 96
CONTROLS Opening and closing
For further information: NOTE Home lights, see page 201. The luggage compartment cover is automati‐ cally raised or lowered. Thereby, loads or the Replacing the battery luggage compartment cover can be damaged. 1. Remove the integrated key from the vehicle There is a risk of material damage. When open‐ key. ing and closing, make sure that the area of movement of the luggage compartment cover Integrated key, see page 102. is kept clear. 2. Place integrated key under the battery com‐ partment lid, arrow 1, and pry off the lid with a lever motion of the integrated key, arrow 2. NOTE Sharp or angular objects can strike the win‐ dows and the heating conductors during the journey. There is a risk of material damage. Cover the edges and make sure that sharp ob‐ jects cannot strike the windows.
Opening Press and hold the button on the vehi‐ 3. Use a pointed object to push the battery in cle key for approximately 1 second. the direction of the arrow and lift it out.
On some equipment versions, the doors are also unlocked each time.
Closing Press and hold the button on the vehi‐ cle key until the tailgate has closed.
Releasing the button stops the closing operation.
If the doors were not unlocked, the tailgate is 4. Insert a new type CR 2032 battery with the locked again as soon as it is closed. positive side facing upwards. Switching on the home lights 5. Press the cover back into position and close it. The home lights function must be set for the 6. Push the integrated key into the vehicle key button on the vehicle key. until the integrated key engages. For further information: Dispose of old batteries at a Service Home lights, see page 114. Partner of the manufacturer or another Press and hold the button on the vehi‐ qualified Service Partner or a specialist cle key for approximately 1 second. workshop or hand them in to an authorised col‐ lecting point. It is possible to adjust the duration of the home lights.
96 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 97
Opening and closing CONTROLS
Additional vehicle keys If there is a malfunction, the vehicle can be un‐ locked and locked from the outside with the Additional vehicle keys are available from a Serv‐ integrated key. ice Partner of the manufacturer or another quali‐ fied Service Partner or an authorised workshop. For further information: Integrated key, see page 102. Loss of vehicle keys A lost vehicle key can be blocked and replaced Switching on drive-ready state via by a Service Partner of the manufacturer or an‐ the emergency detection feature of other qualified Service Partner or an authorised the vehicle key workshop. If a driver profile has been assigned to the lost vehicle key, the connection to this vehicle key must be removed. A new vehicle key can then be assigned to the driver profile.
Malfunction
General A Check Control message is shown. Drive-ready state cannot be switched on if the It may be difficult for the vehicle to detect the ve‐ vehicle key has not been detected. hicle key in some conditions, including the If this happens, proceed as follows: following: 1. Hold the rear side of the vehicle key against ▷ The battery of the vehicle key is discharged. the mark on the steering column. Pay atten‐ ▷ Disruption of the radio link by transmission tion to the display in the instrument cluster. masts or other equipment transmitting pow‐ 2. If the vehicle key is detected: erful signals. Switch on drive-ready state within 10 sec‐ ▷ Shielding of the vehicle key by metallic ob‐ onds. jects. If the vehicle key is not detected, change the po‐ Do not transport the vehicle key together with sition of the vehicle key slightly and repeat the metallic objects. procedure. ▷ Disruption of the radio link by mobile tele‐ phones or other electronic devices in the im‐ Frequently Asked Questions mediate vicinity of the vehicle key. What provisions can be made to enable a vehicle Do not transport the vehicle key together with to be opened if the vehicle key has accidentally electronic devices. been locked inside the vehicle? ▷ Interference with the radio transmission ▷ The Remote Services of the BMW Connec‐ caused by the charging of mobile devices, for ted app can be used to lock and unlock a ve‐ example a mobile phone. hicle. ▷ The vehicle key is located in the immediate This requires an active BMW Connected‐ vicinity of the wireless charging tray. Drive contract and the BMW Connected app Place the vehicle key somewhere else. must be installed on a smartphone.
97 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 98
CONTROLS Opening and closing
▷ Unlocking of the vehicle can be requested via There is a risk of injury or danger to life if per‐ the BMW ConnectedDrive call centre. sons remain in the vehicle for extended periods This requires an active BMW Connected‐ and are exposed to extreme temperatures as a Drive contract. result. Do not lock the vehicle from the outside when there is someone inside it. Key card WARNING Principle Unsupervised children or pets in the vehicle The Key Card can be used to lock, unlock and can set the vehicle in motion and endanger start the vehicle. themselves or other road users, for example by the following actions: General ▷ Pressing the start/stop button. The Key Card is available with Comfort Access ▷ Releasing the parking brake. and Steptronic transmission. Depending on the ▷ Opening and closing doors or windows. national-market version, the Key Card may not ▷ Engaging selector lever position N. be available. ▷ Operating vehicle equipment. A digital key that has already been paired with There is a risk of accident or injury. Do not the vehicle is installed on the key card. The digi‐ leave children or pets unsupervised in the vehi‐ tal key must be activated via iDrive. cle. When leaving the vehicle, take the vehicle When you exit the vehicle, deactivate the Key key with you and lock the vehicle. Card or take the Key Card with you, as it can be used to start the vehicle when activated. Always take the vehicle key with you to a service ap‐ Connection to the vehicle pointment. Communication between the vehicle and the Key Card takes place via near field communica‐ Safety notes tion NFC.
WARNING Activating/deactivating the Key Persons remaining in the vehicle or pets left in‐ Card in the vehicle side can lock the doors from the inside and lock themselves in. In this case, the vehicle cannot General be opened from the outside. There is a risk of To activate the Key Card, it must be in the injury. Carry the vehicle key with you so that smartphone tray and there must be a vehicle key you can open the vehicle from the outside. in the vehicle. To deactivate the Key Card, there must be a ve‐ hicle key in the vehicle. WARNING If BMW Digital Key is activated for the vehicle, a On some national-market versions, unlocking digital key can be used instead of the vehicle from the inside is only possible with special key. knowledge. A deactivated Key Card will remain in the list of registered digital keys.
98 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 99
Opening and closing CONTROLS
Activating the Key Card Starting the engine
1. Open the cover of the smartphone dock. 1. Open the cover of the smartphone dock. 2. Place the Key Card in the middle of the 2. Place the activated Key Card in the middle of smartphone tray. the smartphone tray. 3. Follow the instructions on the control display 3. Press the Start/Stop button to start the en‐ to activate the Key Card. gine. With wireless charging tray: The Key Card can Deactivating the Key Card be taken out of the tray after starting the engine 1. "CAR" so that the tray can be used to charge compati‐ 2. "Settings" ble smartphones. 3. "Doors/ vehicle access" Malfunction 4. "Digital Key" Objects between the sensors and the Key Card, 5. Select Key Card. for example a purse or wallet, may prevent the 6. "Key active." vehicle from detecting the Key Card. A deactivated Key Card will remain in the list of registered digital keys. BMW Digital Key Unlocking and locking the vehicle Principle BMW Digital Key allows you to use a compatible smartphone to lock, unlock and start the vehicle.
General BMW Digital Key is available with Comfort Ac‐ cess and Steptronic transmission. Depending on the national-market version, BMW Digital Key may not be available. BMW Digital Key can be used with a compatible Hold the activated Key Card directly and centrally smartphone or another compatible mobile end up against the outside door handle on the driv‐ device, for example a smartwatch. er's door. To unlock and start a vehicle with a compatible smartphone, this function must be offered by the
99 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 100
CONTROLS Opening and closing
smartphone manufacturer. Users can check whether the smartphone and the vehicle are WARNING compatible in the BMW app. Unsupervised children or pets in the vehicle A driver profile with individual settings can be as‐ can set the vehicle in motion and endanger signed to a digital key. themselves or other road users, for example by For further information: the following actions: Driver profiles, see page 80. ▷ Pressing the start/stop button. When using a smartphone as a digital key, al‐ ▷ Releasing the parking brake. ways have a vehicle key or the activated Key ▷ Opening and closing doors or windows. Card about your person too. This will mean that ▷ Engaging selector lever position N. you can still access the vehicle even if the smart‐ phone is not working. It is also useful to have the ▷ Operating vehicle equipment. vehicle key or Key Card about your person if the There is a risk of accident or injury. Do not vehicle has to be handed over to another person. leave children or pets unsupervised in the vehi‐ The vehicle key or Key Card can then be handed cle. When leaving the vehicle, take the vehicle over, instead of the smartphone. Always take the key with you and lock the vehicle. vehicle key with you to a service appointment.
Safety notes Connection to the vehicle Communication between the vehicle and the smartphone takes place via near field communi‐ WARNING cation, NFC. Persons remaining in the vehicle or pets left in‐ side can lock the doors from the inside and lock Operating requirements themselves in. In this case, the vehicle cannot ▷ The smartphone is compatible with BMW be opened from the outside. There is a risk of Digital Key. injury. Carry the vehicle key with you so that you can open the vehicle from the outside. ▷ The vehicle is linked with the Connected‐ Drive account of the vehicle owner. ▷ The smartphone battery is sufficiently WARNING charged. The minimum battery charge re‐ quired depends on the smartphone in ques‐ On some national-market versions, unlocking tion. from the inside is only possible with special knowledge. Enabling the main digital key There is a risk of injury or danger to life if per‐ sons remain in the vehicle for extended periods The vehicle owner's smartphone is enabled as and are exposed to extreme temperatures as a the main digital key in the vehicle. The vehicle result. Do not lock the vehicle from the outside owner must provide evidence of his/her authori‐ when there is someone inside it. sation for the vehicle for this purpose. Evidence of authorisation can be provided via the BMW app or the activation code in the corre‐ sponding smartphone function, for example in the Wallet app. Both vehicle keys must be in the vehicle during enabling.
100 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 101
Opening and closing CONTROLS
Follow the enabling instructions in the Digital Key A shared key will only be deleted via the smart‐ menu within the BMW app or on the control dis‐ phone associated with the main digital key if the play. vehicle is being used with a key other than the Digital keys may have limited service validity peri‐ one that is to be deleted. ods. The expiry date can be checked in the If the smartphone associated with a shared key BMW app. or iDrive is used to delete a shared key, it will be If a digital key has expired, it can still be used to deleted immediately. drive the vehicle until the vehicle is operated with Deleted digital keys are removed from the list of a different vehicle key or digital key. enabled digital keys. Deleted digital keys cannot be restored. Sharing digital keys Deletion in iDrive General To enable a digital key to be deleted in iDrive, Digital Key enables digital keys to be shared with there must be an authorised vehicle key in the other people. This option is provided via the vehicle or the main key must be in the smart‐ smartphone enabled as the main digital key. phone tray.
Passing on authorisation 1. "CAR" 2. "Settings" To share the digital key, select the correspond‐ ing function on the smartphone, for example in 3. "Doors/ vehicle access" the Wallet app. 4. "Digital Key" As soon as a digital key is shared with a person, 5. Select a digital key as necessary. this person receives an invitation. If the invitation 6. "Delete key" is accepted, the digital key is activated on the re‐ cipient's smartphone. Resetting the function Authentication To reset BMW Digital Key function, there must be an authorised vehicle key in the vehicle. Depending on the recipient's smartphone model, authentication may be required for security rea‐ All digital keys, including the main key, are de‐ sons. leted when the BMW Digital Key function is re‐ set. An authorised vehicle key, the main digital key or another method can be used to perform the au‐ Following the reset, it will no longer be possible thentication. Corresponding information is dis‐ to lock, unlock or start the vehicle with a digital played for your attention on the smartphone or key. control display. The main digital key must be enabled again in or‐ der to be able to use BMW Digital Key again.
Deleting a shared key 1. "CAR" General 2. "Settings" 3. "Doors/ vehicle access" Shared keys can be deleted via the smartphone associated with the main digital key, via the 4. "Digital Key" smartphone associated with a shared key or in 5. "Reset function" iDrive.
101 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 102
CONTROLS Opening and closing
Unlocking and locking the Selling the smartphone vehicle Delete all digital keys from the smartphone be‐ fore selling it. This ensures that the smartphone can no longer be used for the vehicle.
Selling the vehicle Before selling a vehicle, reset the digital key function or remove the vehicle from the Connec‐ tedDrive account of the current vehicle owner. If the vehicle is removed from the Connected‐ Drive account, all digital keys for the vehicle are Hold the NFC antenna on the smartphone di‐ deleted. rectly and centrally up against the outside door handle on the driver's door. Malfunction The position of the NFC antenna will depend on It may be difficult for the vehicle to detect the the smartphone model. digital key in some circumstances, including the When using a smartphone to lock the vehicle, following: make sure that all doors and the tailgate are ▷ The smartphone is shielded from the sensors closed. in the vehicle by an unsuitable smartphone cover. Starting the engine ▷ There are objects between the smartphone and its cover, for example a card with a chip or the Key Card.
Integrated key
General With the integrated key, the driver's door can be unlocked and locked without the vehicle key. 1. Open the cover of the smartphone dock. Depending on the national-market version, the 2. Place the smartphone in the middle of the integrated key also fits in the glove compartment. smartphone tray. Use the integrated key to operate the key switch Make sure that the display is pointing up‐ for front passenger airbags. wards. 3. Close the cover of the smartphone tray. Safety notes 4. Press the Start/Stop button to start the en‐ gine. WARNING On some national-market versions, unlocking from the inside is only possible with special knowledge.
102 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 103
Opening and closing CONTROLS
There is a risk of injury or danger to life if per‐ Unlocking/locking using the door sons remain in the vehicle for extended periods lock and are exposed to extreme temperatures as a result. Do not lock the vehicle from the outside 1. Pull the door handle outwards with one hand when there is someone inside it. and hold it.
NOTE The door lock is fixed to the door. The door handle can be moved. Pulling the door handle when the integrated key is inserted can dam‐ age the paint or the integrated key. There is a risk of material damage. Pull out the integrated key before pulling on the outer door handle. 2. Slide one finger of your other hand under the cover from behind and push the cover out‐ Removing wards. Support the cover with your thumb, to stop it falling out of the door handle.
Press the button, arrow 1, and pull out the integrated key, arrow 2. 3. Remove the cover. 4. Unlock or lock the door lock with the integrated key.
The other doors must be unlocked or locked from the inside.
103 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 104
CONTROLS Opening and closing
Alarm system ▷ Turn the door opener on the door to be opened. The other doors remain locked. The switched-on alarm system is triggered when the door is opened after being unlocked via the door lock. Comfort Access The alarm system is not switched on if the vehi‐ cle is locked with the integrated key. Principle This feature allows you to access the vehicle Central locking buttons without having to operate the vehicle key. Simply having the vehicle key with you, for exam‐ General ple in your trouser pocket, is sufficient. In the event of an accident of sufficient severity, The vehicle automatically recognises the vehicle the vehicle is automatically unlocked. The hazard key when it is in the immediate vicinity or inside warning lights and interior lights illuminate. the vehicle.
Overview General Comfort Access supports the following func‐ tions: ▷ Unlocking and locking the vehicle using the door handle. ▷ Comfort closing. ▷ Contactless vehicle unlocking and locking. ▷ Steptronic transmission: unlocking and lock‐ ing the vehicle using the BMW Digital Key.
Central locking buttons. ▷ Open the tailgate. ▷ Open and close the tailgate contactlessly.
Locking Operating requirements Press the button with the front doors ▷ To lock the vehicle, the vehicle key must be closed. located outside the vehicle in the vicinity of the doors. Locking does not activate the vehicle's anti-theft protection system. ▷ The vehicle can only be unlocked and locked again after approximately 2 seconds. Unlocking Unlocking Press the button. General Opening The behaviour of the vehicle when unlocked via Comfort Access depends on the following set‐ ▷ Press the button to unlock all the tings: doors together. Pull the door handle above the armrest.
104 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 105
Opening and closing CONTROLS
▷ Whether the unlocking of the vehicle is ac‐ hazard warning lights are switched on, the ex‐ knowledged with a light signal or an acoustic terior mirrors are not folded in. signal. ▷ Whether the home lights are activated when ▷ Whether the welcome light is switched on the vehicle is locked. when the vehicle is unlocked. Locking the vehicle Unlocking the vehicle Close the driver's door.
Fully grip the handle of a vehicle door. With your finger, touch the grooved area on the handle of a closed vehicle door for approximately The following functions are also carried out: 1 second, without gripping the door handle. ▷ If a driver profile has been assigned to the ve‐ hicle key, this driver profile is activated and The following functions are carried out: the settings saved in it are configured. ▷ All the doors and tailgate are locked. ▷ The interior light is switched on unless it was ▷ With anti-theft security system: The anti-theft switched off manually. security system is switched on. This prevents ▷ Folded-in exterior mirrors are folded out. the doors from being unlocked using the If the exterior mirrors were folded in using the locking buttons or the door handles. button in the interior, they are not folded out ▷ With alarm system: The alarm system is when the vehicle is unlocked. switched on. ▷ With anti-theft security system: The anti-theft security system is switched off. Comfort closing ▷ With alarm system: The alarm system is switched off. Safety note
Locking WARNING Parts of the body can become trapped when General the comfort closing feature is operated. There The behaviour of the vehicle when locked via is a risk of injury. When the comfort closing fea‐ Comfort Access depends on the following set‐ ture is operating, make sure that the area of tings: movement is kept clear. ▷ Whether locking of the vehicle is acknowl‐ edged with a light signal or an acoustic signal. ▷ Whether the exterior mirrors are automatically folded in when the vehicle is locked. If the
105 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 106
CONTROLS Opening and closing
Closing WARNING The tailgate and rear window swing outwards when opened. There is a risk of injury or mate‐ rial damage. When opening and closing, make sure that the area of movement of the tailgate and rear window is kept clear.
NOTE With your finger, touch the knurled area on the The luggage compartment cover is automati‐ handle of a closed vehicle door and keep your cally raised or lowered. Thereby, loads or the finger there without gripping the door handle. luggage compartment cover can be damaged. There is a risk of material damage. When open‐ In addition to locking, the windows and the glass ing and closing, make sure that the area of sunroof with sun guard are closed. movement of the luggage compartment cover The exterior mirrors are folded in, provided that is kept clear. they were not folded in when the vehicle was locked. If the hazard warning lights are switched on, the exterior mirrors are not folded in. NOTE Opening the tailgate/rear window Sharp or angular objects can strike the win‐ dows and the heating conductors during the journey. There is a risk of material damage. General Cover the edges and make sure that sharp ob‐ If the tailgate is opened using Comfort Access, jects cannot strike the windows. locked doors are not unlocked. To prevent the vehicle key from being locked in, do not place it in the luggage compartment. Opening the tailgate
Safety notes
WARNING Operation of the tailgate/rear window can lead to parts of the body becoming trapped. There is a risk of injury. When opening and closing, make sure that the area of movement of the tailgate/rear window is kept clear. Press the button on the outside of the tailgate.
106 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 107
Opening and closing CONTROLS
Opening rear window you move your foot, and do not touch the vehi‐ cle.
WARNING Operation of the tailgate/rear window can lead to parts of the body becoming trapped. There is a risk of injury. When opening and closing, make sure that the area of movement of the tailgate/rear window is kept clear. Press the button on the rear window.
WARNING Opening and closing the tailgate contactlessly The tailgate and rear window swing outwards when opened. There is a risk of injury or mate‐ rial damage. When opening and closing, make Principle sure that the area of movement of the tailgate The tailgate can be opened and closed contact‐ and rear window is kept clear. lessly, provided you are carrying the vehicle key with you. Two sensors detect a directed foot movement in the central rear area and the tail‐ NOTE gate is opened and closed. The luggage compartment cover is automati‐ General cally raised or lowered. Thereby, loads or the luggage compartment cover can be damaged. To prevent the vehicle key from being locked in, There is a risk of material damage. When open‐ do not place it in the luggage compartment. ing and closing, make sure that the area of If the vehicle key is within the sensor range, the movement of the luggage compartment cover tailgate can be accidentally opened or closed by is kept clear. an unintentional or presumed foot movement. The sensor range extends to approximately 1.50 m, 5 ft behind the rear area. NOTE If the tailgate is opened with a contactless Sharp or angular objects can strike the win‐ method, locked doors are not unlocked. dows and the heating conductors during the Contactless opening and closing of the tailgate journey. There is a risk of material damage. must be activated in the settings. Cover the edges and make sure that sharp ob‐ jects cannot strike the windows. Safety notes Operating requirements WARNING It is not possible to open and close the tailgate When operating the boot lid contactlessly, contactlessly if the trailer socket is in use. there is a risk of touching vehicle parts, for ex‐ ample the hot exhaust system. There is a risk of injury. Make sure you are standing securely as
107 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 108
CONTROLS Opening and closing
Settings Closing 1. "CAR" Perform the foot movement described previ‐ 2. "Settings" ously. 3. "Doors/ vehicle access" The hazard warning lights flash and an acoustic signal sounds. 4. "Tailgate" Moving your foot again will stop the closing oper‐ 5. Select the desired setting: ation, and moving it one more time after that will ▷ "Open with foot movement" open the boot lid again. Contactless opening of the boot lid is switched on or off. Contactless vehicle unlocking ▷ "Close with foot movement" and locking Contactless closing of the tailgate is switched on or off. Principle The vehicle is unlocked when the driver ap‐ Correct foot movement proaches the locked vehicle with the vehicle key. 1. Stand in the centre behind the vehicle, ap‐ If the driver moves away from the unlocked vehi‐ proximately an arm's length away from the cle with the vehicle key, the vehicle is locked. rear of the vehicle. 2. Kick your foot underneath the vehicle and im‐ General mediately pull it back. Your leg must move The vehicle is unlocked when an authorised ve‐ across the ranges of both sensors. hicle key is detected in the unlocking zone. The unlocking zone is an area with a radius of approximately 1 m, 3 ft from the door handles. The vehicle is locked when the vehicle key leaves the locking zone. The locking zone is an area with a radius of ap‐ proximately 2 m, 7 ft from the door handles. If the vehicle key remains within the unlocking zone without moving for a prolonged period of time, the vehicle is locked automatically. Opening If a person is detected on the front passenger seat during locking and if the front passenger's Perform the foot movement described previ‐ seat belt is in the belt buckle during locking. The ously. vehicle is locked, but not protected against theft. The hazard warning lights flash before the tail‐ The behaviour of the vehicle in the case of con‐ gate opens. tactless unlocking/locking depends on the Moving your foot again will stop the opening op‐ following settings: eration, and moving it one more time after that ▷ Whether automatic unlocking is active. will close the boot lid again. ▷ Whether automatic locking is active. ▷ Whether only the driver's door or all vehicle access points are unlocked.
108 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 109
Opening and closing CONTROLS
Only driver's door: driver's door is only un‐ Do not transport the vehicle key together with locked when the driver approaches the vehi‐ metallic objects. cle on the driver's side. ▷ Disruption of the radio link by mobile tele‐ All vehicle access points: the vehicle is un‐ phones or other electronic devices in the im‐ locked regardless of which side the driver ap‐ mediate vicinity of the vehicle key. proaches the vehicle from. Do not transport the vehicle key together with ▷ Whether the locking and unlocking of the ve‐ electronic devices. hicle is acknowledged with a light signal or an Wet or snowy conditions may affect the ability of acoustic signal. the door handles to detect a lock request. ▷ Whether the welcome light is switched on If a fault occurs, unlock and lock the vehicle with when the vehicle is unlocked. the buttons on the vehicle key or with the ▷ Whether the home lights are activated when integrated key. the vehicle is locked. For further information: ▷ Whether the exterior mirrors are automatically Integrated key, see page 102. folded out and in when the vehicle is un‐ locked and locked. Tailgate/rear window Operating requirements ▷ Drive-ready state must be switched off. General ▷ Unlock: on entering the unlocking zone, the To prevent the vehicle key from being locked in, doors and tailgate must be closed. do not place it in the luggage compartment. ▷ Lock: on leaving the locking zone, the doors Depending on the equipment level, and national- and tailgate must be closed. market versions, it is possible to select whether ▷ There must not be a second vehicle key the doors are also unlocked when unlocking with within a radius of six metres of the vehicle in the vehicle key. order to use contactless vehicle locking. For further information: ▷ If the vehicle has been in rest state for several For settings, see page 113. days, contactless unlocking/locking is not possible until the vehicle has been driven. Safety notes Malfunction WARNING It may be difficult for the vehicle to detect the ve‐ hicle key in some conditions, including the Operation of the tailgate/rear window can lead following: to parts of the body becoming trapped. There is a risk of injury. When opening and closing, ▷ The battery of the vehicle key is discharged. make sure that the area of movement of the To replace the battery, see page 96. tailgate/rear window is kept clear. ▷ Disruption of the radio link by transmission masts or other equipment transmitting pow‐ erful signals. ▷ Shielding of the vehicle key by metallic ob‐ jects.
109 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 110
CONTROLS Opening and closing
From outside WARNING The tailgate and rear window swing outwards when opened. There is a risk of injury or mate‐ rial damage. When opening and closing, make sure that the area of movement of the tailgate and rear window is kept clear.
NOTE Sharp or angular objects can strike the win‐ ▷ Unlock the vehicle, then press the button on dows and the heating conductors during the the outside of the tailgate. journey. There is a risk of material damage. ▷ With Comfort Access: have the vehicle key Cover the edges and make sure that sharp ob‐ about your person and press the button on jects cannot strike the windows. the outside of the tailgate.
▷ Press the button on the vehicle key for approximately 1 second. NOTE If applicable, the doors are also unlocked. The luggage compartment cover is automati‐ cally raised or lowered. Thereby, loads or the When the vehicle is stationary, the tailgate opens luggage compartment cover can be damaged. automatically up to the set opening height. There is a risk of material damage. When open‐ ing and closing, make sure that the area of From inside movement of the luggage compartment cover When the vehicle is stationary, press the is kept clear. button in the driver's door down.
The tailgate opens up to the set opening height. Tailgate Cancelling the opening operation Opening The opening procedure is interrupted in the following situations: General ▷ If the vehicle begins to move. When the trailer socket is in use, the tailgate can‐ ▷ By pressing the button on the outside of the not be opened with the vehicle key or with the tailgate. Pressing again closes the tailgate. button in the interior. ▷ By pressing the button on the inside of the tailgate. Pressing again closes the tailgate. ▷ By pressing the button on the vehicle key. Pressing again resumes the opening opera‐ tion. Pressing and holding the button closes the tailgate again.
110 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 111
Opening and closing CONTROLS
▷ By pressing or pulling the button in the driv‐ Malfunction er's door. Pressing again resumes the open‐ ing operation. Safety note
Closing WARNING From outside A jammed tailgate may move unexpectedly when being operated manually to release it. ▷ Press and hold the button on the There is a risk of injury or material damage. Do vehicle key until the tailgate has closed. not manually operate a locked tailgate. Have checks performed by a Service Partner of the Releasing the button stops the movement. manufacturer or another qualified Service Part‐ ner or a specialist workshop. ▷ Press the button on the inside of the tailgate. In the event of an electrical fault, operate the un‐ With Comfort Access: locked tailgate manually; do so slowly and with‐ out sudden movements. ▷ Press the button on the inside of the Only light pressure is required to fully close the tailgate. tailgate. The closing operation is then performed The vehicle is locked after the tailgate has automatically. been closed. To do so, the driver's door must be closed and the vehicle key must be out‐ Rear window side the vehicle in the vicinity of the tailgate. Opening From inside Pull and hold the button in the driver's door.
For this function, the vehicle key must be in the interior.
Cancelling the closing operation The closing procedure is interrupted in the following situations: Without Comfort Access: unlock vehicle. ▷ When driving off suddenly. With Comfort Access: unlock the vehicle or have ▷ By pressing the button on the outside of the the vehicle key about your person. tailgate. Pressing again re-opens the tailgate. Press the button on the rear window. ▷ By pressing the button on the inside of the tailgate. Pressing again re-opens the tailgate. ▷ By releasing the button in the driver's door. Closing Pulling the button again and holding it in this To close: press the rear window closed. position resumes the closing operation. ▷ By releasing the button on the vehicle key. Pressing the button again and holding it down resumes the closing operation. 111 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 112
CONTROLS Opening and closing
Parking service mode 3. "General settings" 4. "Valet parking mode" Principle Activating parking service mode The control display is disabled in parking service mode. Operation via iDrive is no longer possible. General This mode can be used, for example, if the vehi‐ Before activating parking service mode, a PIN cle is to be handed over to a parking service. must be defined so that parking service mode can be deactivated later on. General The procedure for entering a PIN varies depend‐ In parking service mode, the vehicle settings ing on the active driver profile. cannot be changed via iDrive. The Personal Pro‐ file cannot be changed. Personal data cannot be Driver profile with PIN displayed. A PIN has been defined for the active driver pro‐ In addition, the following actions are performed: file. ▷ The volume of the audio system is limited. It is not necessary to enter another PIN. ▷ DSC cannot be switched off. "Activate now"
Operating requirements Driver profile without PIN ▷ At least one driver profile has been created. A PIN must be assigned to the driver profile. ▷ A driver profile or the guest profile is active. 1. "PIN" ▷ A ConnectedDrive account is assigned to at 2. PIN required. least one driver profile. 3. "Activate now" Calling up the menu for parking service mode Guest profile The active driver profile is the guest profile. Via the switch-off screen A PIN must be entered. The switch-off screen is displayed after switch‐ 1. "PIN" ing off the drive-ready state. Select the entry for 2. PIN required. parking service mode in the switch-off screen. 3. "Activate now" Via the display bar at the top of the This PIN can be used once to deactivate control display parking service mode when the guest profile is active. 1. Tilt the Controller up. 2. "Valet parking mode" Deactivating parking service Via the vehicle settings mode 1. "CAR" General 2. "Settings" The lock screen for parking service mode is dis‐ played on the Control Display.
112 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 113
Opening and closing CONTROLS
How parking service mode is deactivated de‐ These settings are saved for the current driver pends on which driver profile is selected on the profile. lock screen. Unlocking and locking Driver profile with PIN Regardless of which driver has activated parking Doors service mode, a driver can deactivate parking 1. "CAR" service mode by entering his/her PIN. 2. "Settings" 1. Select a driver profile. 3. "Key button assignment" 2. Enter the PIN assigned to the driver profile. 4. Select the symbol. If you have forgotten the PIN, parking service 5. Select the desired setting: mode must be deactivated by entering the as‐ ▷ "Driver's door only" signed ConnectedDrive login details. Only the driver's door is unlocked. Press‐ Driver profile without PIN ing again unlocks the entire vehicle. Parking service mode was activated by a differ‐ ▷ "All doors" ent person. To deactivate parking service mode, The entire vehicle is unlocked. a driver without a PIN must enter the login details for his/her ConnectedDrive account. Vehicle acknowledgement signals 1. Select a driver profile. 1. "CAR" 2. Enter the ConnectedDrive login details as‐ 2. "Settings" signed to the driver profile. 3. "Doors/ vehicle access" 4. Deactivate or activate desired acknowledge‐ Guest profile ment signals: It is only possible to deactivate parking service ▷ "Flash for lock/unlock" mode in the guest profile if the mode was activa‐ Unlocking is acknowledged by flashing ted in the guest profile. twice, locking by flashing once. 1. Select the guest profile. ▷ With alarm system: 2. Enter the PIN that was set during activation. "Acoustic signal for lock/unlock" If you have forgotten the PIN, parking service Unlocking is acknowledged by an acous‐ mode must be deactivated via a personal driver tic signal sounding twice, locking by the profile. acoustic signal sounding once.
Settings Automatic folding of the mirrors 1. "CAR" 2. "Settings" General 3. "Doors/ vehicle access" Various settings are possible for opening and closing, depending on the equipment and the 4. "Fold mirrors in when locked" country specifications.
113 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 114
CONTROLS Opening and closing
Automatic unlocking Setting the opening height 1. "CAR" The extent to which the tailgate opens can be 2. "Settings" set. 3. "Doors/ vehicle access" When setting the opening height, make sure that there is a space of at least 10 cm, 4 in above the 4. "Unlock at end of journey" tailgate. After drive-ready state has been switched off by pressing the Start/Stop button, the locked 1. "CAR" vehicle is automatically unlocked. 2. "Settings" 3. "Doors/ vehicle access" Automatic locking 4. "Tailgate" 1. "CAR" 5. "Opening height" 2. "Settings" 6. Watch the tailgate and set the desired open‐ 3. "Doors/ vehicle access" ing height. 4. Select the desired setting: ▷ "Lock in a few minutes" Comfort Access The vehicle is automatically locked again after a short while if no doors are opened Contactless locking and unlocking after unlocking. 1. "CAR" ▷ "Lock after pulling away" 2. "Settings" On driving off, the vehicle is locked auto‐ 3. "Doors/ vehicle access" matically. 4. "Comfort access" 5. Select the desired setting: Tailgate ▷ "Unlock by approaching" Tailgate and doors ▷ "Lock by leaving" Depending on the equipment and the country specifications, these settings may not be avail‐ Home lights able. You can assign the home lights to the vehicle key button. 1. "CAR" 2. "Settings" 1. "CAR" 3. "Key button assignment" 2. "Settings" 4. Select the symbol. 3. "Key button assignment" ▷ "Tailgate" 4. Select the symbol. Tailgate is opened. 5. "Home lights" ▷ "Tailgate and door(s)" Tailgate is opened and doors are un‐ Standing air conditioning locked. 1. "CAR" 2. "Settings" 3. "Key button assignment"
114 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 115
Opening and closing CONTROLS
4. Select the symbol. The alarm system indicates these changes visu‐ 5. "Auxiliary climate control" ally and audibly: ▷ Audible alarm: Closing the glass sunroof Depending on local regulations, the acoustic automatically alarm may be suppressed. 1. "CAR" ▷ Visual alarm: 2. "Settings" By flashing of the hazard warning lights and, if 3. "Doors/ vehicle access" applicable, the headlights. 4. "Automatic roof closing" To safeguard the function of the alarm system, do not modify the system. If the vehicle was parked with the glass sun‐ roof open, the glass sunroof will be automati‐ Switching on/off cally moved to the raised position when it starts to rain. The alarm system is switched off or on as soon as the vehicle is unlocked or locked with the ve‐ Establishing rest state after hicle key or using Comfort Access. opening the front doors Opening the doors when the 1. "CAR" alarm system is switched on 2. "Settings" The alarm system is triggered on opening a door 3. "Doors/ vehicle access" if the door has been unlocked using the 4. "Switch off after door opening" integrated key in the door lock. Rest state, see page 51. Opening the tailgate with the alarm system switched on Alarm system The tailgate can be opened even with the alarm system switched on. General On closing the tailgate, it is locked again and The alarm system responds to the following monitored, as long as the doors are locked. The changes when the vehicle is locked: hazard warning lights flash once. ▷ A door, the front flap or the tailgate is opened. Indicator lamp on the rear-view ▷ Movements inside the vehicle. mirror ▷ A change in the vehicle's incline, for instance if an attempt is made to jack it up and steal the wheels or to raise it prior to towing away. ▷ An interruption in the power supply from the battery. ▷ Improper use of the socket for on-board diag‐ nosis OBD. ▷ The vehicle is locked while a device is con‐ nected to the socket for on-board diagnosis OBD. ▷ Indicator lamp flashes every 2 seconds:
115 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 116
CONTROLS Opening and closing
The alarm system is switched on. ▷ When there are pets in the vehicle. ▷ Indicator lamp flashes for approximately ▷ When the vehicle is locked after starting to 10 seconds before it flashes every 2 sec‐ refuel. onds: The tilt alarm sensor and interior movement de‐ The interior movement detector and tilt alarm tector can be switched off for such situations. sensor are not active because the doors, bonnet or tailgate are not closed correctly. Switching off the tilt alarm sensor Correctly closed access points are secured. and interior movement detector Once the remaining open access points have Within 10 seconds of locking the vehicle, been closed, the interior movement detector press the button on the vehicle key. and tilt alarm sensor are switched on. The indicator lamp illuminates for approximately ▷ The indicator lamp extinguishes after the ve‐ 2 seconds and then flashes again. hicle has been unlocked: The tilt alarm sensor and the interior movement This means that the vehicle is not being tam‐ detector are switched off until the next time the pered with. vehicle is locked. ▷ The indicator lamp flashes after unlocking un‐ til drive-ready state is switched on, but for no longer than approximately 5 minutes: Stopping the alarm The alarm has been triggered. ▷ Unlock the vehicle with the vehicle key. ▷ Unlock the vehicle with the integrated key and switch on drive-ready state using the Tilt alarm sensor emergency detection feature of the vehicle The incline of the vehicle is monitored. key. The alarm system responds, for example when Malfunction, see page 97. there is an attempt to steal a wheel or tow the ▷ With Comfort Access: fully grip the handle of vehicle away. the driver's or front passenger door while car‐ rying the vehicle key. Interior movement detector To ensure perfect functioning, the windows and glass sunroof must be closed. Power window switches
Avoiding false alarms General The windows can be opened and closed from General outside with the vehicle key. The tilt alarm sensor and the interior movement With Comfort Access: The windows can be detector may trigger an alarm without any unau‐ closed from outside using Comfort Access. thorised activity taking place. If a window is often opened to the same point, Situations where false warnings may occur: this task can be carried out by the BMW Intelli‐ ▷ In washing bays or car washes. gent Personal Assistant. For example, if you of‐ ▷ In two-level garages. ten use the same car park. ▷ When transporting the vehicle via motorail, For further information: car ferry or trailer. ▷ Vehicle key, see page 93.
116 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 117
Opening and closing CONTROLS
▷ BMW Intelligent Personal Assistant, see ▷ Push the switch past the resistance page 67. point. The window is opened automatically. Press‐ Safety note ing the switch again stops the movement.
WARNING Closing Parts of the body can become trapped when ▷ Pull the switch as far as the resist‐ the windows are operated. There is a risk of in‐ ance point. jury or material damage. When opening and The window closes for as long as the switch closing, make sure that the area of movement is held. of the windows is kept clear. ▷ Pull the switch past the resistance point. Overview The window closes automatically if the door is closed. Pulling the switch again stops the movement.
Anti-trap mechanism
Principle The anti-trap mechanism prevents objects or parts of the body from becoming trapped be‐ tween the door frame and window while a win‐ dow is being closed. Power window switches General Safety switch If resistance or a blockage is detected while a window is being closed, the closing operation is interrupted. Operating requirements The windows can be operated under the Safety note following conditions. ▷ Standby state is switched on. WARNING ▷ Drive-ready state is switched on. Accessories on the windows, for example aer‐ ▷ For a short while after rest state has been es‐ ials, can impair the anti-trap mechanism. There tablished. is a risk of injury. Do not attach any accessories within the area of movement of the windows. The vehicle key must be in the vehicle interior.
Opening ▷ Push the switch as far as the resist‐ ance point. The window opens for as long as the switch is held.
117 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 118
CONTROLS Opening and closing
Closing without the anti-trap Roller sunblinds, rear side mechanism windows If an external hazard or ice prevents you from closing the windows normally, proceed as fol‐ lows: Safety note
1. Pull the switch past the resistance WARNING point and hold it in this position. When the roller sunblinds are closed and the The window is closed but with limited anti- windows opened, the roller sunblinds can be trap function. If the closing force exceeds a heavily stressed during the journey due to the certain level, the closing operation is interrup‐ air stream. The roller sunblinds can become ted. damaged and endanger vehicle occupants. There is a risk of injury. Do not open the win‐ 2. Pull the switch past the resistance dows during the journey when the roller sun‐ point again within approximately 4 seconds blinds are closed. and hold it in this position. The window is closed with no anti-trap func‐ Pull the roller sunblind out with the loop and tion. hang into the holder.
Safety switch Electric glass sunroof Principle The safety switch can be used to prevent chil‐ General dren from opening and closing the rear windows The glass sunroof and the sun guard are oper‐ by means of the switches in the rear, for exam‐ ated using the same switch. ple. The glass sunroof can be opened and closed In the event of an accident of sufficient severity, from outside with the vehicle key. the safety function is automatically switched off. With Comfort Access: The glass sunroof can be closed from outside using Comfort Access. Switching on/off Press the button. Safety note The LED is illuminated when the safety function is switched on. WARNING Parts of the body may become trapped when the glass sunroof is operated. There is a risk of injury. When opening and closing, make sure that the area of movement of the glass sunroof is kept clear.
118 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 119
Opening and closing CONTROLS
Overview Opening/closing the glass sunroof and sun guard separately ▷ Slide the switch backwards as far as the resistance point and hold. The sun guard continues to open for as long as the switch is pressed. The glass sunroof is opened if the sun guard is Open/close the glass sunroof/sun already fully open. guard. ▷ Slide the switch forwards as far as the resist‐ ance point and hold. The glass sunroof closes for as long as the switch is held. If the glass sunroof is already Operating requirements closed or is in the raised position, the sun guard is closed. The glass sunroof and the sun guard can be op‐ ▷ Slide the switch backwards beyond the re‐ erated under the following conditions. sistance point. ▷ Standby state is switched on. The sun guard is opened automatically. The ▷ Drive-ready state is switched on. glass sunroof is opened automatically if the ▷ For a short while after rest state has been es‐ sun guard is already fully open. tablished. Pressing the switch again stops the move‐ The vehicle key must be in the vehicle interior. ment. ▷ Slide the switch forwards beyond the resist‐ Raising/closing the glass sunroof ance point. Push the switch briefly up. The glass sunroof is closed automatically. If the glass sunroof is already closed or is in the ▷ The closed glass sunroof is raised position, the sun guard is closed auto‐ raised and the sun guard matically. opens slightly. Pressing the switch again stops the move‐ ▷ The opened glass sunroof ment. closes to the raised position. The sun guard does not move. Opening/closing the glass ▷ The raised glass sunroof is closed. sunroof and sun guard together ▷ Press the switch backwards twice in quick succession be‐ yond the resistance point. The glass sunroof and the sun guard open together.
119 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 120
CONTROLS Opening and closing
Pressing the switch again ▷ There is a system error, for example due to a stops the movement. temporary interruption in the electrical power ▷ Slide the switch forwards twice in quick suc‐ supply. In this case, initialising the glass sun‐ cession beyond the resistance point. roof can help. The glass sunroof and the sun guard close An error message is shown on the Control Dis‐ together. play. No further closing is attempted. Pressing the switch again stops the move‐ If rain detection is not possible due to the sys‐ ment. tem, the open glass sunroof is immediately moved to the raised position. An error message is shown on the Control Display. Comfort position In some models, the wind noises in the car's in‐ Anti-trap mechanism terior are lowest when the glass sunroof is not fully open. In these models, the automatic func‐ Principle tion initially only opens the glass sunroof as far as The anti-trap mechanism prevents objects or this comfort position. parts of the body from becoming trapped be‐ Pressing the switch again opens the glass sun‐ tween the roof frame and glass sunroof while the roof fully. glass sunroof is being closed.
For closing when it is raining General If resistance or a blockage is detected while the Principle glass sunroof is being closed, the closing opera‐ An open glass sunroof is automatically moved to tion is interrupted once the roof reaches the half- the raised position when it starts to rain or six open position or it is stopped when closing from hours after the vehicle has been locked. the raised position.
Operating requirements Closing without the anti-trap ▷ It must be possible for rain to reach the touch mechanism from an open position control box in the area of the rear-view mirror. If an external hazard or ice prevents you from The touch control box may be obscured by a closing the windows normally, proceed as fol‐ car port or bridge, for example. lows: ▷ Vehicle must be in rest state. ▷ The function must be activated in the set‐ tings. For settings, see page 113.
Malfunctions 1. Close all doors. 2. Slide the switch forwards beyond the resist‐ The open glass sunroof is not moved to the ance point and hold it in this position. raised position under the following circumstan‐ ces: The glass sunroof is closed with limited anti- trap function. If the closing force exceeds a ▷ The glass sunroof is blocked. certain level, the closing operation is interrup‐ ▷ The anti-trap mechanism is not secured. ted.
120 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 121
Opening and closing CONTROLS
3. Press the switch forwards once again beyond Initialising the system the resistance point and hold until the glass Press the switch up and hold until sunroof closes with no anti-trap function. En‐ initialisation is complete: sure that the closing area is clear.
Closing without the anti-trap mechanism from a raised position Initialisation begins within 15 seconds. If an external hazard or ice prevents you from ▷ If the glass sunroof is closed, it opens, then closing the windows normally, proceed as fol‐ closes again. lows: ▷ If the glass sunroof is open, it first closes, then opens and closes again. Initialisation is complete once the glass sunroof and sun guard have opened then closed again.
1. Close all doors. 2. Slide the switch forwards beyond the resist‐ ance point and hold it in this position.
Initialising after a power failure
General If a power failure occurs while the glass sunroof is opening or closing, it may only have limited functionality afterwards. In this case, initialising the system can help. The system can be initialised under the following conditions: ▷ The vehicle is parked on level ground. ▷ The vehicle does not move until initialisation is complete. ▷ In drive-ready state. ▷ The outside temperature is above 5 ℃/41 ℉. During initialisation, the glass sunroof closes with no anti-trap mechanism. Ensure that the closing area is clear.
121 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 122
CONTROLS Seats, mirrors and steering wheel
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel
Vehicle equipment WARNING This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ If the backrest is angled back too far, the pro‐ cific and optional equipment available for the tective function of the seat belt will no longer model series. It may therefore describe equip‐ be guaranteed. There is a risk of sliding under ment and functions which are not installed in the seat belt in the event of an accident. There your vehicle, for example on account of the spe‐ is a risk of injury or even death. Adjust the seat cial equipment selected or the country specifica‐ before starting the journey. Adjust the backrest tion. This also applies to safety-relevant func‐ to the most upright position possible, and do tions and systems. Please comply with the not change it during the journey. relevant laws and regulations when using the corresponding functions and systems. WARNING Safe seating position There is a risk of entrapment when the seats are moved. There is a risk of injury or material damage. Before making any adjustment, make A seating position that suitably meets the needs sure that the area of movement of the seat is of the occupants is essential for relaxed driving clear. with minimum fatigue. In an accident, the correct seating position plays an important role. Comply with the notes in the Manually adjustable seats following chapters. For further information: Overview ▷ Seats, see page 122. ▷ Seat belts, see page 125. ▷ Head restraints, see page 128. ▷ Airbags, see page 208.
Seats
Safety notes 1 Forward/back 2 Thigh support WARNING 3 Seat angle Adjusting the seat during a journey could cause 4 Backrest width the seat to move unexpectedly. You could lose 5 Lumbar support control of the vehicle. There is a risk of acci‐ dent. Only adjust the seat on the driver's side 6 Height when at a standstill. 7 Backrest angle
122 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 123
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel CONTROLS
Forward/back Backrest angle
Pull the lever and slide the seat in the desired di‐ Pull the lever and apply your weight to or lift your rection. weight off the backrest as required. After releasing the lever, move the seat gently forward or back to make sure it engages prop‐ Electrically adjustable seats erly. General Seat angle The driver's seat setting is saved for the current profile. If a driver profile is selected, the saved position is retrieved automatically. The current seat position can be saved using the memory function.
Overview
Pull the lever up or press the lever down repeat‐ edly until the seat reaches the desired angle.
Height
1 Backrest width 2 Forward/back, height, seat angle 3 Backrest tilt, head restraint 4 Lumbar support
Pull the lever up or press the lever down repeat‐ edly until the seat reaches the desired height.
123 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 124
CONTROLS Seats, mirrors and steering wheel
Forward/back Backrest angle
Press the switch forwards or backwards. Tilt the switch forwards or backwards.
Height Thigh support
Sport seat
Press the switch up or down.
Seat angle Pull the lever on the front of the seat and adjust the thigh support forwards or backwards.
Lumbar support
Principle The curvature of the backrest can be changed to provide support for the lumbar region, or lordo‐ sis. The upper edge of the pelvis and the spinal column are supported to encourage an upright Tilt the switch up or down. posture.
Adjusting ▷ Press the button at the front/ rear: The curvature is increased/ decreased.
124 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 125
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel CONTROLS
▷ Press the button at the top/bottom: The belt anchorage is suitable for adults of any The curvature is shifted upwards/downwards. stature if the seat is adjusted correctly. The two outer belt buckles on the rear seats are intended for those sitting on the left and right. Function restriction The inner belt buckle on the rear seats is inten‐ It may not be possible to adjust the lumbar sup‐ ded for the person sitting in the middle. port at very high and very low temperatures. Safety notes Backrest width
Principle WARNING To adjust the backrest width can improve lateral If a seat belt is used by more than one person support when taking corners. at the same time, the protective function of the seat belt is no longer guaranteed. There is a General risk of injury or even death. Only one person should use each seat belt at any one time. Do The backrest width is changed by adjusting the not allow infants and children to travel on the side sections of the backrest. lap of another occupant. Instead, secure the in‐ fant or child in a child restraint system intended Adjusting for this purpose. ▷ Press the button at the front: Backrest width is reduced. ▷ Press the button at the rear: WARNING Backrest width is increased. The protective function of the seat belts may be limited or may even fail completely if the seat belts are worn incorrectly. If a seat belt is Function restriction not worn correctly, additional injuries can be It may not be possible to adjust the backrest caused, for example in the event of an accident, width at very high and very low temperatures. braking or evasive action. There is a risk of in‐ jury or even death. Make sure that all vehicle occupants have fastened their seat belts cor‐ Seat belts rectly.
General WARNING For the safety of the vehicle occupants, the vehi‐ cle is equipped with five seat belts. However, Seat belts are designed to bear upon the bony they can only provide effective protection when structure of the body and should be worn low worn correctly. across the front of the pelvis, or the pelvis, chest and shoulders, as applicable. Wearing the Before each journey, always make sure that all lap section of the belt across the abdominal occupants have fastened their seat belts. The area must be avoided. airbags supplement the seat belts as an addi‐ tional safety device. The airbags are not a substi‐ tute for the seat belts.
125 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 126
CONTROLS Seats, mirrors and steering wheel
Seat belts should be adjusted as firmly as pos‐ ▷ If the seat belts or belt buckles are dam‐ sible, consistent with comfort, to provide the aged, dirty or have been modified in an‐ protection for which they have been designed. other way. A slack seat belt will greatly reduce the protec‐ ▷ If the belt tensioners or belt retractors tion afforded to the wearer. have been modified. Care should be taken to avoid contamination of Seat belts can be damaged in an accident with‐ the webbing by polishes, oils and chemicals out the damage necessarily being apparent. and particularly battery acid. Cleaning may There is a risk of injury or even death. Do not safely be carried out using a mild soap and wa‐ modify seat belts, belt buckles, belt tensioners, ter solution. The seat belt should be replaced if belt retractors and belt anchor points and en‐ the seat belt strap becomes frayed, contamina‐ sure that they are kept clean. After an accident, ted or damaged. Seat belts should not be worn have the seat belts inspected at a Service Part‐ with straps twisted. Each seat belt assembly ner of the manufacturer or another qualified must only be used by one occupant; it is forbid‐ Service Partner or a specialist workshop. den to put a belt around a child being carried on the occupant's lap. It is essential to replace the entire assembly af‐ Correct seat belt use ter it has been worn in a severe impact even if ▷ Place the seat belt tightly over the pelvis and damage to the assembly is not obvious. shoulder, close to the body and without twist‐ ing. ▷ Make sure that the seat belt is positioned low WARNING at the hips in the area of the pelvis. The seat No modifications or additions should be made belt must not press on the abdomen. by the user that will either prevent the seat belt ▷ The seat belt must not be allowed to rub adjusting devices from operating to remove against sharp edges, be routed over solid or slack, or prevent the seat belt assembly from breakable objects or be trapped. being adjusted to remove slack. ▷ Avoid wearing bulky clothing. ▷ Keep the seat belt taut by occasionally pulling upwards on the upper section. WARNING If the rear backrest is not locked, the protective Adjustment for automatic effect of the middle seat belt is not ensured. retracting seat belts There is a risk of injury or even death. Lock the wider rear seat backrest when using the middle ▷ Draw the buckle tongue attached to the seat seat belt. belt across the body and press it into the buckle catch until a ‘click’ is heard. ▷ Adjustment of the belt length is very impor‐ WARNING tant. To adjust the lap belt and check whether the buckle has locked correctly, pull The protective function of the seat belts may upwards on the shoulder strap until the lap be limited or may even fail completely in the belt fits tightly. following situations: ▷ The length of the diagonal shoulder strap ad‐ justs itself automatically to allow freedom of movement.
126 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 127
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel CONTROLS
▷ To release the seat belt, press the button on Display in the instrument cluster the buckle catch unit. A Check Control message is shown. Check whether the seat belt has been Fastening the seat belt fastened correctly. 1. When fastening the seat belt, guide it slowly over the shoulder and pelvis. Seat belt reminder for rear seats 2. Insert the seat belt tongue in the belt buckle. The seat belt buckle must be heard to en‐ General gage. The seat belt reminder is automatically activated every time the engine starts. The seat belt reminder will also be activated if a rear seat belt is unfastened during the journey.
Display in the instrument cluster The indicator lamp in the instrument cluster is il‐ luminated after the engine starts. The displays may vary depending on the equip‐ If fastened, the driver's and front passenger's ment and country specifications. seat belts are automatically tensioned when driv‐ Symbol Description ing off. Green: seat belt fastened on the Unfastening the seat belt corresponding rear seat. 1. Hold the seat belt firmly. 2. Press the red button on the belt buckle. 3. Guide the seat belt back up to the reel mech‐ anism. Red: seat belt not fastened on the corresponding rear seat. Seat belt reminder for driver and front passenger seat
General The seat belt reminder is activated when the Safety function seat belt on the driver's side is not fastened. In critical driving situations, for example full brak‐ The seat belt warning will also be activated if a ing, the front seat belts are tensioned automati‐ seat belt is unfastened during the journey. cally. On some national-market versions, the seat belt If the situation passes without an accident, the reminder is also active if the front passenger seat belt tension is slackened again. belt is not fastened and heavy objects are on the If the belt tension does not loosen automatically, front passenger seat. stop the vehicle and unfasten the seat belt by pressing the red button in the belt buckle. Fasten
127 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 128
CONTROLS Seats, mirrors and steering wheel
the seat belt again before continuing your jour‐ ▷ Do not use any accessories, for example ney. cushions, during the journey.
Front head restraints Adjusting the height
Safety notes
WARNING If the head restraints are removed or incorrectly adjusted, they cannot provide protection as in‐ tended and head and neck injuries may result. There is a risk of injury. ▷ Before a journey, re-install any removed ▷ Down: press the button, arrow 1, and slide head restraints on all occupied seats. the head restraint downwards. ▷ Adjust the head restraint so that its centre ▷ Up: push the head restraint upwards. supports the back of the head at eye level After adjusting the height, make sure that the where possible. head restraint engages correctly. ▷ Adjust the distance so that the head re‐ straint is as close as possible to the back of the head. If necessary, adjust the dis‐ Adjusting the height: M sport tance by adjusting the backrest angle. seat
WARNING Parts of the body can become trapped when the head restraints are moved. There is a risk of injury. When moving the head restraint, make sure that the area of movement is kept clear.
WARNING Press the switch up or down. Objects on the head restraint impair the protec‐ tive function of the head restraint in the head and neck area. There is a risk of injury. ▷ Do not fit any covers on the seats or head restraints. ▷ Do not hang objects such as coat hangers directly on the head restraint. ▷ Only use accessories that have been clas‐ sified as safe for attaching to the head re‐ straint.
128 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 129
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel CONTROLS
Adjusting the distance Removing: M sport seat The head restraints cannot be removed.
Installing Proceed in the reverse order to install the head restraint.
Rear head restraints
▷ Back: press the button and slide the head re‐ Safety notes straint towards the rear. ▷ Forward: pull the head restraint forwards. WARNING After adjusting the distance, make sure that the If the head restraints are removed or incorrectly head restraint engages correctly. adjusted, they cannot provide protection as in‐ tended and head and neck injuries may result. Adjusting the distance: M sport There is a risk of injury. seat ▷ Before a journey, re-install any removed The distance from the back of the head is adjus‐ head restraints on all occupied seats. ted by the seat backrest angle. ▷ Adjust the head restraint so that its centre Adjust the distance so that the head restraint is supports the back of the head at eye level as close as possible to the back of the head. where possible. ▷ Adjust the distance so that the head re‐ Removing straint is as close as possible to the back of the head. If necessary, adjust the dis‐ Only remove the head restraint if no-one is in‐ tance by adjusting the backrest angle. tending to sit in the seat in question.
WARNING Parts of the body can become trapped when the head restraints are moved. There is a risk of injury. When moving the head restraint, make sure that the area of movement is kept clear.
WARNING 1. Push the head restraint up until resistance is felt. Objects on the head restraint impair the protec‐ tive function of the head restraint in the head 2. Press the button, arrow 1, and pull the head and neck area. There is a risk of injury. restraint fully out. ▷ Do not fit any covers on the seats or head restraints.
129 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 130
CONTROLS Seats, mirrors and steering wheel
▷ Do not hang objects such as coat hangers After adjusting the height, make sure that the directly on the head restraint. head restraint engages correctly. ▷ Only use accessories that have been clas‐ sified as safe for attaching to the head re‐ Removing the outer head straint. restraint ▷ Do not use any accessories, for example Only remove the head restraint if no-one is in‐ cushions, during the journey. tending to sit in the seat in question. 1. Fold down the corresponding rear seat back‐ Folding down the head restraints rest. Head restraints can be folded back to improve Expand the luggage compartment, see rear visibility. Only fold back the head restraint if page 331. no one is sitting on the seat in question. 2. Push the head restraint up until resistance is felt. 3. Insert the integrated key. Integrated key, see page 102.
▷ Backward: press the button, arrow 1, and fold back the head restraint. ▷ Forwards: fold the head restraint forwards as far as it will go. Ensure that the head restraint engages correctly. 4. Press and hold the integrated key and the button simultaneously, arrows 1, and pull the head restraint fully out. Adjusting the height
The outer head restraints can be adjusted in height. ▷ Down: press the button, arrow 1, and slide the head restraint downwards. ▷ Up: push the head restraint upwards.
130 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 131
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel CONTROLS
Removing the middle head accident. Look over your shoulder to estimate restraint the distance from following traffic. Only remove the head restraint if no one is sitting on the middle seat. Overview 1. Push the head restraint up until resistance is felt. 2. Press the buttons, arrows 1, and pull the head restraint fully out.
1 To adjust 2 To select a mirror, automatic parking function 3 To fold in and out
Installing Electrical adjustment To install, insert the head restraint into the mount Press the button. and push down until resistance is felt. The selected mirror moves in response to After installation, make sure that the head re‐ the button movement. straint engages correctly. Selecting a mirror Exterior mirror To switch to the other mirror: Push the switch. General The mirror setting is saved for the current driver Malfunction profile. If a driver profile is selected, the saved In the event of an electrical fault, press the edges position is retrieved automatically. of the mirror glass to adjust the mirror. The current exterior mirror position can be saved with the memory function. Folding in and out Safety note NOTE Because of its width, the vehicle could sustain WARNING damage in car washes. There is a risk of mate‐ Objects reflected in the mirror are closer than rial damage. Before washing, fold the mirrors in they appear. The distance to road users behind manually or with the button. the vehicle could be incorrectly estimated, for example when changing lane. There is a risk of
131 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 132
CONTROLS Seats, mirrors and steering wheel
Press the button. Rear-view mirror, manual-
The mirrors can be folded in at vehicle speeds dim up to approx. 20 km/h, 15 mph. Folding the mirrors in and out is useful in the following situations: ▷ In car washes. ▷ In narrow streets. Mirrors which are folded in automatically fold out when the vehicle reaches a speed of approxi‐ mately 40 km/h, 25 mph.
Automatic heating To reduce glare tilt the lever on the rear-view mirror forward. If required, both exterior mirrors are automatically heated when drive-ready state is switched on.
Automatic dimming Rear-view mirror, The exterior mirror on the driver's side is auto‐ automatic dim matically dimmed. Photocells in the rear-view mirror are used to control this function. General Automatic parking function, The rear-view mirror is dimmed automatically. exterior mirror The function is controlled by photocells: ▷ In the mirror glass. Principle ▷ On the back of the mirror. When reverse gear is engaged, the passenger- side mirror glass is tilted downwards. This pro‐ Overview vides a better view of the kerb or other obstacles near the ground, for example when parking.
Activating
1. Push the switch to the driver's mirror position. 2. Engage selector lever position R. The automatic parking function is deactivated when the trailer socket is in use. Operating requirements Deactivating ▷ Keep the photocells clean. Push the switch to the passenger-side mirror po‐ ▷ Do not obstruct the zone between the rear- sition. view mirror and the windscreen.
132 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 133
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel CONTROLS
Steering wheel Switching on/off Press the button. Safety note A Check Control message is shown.
If a journey is resumed within about 15 minutes WARNING after a temporary stop, steering wheel heating is Adjusting the steering wheel while driving may automatically switched on, provided that the cause the steering wheel to move unexpect‐ function was switched on at the end of the last edly. You could lose control of the vehicle. journey. There is a risk of accident. Only adjust the steering wheel when the vehicle is at a stand‐ still. Memory function
Principle Manual steering wheel The memory function enables the following set‐ adjustment tings to be stored and retrieved when required: ▷ Seat position. ▷ Exterior mirror position. ▷ Height of the Head-Up Display.
General For each driver profile, two memory slots can be assigned with different settings. The following settings are not saved: 1. Fold the lever downwards. ▷ Backrest width. 2. Move the steering wheel to the preferred ▷ Lumbar support. height and angle to suit your seated position. 3. Swing the lever back up. Safety notes Steering wheel heating WARNING Overview Using the memory function while driving may cause the seat or steering wheel to move unex‐ pectedly. You could lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of accident. Only call up the memory function when the vehicle is at stand‐ still.
Button for steering wheel heating
133 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 134
CONTROLS Seats, mirrors and steering wheel
Seat heating WARNING There is a risk of entrapment when the seats Overview are moved. There is a risk of injury or material damage. Before making any adjustment, make sure that the area of movement of the seat is Front clear.
Overview
Seat heating
Rear The memory buttons are on the driver's door.
Saving 1. Set the desired position.
2. Press the button. The lettering in the button is illuminated. 3. Press the desired button 1 or 2 while the let‐ tering is illuminated. A signal sounds. Seat heating Recalling Press the desired button 1 or 2. Switching on The saved position is called up. Press the button once for each temper‐ The operation is halted when you press a seat ature level. adjustment switch or press one of the memory The highest level is selected if the three LEDs buttons again. are illuminated. Once underway, adjustment of the seat position on the driver's side is disabled after a short while. If a journey is resumed within about 15 minutes after a temporary stop, seat heating is automati‐ cally switched on at the last temperature setting. If a driving mode for optimising consumption is activated, the heater output is reduced if neces‐ sary.
134 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 135
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel CONTROLS
For further information: Activating/deactivating Driving modes for optimising consumption, see 1. "CAR" page 350. 2. "Settings" Switching off 3. "Climate comfort" 4. If necessary, "Regulation climate control" Press and hold the button until the LEDs are extinguished. 5. Select the desired function. 6. Activate the required rule. 7. If applicable, adjust the level. Regulation climate control
Principle Depending on the equipment, some heating and cooling functions can be activated automatically according to the outside temperature.
General The outside temperature from which the func‐ tions are to be activated automatically can be set using iDrive. Activation is performed if the outside tempera‐ ture exceeds or falls below the set temperature in the first few minutes after drive-ready state has been switched on. A new alignment is car‐ ried out after the settings have been changed. Depending on the equipment version, the following functions can be activated automati‐ cally: ▷ Seat heating. ▷ Steering wheel heating. If the journey is continued within about 15 mi‐ nutes after a temporary stop, the functions are automatically activated with the most recent set‐ tings.
Operating requirements ▷ The seat belt of the driver's seat is fastened. ▷ The drive-ready state is switched on.
135 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 136
CONTROLS Carrying children safely
Carrying children safely
Vehicle equipment WARNING This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ Hot vehicles can have fatal consequences, in cific and optional equipment available for the particular for children or pets. There is a risk of model series. It may therefore describe equip‐ injury or even death. Do not leave anyone unsu‐ ment and functions which are not installed in pervised in the vehicle, especially children or your vehicle, for example on account of the spe‐ pets. cial equipment selected or the country specifica‐ tion. This also applies to safety-relevant func‐ tions and systems. Please comply with the WARNING relevant laws and regulations when using the Child restraint systems and their parts can get corresponding functions and systems. very hot when exposed to direct sunlight. Con‐ tact with hot parts can cause burns. There is a Important considerations risk of injury. Do not expose the child restraint system to direct sunlight; cover the child re‐ straint system if necessary. It may be necessary Safety notes to allow the child restraint system to cool down before strapping a child in. Do not leave chil‐ dren unsupervised in the vehicle. WARNING Unsupervised children or pets in the vehicle can set the vehicle in motion and endanger Children on the rear seats themselves or other road users, for example by the following actions: General ▷ Pressing the start/stop button. Accident research has shown that the safest ▷ Releasing the parking brake. place for children is on the rear seat. ▷ Opening and closing doors or windows. Wherever possible, children younger than ▷ Engaging selector lever position N. 12 years old or shorter than 150 cm, 5 ft should only be transported in the rear using child re‐ ▷ Operating vehicle equipment. straint systems appropriate for their age, weight There is a risk of accident or injury. Do not and stature. Children aged 12 years and older leave children or pets unsupervised in the vehi‐ must be secured with a seat belt as soon as use cle. When leaving the vehicle, take the vehicle of a child restraint system is no longer appropri‐ key with you and lock the vehicle. ate due to their age, weight or stature.
136 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 137
Carrying children safely CONTROLS
Safety note Fitting child restraints
WARNING General Children shorter than 150 cm, 5 ft cannot wear Please comply with the operating and safety in‐ the seat belt correctly without using additional structions provided by the child restraint system child restraint systems. The protective function manufacturer when selecting, attaching and us‐ of the seat belts may be limited or may even fail ing child restraint systems. completely if the seat belts are worn incorrectly. If a seat belt is not worn correctly, additional in‐ Safety notes juries can be caused, for example in the event of an accident, braking or evasive action. There is a risk of injury or even death. Children under WARNING 150 cm, 5 ft tall must be secured in suitable If child restraint systems and their attachment child restraint systems. systems have been damaged or subjected to stresses in an accident, their protective func‐ tion may be limited or may fail completely. A Not for Australia/New Zealand: child might not be adequately restrained, for ex‐ Children on the front passenger ample in the event of an accident, braking or seat evasive action. There is a risk of injury or even death. General Child restraint systems that are damaged or When using a child restraint system on the front have been subjected to stresses in an accident passenger seat, make sure that the front and must not be used further. side airbags on the passenger side are deactiva‐ If attachment systems have been damaged or ted. Front passenger airbags can only be deacti‐ subjected to stresses in an accident, have them vated with the key switch for front passenger air‐ checked and replaced by a Service Partner of bags. If the front passenger airbags cannot be the manufacturer, another qualified Service deactivated, do not carry children on the front Partner or a specialist workshop. passenger seat, even in suitable child restraint systems. For further information: WARNING Key switch for front passenger airbags, see If the seat is not adjusted properly or the child page 210. seat has been installed incorrectly, the child re‐ straint system may have limited stability or may Safety note not be stable at all. There is a risk of injury or even death. Make sure that the child restraint system rests firmly against the backrest. Wher‐ WARNING ever possible, adapt the backrest angle of all Active front passenger airbags can injure a child the relevant seat backrests and adjust the seats in a child restraint system if they are deployed. correctly. Make sure that the seats and their There is a risk of injury. Make sure that the front backrests are correctly engaged or locked. If passenger airbags are deactivated and the possible, adjust the height of the head re‐ PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp is il‐ straints, or remove them. luminated.
137 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 138
CONTROLS Carrying children safely
For Australia/New Zealand: Rearward-facing child restraint installation of child restraints systems Please note the following warning because your vehicle has been equipped with a front airbag for DANGER the front passenger's seat that cannot be deacti‐ If triggered, active front passenger airbags can vated: fatally injure a child in a rearward facing child re‐ It is recommended not to use any kind of straint system. There is a risk of injury or even child restraint system on the front pas‐ death. Make sure that the front passenger air‐ senger's seat. bags are deactivated and the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp is illuminated.
Extreme hazard Do not use a rearward facing child restraint on a seat protected by an airbag in front of it.
Not for Australia/New Zealand: On the front passenger seat
Deactivating airbags Follow the information on the front passenger sun visor. WARNING Never use a rearward-facing child restraint on a Active front passenger airbags can injure a child seat protected by an active airbag in front of it, as in a child restraint system if they are deployed. death or serious injury to the child can occur. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that the front passenger airbags are deactivated and the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp is il‐ Seat position and height luminated. After installing a universal child restraint system, move the front passenger seat as far back as it Before fitting a child restraint on the front pas‐ will go and adjust it to the highest position. This senger seat, make sure that the front and side seat position and height achieves the best possi‐ airbags on the passenger side are disabled. If the ble routing of the belt and protection in the event airbag cannot be deactivated, do not fit child re‐ of an accident. straint systems. If the upper attachment point of the seat belt is For further information: located ahead of the child seat's belt guide, care‐ Key switch for front passenger airbags, see fully move the front passenger seat forwards until page 210. the best possible belt guidance is achieved.
Backrest width With adjustable backrest width: before fitting a child restraint system on the front passenger seat, fully open the backrest width. Do not
138 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 139
Carrying children safely CONTROLS
change the backrest width from this point on and Position do not call up a memory position. Symbol Meaning ISOFIX child safety seat The corresponding symbol shows the fixtures for the lower fasteners ISOFIX anchors.
General Please comply with the operating and safety in‐ structions provided by the child restraint system manufacturer when selecting, attaching and us‐ ing ISOFIX child restraint systems.
Suitable ISOFIX child restraint systems Only certain ISOFIX child restraints may be used in the seats intended for this purpose. The corre‐ sponding size class and size category are deno‐ The fixtures for the lower ISOFIX anchors are lo‐ ted by a letter or ISO reference on a plate on the cated behind the marked covers. child seat. For further information: Before fitting ISOFIX child Suitable seats for child restraint systems, see restraints page 141. Pull the seat belt away from the area of the child Fixtures for lower seat mountings. ISOFIX anchors Fitting ISOFIX child restraint Safety note systems 1. Install the child restraint system, see the manufacturer's instructions. WARNING 2. Make sure that both ISOFIX anchors are en‐ If the ISOFIX child restraint systems are not en‐ gaged correctly. gaged correctly, the protective effect of the ISOFIX child restraint systems will be limited. There is a risk of injury or even death. Make i-Size child restraint systems sure the lower anchor point has engaged cor‐ rectly and the ISOFIX child restraint system General rests firmly against the backrest. i-Size is a regulation for child restraint systems, which is used for the approval of child restraint systems.
139 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 140
CONTROLS Carrying children safely
Symbol Meaning NOTE If this symbol is seen in the vehi‐ The mounting points for the upper retaining cle, the vehicle has also been straps of child restraint systems are only inten‐ approved in accordance with i- ded for these retaining straps. The mounting Size. The symbol shows the points can be damaged if other objects are at‐ mounts for the system's lower tached. There is a risk of material damage. Only anchors. The lower anchors attach child restraint systems to the upper meet the European i-Size re‐ mounting points. quirements.
The corresponding symbol shows the mounting point for Mounting points the upper retaining strap. Symbol Meaning
The corresponding symbol shows the mounting point for Fixtures for the upper the upper retaining strap. retaining strap
Safety notes
WARNING If the upper retaining strap is used incorrectly on the child restraint system, the protective ef‐ fect will be reduced. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that the upper retaining strap is not twisted and is not routed to the upper mount‐ ing point over sharp edges. Depending on the equipment installed, there are two or three mounting points for the upper re‐ taining strap of ISOFIX child restraint systems. WARNING If the rear backrest is not locked, the protective effect of the child restraint system is limited or non-existing. The rear backrest can fold for‐ ward in certain situations, for example braking manoeuvre or accident. There is a risk of injury or even death. Make sure that the rear backr‐ ests are locked.
140 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 141
Carrying children safely CONTROLS
Routing the retaining strap Attaching the upper retaining strap to the mounting point 1. Raise head restraint if necessary. 2. Guide the upper retaining strap between or along both sides of the head restraint mounts to the mounting point. 3. Guide the retaining strap between the seat backrest and the luggage compartment cover. 4. Attach the hook of the retaining strap to the 1 Direction of travel mounting point. 2 Head restraint 5. Tighten the retaining strap by pulling it firmly 3 Hook for the upper retaining strap down. 4 Mounting point 6. Push the head restraint down if necessary 5 Seat backrest and engage it in place. 6 Upper retaining strap
Suitable seats for child restraint systems
General The legal provisions determining which child seat For detailed information about using child re‐ is permitted for which age and body size may straint systems: vary from country to country. Please comply with Seats for child restraint systems, see page 433. the relevant national legal provisions. Additional information is available from a Service Partner of the manufacturer or another qualified Service Partner or a specialist workshop.
Seats and child restraint systems The following section provides information on which child restraint system is suitable for which seat in the vehicle. Left-hand drive vehicles, seats:
141 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 142
CONTROLS Carrying children safely
Seat Airbag, Fastening front pas‐ senger
1
3 a) ON
OFF
4, 6 - b)
e)
5 - c, d)
a) Adapt the fore/aft position of the front passenger seat and, if necessary, move it to the highest position to achieve the best possible belt fit. b) When using child seats on the rear seats, adjust the front/back position of the front seat if neces‐ sary, and also adjust the head restraint of the rear seat or remove it. c) Only occupy the outer seats if the belt buckles are easily accessible. d) The seat is not suitable for child seats with a support stand. e) Depending on the equipment or national-market version.
Right-hand drive vehicles, seats:
142 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 143
Carrying children safely CONTROLS
Seat Airbag, Fastening front pas‐ senger
1 a) ON
OFF
3
4, 6 - b)
e)
5 - c, d)
a) Adapt the fore/aft position of the front passenger seat and, if necessary, move it to the highest position to achieve the best possible belt fit. b) When using child seats on the rear seats, adjust the front/back position of the front seat if neces‐ sary, and also adjust the head restraint of the rear seat or remove it. c) Only occupy the outer seats if the belt buckles are easily accessible. d) The seat is not suitable for child seats with a support stand. e) Depending on the equipment or national-market version.
Symbol Meaning Symbol Meaning
Not suitable for child restraint systems. Suitable for ISOFIX child re‐ straint systems.
Suitable for Universal-category child restraint sys‐ Suitable for ISOFIX and i- tems approved for use in this weight group. Size child restraint systems.
Suitable for child restraint systems in the Semi- Suitable for child restraint Universal category if the vehicle and the seat are systems with an upper re‐ listed in the list of vehicle models from the manu‐ taining strap. facturer of the child restraint system.
143 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 144
CONTROLS Carrying children safely
Suitable seats for child restraint systems with a belt Information about which child restraint systems can be used on the seats in question in accord‐ ance with the ECE-R 16 standard.
Group Weight of Approxi‐ Front pas‐ Front pas‐ Rear seats, Rear seat, child mate age senger senger outer middle – b, seat, air‐ seat, air‐ c) bag ON bag OFF– a)
0 Up to 10 kg Up X U, L U, L U to 9 months
0+ Up to 13 kg Up X U, L U, L U to 18 month s
I 9 – 18 kg Up X U, L U, L U to 4 years
II 15 – 25 kg Up X U, L U, L U to 7 years
III 22 – 36 kg 7 years and X U, L U, L U over
U: suitable for Universal-category child restraint systems approved for use in this weight group. L: suitable for child restraint systems in the Semi-Universal category if the vehicle and the seat are listed in the list of vehicle models from the manufacturer of the child restraint system. X: unsuitable for Universal-category child restraint systems approved for use in this weight group. a) Adapt the fore/aft position of the front passenger seat and, if necessary, move it to the highest position to achieve the best possible belt fit. b) Only occupy the outer seats if the belt buckles are easily accessible. c) The seat is not suitable for child seats with a support stand.
Suitable seats for ISOFIX child restraint systems The following ISOFIX child restraint systems may and size category are denoted by a letter or ISO be used on the seats designated as appropriate reference on a plate on the child seat. for this purpose. The corresponding size class
144 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 145
Carrying children safely CONTROLS
Grou Weight of Approxi‐ Class/category Front Front Rear Rear p child mate age pas‐ pas‐ seats, seat, sen‐ sen‐ outer – a) middle ger ger seat, seat, air‐ air‐ bag bag ON OFF – b)
Carrycot F - ISO/L1 X X X X G - ISO/L2 X X X X
0 Up to 10 kg Approximately E - ISO/R1 X X IL X 9 months
0+ Up to 13 kg Approximately E - ISO/R1 X X IL X 18 months D - ISO/R2 X X IL X C - ISO/R3 X X IL X
I 9 - 18 kg Up to approxi‐ D - ISO/R2 X X IL X mately 4 years C - ISO/R3 X X IL X B - ISO/F2 X X IL, IUF X B1 - ISO/F2X X X IL, IUF X A - ISO/F3 X X IL, IUF X
a) When using child seats on the rear seats, adapt the front/back and height position of the front seat if necessary, and also adjust the head restraint of the rear seat or remove it.
b) Only if equipped with ISOFIX child safety seat fasteners.
IL: suitable for ISOFIX child restraint systems in the Semi-Universal category if the vehicle and the seat are listed in the list of vehicle models provided by the manufacturer of the child restraint system.
IUF: suitable for forward-facing ISOFIX child restraint systems in the Universal category that have been approved for use in this weight class.
X: the seat is not approved or equipped with mounting points for the ISOFIX system.
Suitable seats for i-Size child restraint systems Information about which child restraint systems Size or meet i-Size requirements – in accordance can be used on the different vehicle seats, if with standard ECE-R 129: those child restraint systems are suitable for i-
145 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 146
CONTROLS Carrying children safely
Group Front passenger Front passenger Rear seats, outer Rear seat, middle seat, airbag ON seat, airbag OFF 2nd seat row 2nd seat row
i-Size X X i-U X
i-U, suitable for rearward and forward-facing i-Size child restraint systems.
X: not suitable for i-Size child restraint systems.
Recommended child seats Safety notes
Please comply with the operating and safety in‐ WARNING structions provided by the child restraint system Child restraint anchorages are designed to manufacturer when selecting, attaching and us‐ withstand only those loads imposed by cor‐ ing child restraint systems. rectly fitted child restraints. Under no circum‐ The manufacturer of the vehicle recommends stances are they to be used for adult seat belts, the following child restraint systems: harnesses or for attaching other items or equip‐ ▷ Maxi-Cosi CabrioFix. ment to the vehicle. After using and removing ▷ Maxi-Cosi FamilyFix base. child restraints, fold away the anchor brackets if necessary. ▷ Römer DUO PLUS. ▷ Römer KIDFIX XP. WARNING For Australia/New Zealand: If the rear backrest is not locked, the protective effect of the child restraint system is limited or Child restraints non-existing. The rear backrest can fold for‐ ward in certain situations, for example braking General manoeuvre or accident. There is a risk of injury or even death. Make sure that the rear backr‐ In accordance with ADR 34/03, provisions have ests are locked. been made to allow installation of a child restraint system at each rear seat position. The anchoring hooks which belong to the upper restraining strap of the child restraint - AS 1754, WARNING can be applied immediately to the relevant If the upper retaining strap is used incorrectly mounting. on the child restraint system, the protective ef‐ Please refer strictly to the installation instructions fect will be reduced. There is a risk of injury. supplied with the child restraint system. Make sure that the upper retaining strap is not twisted and is not routed to the upper mount‐ Each seating position is fitted with a head rest. ing point over sharp edges.
146 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 147
Carrying children safely CONTROLS
Mounting points Attaching the upper retaining strap to the mounting point Symbol Meaning 1. Raise head restraint if necessary. The corresponding symbol 2. Guide the upper retaining strap between the shows the mounting point for head restraint mounts. the upper retaining strap. Middle seat: guide the upper retaining strap over or along both sides of the head restraint to the mounting point. 3. If there is a retaining strap, guide it between the backrest and the case of the luggage net. 4. Guide the retaining strap between the seat backrest and the luggage compartment cover. 5. Attach the hook of the retaining strap to the mounting point. 6. Tighten the retaining strap by pulling it firmly down. Depending on the equipment fitted in the vehi‐ 7. Push the head restraint down if necessary cle, there are two outer mounting points or three and engage it in place. other mounting points for child restraints with tether straps. Securing doors and Routing the retaining strap windows in the rear
General In certain situations, for example when carrying children, it may be advisable to secure the rear doors and windows.
Doors
1 Direction of travel 2 Head restraint 3 Hook for the upper retaining strap 4 Mounting point 5 Seat backrest 6 Upper retaining strap
Unlock or lock the safety switches on the rear doors with the integrated key.
147 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 148
CONTROLS Carrying children safely
Symbol Function
Child locks are unlocked.
Child locks are locked.
The door in question can now only be opened from the outside.
Safety switch for the rear Press the button on the driver's door.
Various functions are disabled and cannot be op‐ erated in the rear. For further information: For safety switch, see page 118.
148 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 149
Driving CONTROLS
Driving
Vehicle equipment energy is saved in the high-voltage battery and is used to drive the electric motor. This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ The high-voltage battery can be charged using cific and optional equipment available for the the charge point at charging stations or at do‐ model series. It may therefore describe equip‐ mestic socket outlets. ment and functions which are not installed in your vehicle, for example on account of the spe‐ Overview cial equipment selected or the country specifica‐ tion. This also applies to safety-relevant func‐ Hybrid system components tions and systems. Please comply with the relevant laws and regulations when using the corresponding functions and systems.
BMW eDRIVE
Principle This BMW is a hybrid vehicle. As well as the in‐ ternal combustion engine, the vehicle is equip‐ 1 Internal combustion engine ped with a high-voltage hybrid system consisting 2 Power electronics of an electric motor and a high-voltage battery, among other components. 3 Electric motor The hybrid system can move the vehicle under 4 High-voltage cables: orange electric power alone, or support the internal com‐ 5 Auxiliary battery for internal combustion en‐ bustion engine in certain situations. gine 6 High-voltage battery General 7 Charge control unit When driving under electric power, the vehicle 8 Charge point does not consume any fuel. For example, this al‐ lows particularly environmentally friendly driving in inner-city areas, without generating emissions. Hybrid system settings During driving with the combustion engine, the hybrid system helps to lower fuel consumption. General The electric motor is switched on to support this, The hybrid system properties can be set to the if required by the situation. following hybrid modes using Driving Experience In addition, the electric motor acts as a genera‐ Control: tor: the electric motor converts the kinetic energy ▷ SPORT of the vehicle into electrical energy when braking ▷ HYBRID and when rolling in overrun mode. The electrical ▷ ELECTRIC
149 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 150
CONTROLS Driving
▷ ADAPTIVE Charging vehicle ▷ BATTERY CONTROL The high-voltage battery of the vehicle can be For system reasons, different maximum speeds charged using the charging socket at charging apply to the individual settings. The speed range stations or at domestic socket outlets. that is possible in each case is indicated by a Regular and complete charging of the high-volt‐ blue mark on the speedometer. age battery reduces fuel consumption, because electrical energy is used. HYBRID, ADAPTIVE and SPORT For further information: The vehicle is propelled in hybrid mode; in other Charge vehicle, see page 356. words, in combined propulsion with the internal combustion engine and electric motor. Air conditioning when parking ELECTRIC and charging In ELECTRIC, the vehicle is driven exclusively The hybrid system allows the automatic air con‐ electrically. ditioning to be operated before the start of a journey and with the internal combustion engine BATTERY CONTROL switched off. When the vehicle is being charged or if the high- With BATTERY CONTROL, the electric range voltage battery is sufficiently charged, the interior can be retained and conserved for a later point in can be cooled or heated in advance before the the journey or increased if necessary. start of a journey. Display of the hybrid system The standing air conditioning can also be switched on directly. The hybrid system's displays provide information about the current state of the hybrid drive and For further information: depict the usage of the system in a diagram. Stationary air conditioning, see page 316. For further information: Energy-saving driving Displays of the hybrid system, see page 177. Observe the following descriptions for energy- While the vehicle is in motion saving driving. Observe the descriptions for the following topics For further information: in the chapter on functions when driving: ▷ Saving fuel, see page 348. ▷ General driving information. ▷ Using the hybrid system efficiently, see ▷ Safety Information. page 349. ▷ Operating requirements. ▷ Driving modes for optimising consumption, see page 350. ▷ Automatic Start/Stop function, coasting. ▷ Energy recuperation, CHARGE. Safety of the hybrid system ▷ Support by the electric motor. For further information: ▷ Anticipatory hybrid drive. Working on the hybrid system, see page 20. For further information: Functions when driving, see page 152.
150 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 151
Driving CONTROLS
Acoustic protection for Driving off pedestrians 1. Switch on drive-ready state. Depending on the country variant, the system 2. Apply the drive position. generates a continuous driving noise when at a 3. Releasing the parking brake. standstill in drive-ready state and during electric driving up to 30 km/h, 20 mph. 4. Drive off. A loudspeaker system plays the noise outside Full drive power may not be available until ap‐ the vehicle. prox. 30 seconds after the internal combustion engine is started. In this case, the vehicle will not As a result, other road users, for example pedes‐ accelerate in the usual way. trians or cyclists, can detect the vehicle better. Maximum drive power can be used as soon as High-voltage battery, long eBOOST is available. stationary periods Follow notes on vehicle lay-up and longer sta‐ Automatic Start/Stop tionary periods. function For further information: High-voltage battery, long stationary periods, see Principle page 426. The Auto Start Stop function helps you to save fuel. The system therefore shuts down the inter‐ Start/Stop button nal combustion engine, if the preconditions for electric driving are met. The standby state re‐ mains switched on. Principle Drive-ready state is switched on General and off by pressing the Start/Stop READY is shown in the instrument cluster. If button. needed, the internal combustion engine starts Steptronic transmission: drive- automatically. ready state is switched on by The internal combustion engine is also stopped pressing the Start/Stop button while the brake during the journey when rolling off or braking. pedal is depressed. This drive state, where the vehicle is rolling and Pressing the Start/Stop button again switches energy recuperation is not active, is referred to drive-ready state off again and standby state is as coasting. switched on. The internal combustion engine is not shut down The drive-ready state cannot be switched on automatically in the following situations: when the charging cable is connected. ▷ The internal combustion engine is not at op‐ erating temperature. For further information: ▷ Gear selector lever in M/S position. ▷ Drive-ready state, see page 52. ▷ High-voltage battery is heavily discharged or ▷ Standby state, see page 52. vehicle electric system is highly loaded. ▷ Charging cable, see page 357.
151 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 152
CONTROLS Driving
▷ High stress of the automatic air conditioning Functions when driving system in the heating up and cooling down phase. ▷ Front flap is unlocked. General ▷ Vehicle is optimised for the current style of The internal combustion engine provides the driving, for example during running in or after main driving power. At the same time, the high- a visit to the workshop. voltage battery is charged as needed. The hybrid system starts the internal combustion engine au‐ ▷ Hybrid system is faulty. tomatically. Safety function While driving electrically with ePOWER, the vehi‐ cle is powered by the electric motor. An automatically stopped internal combustion Depending on the charge state of the high-volt‐ engine does not start automatically: age battery, the maximum speed, acceleration ▷ When the driver's door is open, when neither capability and range achieved may vary. the brake nor the accelerator pedal is pressed For electric driving and driving with the internal and the driver's seat belt is not fastened. combustion engine, the relevant prerequisites ▷ With the front flap released. must be met. The indicator lamps illuminate. The internal com‐ Driving off and accelerating are energy intensive. bustion engine can only be started using the To optimise acceleration and reduce fuel con‐ start/stop button. sumption, the electric motor supports the inter‐ nal combustion engine. Parking the vehicle during automatic engine stop Safety note With automatic engine stop, the vehicle can be parked safely, for example in order to leave it. WARNING 1. Press the start/stop button. With electric driving, pedestrians and other ▷ The standby state is activated. road-users might not detect the vehicle as well as usual due to the lack of engine noise. There ▷ The Auto Start Stop function is deactiva‐ is a risk of accident. Adapt your driving style to ted. the traffic conditions. Observe the traffic situa‐ ▷ Selector lever position P is automatically tion and intervene actively if the situation war‐ engaged. rants it. 2. Apply the parking brake.
Malfunction Operating requirements If there is a malfunction, Auto Start Stop function Electric driving no longer shuts down the internal combustion engine automatically. A message is displayed. It ▷ Charge state and temperature of high-voltage is possible to keep driving. Have the system battery is adequate. checked. ▷ Selector lever position D or R engaged. ▷ Accelerator pedal is not pressed too far. ▷ Possible maximum speed for electric driving is not exceeded.
152 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 153
Driving CONTROLS
Automatic starting of the internal After coasting, the internal combustion engine or combustion engine while the vehicle electric motor provides the necessary drive is being driven power automatically again, depending on the hy‐ brid mode. Depending on the hybrid mode set, the internal combustion engine is started automatically while Operating requirements the vehicle is being driven under conditions such as the following: Coasting is possible under the following precon‐ ditions: ▷ With high acceleration or on upward gradi‐ ents. ▷ In the HYBRID ECO PRO driving mode if the traffic situation allows you to do so. ▷ By depressing the accelerator pedal beyond the full-throttle position, kickdown. ▷ Transmission position D engaged. ▷ Charge level of the high-voltage battery is too low. Energy recuperation: CHARGE ▷ Selector lever position M/S is engaged. Principle ▷ During manual gear-shifting using the shift The electric motor acts as a generator and con‐ paddles. verts the kinetic energy of the vehicle into electri‐ ▷ Anticipatory hybrid drive with active route cal energy during braking and rolling. guidance, for example outside built-up areas. The high-voltage battery is charged by this en‐ ▷ Request to the hybrid components depend‐ ergy recuperation. If needed, this saved electrical ing on system. energy is supplied back to the electric motor.
Automatic stopping of the internal General combustion engine while the vehicle Depending on the set hybrid mode, the high- is being driven voltage battery is recharged at different rates, Depending on the driving situation, the internal and the vehicle is decelerated at different rates combustion engine is stopped if the require‐ when rolling. ments for electric driving are met. Operating requirements Automatic Start/Stop function, Recovering kinetic energy depends on the coasting following factors, for example: ▷ Vehicle is in motion. Principle ▷ Selector lever is in position D or M/S. The Automatic Start/Stop function shuts down ▷ High-voltage battery is not completely the internal combustion engine when you are charged. driving, braking and rolling, and when the vehicle is stationary. The condition of decelerating with‐ out energy recuperation with the internal com‐ Displays in the instrument cluster bustion engine switched off is also called coast‐ For further information: ing. Comfort functions such as automatic air Displays of the hybrid system, see page 177. conditioning are still supplied by the high-voltage battery and may remain switched on.
153 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 154
CONTROLS Driving
Support by electric motor Operating requirements ▷ Selector lever position D engaged. Principle ▷ Route guidance active. The internal combustion engine provides the ▷ HYBRID STANDARD, HYBRID ECO PRO, main driving power. HYBRID COMFORT or ADAPTIVE activated, The electric motor assists with additional drive depending on equipment. power if needed. Activating/deactivating eASSIST 1. "CAR" In normal drive operation, the electric motor sup‐ 2. "Settings" ports the internal combustion engine depending on the situation. 3. "General settings" 4. "Anticipatory hybrid drive" eBOOST With increased acceleration – when overtaking, Displays for example – the maximum available power of 1. "CAR" the electric motor is called on. To do this, press 2. "Driving information" the accelerator pedal firmly. 3. "Energy flow"
Anticipatory hybrid drive Display Principle The system makes it possible to distribute the available electrical energy as effectively as possi‐ ble so that electric driving can take place in urban areas and in the destination when the navigation system route guidance is active. If the high-volt‐ age battery is sufficiently charged, additional route sections for electric driving are selected.
General An example: built-up area. Preparations are made for electric driving before a built-up area is Downward gradients, for example, are taken into reached. When the built-up area is reached, account for efficient energy recuperation purpo‐ electric driving is switched to automatically. ses. Other situations are also shown on the Control The internal combustion engine is automatically Display: activated or deactivated depending on the route section, which supports an efficient driving style ▷ Downward gradient: electric driving takes and emission-free driving in urban areas. place and the high-voltage battery is charged on the downward gradient. For further information: ▷ Target area: electric driving takes precedence Using the hybrid system efficiently, see in the target area. page 349.
154 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 155
Driving CONTROLS
▷ Energy distribution: if the high-voltage battery Overview is sufficiently charged, electric driving takes precedence on later route sections outside built-up areas.
eDRIVE zone Depending on the national-market version, elec‐ tric driving is supported by the eDrive zone app in selected urban areas. When you drive in an eDrive zone, the driving mode is switched to ELECTRIC automatically if necesssary. The eDrive zones are highlighted in colour in the Displays in the instrument map view of the navigation system. cluster The eDrive zone function and the display in the map view can be activated or deactivated. The The selected drive mode is function and the display in the map view are acti‐ shown in the instrument cluster. vated when the vehicle is delivered.
Driving Experience Control Drive modes
Principle Button Drive mode Driving Experience Control influences the driving dynamics and hybrid system characteristics of SPORT STANDARD the vehicle. XTRABOOST The vehicle can be adapted depending on the SPORT INDIVIDUAL situation using various driving modes. HYBRID STANDARD General HYBRID ECO PRO The following systems are influenced, for exam‐ ELECTRIC STANDARD ple: ELECTRIC INDIVIDUAL ▷ Engine characteristics. ADAPTIVE ▷ Properties of the hybrid system.
▷ Steptronic transmission. BATTERY CONTROL ▷ Adaptive M suspension. ▷ Steering. Some driving modes can be configured individu‐ ▷ Display in the instrument cluster. ally. ▷ Cruise Control.
155 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 156
CONTROLS Driving
Drive modes in detail HYBRID STANDARD
SPORT STANDARD Principle HYBRID STANDARD is activated every time the Principle vehicle is started via the start/stop button. Dynamic configuration for greater agility with an In HYBRID STANDARD, the vehicle is propelled optimised suspension. according to the various driving situations in hy‐ brid mode; in other words, in combined propul‐ Switching on sion with the internal combustion engine and Press the button until SPORT is dis‐ electric motor. In each case, the most efficient played in the instrument cluster. type of drive takes precedence.
Switching on XTRABOOST Press the button repeatedly until HY‐ BRID is displayed in the instrument Principle cluster. If available, the electric motor provides additional power. Dynamic configuration for maximum agil‐ ity with an adapted drive. HYBRID ECO PRO
Switching on Principle Press the button repeatedly until XTRA‐ In HYBRID ECO PRO, the vehicle is propelled BOOST is displayed in the instrument according to the various driving situations in hy‐ cluster. brid mode. HYBRID ECO PRO supports a fuel- efficient driving style by adapting the engine con‐ trol and comfort functions; for example, climate SPORT INDIVIDUAL control output.
Principle Switching on Individual settings can be made in SPORT INDI‐ Press the button repeatedly until HY‐ VIDUAL drive mode. BRID ECO PRO is displayed in the in‐ strument cluster. Configuring 1. "CAR" ELECTRIC STANDARD 2. "Settings" 3. "Driving mode" Principle 4. "SPORT INDIVIDUAL" The vehicle is exclusively electrically driven. 5. Select the desired setting: If necessary, the maximum electric speed that The setting is saved for the current driver profile. applies to ELECTRIC STANDARD may be delib‐ erately exceeded with the aid of kickdown. The Reset SPORT INDIVIDUAL to default setting: internal combustion engine is automatically star‐ "Reset to SPORT STANDARD". ted and changes to the most recently selected hybrid mode. For further information:
156 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 157
Driving CONTROLS
BMW eDrive, see page 149. BATTERY CONTROL
Switching on General Press the button repeatedly until ELEC‐ A certain charge state of the high-voltage battery TRIC is displayed in the instrument can be maintained or increased with BATTERY cluster. CONTROL. This charge state can be set. The electric range can be conserved in this way for a later point in the journey, for example. ELECTRIC INDIVIDUAL If the current charge state is too low, the battery Principle is charged during the journey. This charging process increases average consumption. The vehicle is exclusively electrically driven. In ELECTRIC INDIVIDUAL driving mode, individ‐ Switching on ual settings can be made for comfort functions; Press the button. for example, climate control output. This sup‐ ports a fuel-efficient driving style. The LED in the button illuminates red.
Configuring Setting the charge state ELECTRIC INDIVIDUAL can be specified as the The charge state can be set in various ways. default mode, for example. Using the button: 1. "CAR" 2. "Settings" 1. Press the button. 3. "Driving mode" BATTERY CONTROL is displayed in the in‐ 4. "Configure INDIVIDUAL" strument cluster and on the Control Display. 5. Select the desired setting. 2. Select "Set target value" on the Control Dis‐ play. The setting is saved for the current driver profile. 3. "Target:": set the required value. Reset ELECTRIC INDIVIDUAL to the default set‐ tings: Via iDrive: "Reset". 1. "CAR" 2. "Settings" ADAPTIVE 3. "Driving mode" Principle 4. "BATTERY CONTROL" Balanced drive mode with a configuration that 5. Set the desired value. automatically adapts to the driving situation and The Control Display shows the charge state that driving style. is to be saved as a percentage. Using the navigation system, upcoming route The instrument cluster shows a mark for the set stages are also taken into account. value in the charge status display of the high- voltage battery. Switching on For further information: Press the button. ADAPTIVE is dis‐ Charge state indicator the high-voltage battery, played in the instrument cluster. see page 177.
157 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 158
CONTROLS Driving
INDIVIDUAL configuration ▷ Pressing the start/stop button. ▷ Releasing the parking brake. General ▷ Opening and closing doors or windows. The individual configuration of the drive mode is ▷ Engaging selector lever position N. saved for the current driver profile. The configu‐ ▷ Operating vehicle equipment. ration set last is directly activated when the drive mode is called up again. There is a risk of accident or injury. Do not leave children or pets unsupervised in the vehi‐ Activating the configuration of the cle. When leaving the vehicle, take the vehicle drive mode key with you and lock the vehicle. Press the button of the desired drive several times. Overview
Parking brake
Principle The parking brake is used to prevent the vehicle from rolling when it is parked.
Safety notes Parking brake WARNING An unsecured vehicle can start moving and roll‐ ing away. There is a risk of accident. Before Engaging leaving the vehicle, secure it to prevent it from rolling away. When the vehicle is stationary Observe the following to ensure that the vehi‐ Pull the switch. cle is secured against rolling away: The LED is illuminated. ▷ Apply the parking brake. ▷ Turn the front wheels towards the kerb on The indicator lamp in the instrument upward or downward gradients. cluster is illuminated red. The parking brake is engaged. ▷ Additionally secure the vehicle on upward or downward gradients, for example with a chock. While the vehicle is in motion
General WARNING Use during the journey serves as an emergency Unsupervised children or pets in the vehicle brake. can set the vehicle in motion and endanger Pull and hold the switch. Vehicle brakes themselves or other road users, for example by strongly for as long as the switch is pulled. the following actions:
158 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 159
Driving CONTROLS
The indicator lamp in the instrument General cluster is illuminated red, a signal sounds The parking brake is automatically applied in the and the brake lights illuminate. following conditions: A Check Control message is shown. ▷ When drive-ready state is switched off. Apply the parking brake when the vehicle is sta‐ ▷ When the driver's door is opened with the ve‐ tionary. hicle at a standstill. ▷ If the vehicle is brought to a standstill with the With emergency stop assistant parking brake during a journey. Briefly press the switch to activate the emergency stop function. Safety notes
For further information: WARNING Emergency Stop Assistant, see page 240. An unsecured vehicle can start moving and roll‐ Releasing ing away. There is a risk of accident. Before leaving the vehicle, secure it to prevent it from rolling away. Releasing manually Observe the following to ensure that the vehi‐ 1. Switch on drive-ready state. cle is secured against rolling away: ▷ Apply the parking brake. 2. Steptronic transmission: press the switch with the brakes applied or selector ▷ Turn the front wheels towards the kerb on lever position P engaged. upward or downward gradients. The LED and indicator lamp are illuminated. ▷ Additionally secure the vehicle on upward or downward gradients, for example with a The parking brake is released. chock. Automatic release The parking brake is automatically released on WARNING driving off. Unsupervised children or pets in the vehicle LED and indicator lamp turn off. can set the vehicle in motion and endanger themselves or other road users, for example by Steptronic transmission: the following actions: Automatic Hold ▷ Pressing the start/stop button. ▷ Releasing the parking brake. Principle ▷ Opening and closing doors or windows. This system provides assistance by automatically applying and releasing the brake, for example in ▷ Engaging selector lever position N. stop-and-go traffic. ▷ Operating vehicle equipment. The vehicle is held automatically when at a There is a risk of accident or injury. Do not standstill. leave children or pets unsupervised in the vehi‐ On upward gradients, it prevents the vehicle cle. When leaving the vehicle, take the vehicle from rolling back when driving off. key with you and lock the vehicle.
159 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 160
CONTROLS Driving
Driving off NOTE To drive off, press the accelerator pedal. Automatic Hold applies the parking brake when The brake is released automatically and the indi‐ the vehicle is stationary and prevents the vehi‐ cator lamp for the parking brake is no longer illu‐ cle from rolling in car washes. There is a risk of minated. material damage. Deactivate Automatic Hold before driving into the car wash. Automatic activation of the parking brake Overview The parking brake is automatically applied when the vehicle is being held by Automatic Hold and drive-ready state is switched off or the vehicle is exited. The indicator lamp changes from green to red.
The parking brake is not applied automatically if drive-ready state was switched off while the ve‐ hicle was still rolling. Automatic Hold is switched off in this case. Automatic Hold Switching off operational readiness Activating the Automatic Hold Press the button. function The LED is extinguished. 1. Switch on drive-ready state. The indicator lamp extinguishes.
2. Press the button. The LED is illuminated. Automatic Hold is switched off. The indicator lamp illuminates green. If the vehicle is being held stationary by Auto‐ matic Hold, also depress the brake pedal when Automatic Hold is ready to operate. switching off. When the vehicle is restarted, the last se‐ lected setting is retained. Malfunction If the parking brake has failed or malfunctioned, Automatic Hold holds the vehicle secure the vehicle to prevent it from rolling away Operational readiness is established and the before leaving the vehicle. driver's door is closed. A Check Control message is shown. Once the brake has been applied, the ve‐ After getting out, secure the vehicle to prevent it hicle is secured from rolling as soon as from rolling away, for example with a chock. the indicator lamp is illuminated green.
160 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 161
Driving CONTROLS
After a power failure 3. "Exterior lighting" To restore parking brake functionality after a 4. "One-touch indicator" power failure: 5. Select the desired setting. 1. Switch on standby state. The setting is saved for the current driver profile.
2. Pull the switch with the brakes applied Indicating a turn briefly or selector lever position P engaged and then Press the lever as far as the resistance point and press it. hold it there for as long as you wish to indicate a The procedure can take a few seconds. Any turn. sounds that occur are normal. The indicator lamp no longer illuminates High-beam headlights, as soon as the parking brake is once again operational. headlight flasher
Push the lever forwards or pull it back. Turn indicator
Turn indicator in exterior mirror Do not fold in the exterior mirrors while driving or while operating the turn indicators or hazard warning lights to ensure that the indicator lamps in the exterior mirrors are well recognisable.
Indicating ▷ High-beam headlights on, arrow 1. The high-beam headlights are illuminated when the low-beam headlights are switched on. ▷ High-beam headlights off/headlight flasher, arrow 2.
Wiper system Press the lever beyond the resistance point. General Triple turn signal Do not use the wipers on a dry windscreen, oth‐ erwise the wiper blades will wear or become Briefly press the lever up or down. damaged more quickly. The duration of the triple turn signal can be set.
1. "CAR" 2. "Settings"
161 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 162
CONTROLS Driving
Safety notes wipers continue operating at the previously set level.
WARNING Switching off and flick-wiping If the wipers start moving when they are folded away from the windscreen, parts of the body may become trapped or the vehicle may be damaged. There is a risk of injury or material damage. Make sure that the vehicle is switched off when the wipers are folded away from the windscreen, and that the wipers are in contact with the windscreen when switching on.
NOTE Press the lever down. If the wipers are frozen to the windscreen, ▷ To switch off: press the lever downwards to switching them on may cause the wiper blades the home position. to tear off and the wiper motor to overheat. ▷ To flick-wipe: press the lever downwards There is a risk of material damage. Defrost the from the home position. windscreen before switching on the wipers. The lever returns to the home position when released.
Switching on Rain sensor
Principle The rain sensor automatically controls the wiper operation depending on the level of rainfall.
General The sensor is mounted on the windscreen, di‐ rectly in front of the rear-view mirror.
Press the lever upwards to the desired position. Safety note ▷ Rest position of the wipers, position 0. ▷ Rain sensor, position 1. NOTE ▷ Normal wiper speed, position 2. In car washes, the wipers may inadvertently When the vehicle is at a standstill, the wipers start moving if the rain sensor is activated. switch to intermittent operation. There is a risk of material damage. Deactivate ▷ Fast wiper speed, position 3. the rain sensor in car washes. When the vehicle is at a standstill, the wipers switch to normal speed. If a journey is interrupted with the wiper system switched on: when the journey is resumed, the
162 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 163
Driving CONTROLS
Activating Windscreen washer
Safety notes
WARNING At low temperatures, the washer fluid can freeze onto the windscreen and restrict visibil‐ ity. There is a risk of accident. Only use the washer systems if there is no possibility of the washer fluid freezing. Use antifreeze if required. Press the lever upwards once from the home po‐ sition, arrow 1. Wiping is started. NOTE The LED in the wiper lever is illuminated. If the washer fluid reservoir is empty, the If there is frost, wiping may not start. washer pump cannot operate as intended. There is a risk of material damage. Do not use the washer system with the washer fluid reser‐ Deactivating voir empty. Press the lever back to the home position.
Setting the sensitivity of the rain Cleaning the windscreen sensor
Pull the lever. Turn the knurled wheel to set the sensitivity of Washer fluid is sprayed onto the windscreen di‐ the rain sensor. rectly in front of the wiper blade as the wipers Upwards: high sensitivity of the rain sensor. move up. Downwards: low sensitivity of the rain sensor.
163 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 164
CONTROLS Driving
Rear wiper Safety notes
Overview WARNING If the wipers start moving when they are folded away from the windscreen, parts of the body may become trapped or the vehicle may be damaged. There is a risk of injury or material damage. Make sure that the vehicle is switched off when the wipers are folded away from the windscreen, and that the wipers are in contact with the windscreen when switching on.
Switching on NOTE Turn the outer switch upwards. If the wipers are frozen to the windscreen, ▷ Rest position of the wiper, position 0. switching them on may cause the wiper blades ▷ Intermittent mode, arrow 1. Engaging reverse to tear off and the wiper motor to overheat. gear activates continuous operation. There is a risk of material damage. Defrost the windscreen before switching on the wipers. To clean the rear window Turn the outer switch in the desired direction. Folding out the wipers ▷ In rest position: turn the switch downwards, 1. Switch on standby state. arrow 3. The switch returns to the rest posi‐ 2. Press the wiper lever down and hold until the tion when released. wipers stop in an approximately vertical posi‐ ▷ In intermittent operation: turn the switch fur‐ tion. ther, arrow 2. The switch returns to the inter‐ mittent position when released. The function is deactivated if the washer fluid level in the reservoir is low.
Fold-out position of the wipers
Principle In the fold-out position, the wipers can be folded away from the windscreen.
General This is necessary for example when replacing the wiper blades or to keep them away from the windscreen when there is frost.
164 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 165
Driving CONTROLS
3. Lift the wipers completely away from the Selector lever positions windscreen. D drive position Selector lever position for all normal driving. All gears for forward driving are selected automati‐ cally.
R Reverse Only engage selector lever position R when the vehicle is stationary.
N neutral Folding in the wipers In selector lever position N, the vehicle can be After folding the wipers in, the wiper system pushed or can roll without power from the en‐ must be reactivated. gine, for example in car washes. 1. Fold the wipers fully down onto the wind‐ screen. P Park 2. Switch on standby state and press and hold the wiper lever down again. General 3. The wipers move back to the rest position Selector lever position for parking the vehicle, for and are operational once again. example. In selector lever position P, the trans‐ mission blocks the individual wheels. Only engage selector lever position P when the Steptronic transmission vehicle is stationary.
Principle P is engaged automatically Selector lever position P is automatically en‐ The Steptronic transmission combines the func‐ gaged in the following situations, for example: tions of an automatic transmission with the option to change gear manually if required. ▷ After switching off drive-ready state if selec‐ tor lever position R, D or M/S is engaged. Safety note ▷ After switching off standby state if selector lever position N is engaged. ▷ If, while the vehicle is at a standstill and selec‐ WARNING tor lever position D, M/S or R is engaged, the An unsecured vehicle can start moving and roll‐ driver's seat belt is unfastened, the driver's ing away. There is a risk of accident. Before door is opened and the brake pedal is not de‐ leaving the vehicle, secure it to prevent it from pressed. rolling away, for example by applying the park‐ Before leaving the vehicle, ensure that selector ing brake. lever position P is engaged. The vehicle could otherwise start to move. Also apply the parking brake. For further information: Parking brake, see page 158. 165 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 166
CONTROLS Driving
Engaging selector lever point. The selector lever returns to the middle positions position when released.
General Apply the brakes until you are ready to drive off, otherwise the vehicle will move when a drive po‐ sition is selected.
Operating requirements The selector lever will only move from position P to another selector lever position if drive-ready state is switched on and the brake pedal is de‐ Engaging selector lever position P pressed. It may not be possible to move out of selector lever position P until all technical requirements are fulfilled.
Engaging selector lever positions D, N, R A selector lever lock prevents the following incor‐ rect operation: ▷ Inadvertent shifting to selector lever posi‐ Press button P. tion R. ▷ Inadvertent change from selector lever posi‐ tion P to another selector lever position. Rolling or pushing the vehicle 1. Fasten the driver's seat belt. General 2. Press and hold the button to cancel the se‐ In some situations, the vehicle may need to be lector lever lock. rolled a short distance without power, for exam‐ ple in a car wash, or may need to be pushed.
Engaging selector lever position N 1. Switch on drive-ready state while pressing the brake. 2. If necessary, release the parking brake. 3. If necessary, switch off Automatic Hold. Automatic Hold, see page 159. 3. Briefly press the selector lever in the desired 4. Press the brake. direction, possibly overcoming a resistance 5. Touch the selector lever lock and engage se‐ lector lever position N. 6. Switch off drive-ready state.
166 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 167
Driving CONTROLS
Standby state then remains switched on and Activating the sport programme a Check Control message is shown. The vehicle can now roll.
NOTE Selector lever position P is automatically en‐ gaged when standby state is switched off. There is a risk of material damage. Do not switch off standby state in car washes.
Selector lever position P is automatically en‐ Press the selector lever out of selector lever po‐ gaged after approximately 35 minutes. sition D to the left. If there is a fault, it may not be possible to The gear selected appears on the instrument change the selector lever position. cluster, for example S1. Unlock the transmission lockout electronically if The sport programme of the gearbox is activa‐ necessary. ted. Electric driving eDRIVE and the Auto Start Stop Kick-down function are deactivated. Rolling and braking phases are used more frequently for energy re‐ Kick-down is used to achieve maximum perform‐ cuperation. The high-voltage battery can be ance. charged according to the driving situation. Press the accelerator pedal down beyond the Charging can increase fuel consumption. regular full-throttle position; some resistance will be felt. Exiting sport programme Sport program M/S Press the selector lever to the right. D is shown in the instrument cluster. Principle In the sport programme, the gear shift points and Manual mode M/S gear shift times are configured for more sporty driving. For example, the transmission shifts up Principle later and the gearshift times are shorter. The gears can be changed manually in manual operation.
167 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 168
CONTROLS Driving
Activating manual operation Shift paddles 1. Press the selector lever from selector lever position D to the left, arrow 1. Principle Shift paddles on steering wheel enable fast gear‐ shifting without taking hands off steering wheel.
General
Gearshift Gear shifting is only carried out at the appropriate engine RPM and vehicle speed.
2. Press the selector lever forwards or pull it Short-term manual operation backwards, arrows 2. In selector lever position D, operating a shift pad‐ Manual operation becomes active and the gear is dle causes the system to switch to manual oper‐ shifted. ation temporarily. The gear selected appears on the instrument The gearbox reverts to automatic operation from cluster, for example M1. manual operation after a certain period of time of moderate driving without acceleration or gear Shifting gears shifts using the shift paddles. ▷ To shift down: press the selector lever for‐ It is possible to change to automatic mode: wards. ▷ Pull and hold the right shift paddle until D is ▷ To shift up: pull the selector lever backwards. shown in the instrument cluster. In certain situations, the transmission continues ▷ In addition to pulling the right shift paddle, to shift automatically, for example when engine pull the left shift paddle. speed limits are reached. Permanent manual mode Steptronic sport transmission: In selector lever position S, operating a shift pad‐ preventing automatic upshift in dle causes the system to switch permanently to manual mode M/S manual mode.
Depending on the motorisation: when SPORT Steptronic sport transmission driving mode is selected, the Steptronic Sport transmission does not automatically shift up in In the corresponding gearbox version, operating M/S manual mode when certain engine speed the kick-down and the left shift paddle at the limits are reached. same time allows you to change down to the lowest possible gear. This is not possible in In addition, there is no down shift for kick-down. short-term manual mode. For further information: SPORT, see page 156.
Exiting manual operation Press the selector lever to the right. D is shown in the instrument cluster.
168 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 169
Driving CONTROLS
Shifting gears lever to selector lever position N and hold it there, arrow N, until selector lever position N is displayed in the instrument cluster. A Check Control message is shown.
▷ To change up: pull the right shift paddle. ▷ To change down: pull the left shift paddle. ▷ To change down to the lowest possible gear: pull and hold the left shift paddle. 4. Release the Start/Stop button and selector lever. The gear selected appears briefly on the instru‐ ment cluster, followed by the gear currently in 5. Release the brake. use. 6. Manoeuvre the vehicle out of danger and then secure it against rolling away. Displays in the instrument For further information: cluster Tow-starting/towing, see page 419. The selector lever position is dis‐ Launch Control played, for example P. Principle When the ambient conditions are dry, Launch Control permits optimised acceleration on a road Unlocking the transmission surface that offers plenty of grip. lockout electronically General General Use of Launch Control causes premature com‐ ponent wear, as the function subjects the vehicle Unlock the transmission lockout electronically to to very high stresses and loads. manoeuvre the vehicle out of danger. Do not use Launch Control when running in. Before releasing the transmission lockout, apply the parking brake to prevent the vehicle from roll‐ When starting with Launch Control, do not turn ing away. the steering wheel. For further information: Engaging selector lever position N Running in, see page 336. 1. Apply the brakes and keep them applied. 2. Press the start/stop button. Press and hold Operating requirements the start/stop button. Launch Control is available when the engine is at 3. With your free hand, press the button on the operating temperature. The engine is at operat‐ selector lever, arrow 1, push the selector 169 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 170
CONTROLS Driving
ing temperature after an uninterrupted journey of at least 10 km, 6 miles.
Starting with Launch Control 1. Switch on drive-ready state.
2. Press the button. TRACTION is displayed in the instrument cluster and the DSC OFF indicator lamp is il‐ luminated. 3. Engage selector lever position S. 4. Press the brake firmly with the left foot. 5. Press the accelerator pedal down beyond the resistance at the full-throttle position and hold, kick-down. A flag symbol is shown in the instrument cluster. 6. The starting engine speed is adjusted. Wait briefly until the engine speed is constant. Keep the accelerator pedal in this position. 7. Release the brake within 3 seconds of the flag symbol illuminating. The vehicle accelerates. Upshifts are automatic as long as the flag symbol is displayed and the accelerator pedal is not released.
Using again during a journey Once Launch Control has been used, the trans‐ mission requires approximately 5 minutes to cool down before Launch Control can be used again. Launch Control adapts to the ambient conditions when used again.
After using Launch Control To assist driving stability, re-activate Dynamic Stability Control, DSC as soon as possible.
System limits An experienced driver may be able to achieve better acceleration values in DSC OFF mode.
170 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 171
Displays CONTROLS
Displays
Vehicle equipment Navigation display Charge screen 176 This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ 4 Depending on the vehicle equipment: Driver cific and optional equipment available for the Attention Camera model series. It may therefore describe equip‐ 5 Selection lists 193 ment and functions which are not installed in your vehicle, for example on account of the spe‐ Widgets 173 cial equipment selected or the country specifica‐ Trip distance recorder, see Journey tion. This also applies to safety-relevant func‐ data 194 tions and systems. Please comply with the Performance display 186 relevant laws and regulations when using the corresponding functions and systems. Status of Driving Experience Control 155 Gear indicator 165 6 Charge state indicator the high-voltage bat‐ Instrument cluster tery 177 Electric range 177 General 7 Outside temperature 187 Depending on the equipment, changes to the 8 Check Control 179 displays in the instrument cluster can be deacti‐ vated via iDrive. 9 Speed Limit Assist 264 The displays in the instrument cluster can some‐ Speed Limit Info 190 times differ from the illustrations in the Owner's Time 75 Handbook. Instrument cluster without Full Black Panel Display: extended functionality: Overview Overview
1 Fuel gauge 185 1 Fuel gauge 185 Charge state indicator the high-voltage bat‐ Total range 188 tery 177 2 Speedometer 2 Speedometer 3 Central display area 172 3 Check Control 179
171 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 172
CONTROLS Displays
Widgets 174 4. "Instrument cluster" Service requirements 189 5. Select the desired setting. Navigation display Total range 188 Assisted Driving View 4 Revolution counter 186 Display of the hybrid system 177 Principle Performance display 186 Depending on the equipment and if driver assis‐ 5 Charge state display 177 tance is active, information about the driver as‐ sistance systems appears in an animated vehicle 6 Outside temperature 187 environment. Gear indicator Status of Driving Experience Control 155 General Time 75 Depending on the setting, Assisted Driving View 7 Speed Limit Info 190 can be displayed permanently or temporarily if Charge screen 176 driver assistance is active in the instrument clus‐ ter.
Central display area Safety note Depending on the equipment and setting, the following is displayed in the central display area WARNING of the instrument cluster: The system does not relieve you of your per‐ ▷ Navigation displays such as the map view or, sonal responsibility to assess the visibility con‐ if route guidance is active, a route preview ditions and traffic situation correctly. There is a with route guidance information. risk of accident. Adapt your driving style to the ▷ Displays showing service requirements. traffic conditions. Observe the traffic situation ▷ Charge screen. and intervene actively if the situation warrants it. ▷ Assisted Driving View. Information about the Driver Assistance Systems appears in an ani‐ mated vehicle environment. Settings Some displays in the central display area can be Permanent display configured individually. 1. "CAR" The displays may vary depending on the equip‐ ment and country specifications. 2. "Settings" 3. "Displays" Settings 4. "Instrument cluster" Individual displays in the instrument cluster can 5. "Central display area" be configured individually. 6. "Assisted Driving View" 1. "CAR" 2. "Settings" 3. "Displays"
172 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 173
Displays CONTROLS
Temporary display ▷ G meter. 1. "CAR" ▷ Journey data. 2. "Settings" ▷ Efficiency display. 3. "Displays" Selecting 4. "Instrument cluster" 5. "Display Assisted Driving View when driver assistance is active"
Display
Press the button on the turn indicator lever re‐ peatedly until the desired widget is selected.
Display An example: the indicator and warning lamps for Active Cruise Control with Stop&Go function ACC and the lane change assistant indicate a move into the adjacent lane. At the same time, the move into the adjacent lane is shown as an animation in the Assisted Driving View.
System limits The detection ability of the system is limited. Only objects detected by the system are taken into account. G meter The G meter shows the forces which act on the passengers in the longitudinal and transverse di‐ Full Black Panel Display: rection during the journey. Widgets Efficiency display
Principle Principle Displays for particular functions can be shown in Information on the driving style and consumption the instrument cluster. can be shown as a widget in the instrument clus‐ The following displays can be selected: ter, taking the form of a consumption display, for ▷ Current entertainment source, for example example. radio. ▷ Torque and power.
173 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 174
CONTROLS Displays
General Instrument cluster without Various information is displayed, depending on the activated driving mode: extended functionality: Widgets Drive Display mode Principle HYBRID Average consumption, fuel. Displays for particular functions can be shown in Momentary consumption, fuel. the instrument cluster. Consumption display, fuel. ▷ Distance travelled. Odometer for driving without an in‐ ▷ Consumption display. ternal combustion engine. ▷ Current consumption and average consump‐ ELEC‐ Average consumption, electrical. tion. TRIC Momentary consumption, electri‐ ▷ Digital speed. cal. ▷ Navigation data. Consumption display, electric. When route guidance is activated in the navi‐ Odometer for driving without an in‐ gation system. ternal combustion engine. ▷ Driver Assistance Systems. SPORT Engine temperature. ▷ Compass display for the direction of travel. ▷ Current entertainment source, for example Average consumption radio. Average consumption indicates the fuel con‐ sumption over a specific route. Selecting In ELECTRIC, the average electric consumption is displayed.
Current consumption The current consumption indicates how much fuel is currently being used. It is possible to check the economy and environmental compati‐ bility of your driving style. In ELECTRIC, the current electric consumption is displayed. Press the button on the turn indicator lever re‐ peatedly until the desired widget is selected.
Configuring widgets Some widgets can be configured individually.
1. "CAR" 2. "Settings" 3. "Displays"
174 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 175
Displays CONTROLS
4. "Instrument cluster" Navigation data 5. "Configure widgets" General 6. Select the desired setting. The expected arrival time and remaining distance The setting is saved for the current driver profile. to the destination are displayed if a destination was entered in the navigation system before Information in detail starting the journey.
Distance travelled Display Depending on the setting for displaying journey data, the total distance driven and the route cov‐ ered are shown in the widget for the distance travelled.
Consumption display
General The average consumption values can be shown on the on-board computer in the form of a bar ▷ Arrival time, arrow 1. display. ▷ Distance to destination, arrow 2. In ELECTRIC, the electric consumption figures are displayed. Compass Display General The compass shows the direction in which the vehicle is currently driving.
Display
▷ Odometer for a electric driving, arrow 1. ▷ Current consumption, arrow 2. ▷ Average consumption, arrow 3.
Current consumption and average consumption Depending on the setting for displaying journey data, the current consumption and average con‐ sumption are shown in the widget.
175 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 176
CONTROLS Displays
Charge screen
Full Black Panel Display: Overview
1 Range for electric driving 362 5 Departure time for timer 363 2 Charge state with charging cable 362 6 Maximum electrical range 362 3 Departure time timer 363 7 Standing air conditioning 363 4 Time for end of charging 362 8 Current charge state 362
176 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 177
Displays CONTROLS
Instrument cluster without extended functionality: Overview
1 Range for electric driving 362 5 Departure time timer 363 2 Maximum electrical range 362 6 Standing air conditioning 363 3 Range for electric driving 362 7 Charge state with charging cable 362 4 Departure time for timer 363
Display of the hybrid ▷ Hybrid mode: HYBRID ECO PRO. system ▷ BATTERY CONTROL. ▷ XTRABOOST. Displays in the instrument What is displayed depends on the operating mode of the system. cluster Charge state indicator of the high- General voltage battery The following functions of the hybrid system are shown: Principle ▷ Charge state indicator the high-voltage bat‐ Displays the current charge state of the high- tery. voltage battery in percent. ▷ Drive-ready state: READY. ▷ Electric driving: ELECTRIC. ▷ Electric driving: ELECTRIC INDIVIDUAL ▷ Hybrid mode: HYBRID STANDARD.
177 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 178
CONTROLS Displays
Safety note Electric driving: ELECTRIC The display becomes active after WARNING ELECTRIC is activated via Driving Even when the display shows that the high- Experience Control. voltage battery is discharged, the high-voltage system will still be carrying high-voltage. There is a risk of injury or fire. Do not touch or modify For further information: live parts, for example orange high-voltage ca‐ Driving Experience Control, see page 155. bles, even if the batteries are empty. Electric driving: ELECTRIC Full Black Panel Display: Display INDIVIDUAL The display becomes active after ELECTRIC INDIVIDUAL is activa‐ ted via Driving Experience Con‐ trol.
For further information: Driving Experience Control, see page 155.
Hybrid mode: HYBRID STANDARD ▷ Electric range, arrow 1. The display becomes active after ▷ Current charge state, arrow 2. HYBRID STANDARD is activated ▷ Set charge state of the BATTERY CON‐ via Driving Experience Control. TROL function, arrow 3.
For further information: Instrument cluster without extended functionality: Display Driving Experience Control, see page 155.
Hybrid mode: HYBRID ECO PRO The display becomes active after HYBRID ECO PRO is activated via Driving Experience Control. Drive-ready state: READY READY shows the drive-ready state. For further information: Driving Experience Control, see page 155.
For further information: Drive-ready state, see page 52.
178 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 179
Displays CONTROLS
BATTERY CONTROL ▷ Driver request, for example, gear selector lever in M/S position. The display becomes active after BATTERY CONTROL is activa‐ Displaying current vehicle status ted via the BATTERY CONTROL button. 1. "CAR" 2. "Driving information" The available electric range is saved for later. 3. "Energy flow" For further information: Driving modes in detail, see page 156. Check Control XTRABOOST Principle The display becomes active after XTRABOOST is activated via The Check Control monitors vehicle functions Driving Experience Control. and alerts you to any faults in the monitored sys‐ tems.
For further information: General A Check Control message is displayed as a com‐ Driving Experience Control, see page 155. bination of indicator or warning lamps and text messages in the instrument cluster and, if appli‐ Display on the control display cable, in the Head-Up Display. Current vehicle status If required, an acoustic signal is also output and a text message shown on the Control Display. General Hiding Check Control messages The following are shown: ▷ Active components of the hybrid system. ▷ Direction of energy flows: Orange: energy flow of the internal combus‐ tion engine. Blue: energy flow of the hybrid system. ▷ Vehicle states: ▷ ePOWER. ▷ POWER. Press the button on the turn indicator lever. ▷ eBOOST. ▷ CHARGE. Continuous display ▷ Coasting. Some Check Control messages are displayed ▷ Charging. permanently and remain until the fault has been ▷ System requirements of the hybrid system, repaired. If a number of malfunctions have occur‐ for example drive system is not yet at operat‐ red at the same time, the messages are dis‐ ing temperature. played in succession.
179 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 180
CONTROLS Displays
The messages can be hidden for approximately 4. Select the required text message. 8 seconds. Afterwards they are displayed again 5. Select the desired setting. automatically. Messages displayed at the end of Temporary display a journey Some Check Control messages are automati‐ Certain messages displayed when driving are cally hidden after approximately 20 seconds. The displayed again when drive-ready state is Check Control messages remain saved and can switched off. be displayed again.
Displaying saved Check Control Indicator and warning messages lamps 1. "CAR" 2. "Vehicle status" Principle 3. "Check Control messages" Indicator and warning lamps in the instrument 4. Select a text message. cluster show the status of some functions in the vehicle and indicate any malfunctions in moni‐ Display tored systems.
Check Control General At least one Check Control message is Indicator and warning lamps can illuminate in a displayed or saved. variety of combinations and colours. When drive-ready state is switched on, the func‐ tionality of some lights is checked and they illu‐ Text messages minate briefly. Text messages and symbols in the instrument cluster explain what a Check Control message Red lights means and what the indicator and warning lamps signify. Seat belt reminder Supplementary text messages The driver's side seat belt is not fas‐ tened. On some national-market ver‐ Additional information, for example the cause of sions: the front passenger seat belt is not the fault and any action required, can be called fastened or objects are detected on the front up via Check Control. passenger seat. If the message is urgent, the supplementary text Check whether the seat belt has been fastened is shown in the Control Display automatically. correctly. It is possible to select additional assistance de‐ pending on the Check Control message. Seat belt reminder for rear seats 1. "CAR" 2. "Vehicle status" 3. "Check Control messages"
180 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 181
Displays CONTROLS
Seat belt on the corresponding rear seat Junction warning with City braking is not fastened. function The displays may vary depending on the Indicator lamp illuminates: risk of collision equipment and country specifications. with a crossing vehicle.
Airbag system Indicator lamp illuminates: risk of a colli‐ sion with a vehicle with unidentifiable di‐ Airbag system and belt tensioner may be rection of travel or advance warning in faulty. the case of vehicles crossing your own direction Immediately have the vehicle checked by of travel. a Service Partner of the manufacturer or another The driver must intervene personally, for exam‐ qualified Service Partner or a specialist work‐ ple by braking. shop. Indicator lamp flashes and an acoustic signal sounds: acute warning in the case of vehicles Parking brake crossing your own direction of travel. The parking brake is engaged. Brake and take evasive action if necessary. For further information: For further information: Release the parking brake, see Junction warning with City braking function, see page 159. page 219.
Brake system Person warning with light braking function Brake system malfunctioning. Continue driving at moderate speed. Indicator lamp is illuminated and an Immediately have the vehicle checked by acoustic signal sounds: imminent colli‐ a Service Partner of the manufacturer or another sion with a detected pedestrian or a cy‐ qualified Service Partner or a specialist work‐ clist. shop. Take action yourself immediately by braking or swerving. Collision warning with braking For further information: function Person warning with light braking function, see page 222. Indicator lamp is illuminated: advance warning. Brake and increase the dis‐ tance. Active Cruise Control with Stop&Go Indicator lamp flashes and an acoustic signal function sounds: acute warning. Brake and take evasive Indicator lamp flashes and an acoustic action if necessary. signal sounds: brake and take evasive ac‐ For further information: tion, if necessary. Front-end collision warning with light braking For further information: function, see page 214. Active Cruise Control with Stop&Go function, see page 255.
181 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 182
CONTROLS Displays
Steering and lane control assistant Dynamic Stability Control DSC, see page 247. Indicator lamp flashes and an acoustic signal sounds: the system is switching Dynamic Stability Control DSC off. deactivated, or Dynamic Traction For further information: Control DTC activated Steering and lane control assistant, see DSC is deactivated or DTC is activated. page 268. For further information: ▷ Dynamic Stability Control DSC, see Yellow lights page 247. ▷ Dynamic Traction Control DTC, see Steering and lane control assistant page 248. Indicator lamp illuminates and an acous‐ tic signal may sound: a system interrup‐ Runflat indicator RPA tion is imminent. RPA reports a loss of tyre inflation pres‐ Indicator light flashing: lane boundary has been sure in a tyre. driven over. Reduce your speed and carefully stop For further information: the vehicle. Avoid heavy braking and sudden Steering and lane control assistant, see steering manoeuvres. page 268. For further information: Runflat indicator RPA, see page 386. Anti-lock Brake System ABS Braking force boost may be faulty. Avoid Tyre Pressure Monitor sudden braking. Bear in mind that stop‐ ping distances will be longer. Indicator lamp illuminates: the Tyre Pres‐ sure Monitor is reporting a low tyre infla‐ Have the vehicle checked immediately by a Serv‐ tion pressure or a flat tyre. Note the infor‐ ice Partner of the manufacturer or another quali‐ mation in the Check Control message. fied Service Partner or a specialist workshop. Indicator lamp flashes and then illuminates con‐ tinuously: no flat tyres or loss of tyre inflation Dynamic Stability Control DSC pressure can be detected. If the indicator lamp is flashing: DSC is ▷ Fault due to systems or devices with the regulating the acceleration and braking same radio frequency: the system is auto‐ forces. The vehicle is being stabilised. matically reactivated upon leaving the field of Decrease speed and adjust driving style to the interference. road conditions. ▷ In the case of tyres with special approval: the If the indicator lamp is illuminated: DSC has Tyre Pressure Monitor was unable to com‐ failed. plete the reset. Reset the system again. Immediately have the system checked by a Serv‐ ▷ A wheel without wheel electronics is moun‐ ice Partner of the manufacturer or another quali‐ ted: if necessary have it checked by a Service fied Service Partner or a specialist workshop. Partner of the manufacturer or another quali‐ For further information: fied Service Partner or a specialist workshop.
182 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 183
Displays CONTROLS
▷ Malfunction: have the system checked by a Green lights Service Partner of the manufacturer or an‐ other qualified Service Partner or a specialist Seat belt reminder for rear seats workshop. Seat belt on the corresponding rear seat For further information: is fastened. Tyre Pressure Monitor, see page 379. The displays may vary depending on the equipment and country specifications. Steering system
The steering system may be faulty. Turn indicator Have the system checked by a Service The turn indicator is switched on. Partner of the manufacturer or another qualified Service Partner or a specialist work‐ If the indicator bulb flashes more rapidly shop. than usual, a turn indicator has failed. For further information: Engine warning light Turn indicators, see page 161. Engine malfunction. Have the vehicle checked by a Service Side lights Partner of the manufacturer or another The side lights are switched on. qualified Service Partner or a specialist work‐ For further information: shop. Side lights/low-beam headlights, see For further information: page 200. Socket for on-board diagnosis, see page 404. Low-beam headlights Rear fog light Low-beam headlights are switched on. Rear fog light is switched on. For further information: For further information: Side lights/low-beam headlights, see Rear fog light, see page 205. page 200.
Acoustic protection for pedestrians Lane Departure Warning inactive If the indicator lamp is illuminated: the Acoustic protection for pedestrians system is switched on. At least one lane faulty. marking has been detected and warnings Have the system checked by a Service can be issued on at least one side of the vehicle. Partner of the manufacturer or another qualified For further information: Service Partner or a specialist workshop. Lane Departure Warning, see page 225.
183 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 184
CONTROLS Displays
Front fog lights If the indicator lamp is illuminated: the system is switched on. Front fog lights are switched on. For further information: For further information: Active Cruise Control with Stop&Go function, Front fog lights, see page 205. see page 255.
High-beam assistance Speed Limit Assist High-beam assistance is switched on. Depending on the equipment, indicator The high-beam headlights are switched lamp illuminates together with the sym‐ on and off automatically according to bol for a cruise control system: Speed traffic conditions. Limit Assist is active and detected speed limits For further information: can be adopted manually for the displayed sys‐ High-beam assistance, see page 203. tem. Indicator lamp illuminates: the detected Automatic Hold speed limit can be adopted with the SET button. As soon as the speed limit has Automatic Hold is activated. The vehicle been adopted, a green tick is displayed. is held automatically when at a standstill. For further information: For further information: Speed Limit Assist, see page 264. Automatic Hold, see page 159.
Steering and lane control assistant Manual Speed Limiter Indicator lamp illuminates: the system is If the indicator lamp is illuminated: the helping the driver keep the vehicle in the system is switched on. driving lane. If the indicator lamp is flashing: set speed For further information: limit is exceeded. Steering and lane control assistant, see For further information: page 268. Manual Speed Limiter, see page 251.
Lane change assistant Cruise Control Grey line for lane marking on the appro‐ Indicator lamp is illuminated: the system priate side: the system has detected the is active. lane change request. Lane change not For further information: currently possible. Cruise Control, see page 253. Green arrow symbol for lane-changing: the system carries out a lane change. Active Cruise Control with Stop&Go function Grey arrow symbol for lane-changing: lane change not possible; operating re‐ quirements not met. For further information:
184 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 185
Displays CONTROLS
Lane change assistant, see page 273. Assisted Driving Plus Indicator lamp illuminates: the system is Assisted Driving Plus interrupted. Indicator lamp illuminates: the system is For further information: active. Assisted Driving Plus, see page 272. For further information: Assisted Driving Plus, see page 272. White lights
Blue lights Assisted Driving Plus Indicator lamp illuminates: the system is High-beam headlights ready. The high-beam headlights are switched For further information: on. Assisted Driving Plus, see page 272. For further information: High-beam headlights, see page 161. Fuel gauge Grey lights Principle Active Cruise Control with Stop&Go The current fill level of the fuel tank is displayed. function Indicator lamp illuminates: the system is General interrupted. The angle of the vehicle may cause the display Indicator lamp flashes: the prerequisites to fluctuate. for operation of the system are no longer being For further information: met or the system has been deactivated. Refuelling, see page 365. For further information: Active Cruise Control with Stop&Go function, Display see page 255. Full Black Panel Display: An arrow next to the petrol pump Steering and lane control assistant symbol indicates on which side of the vehicle the fuel tank filler flap Indicator lamp illuminates: the system is is located. ready. The current total range is dis‐ For further information: played as a number. Steering and lane control assistant, see page 268. Instrument cluster without extended functional‐ ity:
185 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 186
CONTROLS Displays
An arrow next to the petrol pump ePOWER symbol indicates on which side of the vehicle the fuel tank filler flap is located.
Revolution counter
General
It is vital to avoid engine speeds in the red warn‐ Full Black Panel Display. ing zone. In this zone, the fuel supply is interrup‐ ted to protect the engine. The revolution counter is available in SPORT driving mode or in the M/S sport program.
Performance display
Principle The display shows the available drive power as a percentage of the overall power. Instrument cluster without extended functional‐ ity.
General The range for ePOWER electric driving is shown The available power may be reduced due to cer‐ in blue, arrow 1. The area coloured in blue may tain factors. vary depending on the driving situation and hy‐ The following functions of the hybrid system are brid mode. shown: A scale shows the power output by the hybrid ▷ Electric driving: ePOWER. drive as a mark, arrow 2. ▷ Energy recuperation: CHARGE. If the mark is outside the range coloured in blue, the combustion engine is switched on, arrow 3. ▷ Acceleration support: eBOOST. Full Black Panel Display: in SPORT driving mode, the combustion engine speed is shown instead of the power of the hybrid drive. For further information: BMW eDRIVE, see page 149.
186 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 187
Displays CONTROLS
CHARGE eBOOST
Full Black Panel Display. Full Black Panel Display.
Instrument cluster without extended functional‐ Instrument cluster without extended functional‐ ity. ity.
The energy recuperation when rolling and brak‐ If the electric motor supports the internal com‐ ing is displayed depending on the drive mode by bustion engine, for example in the case of heavy the CHARGE display in the instrument cluster, acceleration, eBOOST will be displayed. The see arrow. The high-voltage battery is charged. level of eBOOST provided depends on the avail‐ No energy can be recovered if high-voltage bat‐ able charge state of the high-voltage battery. tery is fully charged. eBOOST might not be available at all if the For further information: charge state of the-voltage battery is low. BMW eDRIVE, see page 149. For further information: BMW eDRIVE, see page 149.
Outside temperature
General If the display drops to +3 ℃/+37 ℉ or lower, a signal sounds. A Check Control message is shown. There is an increased risk of black ice.
187 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 188
CONTROLS Displays
Safety note As soon as a low tank fill level has been reached, ELECTRIC is activated automatically to protect the internal combustion engine, if the require‐ WARNING ments for electric driving are met. The sport pro‐ Even at temperatures above +3 ℃/+37 ℉ gram of Steptronic is not available. there may be an increased risk of black ice, for It is possible to continue driving with reduced example on bridges or on shaded sections of drive power and exclusively using the electric road. There is a risk of accident. At low temper‐ motor. atures, adjust driving style to the weather con‐ ditions. Safety note
Range NOTE If the range drops below 50 km, 30 miles, the engine may no longer be supplied with suffi‐ Principle cient fuel. Engine function is no longer ensured. The range shows what distance can still be cov‐ There is a risk of material damage. Refuel in ered with the content of the fuel tank as well as good time. energy in the high-voltage battery.
General Electric motor range display Full Black Panel Display: The range can be displayed as the range for electric driving or as the total range. The total The electric range is permanently displayed un‐ range takes account of the content of the fuel der the charge state indicator of the high-voltage tank as well as the electrical energy in the high- battery. voltage battery. If the preconditions for electric Instrument cluster without exten‐ driving are not met, the total range only consid‐ ded functionality: ers the content in the fuel tank. The electric range can be shown Various factors, for example automatic air condi‐ in the fuel consumption display. tioning settings, are taken into account when cal‐ Additional information: widgets, culating the electric range. The electric range see page 174. value is adapted dynamically. The following factors are taken into account The display indicates that the when calculating the range: high-voltage battery is almost fully ▷ Settings of the automatic air conditioning. discharged or the electric drive is ▷ Driving style. not available at the present time. ▷ Climate conditions. A Check Control message is displayed briefly if Total range display the remaining total range is low. If a sporty driv‐ ing style is adopted, for example fast cornering, Full Black Panel Display: engine function cannot be ensured at all times. The total range is permanently If the range drops below approximately 50 km, displayed next to the fuel level in‐ 30 miles the Check Control message is dis‐ dicator. played continuously. 188 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 189
Displays CONTROLS
Instrument cluster without extended functional‐ Symbols ity: The total range is displayed between the speed‐ Sym‐ Description ometer and the revolution counter. bols
For further information: No servicing is currently needed. Fuel level indicator, see page 185. Maintenance or a statutory inspection Service requirements is due soon. Service interval has been exceeded. Principle The function shows the current service require‐ ments and related maintenance jobs. Entering deadlines General Enter deadlines for statutory vehicle inspections. The distance or time remaining until the next Ensure that the date and time are set correctly in service is displayed briefly in the instrument clus‐ the vehicle. ter after drive-ready state is switched on. 1. "CAR" The current service requirements can be read 2. "Vehicle status" out from the vehicle key by a service advisor. 3. "Service requirements" Display 4. "Vehicle inspection" 5. "Date:" Detailed information on service 6. Select the desired setting. requirements More detailed information on the maintenance Service history work required can be displayed on the Control Display. Principle 1. "CAR" Maintenance that has been performed can be displayed on the Control Display. The function is 2. "Vehicle status" available as soon as a maintenance visit has 3. "Service requirements" been logged in the vehicle data. Maintenance routines and any statutory in‐ spections required are displayed. General 4. Select an entry to display more detailed infor‐ Have maintenance work performed by a Service mation. Partner of the manufacturer or another qualified Service Partner or a specialist workshop. The maintenance work carried out is entered in the vehicle data.
189 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 190
CONTROLS Displays
Displays Example Description 1. "CAR" Most efficient gear is engaged. 2. "Vehicle status" 3. "Service requirements" Essential maintenance routines and any stat‐ Shift to a more efficient gear. utory inspections required are displayed. 4. "Service history" 5. Select an entry to display more detailed infor‐ mation. Speed Limit Info with no- overtaking indicator Symbols
Symbols Description Speed Limit Info Green: maintenance has been Principle carried out on time. Speed Limit Info shows the currently applicable speed limit in the instrument cluster and, if appli‐ Yellow: maintenance has been cable, the Head-Up Display, as well as additional carried out later than scheduled. signs where necessary; for example, in wet con‐ ditions. Maintenance has not been car‐ ried out. General The camera located near the interior mirror de‐ tects road signs at the edge of the road as well Optimum shift indicator as variable overhead signs. Road signs with additional instructions, for exam‐ Principle ple restrictions applicable in wet conditions, are taken into account and compared with internal The system recommends the most efficient gear vehicle data, for example the windscreen wiper for the current driving situation. signal. The road sign and associated additional instructions are then displayed in the instrument General cluster and the Head-Up Display, if applicable, or Depending on the design and the national-mar‐ ignored, depending on the situation. Some addi‐ ket version, the shift point indicator is active in M tional signs are taken into account in the speed manual operation of the Steptronic transmission. limit evaluation, but are not displayed in the in‐ strument cluster. Steptronic transmission: If a navigation system is installed, the system displays takes the information saved in the navigation Information on up or down shifting are displayed data into account where applicable and also dis‐ in the instrument cluster. plays the speed limits for sections of road with no road signs. For vehicles without optimum shift indicator, the gear engaged is shown. If a navigation system is not installed, the system has certain technical limitations. Only road signs
190 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 191
Displays CONTROLS
with speed limits are detected and displayed. Safety note Speed limits when driving into and leaving built- up areas and motorway signs, for example, are not displayed. Speed limits with textual supple‐ WARNING mentary signs are always shown. The system does not relieve you of your per‐ Speed limits for towing a trailer are displayed sonal responsibility to assess the visibility con‐ when the trailer socket is in use or when towing a ditions and traffic situation correctly. There is a trailer mode has been activated via iDrive. risk of accident. Adapt your driving style to the traffic conditions. Observe the traffic situation No-overtaking indicator and intervene actively if the situation warrants it.
Principle Overview Overtaking restriction signs and end of restriction signs which have been detected by the camera Sensors are indicated by corresponding symbols in the The system is controlled using the following sen‐ instrument cluster and, if applicable, the Head- sors: Up Display. ▷ Cameras behind the windscreen. General For further information: The system considers overtaking restrictions and Sensors of the vehicle, see page 47. ends of restrictions that are indicated by means of signs. Displaying Speed Limit Info Nothing will be displayed in the following situa‐ tions: General ▷ In countries where overtaking restrictions are Depending on the equipment, Speed Limit Info primarily shown by road markings. is displayed permanently in the instrument clus‐ ▷ On routes without road signs. ter or via iDrive. ▷ In the case of railway crossings, lane mark‐ Activating ings and other situations which indicate an overtaking restriction but which are not sign‐ 1. "CAR" posted to this effect. 2. "Settings" Overtaking restrictions for towing a trailer are not 3. "Driver assistance" shown. 4. If necessary, "Driving" Depending on the equipment version, an addi‐ 5. "Speed Assistant" tional symbol with distance information may also 6. "Speed limits" be displayed to indicate the end of the no-over‐ taking indicator. 7. "Show current limit"
191 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 192
CONTROLS Displays
Display Additional signs
General Symbols Description Depending on the national equipment, additional Speed limit with time limit. signs and overtaking restrictions are displayed together with Speed Limit Info. Speed limit only applies in wet conditions.
Speed Limit Info Speed limit only applies in Present speed limit. snowy conditions. If no navigation system is instal‐ Speed limit only applies in foggy led, the traffic sign is greyed out conditions. after turning off or on longer sec‐ tions of road. Speed limit applies to exit on left.
Depending on the vehicle equip‐ Speed limit applies to exit on ment, Speed Limit Info may not right. be available. Speed limit only applies when towing a trailer.
Speed limit with undetected supplementary sign.
Speed Limit Info with preview The display flashes if the detected speed limit Depending on the equipment version, an addi‐ has been exceeded. tional symbol with distance information may also be displayed to indicate that a change in speed No-overtaking indicator limit is ahead. Depending on the equipment, temporary speed limits may also be displayed; No overtaking. for example, speed limits at roadworks or traffic management systems. Temporary speed limits can only be displayed if the following services are selected in the data protection menu for the navigation system: End of overtaking restriction. ▷ "Learning map" ▷ "Map update" For further information: Data protection, see page 79.
Settings 1. "CAR" 2. "Settings"
192 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 193
Displays CONTROLS
3. "Driver assistance" ▷ If road signs are detected that apply to a par‐ 4. If necessary, "Driving" allel road. 5. "Speed Assistant" ▷ If the signs or road layouts are specific to one country. 6. Select the desired setting: ▷ "Warning when speeding": activate or de‐ activate the flashing of the Speed Limit Selection lists Info display in the instrument cluster and, if applicable, the Head-Up Display when the currently applicable speed limit is ex‐ Principle ceeded. The warning that is issued when The instrument cluster or the Head-Up Display a speed limit is exceeded may depend on can show lists for certain functions and can be the Speed Limit Assist settings. used for operation where applicable. ▷ "Show speeding": the speed limit detec‐ ▷ Entertainment source. ted by the Speed Limit Info is indicated by ▷ Current audio source. a mark in the speedometer in the instru‐ ▷ Recent calls list. ment cluster. If applicable, the relevant menu is opened on the System limits Control Display.
System limits of the sensors Display For further information: ▷ Cameras, see page 47.
Functional limitations Functionality may be limited or incorrect informa‐ tion may be displayed in some situations such as: ▷ If road signs are fully or partially obscured by objects, stickers or paint. Depending on the equipment, the list in the in‐ ▷ If the vehicle is too close to the vehicle ahead. strument cluster may differ from the illustration. ▷ In the case of navigation data that is invalid, outdated or not available. ▷ In areas not covered by the navigation sys‐ tem. ▷ If there are navigation discrepancies, for ex‐ ample due to changes in road layout. ▷ In the case of electronic road signs. ▷ When overtaking buses or trucks with road sign stickers. ▷ If traffic signs do not correspond to the stand‐ ard.
193 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 194
CONTROLS Displays
Displaying and using the list ▷ Average speed. ▷ Odometer for driving without an internal com‐ Button Function bustion engine. To change the entertainment ▷ Average consumption, electrical. source. ▷ Consumption history as a diagram. Press the button again to close the list currently displayed. Displays 1. "CAR" Display the last calls list. 2. "Driving information"
Turn the knurled wheel to se‐ 3. "Journey data" lect the desired setting. Consumption history Press the knurled wheel to con‐ firm the setting. The consumption history shows the hybrid sys‐ tem usage in a diagram as a function of the route The list that is currently selec‐ covered. ted can be displayed in the in‐ strument cluster again by turn‐ ing the knurled wheel. Display in the instrument cluster Depending on the equipment, information on the distance travelled can be displayed as a widget in Journey data the instrument cluster. The following information is displayed: Principle ▷ Total distance driven Values relating to the journey, such as the aver‐ ▷ Set interval for displaying the journey data. age consumption or the trip distance, are dis‐ ▷ Route covered, depending on the set interval. played. ▷ Odometer for driving without an internal com‐ bustion engine. General Selecting and setting widgets in the instrument The journey data can be shown on the Control cluster. Display and in the instrument cluster. For further information: The values can be displayed and reset according Full Black Panel Display: to different intervals; for example, after refuelling. Widgets, see page 173. Display on the control display Instrument cluster without extended functional‐ ity: Overview Widgets, see page 174. Depending on the equipment, the following infor‐ mation is shown as a function of the set interval and driving mode: ▷ Set interval for displaying the journey data. ▷ Average fuel consumption as a function of the set interval.
194 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 195
Displays CONTROLS
Configuring the journey data Via the button on the turn indicator lever: display 1. Press the button on the turn indicator lever The intervals for displaying the journey data in repeatedly until the widget for the journey the instrument cluster and on the Control Display data is selected. can be configured. 1. "CAR" 2. "Driving information" 3. "Journey data" 4. "Values since" 5. Select the desired setting: ▷ "Start of journey ( )": the values are reset automatically if the vehicle is at a standstill for approximately four hours. 2. Press and hold the button on the turn indica‐ tor lever. ▷ "Refuel ( )": the values are reset automati‐ cally after refuelling with a significant Via iDrive: amount of fuel. 1. "CAR" ▷ "Charging ( )": the values are automatically 2. "Driving information" reset after charging. 3. "Journey data" ▷ "Ex works": Average consumption since leaving the factory. 4. "Values since" The values since leaving the factory are 5. "Reset individual" displayed. The average values and counters are reset. ▷ "Individual ( )": the values since the last Once the average values and counters have manual reset are displayed. The values been reset, the following interval is automatically can be reset at any time. set: "Individual ( )".
Resetting average values Sport displays manually The following interval can be reset manually at Principle any time: "Individual ( )". The sport displays primarily assist a sporty driv‐ ing style.
Display on the control display
Overview The following information is displayed: ▷ Charging pressure. ▷ Engine oil temperature. ▷ G meter.
195 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 196
CONTROLS Displays
▷ Torque. Symbols Description ▷ Power. "Check Control messages": to display saved Check Control Displays messages, see page 179. 1. "CAR" "Service requirements": to dis‐ 2. "Driving information" play service requirements, see 3. "Sport displays" page 189. Full Black Panel Display: Display in the instrument cluster Head-Up Display The sport displays can be shown as widgets in the instrument cluster. Principle The following widgets can be selected: The system projects important information, for ▷ Widget for torque and performance. example the speed, into the driver's field of vi‐ ▷ Widget for G meter. sion. For further information: The driver can absorb this information without having to divert attention from the road. Widgets, see page 173. General Vehicle status Follow the instructions on cleaning the Head-Up Display. General Overview It is possible to show the status of some systems and perform actions on them.
Calling up the vehicle status 1. "CAR" 2. "Vehicle status"
Overview of information shown
Symbols Description
"Flat Tyre Monitor": status of the Switching on/off runflat indicator RPA, see 1. "CAR" page 386. 2. "Settings" "Tyre Pressure Monitor": status 3. "Displays" of the Tyre Pressure Monitor, 4. "Head-up display" see page 379. 5. "Head-up display" "Engine oil level": Electronic oil measurement, see page 397.
196 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 197
Displays CONTROLS
Display Adjusting the height 1. "CAR" Overview 2. "Settings" The following information is displayed in the 3. "Displays" Head-Up Display: 4. "Head-up display" ▷ Speed. 5. "Height" ▷ Navigation instructions. 6. Turn the Controller until the desired height is ▷ Check Control messages. obtained. ▷ Selection list in the instrument cluster. 7. Press the Controller. ▷ Driver Assistance Systems. The setting is saved for the current driver profile. ▷ Sport displays. The height of the Head-Up Display can also be Some of this information is only shown briefly saved with the memory function. when needed. Adjusting the rotation Selecting displays in the Head-Up The Head-Up Display view can be rotated. Display 1. "CAR" 1. "CAR" 2. "Settings" 2. "Settings" 3. "Displays" 3. "Displays" 4. "Head-up display" 4. "Head-up display" 5. "Rotation" 5. Select the desired setting. 6. Turn the Controller until the desired setting is The setting is saved for the current driver profile. reached. Adjusting the brightness 7. Press the Controller. The brightness is automatically adapted to the Additional settings ambient light. 1. "CAR" The default setting can be adjusted manually. 2. "Settings" 1. "CAR" 3. "Displays" 2. "Settings" 4. "Head-up display" 3. "Displays" 5. Select the desired setting: 4. "Head-up display" ▷ "Speed Assistant": call up settings for 5. "Brightness" speed assistance. 6. Turn the Controller until the desired bright‐ ▷ "Display infotainment lists in": set whether ness is obtained. the selection lists are displayed in the in‐ 7. Press the Controller. strument cluster or in the Head-Up Dis‐ The brightness of the Head-Up Display can also play. be adjusted with the instrument lighting if the ▷ "Sport displays": show revolution counter low-beam headlights are switched on. in the Head-Up Display.
197 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 198
CONTROLS Displays
▷ "Off": the sport displays are not shown in the Head-Up Display. ▷ "In SPORT mode": the sport displays are only shown in the SPORT driving mode. ▷ "Always": the sport displays are per‐ manently shown in the Head-Up Dis‐ play. ▷ "Reduced height": if some of the informa‐ tion is not in the driver's field of view, the information can be displayed in the lower part of the Head-Up Display.
Visibility of the display The visibility of the information shown on the Head-Up Display can be affected by the following: ▷ Seat position. ▷ Objects placed on the Head-Up Display cover. ▷ Sunglasses with certain polarisation filters. ▷ Wet roads. ▷ Adverse lighting conditions. If the image is distorted, have the default settings checked by a Service Partner of the manufac‐ turer or another qualified Service Partner or a specialist workshop.
Special windscreen The windscreen is an integral part of the system. The shape of the windscreen enables a sharp image to be projected. A film in the windscreen prevents the projection of double images. Therefore if the special windscreen needs to be replaced, it is strongly recommended that this be carried out by a Service Partner of the manufac‐ turer or another qualified Service Partner or a specialist workshop.
198 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 199
Lights CONTROLS
Lights
Vehicle equipment Symbol Function Side lights. This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ cific and optional equipment available for the model series. It may therefore describe equip‐ Automatic driving lights control. ment and functions which are not installed in your vehicle, for example on account of the spe‐ Adaptive light functions. cial equipment selected or the country specifica‐ Low-beam headlights. tion. This also applies to safety-relevant func‐ tions and systems. Please comply with the relevant laws and regulations when using the Instrument lighting. corresponding functions and systems.
Light and lighting Parking light, right.
Switches in the vehicle Parking light, left.
Automatic driving lights control
Principle Depending on ambient light conditions, the sys‐ The light switch panel is located next to the tem switches the low-beam headlights on or off steering wheel. automatically, for example in a tunnel, at twilight and in rain or snow. Symbol Function General Rear fog light. The headlights may also come on when the sun is low against a blue sky. Front fog lights. If the low-beam headlights are switched on man‐ ually, the automatic driving lights control is deac‐ tivated. Lights off. Daytime running lights.
199 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 200
CONTROLS Lights
Activating Do not leave the side lights on for extended peri‐ ods of time, since the vehicle battery could dis‐ Press the button on the light switch ele‐ charge and it may no longer be possible to ment. switch on drive-ready state. The LED in the button illuminates. Switching off The indicator lamp in the instrument cluster is illuminated when the low-beam Press the button on the light switch ele‐ headlights are switched on. ment or switch on the drive-ready state. After switching on the drive-ready state, the au‐ System limits tomatic driving lights control is activated. The automatic driving lights control is no substi‐ tute for using your own judgement to assess the Low-beam headlights light conditions. Switching on The sensors are unable to recognise fog or hazy weather, for example. In such situations, switch Press the button on the light switch ele‐ on the lights manually. ment.
The low-beam headlights illuminate if drive- Side lights, low-beam ready state is switched on. headlights and parking The indicator lamp in the instrument light cluster is illuminated. To switch on the low-beam headlights as soon General as the standby state is switched on, press the button again. If the driver's door is opened when drive-ready state is switched off, the exterior lights are Switching off switched off automatically after a given time. Depending on the country specifications, the Side lights low-beam headlights may be switched off in the low speed range. General Press the button on the light switch ele‐ The side lights can only be switched on in the ment. low speed range. Parking lights Switching on When parking the vehicle, it is possible to switch Press the button on the light switch ele‐ on a parking light on one side. ment. Button Function
The indicator lamp in the instrument Parking lights, right on. cluster is illuminated.
The vehicle is illuminated all round. Parking lights, left on.
200 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 201
Lights CONTROLS
Switch off parking lights: Welcome Light Carpet Press the button on the light switch ele‐ ment or switch on the drive-ready state.
Welcome lights
General The exterior lights are switched on automatically when the vehicle is approached or unlocked. De‐ The light source is located in the position indica‐ pending on the equipment version, the exterior ted. lights of the vehicle can be individually adjusted. Keep the light source clean and unobstructed. Activating/deactivating 1. "CAR" Home lights 2. "Settings" 3. "Exterior lighting" General 4. Select the desired setting: The exterior lights can be switched on for a cer‐ ▷ "Welcome and goodbye" tain period of time to illuminate the surroundings When the vehicle is unlocked, individual after exiting the vehicle. light functions are switched on for a limi‐ ted time. Activating ▷ "Door handle lights" Push the turn indicator lever forwards briefly after The door handles and the ground in front switching off the drive-ready state. of the doors are illuminated for a limited time. Setting the duration ▷ "Welcome Light Carpet" 1. "CAR" The area adjacent to the vehicle is illumi‐ 2. "Settings" nated for a limited time. 3. "Exterior lighting" 4. "Home lights" 5. Select the desired setting. 6. "OK"
Daytime running lights
General The daytime running lights illuminate when drive-ready state is switched on.
201 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 202
CONTROLS Lights
The indicator light in the instrument clus‐ General ter is illuminated when the rear daytime The adaptive light functions consist of one sys‐ running lights are switched on. tem or multiple systems, depending on the equipment version: Activating/deactivating ▷ Adaptive Headlights. In some countries, daytime running lights are ▷ Variable light distribution. compulsory, in which case the daytime running ▷ Cornering light. lights cannot be deactivated. ▷ Roundabout light. 1. "CAR" 2. "Settings" Activating 3. "Exterior lighting" Press the button on the light switch ele‐ 4. Depending on national-market version: ment. "Daytime driving lights" or "Daytime driving lights rear" The LED in the button illuminates. The setting is saved for the current driver profile. The adaptive light functions are active when drive-ready state is switched on.
Dynamic ECO light function Adaptive Headlights General General The brightness of the low-beam headlights is re‐ duced, depending on the speed and distance The headlight beams follow the road ahead in re‐ from the vehicle in front. sponse to the steering angle and other parame‐ ters. Activating To prevent dazzling oncoming vehicles, the Adaptive Headlights do not swivel to the oppo‐ Press the button on the light switch ele‐ site side of the road at standstill. ment. If the headlights are converted, the Adaptive The LED in the button illuminates. Headlights may only function to a limited extent. Activate HYBRID ECO PRO or ELECTRIC INDI‐ For further information: VIDUAL driving mode. Left-hand/right-hand traffic, see page 205. For further information: ▷ HYBRID ECO PRO, see page 156. Anticipatory headlights for ▷ ELECTRIC INDIVIDUAL, see page 157. bends The beams are adapted to the direction of the road ahead even before entering or leaving a Adaptive light functions bend.
Principle Headlights for S-bends Adaptive light functions makes it possible to illu‐ The beams are kept as straight as possible when minate the road responsively. driving around S-bends.
202 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 203
Lights CONTROLS
Headlights for hairpin bends Roundabout light The cornering light is also switched on before entering hairpin bends. Shortly before driving onto a roundabout, the cornering light on both sides is switched on. The edge of the road is illuminated more effectively. Variable light distribution Shortly before leaving a roundabout, the corner‐ ing light on both sides is switched off again. Principle Variable light distribution illuminates the road Adaptive headlight beam even more effectively. throw adjustment General Adaptive headlight beam throw adjustment com‐ The light distribution is automatically adapted to pensates for acceleration and braking manoeu‐ the speed. vres and vehicle load conditions to prevent on‐ If equipment includes a navigation system, the coming vehicles from being dazzled. Illumination light distribution is automatically adapted de‐ of the road is optimised. pending on the navigation data and speed.
City light High-beam assistance The light beam from the low-beam headlights is extended at the sides. Principle High-beam assistance detects other road users Motorway beam pattern in good time and activates or deactivates the The range of the low-beam headlights is in‐ high beam depending on the traffic situation. creased. General High-beam assistance ensures that the high- Cornering light beam headlights are switched on when the traffic situation allows. The system does not switch on In sharp turns up to a specified speed, for exam‐ the high-beam headlights at low speeds. ple in hairpin bends or when turning off, a corner‐ The system responds to the lights from oncom‐ ing light is added to illuminate the inside area of ing traffic and traffic driving ahead of you, and to the bend. ambient lighting, for example in built-up areas. The cornering light is activated automatically de‐ The high-beam headlights can be switched on pending on the steering angle or, where appro‐ and off manually at any time. priate, use of the turn indicators. If the no-dazzle high beam assistant is installed, When reversing, the cornering light is activated the high-beam headlights are not switched off automatically as appropriate, irrespective of the for oncoming vehicles or vehicles driving ahead steering angle. of you. The system only masks those areas of the beam which would otherwise dazzle oncom‐ ing traffic or traffic driving ahead. In this case, the blue indicator lamp continues to illuminate.
203 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 204
CONTROLS Lights
If the headlights are converted, high-beam assis‐ Deactivating tance may only function to a limited extent. For further information: Left-hand/right-hand traffic, see page 205.
Activating
1. Press the button on the light switch element. The LED in the button illuminates. 2. Press the button on the turn indicator lever. Press the button on the turn indicator lever.
System limits High-beam assistance cannot replace the driv‐ er's own judgement as to when to use the high- beam headlights. Therefore activate the dipped headlights manually if the situation requires it. In the following situations, the system will not op‐ erate or its operation will be impaired and your intervention may be required: The indicator lamp in the instrument ▷ In extremely adverse weather conditions such cluster is illuminated when the low-beam as fog or heavy precipitation. headlights are switched on. ▷ When detecting poorly lit road users such as The system will switch automatically between pedestrians, cyclists or horse riders or car‐ low-beam and high-beam headlights. riages and when trains or ships are close to the road, or when animals are crossing the The blue indicator lamp in the instrument road. cluster illuminates if the high beam is ▷ On tight bends, on steep brows or hollows of switched on by the system. hills, when there is crossing traffic or if the If a journey is interrupted with high-beam assis‐ view of oncoming vehicles on a motorway is tance activated: when the journey is resumed, obstructed. high-beam assistance remains activated. ▷ In poorly lit towns or where there are highly The high beam assistant is deactivated by reflective signs. switching the high beams on and off manually. ▷ If the area of windscreen in front of the rear- To reactivate high-beam assistance, press the view mirror is covered with condensation, dirt, button on the turn indicator lever. stickers, labels, etc.
204 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 205
Lights CONTROLS
Laser high-beam matically when the front fog lights are switched on. headlights Rear fog light Principle The beam throw of the high-beam headlights is Operating requirements increased for even better illumination of the road Before the rear fog light is switched on, the low- surface. beam headlights or the fog lights must be switched on. General Switching on/off When high-beam headlights are switched on, la‐ ser high-beam headlight is switched on automat‐ Press the button. ically in addition to LED high-beam headlight from a speed of approximately 60 km/h, 37 mph. The yellow indicator lamp in the instru‐ Depending on the national-market version, the ment cluster is illuminated when the rear laser warning label on the headlight may contain fog light is switched on. additional information. If automatic driving lights control has been acti‐ vated, the low-beam headlights switch on auto‐ Fog lights matically when the rear fog light is switched on.
Front fog lights Guiding fog lights
Principle Principle The light distribution of the low-beam headlights The fog lights work alongside the low-beam may be adapted to the foggy conditions accord‐ headlights to illuminate a wider area of the road‐ ing to the speed. way.
Operating requirements Operating requirements ▷ Automatic driving lights control is active. ▷ Low-beam headlights are switched on. ▷ Rear fog lights or front fog lights are switched ▷ Depending on national-market version: the on. side lights are switched on.
Switching on/off Left-hand/right-hand traffic Press the button. General The green indicator lamp in the instru‐ When driving in countries where vehicles drive ment cluster illuminates if the fog lights on the opposite side of the road to your vehicle's are switched on. country of registration, you will need to prevent If automatic driving lights control has been acti‐ your headlights from dazzling oncoming vehicles. vated, the low-beam headlights illuminate auto‐
205 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 206
CONTROLS Lights
Converting the headlights Overview 1. "CAR" Buttons in the vehicle 2. "Settings" 3. "Exterior lighting" 4. "Right/left-hand traffic" 5. Select the desired setting.
System limits High-beam assistance may only function to a limited extent. The availability of the adaptive light functions might be restricted. Interior light
Instrument lighting Reading lights
Operating requirements Switching the interior light on/off The brightness can only be adjusted when the Press the button. side lights or the low-beam headlights are switched on. To switch off permanently: press and hold the button for approximately 3 seconds. Adjusting The interior light in the rear can be switched on The brightness can be adjusted and off independently. The button is located on using the knurled wheel. the headliner in the rear.
Switching the reading lights on/off Press the button. Interior light Depending on the equipment version, there are General reading lights located at the front and in the rear beside the interior light. Depending on the equipment, the interior light, the footwell lights, door entry lighting, ambient lighting and loudspeaker lighting are controlled Ambient lighting automatically. General Depending on the equipment, the lighting for some of the interior lights can be adjusted.
206 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 207
Lights CONTROLS
Switching on/off Dimmed during the journey The ambient lighting is switched on when the The lighting in the interior is dimmed for certain vehicle is unlocked and switched off when the lights during journeys in the dark. vehicle is locked. 1. "CAR" If the ambient light was deactivated using iDrive, 2. "Settings" it is not switched on when the vehicle is un‐ locked. 3. "Interior lighting" 4. "Dimmed for night driving" 1. "CAR" The selected setting is saved for the current 2. "Settings" driver profile. 3. "Interior lighting" 4. "Ambient light" The selected setting is saved for the current driver profile.
Selecting the colour scheme 1. "CAR" 2. "Settings" 3. "Interior lighting" 4. "Colour" 5. Select the desired setting.
Adjusting the brightness 1. "CAR" 2. "Settings" 3. "Interior lighting" 4. "Brightness" 5. Select the desired setting.
Dynamic light Individual actions, for example incoming calls or open doors, are indicated by light effects.
1. "CAR" 2. "Settings" 3. "Interior lighting" 4. "Dynamic light" 5. Select the desired setting.
207 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 208
CONTROLS Safety
Safety
Vehicle equipment your vehicle, for example on account of the spe‐ cial equipment selected or the country specifica‐ tion. This also applies to safety-relevant func‐ This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ tions and systems. Please comply with the cific and optional equipment available for the relevant laws and regulations when using the model series. It may therefore describe equip‐ corresponding functions and systems. ment and functions which are not installed in
Airbags
1 Front airbag, driver 4 Side airbag 2 Front airbag, front passenger 5 Knee airbag 3 Head airbag
Front airbags Side airbag Front airbags protect the driver and front pas‐ In a side-on crash, the side airbag protects the senger in the event of a head-on collision where side of the body in the chest and pelvic area. the protection of the seat belts alone would no longer be sufficient. Head airbag The head airbag protects the head in the event of a side-on crash. 208 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 209
Safety CONTROLS
Knee airbag ▷ Do not place any other persons, pets or ob‐ jects between the airbags and occupants. Depending on the equipment version: ▷ Keep the dashboard and windscreen area on The knee airbag protects the legs in the event of the passenger side clear, for example do not a head-on crash. attach adhesive foil or covers and do not fit brackets for navigation devices or mobile tel‐ Protective function ephones, for example. General ▷ Do not glue the airbag covers and do not cover or modify them in any way. Airbags are not activated in every collision, for ex‐ ▷ Do not use the front airbag cover on the front ample, in minor accidents. passenger's side as a tray. Information for optimum airbag ▷ Do not install seat covers, cushions or other effectiveness objects on the front seats if they are not spe‐ cifically designed for use on seats with inte‐ gral side airbags. WARNING ▷ Do not hang items of clothing for example If the seat position is incorrect or the deploy‐ coats or jackets over the backrests. ment area of the airbag is restricted, the airbag ▷ Do not modify individual components of the system cannot provide the intended level of system or its wiring. This also applies to the protection or may cause additional injuries covers of the steering wheel, the dashboard when it deploys. There is a risk of injury or even and seats. death. Observe the following to achieve opti‐ mum protective function. ▷ Do not dismantle the airbag system. Even if all this information is observed, injuries re‐ ▷ Keep a distance from the airbags. sulting from contact with the airbag cannot be entirely ruled out depending on the situation. ▷ Always grip the steering wheel at the steering wheel rim. Place your hands in the 3 o'clock The noise caused by the deployment of an air‐ and 9 o'clock positions to minimise the risk of bag may lead to temporary hearing loss in vehi‐ injury to hands or arms when the airbag de‐ cle occupants sensitive to noise. ploys. ▷ Adjust the seat and steering wheel so the Operational readiness of the driver can reach over the steering wheel diag‐ airbag system onally. Select the settings so that, when reaching over, the shoulders stay in contact Safety notes with the backrest and the upper body stays as far away from the steering wheel as possi‐ WARNING ble. Individual components of the airbag system ▷ Make sure that the front-seat passenger is may be hot after airbag deployment. There is a sitting correctly, i.e. with their feet and legs in risk of injury. Do not touch individual compo‐ the footwell, not resting on the dashboard. nents. ▷ Make sure that vehicle occupants keep their head away from the side airbag.
209 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 210
CONTROLS Safety
Overview WARNING Work carried out incorrectly can lead to a fail‐ ure, malfunction or accidental deployment of the airbag system. If there is a malfunction, the airbag system might not deploy as intended in an accident, even if the impact is of the appro‐ priate severity. There is a risk of injury or even death. Have the airbag system tested, repaired or removed and disposed of by a Service Part‐ ner of the manufacturer or another qualified Service Partner or a specialist workshop. The key switch for front passenger airbags is lo‐ cated on the outside of the dashboard.
Display in the instrument cluster Deactivating the front passenger When drive-ready state is switched on, airbags the warning lamp in the instrument clus‐ ter illuminates briefly to indicate that the entire airbag system and the belt tensioners are operational.
Malfunction ▷ The warning lamp does not illuminate after drive-ready state is switched on. ▷ The warning lamp is permanently illu‐ minated. 1. Insert the key and press inwards where nec‐ essary. Have the system checked. 2. While the key is pressed inwards, turn it to the OFF position as far as it will go. Once the stop position has been reached, remove the Key switch for front key. passenger airbags 3. Make sure that the key switch is in the end position so that the airbags are deactivated. Principle The front passenger airbags are deactivated. When a child restraint system is used on the The driver's airbags remain active. front passenger seat, the front and side airbags If a child restraint system is no longer fitted in the on the front passenger side can be deactivated front passenger seat, reactivate the front passen‐ using the key switch for front passenger airbags. ger airbags so that they are triggered as intended in the event of an accident. General The airbag status is displayed by the indicator The front and side airbags for the front passen‐ lamp on the headliner. ger can be deactivated and reactivated using the integrated key from the vehicle key.
210 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 211
Safety CONTROLS
Activating the front passenger Active pedestrian airbags protection
Principle The active pedestrian protection system raises the front flap if the front of the vehicle collides with a pedestrian. Sensors underneath the bumper are used for detection.
General 1. Insert the key and press inwards where nec‐ When triggered, the pedestrian protection sys‐ essary. tem creates deformation space underneath the front flap in readiness for the subsequent head 2. While the key is pressed inwards, turn it to impact. the ON position as far as it will go. Once the stop position has been reached, remove the key. Safety notes 3. Make sure that the key switch is in the end position so that the airbags are activated. WARNING The front passenger airbags are reactivated and The system may trigger inadvertently if contact can deploy correctly if the need arises. is made with individual components of the hinges and front flap locks. There is a risk of in‐ Indicator lamp for front jury or material damage. Do not touch individual passenger airbags components of the hinges and front flap locks. The indicator lamp for the front passenger air‐ bags in the headliner shows the operating status of the front passenger airbags. WARNING After switching on the drive-ready state, the light Modifications to the pedestrian protection sys‐ illuminates briefly and then shows whether the tem can lead to a failure, a malfunction or acci‐ airbags are activated or deactivated. dental triggering of the pedestrian protection system. There is a risk of injury or even death. Display Function Do not modify the pedestrian protection sys‐ If the front passenger airbag is tem, its individual components or its wiring. Do activated, the indicator lamp illu‐ not dismantle the system. minates for a short period and then extinguishes. WARNING When front passenger airbags Work carried out incorrectly can lead to a fail‐ are deactivated, the indicator ure, malfunction or accidental triggering of the lamp remains illuminated. system. If there is a malfunction, the system might not trigger as intended in an accident, even if the impact is of the appropriate severity. There is a risk of injury or even death. Have the
211 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 212
CONTROLS Safety
system tested, repaired or removed and dis‐ Malfunction posed of by a Service Partner of the manufac‐ turer or another qualified Service Partner or a A Check Control message is shown. specialist workshop. The system has been triggered or is faulty. Immediately drive at moderate speed to a Serv‐ WARNING ice Partner of the manufacturer or another quali‐ fied Service Partner or a specialist workshop to If the system has been deployed or is dam‐ have the system checked and repaired. aged, its functionality will be limited or it may no longer work at all. There is a risk of injury or even death. If the system has been triggered or is damaged, Intelligent Safety have it checked and renewed at a Service Part‐ ner of the manufacturer or another qualified Principle Service Partner or a specialist workshop. Intelligent Safety enables the Driver Assistance Systems to be operated centrally.
NOTE General Opening the front flap when the pedestrian Depending on the equipment, Intelligent Safety protection system has triggered may damage consists of one or more systems which can help the front flap or the pedestrian protection sys‐ to avoid the risk of a collision. tem. There is a risk of material damage. Do not ▷ Front-end collision warning with braking func‐ open the front flap after the Check Control tion. message is displayed. Have checks performed by a Service Partner of the manufacturer or an‐ ▷ Avoidance assistant. other qualified Service Partner or a specialist ▷ Junction warning with City braking function. workshop. ▷ Person warning with light braking function. ▷ Lane Departure Warning. System limits ▷ Lane Change Warning. The active pedestrian protection system is only ▷ Side collision warning. triggered at speeds between approximately ▷ Road priority warning. 30 km/h, 18 mph and 55 km/h, 34 mph. ▷ Wrong-way driving warning. For safety reasons, the system may also trigger in rare instances where impact with a pedestrian Safety notes cannot be excluded beyond all doubt, for exam‐ ple in the following situations: ▷ Collision with objects such as a skip or a WARNING boundary post. The system does not relieve you of your per‐ ▷ Collision with animals. sonal responsibility to assess the visibility con‐ ditions and traffic situation correctly. There is a ▷ Stone impact. risk of accident. Adapt your driving style to the ▷ Driving into a snow drift.
212 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 213
Safety CONTROLS
traffic conditions. Observe the traffic situation Button Status and intervene actively if the situation warrants it. Button illuminates green: all Intelligent Safety Systems are switched on.
WARNING Button illuminates orange: some Intel‐ Displays and warnings do not relieve you of ligent Safety Systems are switched your personal responsibility. System limitations off or are currently not available. can mean that warnings or system responses Button does not illuminate: all Intelli‐ are not issued or are issued too late, incorrectly gent Safety Systems are switched off. or without justification. There is a risk of acci‐ dent. Adapt your driving style to the traffic con‐ Press the button. ditions. Observe the traffic situation and inter‐ vene actively if the situation warrants it. The menu for the Intelligent Safety Sys‐ tems is shown. If all Intelligent Safety Systems were switched WARNING off, all systems are now switched on. Due to system limitations, individual functions "Configure INDIVIDUAL": depending on the may not work properly when tow-starting/ equipment, the Intelligent Safety Systems can be towing with activated Intelligent Safety Sys‐ configured individually. The individual settings tems. There is a risk of accident. Switch off all are activated and saved for the current driver Intelligent Safety Systems before tow-starting/ profile. As soon as a setting is changed in the towing. menu, all settings in the menu are activated.
Press the button repeatedly. The set‐ Overview ting switches between the following: "ALL ON": all Intelligent Safety Systems are Button in the vehicle switched on. Basic settings are activated for the sub-functions, for example the setting for warn‐ ing time. "INDIVIDUAL": the Intelligent Safety Systems are switched on according to the individual settings. Some Intelligent Safety Systems cannot be switched off individually.
Press and hold the button. All Intelligent Safety Systems are Intelligent Safety switched off.
Switching on/off Some Intelligent Safety Systems are automati‐ cally active at the start of each journey. Some In‐ telligent Safety Systems are activated depending on their last setting.
213 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 214
CONTROLS Safety
Collision warning with WARNING braking function Displays and warnings do not relieve you of your personal responsibility. System limitations Principle can mean that warnings or system responses The system can help avoid accidents. If an acci‐ are not issued or are issued too late, incorrectly dent cannot be avoided, the system helps to re‐ or without justification. There is a risk of acci‐ duce the collision speed. dent. Adapt your driving style to the traffic con‐ ditions. Observe the traffic situation and inter‐ The system warns of the possible risk of collision vene actively if the situation warrants it. and brakes automatically, as necessary.
General WARNING Sensors record the traffic situation. Due to system limitations, individual functions From speeds of approximately 5 km/h, 3 mph, may not work properly when tow-starting/ the system provides a two-stage warning of any towing with activated Intelligent Safety Sys‐ possible risk of collision with vehicles. The timing tems. There is a risk of accident. Switch off all of these warnings may vary depending on the Intelligent Safety Systems before tow-starting/ current driving situation. towing. When deliberately moving closer to a vehicle, the front-end collision warning and braking interven‐ tion are activated later to avoid unwarranted sys‐ Overview tem responses. Depending on the equipment, the Driver Atten‐ Button in the vehicle tion Camera detects the driver's view behaviour in the instrument cluster. The system also checks whether there are any visual impairments present. The view behaviour and visibility condi‐ tions also affect the point at which the warnings are issued.
Safety notes
WARNING Intelligent Safety The system does not relieve you of your per‐ sonal responsibility to assess the visibility con‐ ditions and traffic situation correctly. There is a Sensors risk of accident. Adapt your driving style to the The system is controlled using the following sen‐ traffic conditions. Observe the traffic situation sors: and intervene actively if the situation warrants it. ▷ Cameras behind the windscreen. ▷ With radar sensor: front radar sensor. For further information: Sensors of the vehicle, see page 47.
214 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 215
Safety CONTROLS
Switching on/off Button Status
Automatic activation Button illuminates green: all Intelligent Safety Systems are switched on. The system is automatically activated at the start of each journey. Button illuminates orange: some Intel‐ ligent Safety Systems are switched Switching on manually off or are currently not available. Press the button. Button does not illuminate: all Intelli‐ gent Safety Systems are switched off. The menu for the Intelligent Safety Sys‐ tems is shown. If all Intelligent Safety Systems were switched Setting the warning time off, all systems are now switched on. 1. "CAR" "Configure INDIVIDUAL": depending on the 2. "Settings" equipment, the Intelligent Safety Systems can be 3. "Driver assistance" configured individually. The individual settings 4. "Safety and warnings" are activated and saved for the current driver profile. As soon as a setting is changed in the 5. "Front-collision warning" menu, all settings in the menu are activated. 6. Select the desired setting: ▷ "Early" Press the button repeatedly. ▷ "Medium" The setting switches between the following: ▷ "Late": only acute warnings are displayed. "ALL ON": all Intelligent Safety Systems are The selected time is saved for the current driver switched on. Basic settings are activated for the profile. sub-functions. "INDIVIDUAL": the Intelligent Safety Systems are Warning with braking function switched on according to the individual settings. Display Some Intelligent Safety Systems cannot be switched off individually. If there is a risk of collision with a detected vehi‐ cle, a warning symbol is shown in the instrument cluster and, if applicable, in the Head-Up Display. Switching off manually Symbol Action Press and hold the button. Symbol illuminates red: advance All Intelligent Safety Systems are warning. switched off. Brake and increase the distance.
Symbol flashes red and an acoustic signal sounds: acute warning. Brake and perform an evasive ma‐ noeuvre if necessary.
215 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 216
CONTROLS Safety
Advance warning Braking can be discontinued either by pressing An advance warning is given for example if there the accelerator pedal or by actively moving the is an impending risk of collision or the distance steering wheel. from the vehicle ahead is too short. Object detection may be limited. Take into ac‐ The driver must intervene personally when an count the detection range limits and the func‐ advance warning is given. tional limitations.
Acute warning with braking function System limits An acute warning is given when the vehicle is ap‐ Safety note proaching another object at a high differential speed and there is an immediate risk of a colli‐ sion. WARNING The driver must intervene personally when an The system may not respond at all, or may re‐ acute warning is given. Depending on the driving spond too late, incorrectly or without justifica‐ situation and the vehicle's equipment, the acute tion due to system limitations. There is a risk of warning may be supported by a brief jolt in the accident or material damage. Observe the in‐ brakes. formation on the system limits and intervene If the warning time setting is "Late", the jolt does actively if necessary. not occur. If necessary, the system can also assist by brak‐ Detection range ing the vehicle automatically if there is a risk of a collision. An acute warning can be triggered even without a previous advance warning.
Brake intervention The warning prompts the driver to take action. When the brake is operated during a warning, the maximum necessary brake force is applied. Brak‐ ing assistance requires that the brake pedal is The detection ability of the system is limited. depressed sufficiently quickly and firmly before‐ hand. Only objects detected by the system are taken into account. The system can also assist by braking the vehi‐ cle automatically if there is a risk of a collision. For this reason, the system may fail to respond At low speeds, the vehicle can be braked to a or only respond after a delay. stop. For example it is possible that the following may City braking function: brake intervention takes not be detected: place at up to approx. 80 km/h, 50 mph. ▷ Slow-moving vehicle when approaching it at With radar sensor: brake intervention takes place high speed. at up to approx. 250 km/h, 155 mph. ▷ Vehicles suddenly cutting in or braking heav‐ At speeds above approx. 210 km/h, 130 mph, ily. brake intervention takes the form of a brief jolt. ▷ Vehicles with an unusual rear appearance. There is no automatic deceleration. 216 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 217
Safety CONTROLS
▷ Two-wheeled vehicles ahead. an evasive manoeuvre to the side. Sensors mon‐ itor and detect the space around the vehicle. The Upper speed limit system then utilises the detected free space to The system is temporarily disabled at speeds perform the evasive manoeuvre by steering the over approx. 250 km/h, 155 mph. Once the vehicle safely and precisely in the direction speed drops back below this threshold, the sys‐ specified by the driver. tem becomes responsive again according to its settings. Safety notes
System limits of the sensors WARNING For further information: The system does not relieve you of your per‐ ▷ Cameras, see page 47. sonal responsibility to assess the visibility con‐ ▷ Radar sensors, see page 48. ditions and traffic situation correctly. There is a risk of accident. Adapt your driving style to the Functional limitations traffic conditions. Observe the traffic situation and intervene actively if the situation warrants it. The system may have limited functionality in the following situations, for example: ▷ On sharp bends. WARNING ▷ When Driving Stability Control Systems are Displays and warnings do not relieve you of limited or deactivated, for example DSC OFF. your personal responsibility. System limitations ▷ Up to 10 seconds after starting the engine can mean that warnings or system responses using the Start/Stop button. are not issued or are issued too late, incorrectly or without justification. There is a risk of acci‐ Sensitivity of the warnings dent. Adapt your driving style to the traffic con‐ The higher the sensitivity of the warning settings, ditions. Observe the traffic situation and inter‐ for example warning time, the more warnings are vene actively if the situation warrants it. displayed. As a result, there may also be an in‐ creased number of premature or unjustified warnings and responses. Overview
Sensors Avoidance assistant The system is controlled using the following sen‐ sors: Principle ▷ Cameras behind the windscreen. The system supports the driver in certain situa‐ ▷ Front radar sensor. tions when there is a need to avoid something, ▷ Side radar sensors, front. for example people or obstacles that appear sud‐ ▷ Side radar sensors, rear. denly. For further information: General Sensors of the vehicle, see page 47. The system issues warnings and intervenes to provide support if there is a possibility to perform
217 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 218
CONTROLS Safety
Operating requirements Acute warning with avoidance ▷ Pedestrian warning with braking function is assistance switched on. An acute warning is given when the vehicle is ap‐ Person warning with light braking function, proaching another object at a high differential see page 222. speed and there is an immediate risk of a colli‐ sion. ▷ Collision warning with braking function is switched on. The driver must intervene personally when an acute warning is given. The system provides Collision warning with braking function, see support for the driver's evasive manoeuvres if page 214. there is a risk of collision. ▷ The sensors detect adequate space around An acute warning can be triggered even without the vehicle. a previous advance warning.
Switching on/off System limits The system is automatically activated at the start of each journey. Safety note Warning with avoidance assistance WARNING The system may not respond at all, or may re‐ Display in the instrument cluster spond too late, incorrectly or without justifica‐ tion due to system limitations. There is a risk of If there is a risk of collision with a detected vehi‐ accident or material damage. Observe the in‐ cle or person, a warning symbol is shown in the formation on the system limits and intervene instrument cluster and in the Head-Up Display. actively if necessary. Symbol Action Symbol illuminates red: advance Detection range warning. Brake and increase the distance.
Symbol flashes red and an acoustic signal sounds: acute warning for ob‐ stacles. Brake and perform an evasive ma‐ noeuvre if necessary.
Symbol flashes red and an acoustic signal sounds: acute warning for The detection ability of the system is limited. people. Only objects detected by the system are taken Brake and perform an evasive ma‐ into account. noeuvre if necessary. For this reason, the system may fail to respond or only respond after a delay.
218 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 219
Safety CONTROLS
For example it is possible that the following may these vehicles enter the detection range of the not be detected: system. ▷ Slow-moving vehicle when approaching it at A warning is given at junctions and crossroads if high speed. there is a risk of collision with crossing traffic. ▷ Vehicles suddenly cutting in or braking heav‐ From speeds of approximately 10 km/h, 6 mph, ily. the system provides a two-stage warning of any ▷ Vehicles with an unusual rear appearance. possible risk of collision with vehicles. The timing of these warnings may vary depending on the ▷ Two-wheeled vehicles ahead. current driving situation. System limits of the sensors The Driver Attention Camera in the instrument cluster detects the driver's view behaviour. The For further information: system also checks whether there are any visual ▷ Cameras, see page 47. impairments present. The view behaviour and ▷ Radar sensors, see page 48. visibility conditions also affect the point at which the warnings are issued. Functional limitations The system may have limited functionality in the Safety notes following situations, for example: ▷ On sharp bends. WARNING ▷ When Driving Stability Control Systems are The system does not relieve you of your per‐ limited or deactivated, for example DSC OFF. sonal responsibility to assess the visibility con‐ ▷ Up to 10 seconds after starting the engine ditions and traffic situation correctly. There is a using the Start/Stop button. risk of accident. Adapt your driving style to the traffic conditions. Observe the traffic situation and intervene actively if the situation warrants it. Junction warning with City braking function WARNING Displays and warnings do not relieve you of Principle your personal responsibility. System limitations The system can help to avoid accidents with can mean that warnings or system responses crossing traffic at junctions and crossroads. If an are not issued or are issued too late, incorrectly accident cannot be avoided, the system helps to or without justification. There is a risk of acci‐ reduce the collision speed. dent. Adapt your driving style to the traffic con‐ The system warns of the possible risk of collision ditions. Observe the traffic situation and inter‐ in the urban speed range and brakes automati‐ vene actively if the situation warrants it. cally, as necessary.
General WARNING Sensors record the traffic situation. Due to system limitations, individual functions Vehicles that cross the vehicle's direction of may not work properly when tow-starting/ travel can be detected by the system as soon as towing with activated Intelligent Safety Sys‐ tems. There is a risk of accident. Switch off all
219 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 220
CONTROLS Safety
Intelligent Safety Systems before tow-starting/ configured individually. The individual settings towing. are activated and saved for the current driver profile. As soon as a setting is changed in the menu, all settings in the menu are activated. Overview Press the button repeatedly. Button in the vehicle The setting switches between the following: "ALL ON": all Intelligent Safety Systems are switched on. Basic settings are activated for the sub-functions. "INDIVIDUAL": the Intelligent Safety Systems are switched on according to the individual settings. Some Intelligent Safety Systems cannot be switched off individually.
Intelligent Safety Switching off manually Press and hold the button. Sensors All Intelligent Safety Systems are The system is controlled using the following sen‐ switched off. sors: ▷ Cameras behind the windscreen. Button Status ▷ Front radar sensor. Button illuminates green: all Intelligent ▷ Side radar sensors, front. Safety Systems are switched on. For further information: Button illuminates orange: some Intel‐ Sensors of the vehicle, see page 47. ligent Safety Systems are switched off or are currently not available.
Switching on/off Button does not illuminate: all Intelli‐ gent Safety Systems are switched off. Automatic activation The system is automatically activated at the start Setting the warning time of each journey. 1. "CAR" Switching on manually 2. "Settings" 3. "Driver assistance" Press the button. 4. "Safety and warnings" The menu for the Intelligent Safety Sys‐ 5. "Front-collision warning" tems is shown. 6. Select the desired setting: If all Intelligent Safety Systems were switched off, all systems are now switched on. ▷ "Early" "Configure INDIVIDUAL": depending on the ▷ "Medium" equipment, the Intelligent Safety Systems can be ▷ "Late": only acute warnings are displayed.
220 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 221
Safety CONTROLS
The selected time is saved for the current driver Acute warning with braking function profile. An acute warning is displayed if there is an immi‐ nent risk of a collision with a crossing vehicle. Warning with braking function The driver must intervene personally when an acute warning is given. Where required, the sys‐ Display tem can assist by braking the vehicle automati‐ cally if there is a risk of a collision. General An acute warning can be triggered even without If there is a risk of collision with a detected vehi‐ a previous advance warning. cle, a warning symbol is shown in the instrument cluster and, if applicable, in the Head-Up Display. Brake intervention Symbol Meaning The warning prompts the driver to take action. Risk of collision with crossing vehicle The system can also assist by braking the vehi‐ from right. cle automatically if there is a risk of a collision. The vehicle can be braked to a stop. Risk of collision with crossing vehicle Braking can be discontinued either by pressing from left. the accelerator pedal or by actively moving the steering wheel. Risk of collision with vehicle with un‐ identifiable direction of travel. Object detection may be limited. Take into ac‐ count the detection range limits and the func‐ tional limitations. Display for advance warning The relevant symbol illuminates red: advance System limits warning in the case of vehicles crossing your own direction of travel. Safety note The driver must intervene personally, for exam‐ ple by braking. WARNING The system may not respond at all, or may re‐ Display for acute warning spond too late, incorrectly or without justifica‐ The relevant symbol flashes red and an acoustic tion due to system limitations. There is a risk of signal sounds: acute warning in the case of vehi‐ accident or material damage. Observe the in‐ cles crossing your own direction of travel. formation on the system limits and intervene Brake and take evasive action if necessary. actively if necessary.
Advance warning Upper speed limit An advance warning is displayed, for example if there is an impending risk of a collision with a The system reacts to crossing vehicles if your crossing vehicle. own speed is below approx. 80 km/h, 50 mph. The driver must intervene personally when an advance warning is given.
221 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 222
CONTROLS Safety
Detection range creased number of premature or unjustified warnings and responses.
Person warning with light braking function
Principle The system can help to avoid accidents with pe‐ destrians and cyclists. If an accident cannot be The detection ability of the system is limited. avoided, the system helps to reduce the collision For this reason, the system may fail to respond speed. or only respond after a delay. The system warns of the possible risk of collision in the urban speed range and brakes automati‐ For example it is possible that the following may cally, as necessary. not be detected: ▷ Crossing vehicles concealed by buildings, for General example. Sensors record the traffic situation. ▷ Vehicles suddenly cutting in or braking heav‐ ily. At speeds above approx. 5 km/h, 3 mph, the sys‐ tem warns of the possible risk of collision with ▷ Crossing two-wheeled vehicles. pedestrians and cyclists. ▷ Vehicles with an unusual side appearance. Pedestrians and cyclists are taken into account if they are located within the detection range of the System limits of the sensors system. For further information: ▷ Cameras, see page 47. Safety notes ▷ Radar sensors, see page 48. WARNING Functional limitations The system does not relieve you of your per‐ The system may have limited functionality in the sonal responsibility to assess the visibility con‐ following situations, for example: ditions and traffic situation correctly. There is a ▷ On sharp bends. risk of accident. Adapt your driving style to the traffic conditions. Observe the traffic situation ▷ When Driving Stability Control Systems are and intervene actively if the situation warrants it. limited or deactivated, for example DSC OFF. ▷ Up to 10 seconds after starting the engine using the Start/Stop button. WARNING Sensitivity of the warnings Displays and warnings do not relieve you of your personal responsibility. System limitations The higher the sensitivity of the warning settings, can mean that warnings or system responses for example warning time, the more warnings are are not issued or are issued too late, incorrectly displayed. As a result, there may also be an in‐ or without justification. There is a risk of acci‐
222 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 223
Safety CONTROLS
dent. Adapt your driving style to the traffic con‐ Detection range ditions. Observe the traffic situation and inter‐ vene actively if the situation warrants it.
WARNING Due to system limitations, individual functions may not work properly when tow-starting/ towing with activated Intelligent Safety Sys‐ tems. There is a risk of accident. Switch off all Intelligent Safety Systems before tow-starting/ The detection zone in front of the vehicle con‐ towing. sists of two parts: ▷ Central zone, arrow 1, directly in front of the Overview vehicle. ▷ Extended zone, arrows 2, to the right and left Button in the vehicle of the central area. There is a risk of collision if persons are in the central zone. A warning is only given of persons in the extended zone if they are moving towards the central zone.
Switching on/off
Automatic activation The system is automatically activated at the start Intelligent Safety of each journey.
Switching on manually Sensors Press the button. The system is controlled using the following sen‐ sors: The menu for the Intelligent Safety Sys‐ tems is shown. ▷ Cameras behind the windscreen. If all Intelligent Safety Systems were switched ▷ With radar sensor: front radar sensor. off, all systems are now switched on. For further information: "Configure INDIVIDUAL": depending on the Sensors of the vehicle, see page 47. equipment, the Intelligent Safety Systems can be configured individually. The individual settings are activated and saved for the current driver profile. As soon as a setting is changed in the menu, all settings in the menu are activated.
Press the button repeatedly.
223 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 224
CONTROLS Safety
The setting switches between the following: Brake intervention "ALL ON": all Intelligent Safety Systems are The warning prompts the driver to take action. If switched on. Basic settings are activated for the the brake is operated during a warning, maximum sub-functions. braking force will be applied. Braking force assis‐ "INDIVIDUAL": the Intelligent Safety Systems are tance requires that the brake pedal is depressed switched on according to the individual settings. sufficiently quickly and firmly beforehand. Some Intelligent Safety Systems cannot be In addition, the system can assist with a brake in‐ switched off individually. tervention if there is the risk of a collision. At low speeds, the vehicle can be braked to a Switching off manually stop. Braking can be discontinued either by pressing Press and hold the button. the accelerator pedal or by actively moving the All Intelligent Safety Systems are steering wheel. switched off. Object detection may be limited. Take into ac‐ count the detection range limits and the func‐ Button Status tional limitations. Button illuminates green: all Intelligent Safety Systems are switched on. System limits
Button illuminates orange: some Intel‐ Safety note ligent Safety Systems are switched off or are currently not available. WARNING Button does not illuminate: all Intelli‐ gent Safety Systems are switched off. The system may not respond at all, or may re‐ spond too late, incorrectly or without justifica‐ tion due to system limitations. There is a risk of Warning with braking function accident or material damage. Observe the in‐ formation on the system limits and intervene Display actively if necessary. If there is a risk of collision with a detected pe‐ destrian or a cyclist, a warning symbol is shown in the instrument cluster and, where applicable, Upper speed limit in the Head-Up Display. The system reacts to pedestrians and cyclists if A red symbol is displayed and an acous‐ your own speed is below approx. 80 km/h, tic warning sounds. 50 mph.
Alternatively, depending on the equip‐ Detection range ment, a red warning triangle illuminates in The detection ability of the system is limited. the instrument cluster. As a result, the system may fail to give warnings or may give warnings late. Take action yourself immediately by braking or swerving. For example it is possible that the following may not be detected: ▷ Partially concealed pedestrians.
224 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 225
Safety CONTROLS
▷ Pedestrians who are not detected as such only by vibrating but also with a brief active steer‐ due to the viewing angle or outline. ing intervention. The system thereby helps to ▷ Pedestrians outside the detection range. keep the vehicle in lane. ▷ Pedestrians less than approximately 80 cm, 32 in tall. Safety notes
System limits of the sensors WARNING For further information: The system does not relieve you of your per‐ ▷ Cameras, see page 47. sonal responsibility to assess the layout of the road and the traffic situation. There is a risk of ▷ Radar sensors, see page 48. accident. Adapt your driving style to the traffic conditions. Observe the traffic situation and in‐ Functional limitations tervene actively if the situation warrants it. In The system may have limited functionality or the event of a warning, do not move the steer‐ may not be available at all in the following situa‐ ing wheel unnecessarily abruptly. tions, for example: ▷ If vehicle stability control systems are deacti‐ vated, for example DSC OFF. WARNING ▷ Up to 10 seconds after starting the engine Displays and warnings do not relieve you of using the start/stop button. your personal responsibility. System limitations can mean that warnings or system responses are not issued or are issued too late, incorrectly Lane Departure Warning or without justification. There is a risk of acci‐ dent. Adapt your driving style to the traffic con‐ Principle ditions. Observe the traffic situation and inter‐ vene actively if the situation warrants it. The Lane Departure Warning issues a warning if the vehicle leaves the road or its lane. Operating requirements General The lane marking must be detected by the cam‐ This camera-based system warns once a mini‐ era in order for the Lane Departure Warning to mum speed has been reached. be active. The minimum speed is country-specific and is displayed in the menu for the Intelligent Safety Systems. Warnings are issued in the form of steering wheel vibrations. The strength of the steering wheel vibration can be adjusted. The system does not issue a warning if the driver indicates in the corresponding direction before leaving the driving lane. Depending on the equipment, if a lane marking is crossed in the speed range up to 210 km/h, ap‐ prox. 130 mph, the system may intervene not
225 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 226
CONTROLS Safety
Overview are activated and saved for the current driver profile. As soon as a setting is changed in the Button in the vehicle menu, all settings in the menu are activated.
Press the button repeatedly. The setting switches between the following: "ALL ON": all Intelligent Safety Systems are switched on. Basic settings are activated for the sub-functions. "INDIVIDUAL": the Intelligent Safety Systems are switched on according to the individual settings.
Intelligent Safety Some Intelligent Safety Systems cannot be switched off individually.
Sensors Switching off manually The system is controlled using the following sen‐ Press and hold the button. sors: All Intelligent Safety Systems are ▷ Cameras behind the windscreen. switched off. For further information: Sensors of the vehicle, see page 47. Button Status Button illuminates green: all Intelligent Switching on/off Safety Systems are switched on.
Automatic activation Button illuminates orange: some Intel‐ ligent Safety Systems are switched Lane Departure Warning is activated automati‐ off or are currently not available. cally at the start of a journey if the function was switched on the last time the engine was stop‐ Button does not illuminate: all Intelli‐ ped. gent Safety Systems are switched off. Depending on the national-market version, the system is automatically activated at the start of Setting the warning time each journey. The basic setting is activated. 1. "CAR" Switching on manually 2. "Settings" 3. "Driver assistance" Press the button. 4. "Safety and warnings" The menu for the Intelligent Safety Sys‐ tems is shown. 5. "Lane departure warning" If all Intelligent Safety Systems were switched 6. Select the desired setting: off, all systems are now switched on. ▷ "Early" "Configure INDIVIDUAL": depending on the ▷ "Medium" equipment, the Intelligent Safety Systems can be ▷ "Reduced": depending on the situation, configured individually. The individual settings some warnings are suppressed, for exam‐
226 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 227
Safety CONTROLS
ple during overtaking manoeuvres without Warning function using turn indicators or when deliberately crossing lane markings on bends. When leaving the lane ▷ "Off": no warnings are given. If the vehicle leaves the lane and the lane mark‐ The selected setting is saved for the current ing is detected, the steering wheel vibrates de‐ driver profile. pending on the steering wheel vibration setting. If the turn indicator is switched on in the corre‐ Adjusting the strength of the sponding direction before changing lanes, no steering wheel vibration warning is issued. 1. "CAR" 2. "Settings" Steering intervention 3. "Driver assistance" Depending on the equipment, if a lane marking is crossed in the speed range up to 210 km/h, ap‐ 4. "Feedback via steering wheel" prox. 130 mph, the system may intervene not 5. "Vibration intensity" only by vibrating but also with a brief active steer‐ 6. Select the desired setting. ing intervention. The steering intervention helps to keep the vehicle in lane. Steering intervention The setting is accepted for all Intelligent Safety can be felt at the steering wheel, and can be Systems and saved for the current driver profile. overridden manually at any time. With active steering intervention, the display flashes in the Switching steering intervention instrument cluster. on/off Steering intervention can be separately switched Warning signal on and off for Lane Change Warning or Lane De‐ Depending on the equipment, if the system exe‐ parture Warning. cutes an active steering intervention multiple 1. "CAR" times within 3 minutes without the driver touch‐ 2. "Settings" ing the steering wheel, an acoustic warning is emitted. A short warning signal sounds on the 3. "Driver assistance" second steering intervention. A longer warning 4. "Safety and warnings" signal sounds from the third steering intervention 5. "Lane departure warning" onwards. 6. "Steering intervention" A Check Control message is also displayed. The selected setting is saved for the current The warning signal and Check Control message driver profile. tell the driver to pay more attention to the lane.
Display in the instrument cluster When towing a trailer There is no steering intervention when the trailer The symbol is illuminated green: a lane socket is in use, for example when operating with marking has been detected on at least a trailer or bicycle carrier. one side of the vehicle and warnings can be issued. Cancellation of the warning For example, the warning is cancelled in the following situations:
227 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 228
CONTROLS Safety
▷ Automatically after a few seconds. Lane Change Warning ▷ On returning to the correct lane. ▷ If the vehicle is braking heavily. Principle ▷ On indicating. Lane Change Warning detects vehicles in the ▷ If Dynamic Stability Control DSC intervenes. blind spot, or if vehicles are approaching from behind in the adjacent lane. Different levels of System limits warning are given in these situations.
Safety note General
WARNING The system may not respond at all, or may re‐ spond too late, incorrectly or without justifica‐ tion due to system limitations. There is a risk of accident or material damage. Observe the in‐ formation on the system limits and intervene actively if necessary.
Operational from a minimum speed, radar sen‐ System limits of the sensors sors monitor the area behind and adjacent to the For further information: vehicle. ▷ Cameras, see page 47. The minimum speed is country-specific and is displayed in the menu for the Intelligent Safety Functional limitations Systems. The system may have limited functionality in the The system indicates when vehicles are in the following situations, for example: blind spot, arrow 1, or are approaching from the rear in an adjacent lane, arrow 2. ▷ When there are missing, worn, poorly visible, merging/separating or ambiguous lane mark‐ The light in the exterior mirror illuminates at a ings; for example, in areas where there are dimmed level. roadworks. Before changing lanes with the turn indicator ▷ If lane markings are covered by snow, ice, dirt switched on, the system issues a warning in the or water. above situations. ▷ On sharp bends or narrow roads. The light in the exterior mirror flashes and the steering wheel vibrates. ▷ If lane markings are not white. ▷ If lane markings are obscured by objects. Vehicles with side collision warning: at speeds of ▷ If the vehicle is too close to the vehicle ahead. up to 210 km/h, 130 mph, the system can re‐ spond with a brief active steering intervention ▷ Up to 10 seconds after starting the engine and thus help to return the vehicle to its lane. using the Start/Stop button. The steering intervention is carried out above a A Check Control message may be displayed in minimum speed. This minimum speed is shown the event of limited functionality. on the Control Display in the steering interven‐ tion menu.
228 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 229
Safety CONTROLS
Safety notes Switching on/off
Automatic activation WARNING The Lane Change Warning is reactivated auto‐ The system does not relieve you of your per‐ matically at the start of a journey if the function sonal responsibility to assess the visibility con‐ was switched on the last time the engine was ditions and traffic situation correctly. There is a stopped. risk of accident. Adapt your driving style to the traffic conditions. Observe the traffic situation and intervene actively if the situation warrants it. Switching on manually Press the button. The menu for the Intelligent Safety Sys‐ WARNING tems is shown. Displays and warnings do not relieve you of If all Intelligent Safety Systems were switched your personal responsibility. System limitations off, all systems are now switched on. can mean that warnings or system responses "Configure INDIVIDUAL": depending on the are not issued or are issued too late, incorrectly equipment, the Intelligent Safety Systems can be or without justification. There is a risk of acci‐ configured individually. The individual settings dent. Adapt your driving style to the traffic con‐ are activated and saved for the current driver ditions. Observe the traffic situation and inter‐ profile. As soon as a setting is changed in the vene actively if the situation warrants it. menu, all settings in the menu are activated.
Press the button repeatedly. Overview The setting switches between the following: Button in the vehicle "ALL ON": all Intelligent Safety Systems are switched on. Basic settings are activated for the sub-functions. "INDIVIDUAL": the Intelligent Safety Systems are switched on according to the individual settings. Some Intelligent Safety Systems cannot be switched off individually.
Switching off manually Intelligent Safety Press and hold the button. All Intelligent Safety Systems are switched off. Sensors The system is controlled using the following sen‐ sors: ▷ Side radar sensors, rear. For further information: Sensors of the vehicle, see page 47.
229 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 230
CONTROLS Safety
Button Status Vehicles with side collision warning: steering intervention on/off Button illuminates green: all Intelligent Safety Systems are switched on. Steering intervention can be separately switched on and off for Lane Change Warning or Lane De‐ Button illuminates orange: some Intel‐ parture Warning. ligent Safety Systems are switched 1. "CAR" off or are currently not available. 2. "Settings" Button does not illuminate: all Intelli‐ 3. "Driver assistance" gent Safety Systems are switched off. 4. "Safety and warnings" Setting the warning time 5. "Lane change warning" 1. "CAR" 6. "Steering intervention" 2. "Settings" The setting is saved for the current driver profile. 3. "Driver assistance" Warning function 4. "Safety and warnings" 5. "Lane change warning" Light in the exterior mirror 6. Select the desired setting: ▷ "Early" ▷ "Medium" ▷ "Late" ▷ "Off": no warning is output for this setting. The setting is saved for the current driver profile.
Adjusting the strength of the steering wheel vibration 1. "CAR" Advance warning 2. "Settings" The dimmed light in the exterior mirror indicates when vehicles are in the blind spot or are ap‐ 3. "Driver assistance" proaching from the rear. 4. "Feedback via steering wheel" 5. "Vibration intensity" Acute warning 6. Select the desired setting. If the turn indicator is activated while a vehicle is The setting is accepted for all Intelligent Safety in the critical area, the steering wheel vibrates Systems and saved for the current driver profile. briefly and the light in the exterior mirror flashes brightly. The warning is terminated when the other vehi‐ cle has left the critical area or the turn signal has been deactivated.
230 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 231
Safety CONTROLS
Vehicles with side collision warning ▷ If the speed of the approaching vehicle is sig‐ If there is no response to the steering wheel vi‐ nificantly higher than the driver's own speed. brating and a lane marking is crossed at speeds ▷ On sharp bends or narrow roads. of up to 210 km/h, 130 mph, the system re‐ ▷ If the bumper is dirty, iced up or covered, sponds if necessary with a brief active steering for example by stickers. intervention. The steering intervention helps to In vehicles with side collision warning, the steer‐ return the vehicle to its lane. Steering interven‐ ing intervention may be limited in the following tion can be felt at the steering wheel, and can be situations, for example: overridden manually at any time. ▷ When there are missing, worn, poorly visible, Flashing of light merging/separating or ambiguous lane mark‐ ings; for example, in areas where there are A flashing light when the vehicle is unlocked indi‐ roadworks. cates that the system is performing a self-test. ▷ If lane markings are covered by snow, ice, dirt System limits or water. ▷ If lane markings are not white. Safety note ▷ If lane markings are obscured by objects. ▷ If the vehicle is too close to the vehicle ahead. WARNING ▷ If the camera is impaired. The system may not respond at all, or may re‐ ▷ Up to 10 seconds after starting the engine spond too late, incorrectly or without justifica‐ using the Start/Stop button. tion due to system limitations. There is a risk of A Check Control message is displayed in the accident or material damage. Observe the in‐ event of limited functionality. formation on the system limits and intervene The system cannot be switched on when the actively if necessary. trailer socket is in use, for example when operat‐ ing with a trailer or bicycle carrier. A Check Con‐ Upper speed limit trol message is shown. The system is temporarily disabled at speeds Warning displays over approx. 250 km/h, 155 mph. Depending on the selected setting for warnings, At speeds below approx. 250 km/h, 155 mph, for example the warning time, it is possible that the system once again responds according to more or fewer warnings will be displayed. As a the setting. result, there may also be an increased number of premature warnings about critical situations. System limits of the sensors For further information: ▷ Radar sensors, see page 48. Side collision warning ▷ For vehicles with side-collision warning: cam‐ eras, see page 47. Principle The system helps to avoid potential side colli‐ Functional limitations sions. The system may have limited functionality in the following situations, for example:
231 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 232
CONTROLS Safety
General or without justification. There is a risk of acci‐ dent. Adapt your driving style to the traffic con‐ ditions. Observe the traffic situation and inter‐ vene actively if the situation warrants it.
Operating requirements The lane markings must be detected by the camera in order for the side collision warning with steering intervention to be active.
Radar sensors monitor the area adjacent to the Overview vehicle from a minimum speed up to approxi‐ mately 210 km/h, 130 mph. Button in the vehicle The minimum speed is country-specific and is displayed in the menu for the Intelligent Safety Systems. A front camera detects the position of the lane markings. If another vehicle is detected adjacent to the ve‐ hicle – for example, with the potential of a side collision – the system helps the driver to avoid a collision. For this purpose, the system issues a warning in the form of the LED on the exterior mirror flashing and the steering wheel vibrating. Intelligent Safety The system may execute an active steering in‐ tervention. Sensors The system is controlled using the following sen‐ Safety notes sors: ▷ Cameras behind the windscreen. WARNING ▷ Side radar sensors, front. The system does not relieve you of your per‐ ▷ Side radar sensors, rear. sonal responsibility to assess the visibility con‐ ditions and traffic situation correctly. There is a For further information: risk of accident. Adapt your driving style to the Sensors of the vehicle, see page 47. traffic conditions. Observe the traffic situation and intervene actively if the situation warrants it. Switching on/off
Automatic activation WARNING The side collision warning is activated automati‐ Displays and warnings do not relieve you of cally at the start of a journey if the function was your personal responsibility. System limitations switched on the last time the engine was stop‐ can mean that warnings or system responses ped. are not issued or are issued too late, incorrectly 232 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 233
Safety CONTROLS
Switching on manually Adjusting the strength of the Press the button. steering wheel vibration The menu for the Intelligent Safety Sys‐ 1. "CAR" tems is shown. 2. "Settings" If all Intelligent Safety Systems were switched 3. "Driver assistance" off, all systems are now switched on. 4. "Feedback via steering wheel" "Configure INDIVIDUAL": depending on the 5. "Vibration intensity" equipment, the Intelligent Safety Systems can be 6. Select the desired setting. configured individually. The individual settings are activated and saved for the current driver The setting is accepted for all Intelligent Safety profile. As soon as a setting is changed in the Systems and saved for the current driver profile. menu, all settings in the menu are activated. Warning function Press the button repeatedly. The setting switches between the Light in the exterior mirror following: "ALL ON": all Intelligent Safety Systems are switched on. Basic settings are activated for the sub-functions. "INDIVIDUAL": the Intelligent Safety Systems are switched on according to the individual settings. Some Intelligent Safety Systems cannot be switched off individually.
Switching off manually Acute warning Press and hold the button. In the event of imminent collision danger, the All Intelligent Safety Systems are light in the exterior mirror flashes and the steer‐ switched off. ing wheel starts vibrating. A Check Control message is displayed at the Button Status same time.
Button illuminates green: all Intelligent An active steering intervention may be executed Safety Systems are switched on. to avoid the collision and to keep the vehicle safely within its lane. Button illuminates orange: some Intel‐ Steering intervention can be felt at the steering ligent Safety Systems are switched wheel, and can be overridden manually at any off or are currently not available. time. Button does not illuminate: all Intelli‐ gent Safety Systems are switched off.
233 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 234
CONTROLS Safety
System limits Rear collision prevention Safety note Principle The system responds to vehicles approaching WARNING from behind. The system may not respond at all, or may re‐ spond too late, incorrectly or without justifica‐ General tion due to system limitations. There is a risk of accident or material damage. Observe the in‐ formation on the system limits and intervene actively if necessary.
System limits of the sensors For further information: ▷ Cameras, see page 47.
▷ Radar sensors, see page 48. Radar sensors monitor the area behind the vehi‐ cle. Functional limitations If a vehicle is approaching from behind at a rele‐ The system may have limited functionality in the vant speed, the system responds as follows: following situations, for example: ▷ The hazard warning lights are switched on to ▷ If the speed of the approaching vehicle is sig‐ warn the traffic behind if there is a risk of a nificantly higher than the driver's own speed. rear collision. ▷ On sharp bends or narrow roads. ▷ Active Protection: if a collision appears un‐ ▷ When there are missing, worn, poorly visible, avoidable, PreCrash functions are triggered. merging/separating or ambiguous lane mark‐ ings; for example, in areas where there are roadworks. Safety notes ▷ If lane markings are covered by snow, ice, dirt or water. WARNING ▷ If lane markings are not white. The system does not relieve you of your per‐ ▷ If lane markings are obscured by objects. sonal responsibility to assess the visibility con‐ ditions and traffic situation correctly. There is a ▷ If the vehicle is too close to the vehicle ahead. risk of accident. Adapt your driving style to the ▷ Up to 10 seconds after starting the engine traffic conditions. Observe the traffic situation using the Start/Stop button. and intervene actively if the situation warrants it. A Check Control message is displayed in the event of limited functionality. The system cannot be switched on when the trailer socket is in use, for example when operat‐ ing with a trailer or bicycle carrier. A Check Con‐ trol message is shown.
234 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 235
Safety CONTROLS
Road priority warning WARNING Displays and warnings do not relieve you of Principle your personal responsibility. System limitations can mean that warnings or system responses The system provides support in situations where are not issued or are issued too late, incorrectly signs or light signal systems indicate that the or without justification. There is a risk of acci‐ driver must give way. dent. Adapt your driving style to the traffic con‐ ditions. Observe the traffic situation and inter‐ General vene actively if the situation warrants it. The system uses a camera to evaluate the road signs and light signal systems. Overview The navigation system forwards information re‐ garding the route to the system. Sensors A warning is given if a right-of-way is about to be violated in the following traffic situations, for ex‐ The system is controlled using the following sen‐ ample: sors: ▷ At a junction. ▷ Side radar sensors, rear. ▷ At a T-junction. For further information: ▷ On a slip road. Sensors of the vehicle, see page 47. ▷ At a roundabout. Switching on/off ▷ In the event of a red traffic light. The system is automatically activated at the start Starting from a variable minimum speed, the sys‐ of each journey. tem issues warnings up to approximately 75 km/h, approx. 47 mph. The system is deactivated in the following situa‐ tions: Safety notes ▷ When reversing. ▷ If the trailer socket is occupied, for example when operating with a trailer or bicycle carrier. WARNING The system does not relieve you of your per‐ System limits sonal responsibility to assess the visibility con‐ ditions and traffic situation correctly. There is a System limits of the sensors risk of accident. Adapt your driving style to the traffic conditions. Observe the traffic situation For further information: and intervene actively if the situation warrants it. ▷ Radar sensors, see page 48.
Functional limitations WARNING The system may have limited functionality in the Displays and warnings do not relieve you of following situations: your personal responsibility. System limitations ▷ If the speed of the approaching vehicle is sig‐ can mean that warnings or system responses nificantly higher than the driver's own speed. are not issued or are issued too late, incorrectly ▷ If the approaching vehicle is travelling slowly. or without justification. There is a risk of acci‐
235 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 236
CONTROLS Safety
dent. Adapt your driving style to the traffic con‐ The menu for the Intelligent Safety Systems is ditions. Observe the traffic situation and inter‐ shown. vene actively if the situation warrants it. If all Intelligent Safety Systems were switched off, all systems are now switched on. Operating requirements "Configure INDIVIDUAL": depending on the equipment, the Intelligent Safety Systems can be The road priority situation must be unambigu‐ configured individually. The individual settings ously directed by road signs or light signal sys‐ are activated and saved for the current driver tems. profile. As soon as a setting is changed in the menu, all settings in the menu are activated. Overview Press the button repeatedly. Button in the vehicle The setting switches between the following: "ALL ON": all Intelligent Safety Systems are switched on. Basic settings are activated for the sub-functions. "INDIVIDUAL": the Intelligent Safety Systems are switched on according to the individual settings. Some Intelligent Safety Systems cannot be switched off individually.
Intelligent Safety Switching off manually Press and hold the button. Sensors All Intelligent Safety Systems are The system is controlled using the following sen‐ switched off. sors: ▷ Cameras behind the windscreen. Button Status For further information: Button illuminates green: all Intelligent Sensors of the vehicle, see page 47. Safety Systems are switched on. Button illuminates orange: some Intel‐ Switching on/off ligent Safety Systems are switched off or are currently not available. Automatic activation Button does not illuminate: all Intelli‐ The road priority warning is activated automati‐ gent Safety Systems are switched off. cally at the start of a journey if the function was switched on the last time the engine was stop‐ ped. Setting the warning time 1. "CAR" Switching on manually 2. "Settings" Press the button. 3. "Driver assistance"
236 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 237
Safety CONTROLS
4. "Safety and warnings" Advance warning 5. "Give way warning" If there is a risk that road priority is about to be 6. Select the desired setting: ignored, one of the following symbols appears in the instrument cluster: ▷ "Early" ▷ "Medium" Symbol Meaning ▷ "Late": only acute warnings are displayed. Give way. ▷ "Off": no warnings are displayed. The selected setting is saved for the current driver profile.
Warning function Stop.
General The system warns in two stages: ▷ Advance warning: visually by means of a Red traffic light. warning symbol in the instrument cluster. ▷ Acute warning: visually by means of a warning symbol in the instrument cluster and with an additional acoustic signal. The timing of the warnings may vary depending on the current driving situation and the set warn‐ When a prior warning is issued, intervene as ap‐ ing time. propriate for the situation; for example, by brak‐ The following road signs are taken into account ing. for the road priority warning: Acute warning Signs Meaning If there is a serious risk that road priority is about Give way signs: to be ignored, a signal sounds and one of the These signs trigger an ad‐ following symbols appears in the instrument vance warning. cluster: Symbol Meaning
Stop signs. Stop. These signs trigger an ad‐ vance warning and an acute warning.
An advance warning and an Red traffic light. acute warning are triggered by red traffic lights.
237 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 238
CONTROLS Safety
When an acute warning is issued, immediately ▷ If road signs or light signal systems are diffi‐ intervene as appropriate for the situation; for ex‐ cult to read or rotated. ample, by braking. ▷ If road signs or light signal systems are too small or too large. Display in the Head-Up Display ▷ If traffic signs do not correspond to the stand‐ Depending on the equipment version, the warn‐ ard. ing is displayed in the Head-Up Display at the ▷ If road signs are detected that apply to a junc‐ same time as in the instrument cluster. tion or parallel road. System limits ▷ If the signs or road layouts are specific to one country. Safety note ▷ At crossings with flashing light signal sys‐ tems. ▷ Up to 10 seconds after starting the engine WARNING using the Start/Stop button. The system may not respond at all, or may re‐ ▷ In the case of navigation data that is invalid, spond too late, incorrectly or without justifica‐ outdated or not available. tion due to system limitations. There is a risk of accident or material damage. Observe the in‐ ▷ The system may not be available or may only formation on the system limits and intervene be available to a limited extent is some coun‐ actively if necessary. tries.
No Warning Wrong-way driving warning The system provides no warning in the following situations, for example: Principle ▷ In road priority situations without “Give Way” The system issues a warning if you are about to signs, “Stop” signs or red light signal sys‐ drive the wrong way, for example on motorways, tems. roundabouts and one-way streets. ▷ At crossings with light signal systems that il‐ A warning is shown in the instrument cluster and, luminate yellow or green. where applicable, in the Head-Up Display and an acoustic signal sounds as soon as a road is en‐ System limits of the sensors tered in the wrong direction of travel. For further information: General ▷ Cameras, see page 47. Depending on the vehicle equipment, the sys‐ Function restriction tem will check the traffic situation based on navi‐ gation data and road signs. The system may have limited functionality in the following situations, for example: The system will take into account road signs such as the following: ▷ If signs or light signal systems are unclear. ▷ No entry. ▷ If road signs or light signal systems are fully or partially concealed or soiled. ▷ Roundabout. ▷ Direction arrows: keep right/left signs.
238 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 239
Safety CONTROLS
Safety notes Sensors The system is controlled using the following sen‐ WARNING sors: The system does not relieve you of your per‐ ▷ Cameras behind the windscreen. sonal responsibility to assess the visibility con‐ For further information: ditions and traffic situation correctly. There is a Sensors of the vehicle, see page 47. risk of accident. Adapt your driving style to the traffic conditions. Observe the traffic situation Switching on/off and intervene actively if the situation warrants it. Automatic activation The wrong-way driving warning is automatically WARNING activated at the start of each journey. Displays and warnings do not relieve you of your personal responsibility. System limitations Switching off manually can mean that warnings or system responses If all Intelligent Safety Systems are switched off are not issued or are issued too late, incorrectly together via the button, the wrong-way driving or without justification. There is a risk of acci‐ warning is also switched off. dent. Adapt your driving style to the traffic con‐ ditions. Observe the traffic situation and inter‐ Press and hold the button. vene actively if the situation warrants it. The wrong-way driving warning and all Intelligent Safety Systems are switched off.
Operating requirements Button Status The road layout ahead must be unambiguously Button illuminates green: all Intelligent indicated by road signs. Safety Systems are switched on. Overview Button illuminates orange: some Intel‐ ligent Safety Systems are switched Button in the vehicle off or are currently not available. Button does not illuminate: all Intelli‐ gent Safety Systems are switched off.
Warning function A warning is shown in the instrument cluster and, where applicable, in the Head-Up Display and an acoustic signal sounds as soon as a motorway, roundabout or one-way street is entered in the wrong direction Intelligent Safety of travel.
239 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 240
CONTROLS Safety
System limits ▷ It may not be possible to use the system in all countries. Safety note If your vehicle is equipped WARNING with the Emergency Stop The system may not respond at all, or may re‐ spond too late, incorrectly or without justifica‐ Assistant tion due to system limitations. There is a risk of accident or material damage. Observe the in‐ Principle formation on the system limits and intervene If the driver is no longer capable of driving, the actively if necessary. system helps to bring the vehicle safely to a standstill. No Warning General The system provides no warning if the road lay‐ out is not indicated by road signs, for example. The emergency stop function is not triggered automatically. The emergency stop function can System limits of the sensors only be triggered manually by the vehicle occu‐ pants. For further information: If the system is activated, the vehicle is brought ▷ Cameras, see page 47. to a standstill within its own lane by means of tracking. Functional limitations Depending on the vehicle's equipment and na‐ The system may have limited functionality, or tional-market version, the system may have a give no warnings at all, in situations such as the lane change function. following: With lane change function: on motorways or sim‐ ▷ If the road signs are ambiguous. ilar roads, the system steers the vehicle to the ▷ If the road signs are fully or partially covered hard shoulder if possible. On other roads or in or soiled. heavy traffic, the vehicle is brought to a standstill ▷ If the road signs are poorly visible or twisted. in the lane it is currently in. ▷ If the road signs are too small or too large. Overview ▷ If traffic signs do not correspond to the stand‐ ard. ▷ If road signs are detected that apply to a junc‐ tion or parallel road. ▷ If the signs or road layouts are specific to one country. ▷ Up to 10 seconds after starting the engine using the Start/Stop button. ▷ In the case of navigation data that is invalid, outdated or not available. Parking brake
240 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 241
Safety CONTROLS
Operating requirements ▷ When the selector lever position is changed while at a standstill. ▷ The function can be activated at speeds of. 10 km/h, approx. 6 mph to approx. 250 km/h, ▷ When the driver's foot is still on the accelera‐ approx. 155 mph. tor pedal when the function is triggered. ▷ Lane changes to other driving lanes are car‐ ▷ When the parking brake switch is pressed. ried out at speeds from approximately 70 km/h, 43 mph to approximately 100 km/h, When the vehicle is at a standstill 62 mph. As soon as the vehicle is at a standstill, the sys‐ ▷ Lane changes to the hard shoulder are car‐ tem configures the following settings: ried out at speeds from approximately ▷ Selector lever position P is engaged. 35 km/h, 22 mph to approximately 40 km/h, ▷ Parking brake is applied. 25 mph. ▷ Interior light is switched on. Activating the emergency stop ▷ Central locking system is unlocked. function Displays in the instrument Briefly press the switch for the parking brake to activate the emergency stop func‐ cluster tion. Symbol Status ▷ With lane change function: when the switch is released, an automatic lane change is trig‐ Emergency stop function active. gered if necessary. ▷ The system takes over vehicle control for a maximum of 2 minutes. Without lane change function: ▷ The hazard warning lights are switched on. Symbol Status ▷ An emergency call is triggered. Steering wheel symbol green: Cancelling the emergency stop If lane boundaries are detected, the system keeps the vehicle in the lane. function At any time during the process, the driver can Steering wheel symbol grey: cancel the emergency stop function by actively Lane tracking interrupted briefly. taking control of the vehicle. Steering wheel symbol yellow: For example, the emergency stop function can be cancelled in the following situations: Lane marking driven over. ▷ When steering. If lane boundaries are detected, the system keeps the vehicle in the lane. ▷ On indicating. ▷ When accelerating. Steering wheel symbol yellow: ▷ When the hazard warning lights are switched Hands are not around the steering off. wheel. System remains active. ▷ When the emergency call is cancelled.
241 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 242
CONTROLS Safety
Symbol Status ▷ Accelerate. ▷ Press the hazard warning lights button. Red steering wheel symbol, acoustic signal: Hands are not around the steering wheel. Interruption of lane tracking is BMW Drive Recorder imminent. Principle Red steering wheel symbol, acoustic signal: The system saves short video recordings of the vehicle environment in order to document traffic Lane tracking is switched off. conditions, for example. In addition, the following journey parameters are System limits saved: Only use the system if the driver is no longer to ▷ Date. operate the vehicle. ▷ Time. The system cannot replace the kind of perform‐ ▷ Speed. ance that would be delivered by a driver who is capable of driving. ▷ GPS coordinates.
General Dynamic brake lights There are various ways of saving video record‐ ings. Principle ▷ Automatic saving of recordings. The brake lights flash to warn road users behind The function makes it possible to document the vehicle that an emergency braking manoeu‐ the circumstances of an accident. vre is being performed. This can reduce the risk ▷ Manual saving of recordings. of a rear-end collision. The function makes it possible to document General traffic conditions. The system records for up to 20 seconds before and after the save function is activated. Cameras for assistance systems are used, for ex‐ ample Panorama View.
Data protection The reliability of the recording and the use of video recordings depend on the legal regulations in the country where the system is to be used. ▷ Normal braking: brake lights illuminate. The user is responsible for the use of the system and for complying with the provisions that apply ▷ Heavy braking: brake lights flash. in each case. Shortly before the vehicle comes to a standstill, Before using for the first time, the vehicle manu‐ the hazard warning lights are activated. facture recommends checking that there are no To switch off the hazard warning lights: legal or official restrictions on using the system in
242 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 243
Safety CONTROLS
the state or country in question. Additionally, the 3. "Start recording" legality of using the system should be checked To cancel the recording: "Cancel". at regular intervals, especially if the vehicle fre‐ The recording can also be started using the quently crosses borders. widget on the control display. If anyone else drives the vehicle, he/she must be given information about the system. Information Playing and managing recordings about the system must also be provided if the vehicle is passed on to anyone else. Saved video recordings can be played, exported and deleted. Operating requirements For your own safety, the video recording is only shown on the control display if the speed is be‐ ▷ BMW Drive Recorder is activated. low approximately 3 km/h, approx. 2 mph. In the ▷ Privacy Policy has been accepted. case of some national-market versions, the video ▷ Recording type selected. recording is only shown with the parking brake ▷ Recording duration selected. applied or with the selector lever in position P. 1. "Apps" Activating/deactivating 2. "Drive Recorder" The BMW Drive Recorder must be activated be‐ 3. "Saved recordings" fore using the recording function for the first 4. Select the desired recording. time. 5. Select the desired setting: 1. "Apps" ▷ "Play" 2. "Drive Recorder" ▷ "Pause" 3. Accept Privacy Policy. ▷ "Previous" 4. "Settings" ▷ "Next" 5. "Recording allowed" ▷ "Export" 6. Select the desired setting. ▷ "Delete" Recording functions If the cameras switched during the recording, it is possible to select various video sections. Automatic recording Settings The recording is saved automatically when the vehicle sensors detect an accident. General Manual recording Various settings can be made.
Using the button Recording type Press and hold the button. 1. "Apps" 2. "Drive Recorder" 3. "Settings" Via iDrive 4. "RECORDING TYPE" 1. "Apps" 5. Select the desired setting: 2. "Drive Recorder"
243 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 244
CONTROLS Safety
▷ "Manually" General ▷ "Automatically" Active Protection consists of different PreCrash ▷ "Manually" and "Automatically" functions which may vary depending on the equipment installed. Recording duration The system detects critical driving situations 1. "Apps" which could potentially lead to an accident. Such situations include: 2. "Drive Recorder" ▷ Full braking. 3. "Settings" ▷ Severe understeer. 4. Select the desired setting: ▷ Severe oversteer. ▷ "Before trigger" Certain functions of some systems installed in Recording duration before an event. the vehicle can – within the system's limits – ▷ "After trigger" cause Active Protection to trigger: Recording duration after an event. ▷ Collision warning with braking function: auto‐ matic brake application. Cameras ▷ Front-end collision warning with light braking 1. "Apps" function: braking force assistance. 2. "Drive Recorder" ▷ Rear collision prevention: detection of poten‐ 3. "Settings" tial rear collisions. 4. "Camera selection" Safety note 5. Select the desired camera. In the event of an accident, the system switches to "All" cameras automatically. WARNING If driver assistance systems are active, their cam‐ The system does not relieve you of your per‐ era views are selected automatically. sonal responsibility. System limitations may mean that critical situations are not detected System limits reliably or in good time. There is a risk of acci‐ dent. Adapt your driving style to the traffic con‐ In the event of a serious accident, recordings ditions. Observe the traffic situation and inter‐ may not be saved if, for example, the damage to vene actively if the situation warrants it. the vehicle is too extensive or the power supply was interrupted. Function Active Protection If fastened, the driver's and front passenger's seat belts are automatically tensioned when driv‐ ing off. Principle In critical accident situations, the following indi‐ In critical driving or collision situations, Active vidual functions become active as required: Protection prepares the vehicle occupants and ▷ Automatic pre-tensioning of the front seat the vehicle for a potential imminent accident. belts.
244 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 245
Safety CONTROLS
▷ Automatic closing of the windows, leaving Cancelling automatic braking just a small gap. In certain situations, it may be necessary to can‐ ▷ Automatic closing of the panorama glass cel automatic braking, for example for an evasive sunroof, including the sun guard. manoeuvre. ▷ With comfort seat in the front: automatic po‐ Cancel automatic braking: sitioning of the backrest of the front passen‐ ▷ By depressing the brake pedal. ger seat. ▷ By depressing the accelerator pedal. If the critical driving situation passes without an accident occurring, the tension in the front seat belts is slackened again. Attentiveness assistant If the belt tension does not slacken automatically, stop the vehicle and unfasten the seat belt by pressing the red button on the buckle. Fasten General the seat belt again before continuing your jour‐ The system can detect decreasing attentiveness ney. or the onset of fatigue in the driver on long mo‐ All other systems can be restored to the desired notonous journeys, for example on motorways. In setting. such situations, the system recommends taking a break. PostCrash – iBrake Safety note
Principle WARNING The system can automatically bring the vehicle The system does not relieve you of your per‐ to a standstill in certain accident situations with‐ sonal responsibility to assess your physical out the involvement of the driver. The risk of a condition correctly. Increasing inattention or fa‐ further collision and its consequences can tigue might not be detected, or may not be de‐ thereby be reduced. tected in good time. There is a risk of accident. Make sure that you, as the driver, are rested At a standstill and alert. Adapt your driving style to the traffic conditions. Once the vehicle has come to a halt, the brake is released automatically. Function Harder vehicle braking The system is switched on every time drive- In certain situations, it may be necessary to bring ready state is switched on. the vehicle to a standstill more quickly than is After commencement of the journey, the system possible with automatic braking. adapts to the driver so that any decrease in at‐ To do so, brake quickly and firmly. For a brief pe‐ tention or fatigue can be detected. riod, the braking pressure will be higher than that This process considers the following criteria: achieved with the automatic braking function. Automatic braking is interrupted. ▷ Personal driving style, for example steering. ▷ Driving conditions, for example time of day, duration of journey.
245 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 246
CONTROLS Safety
▷ Depending on the vehicle equipment: atten‐ ▷ If the time is set incorrectly. tiveness of the driver through the Driver At‐ ▷ When the speed is predominantly below ap‐ tention Camera. prox. 70 km/h, 43 mph. The system is active from approx. 70 km/h, ▷ If a sporty driving style is adopted, for exam‐ 43 mph and can also display a recommendation ple sharp acceleration or fast cornering. to take a break. ▷ In active driving situations, for example fre‐ quent lane changes. Break recommendations ▷ In poor road conditions. Adjusting ▷ In strong crosswinds. The attentiveness assistant is automatically ac‐ The system is reset approximately 45 minutes tive every time drive-ready state is switched on after the vehicle is stopped, for example when and can thus display break recommendations. taking a break during a long motorway journey. Break recommendations can also be switched on or off and adjusted via iDrive. 1. "CAR" 2. "Settings" 3. "General settings" 4. "Attentiveness Assistant" 5. Select the desired setting: ▷ "Standard": the break recommendation is given with a defined value. ▷ "Sensitive": the break recommendation is given earlier. ▷ "Off": no break recommendation is given.
Display If the driver shows signs of decreasing attentive‐ ness or of fatigue, a message is shown on the Control Display with the recommendation to take a break. The following settings can be selected during the display. After a break, another break recommendation cannot be displayed until after approximately 45 minutes at the earliest.
System limits The system may have limited functionality in sit‐ uations such as the following and an incorrect warning, or no warning at all, may be given:
246 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 247
Driving Stability Control Systems CONTROLS
Driving Stability Control Systems
Vehicle equipment even more quickly when braking in critical situa‐ tions. This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ cific and optional equipment available for the Drive-off assistant model series. It may therefore describe equip‐ ment and functions which are not installed in your vehicle, for example on account of the spe‐ Principle cial equipment selected or the country specifica‐ The system provides support when driving off on tion. This also applies to safety-relevant func‐ upward gradients. tions and systems. Please comply with the relevant laws and regulations when using the Driving off corresponding functions and systems. 1. Hold the vehicle in place with the foot brake. 2. Release the foot brake and drive off without Anti-lock Brake System delay. ABS After the foot brake is released, the vehicle is held in place for approximately 2 seconds. ABS prevents the wheels from locking when the Depending on the vehicle's load or when towing brakes are applied. a trailer, the vehicle may roll backwards a little. Steering control is retained even during full brak‐ ing, which enhances active road safety. Dynamic Stability Control ABS is operational each time the engine is star‐ ted. DSC
Brake assist Principle The system reduces drive power and applies the brakes on individual wheels, thereby helping, When the brake pedal is depressed quickly, the within the limits imposed by physics, to keep the system automatically applies maximum braking vehicle safely on course. power. This keeps the stopping distance as short as possible in full braking situations. The advan‐ tages offered by the Anti-lock Brake System General ABS can also be utilised to the full. DSC detects the following unstable driving con‐ The pressure on the brake should be maintained ditions, for example: for the duration of the full-braking process. ▷ Loss of traction at the rear which can lead to oversteer. ▷ Loss of grip at the front wheels which can Adaptive brake assist lead to understeer.
In conjunction with Active Cruise Control ACC, this system ensures that the brakes respond
247 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 248
CONTROLS Driving Stability Control Systems
Safety notes To assist driving stability, re-activate DSC as soon as possible.
WARNING Deactivating DSC The system does not relieve you of your per‐ Hold the button down until DSC OFF is sonal responsibility to assess the traffic situa‐ displayed in the instrument cluster and tion correctly. Due to system limitations, it can‐ the DSC OFF indicator lamp is illuminated. not respond independently and appropriately in all traffic conditions. There is a risk of accident. Adapt your driving style to the traffic conditions. Activating DSC Observe the traffic situation and intervene ac‐ Press the button. tively if the situation warrants it. DSC OFF and the DSC OFF indicator lamps are extinguished. WARNING When driving with a roof load, for example with Display a roof rack, the higher centre of gravity can mean that driving safety is no longer guaran‐ In the instrument cluster teed in critical driving situations. There is a risk DSC OFF is displayed in the instrument cluster of accident or material damage. Do not deacti‐ when DSC is deactivated. vate Dynamic Stability Control DSC when driv‐ ing with a roof load. Indicator and warning lamps If the indicator lamp is illuminated: DSC is Overview deactivated.
Button in the vehicle If the indicator lamp is flashing: DSC is regulating the acceleration and braking forces. If the indicator lamp is illuminated: DSC has failed.
Dynamic Traction Control DTC
DSC OFF Principle DTC is a variant of Dynamic Stability Control Deactivate/activate DSC DSC and is optimised for forward momentum. In special road conditions, for example on un‐ General cleared, snow-covered roads or on loose surfa‐ ces, the system ensures maximum forward mo‐ Driving stability during acceleration and cornering mentum, but with restricted driving stability. is restricted if DSC is deactivated.
248 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 249
Driving Stability Control Systems CONTROLS
General Display Activating DTC provides maximum traction. Driv‐ ing stability assistance during acceleration and Display in the instrument cluster cornering is limited. When DTC is activated, TRACTION is displayed Activating DTC briefly may be useful in the in the instrument cluster. following situations: ▷ When driving in slush or on uncleared, snow- Indicator and warning lamps covered roads. The indicator lamp is illuminated: DTC ▷ When starting in deep snow or on a loose has been activated. surface. ▷ When driving with snow chains. Automatic program change In certain situations, Dynamic Stability Control Overview DSC is activated automatically: Button in the vehicle ▷ If Active Cruise Control with Stop&Go func‐ tion ACC is activated. ▷ When the Intelligent Safety Systems are braking the vehicle. ▷ In the event of a flat tyre.
xDrive
Principle DSC OFF xDrive is the all-wheel system of the vehicle. The interaction between xDrive and other drive con‐ trol systems, such as Dynamic Stability Control Activate/deactivate DTC DSC, further optimises traction and driving dy‐ namics. xDrive distributes the drive forces varia‐ Activating DTC bly between the front and rear axles according to the driving situation and road surface conditions. Press the button. The Driving Experience Control makes it possi‐ TRACTION is displayed in the instru‐ ble to change the four-wheel drive distribution ment cluster and the DSC OFF indicator lamp is from traction-based to sport-based. illuminated. Efficient4x4 reduces consumption by using the all-wheel drive according to requirements. Deactivating DTC Press the button again. Variable sport steering TRACTION and the DSC OFF indicator light are extinguished. The variable sport steering facilitates a direct and agile driving style with little steering effort. The variable sport steering works independently of
249 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 250
CONTROLS Driving Stability Control Systems
the current speed, varying the steering ratio in line which the steering angle.
250 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 251
Driver Assistance Systems CONTROLS
Driver Assistance Systems
Vehicle equipment Operation
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ Switching on cific and optional equipment available for the Press the button on the steering wheel. model series. It may therefore describe equip‐ ment and functions which are not installed in The current speed is adopted as the speed limit. your vehicle, for example on account of the spe‐ cial equipment selected or the country specifica‐ When switching on at a standstill or driving at low tion. This also applies to safety-relevant func‐ speed, 30 km/h/20 mph is set as the speed limit. tions and systems. Please comply with the The speedometer marker is set to the current relevant laws and regulations when using the speed. corresponding functions and systems. When the speed limit is activated, Dynamic Sta‐ bility Control may be switched on and the driving Manual Speed Limiter mode may be changed. Switching off Principle Press the button on the steering wheel. The system can be used to set a speed limit so that speed restrictions are not exceeded. The system switches off automatically in the following situations, for example: General ▷ When switching the engine off. The system enables speeds from a value of ▷ When switching on Cruise Control. 30 km/h/20 mph and above to be set as a speed limit. Below the set speed limit, the vehicle can ▷ When activating some programs using the be driven without restriction. Driving Experience Control. The displays turn off. Overview Interrupting Buttons on the steering wheel The system is interrupted in reverse or when roll‐ ing backwards at idle speed. Button Function
System on/off.
Store current speed. Speed Limit Assist: adopt the sug‐ gested speed manually.
Rocker switch: Change the speed limit.
251 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 252
CONTROLS Driver Assistance Systems
Change speed limit Warning when the speed limit is exceeded
Visual warning If the speed limit is exceeded: the indica‐ tor lamp in the instrument cluster flashes for as long as you exceed the set speed limit.
Acoustic warning Press the rocker switch repeatedly up or down until the desired speed is set. ▷ A signal sounds if you inadvertently exceed the set speed limit. ▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed to the resistance point, the speed limit is increased ▷ If the speed limit is reduced to below the or decreased by 1 km/h, 1 mph. driven speed during the journey, the warning sounds after a little time. ▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed be‐ yond the resistance point, the speed limit ▷ If you intentionally exceed the speed limit by changes to the next multiple of 10 km/h on fully pressing the accelerator pedal, no warn‐ the km/h display or the next multiple of 5 mph ing sounds. on the mph display in the speedometer. If the set speed limit has been reached or unin‐ Displays in the instrument tentionally exceeded, for example when driving cluster downhill, there is no active brake intervention. If you set a speed during the journey which is be‐ Display in the speedometer low the current speed, the vehicle rolls to the set ▷ Green marker: system is ac‐ speed limit. tive. The current speed can also be stored by press‐ ▷ Grey mark: the system is inter‐ ing the button: rupted. Press the button on the steering wheel. ▷ No marker: system is switched off.
Exceeding the speed limit Indicator lamp The system gives a warning if the travelling ▷ If the indicator lamp is illuminated: the speed exceeds the set speed limit. system is switched on. You can intentionally exceed the speed limit. ▷ If the indicator lamp is flashing: set There is no warning in such a case. speed limit is exceeded. To intentionally exceed the set speed limit, press ▷ Grey indicator lamp: the system is interrup‐ the accelerator pedal all the way down. ted. The limit automatically becomes active again as soon as the current speed falls below the set speed limit.
252 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 253
Driver Assistance Systems CONTROLS
Cruise Control WARNING Principle The desired speed may be set incorrectly by mistake or called up accidentally. There is a risk This system allows a desired speed to be set us‐ of accident. Adjust the desired speed to the ing the buttons on the steering wheel. The de‐ traffic conditions. Observe the traffic situation sired speed is then maintained by the system. It and intervene actively if the situation warrants it. does this by automatically accelerating and brak‐ ing the vehicle as necessary. Overview General The system can be activated from Buttons on the steering wheel 30 km/h/20 mph. Button Function Depending on the vehicle setting, the character‐ istics of Cruise Control may change in certain Cruise Control on/off. areas; for example, acceleration may change de‐ pending on the driving mode.
Safety notes To resume Cruise Control with last setting. WARNING To interrupt Cruise Control. The system does not relieve you of your per‐ sonal responsibility to assess the traffic situa‐ tion correctly. Due to system limitations, it can‐ Store current speed. not respond independently and appropriately in Speed Limit Assist: adopt the sug‐ all traffic conditions. There is a risk of accident. gested speed manually. Adapt your driving style to the traffic conditions. Observe the traffic situation and intervene ac‐ Rocker switch: tively if the situation warrants it. Set the speed.
Switching Cruise Control on/off WARNING The risk of an accident may increase if the sys‐ Switching on tem is used in certain situations, such as: Depending on the equipment, press the ▷ On stretches of road with many corners corresponding button on the steering and bends. wheel. ▷ In heavy traffic. ▷ If the road is icy, if there is fog or snow, in The indicator lamps are illuminated in the instru‐ wet conditions or on a loose road surface. ment cluster and the marker in the speedometer is positioned at the current speed. There is a risk of accident or material damage. Only use the system if it is possible to drive at a Cruise Control is active. The driven speed is constant speed. maintained and stored as the desired speed.
253 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 254
CONTROLS Driver Assistance Systems
Dynamic Stability Control DSC is switched on, if When the system is switched on, the current necessary. speed is maintained and stored as the desired speed. Switching off The stored speed is displayed on the speedom‐ Depending on the equipment, press the eter. corresponding button on the steering Dynamic Stability Control DSC is switched on, if wheel. necessary. The speed can also be stored by pressing the The displays turn off. The stored desired speed button. is deleted. Press the button. Interrupting Cruise Control Changing the speed Interrupting manually Press the button while the system is ac‐ tivated.
Interrupting automatically The system is interrupted automatically in the following situations: ▷ If the driver brakes.
▷ Steptronic transmission: if the selector lever Press the rocker switch repeatedly up or down is moved out of selector lever position D. until the desired speed is set. ▷ If Dynamic Traction Control DTC is activated If the system is active, the displayed speed is or Dynamic Stability Control DSC deactiva‐ stored and the vehicle adjusts to the stored ted. speed when the road is clear. ▷ If Dynamic Stability Control DSC intervenes. ▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed to the resistance point, the desired speed is in‐ Setting the speed creased or decreased by 1 km/h, 1 mph. ▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed be‐ Maintaining and saving the speed yond the resistance point, the desired speed changes to the next multiple of 10 km/h on the km/h display or the next multiple of 5 mph on the mph display in the speedometer. The maximum speed that can be set de‐ pends on the vehicle and the set characteris‐ tics of the hybrid system. ▷ When the rocker switch is pressed to the re‐ sistance point and then held there: the vehi‐ cle accelerates or decelerates without the While the system is interrupted, press the rocker need to press the accelerator pedal. switch up or down once.
254 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 255
Driver Assistance Systems CONTROLS
When the rocker switch is released, the vehi‐ Displays in the Head-Up Display cle maintains the final speed. Pressing be‐ Some information from the system can also be yond the resistance point accelerates the ve‐ shown in the Head-Up Display. hicle more rapidly. The symbol is displayed when the set Resuming Cruise Control desired speed has been reached. If Cruise Control is interrupted, it can be resumed by calling up the stored speed. System limits Before calling up the stored speed, make sure The desired speed is also maintained when driv‐ that the difference between the current speed ing downhill. The vehicle may drive slower than and the stored speed is not too great. Otherwise, the desired speed on uphill gradients if there is there may be unintentional braking or accelera‐ not enough drive power. tion. Depending on the driving mode, it is possible With the system interrupted, press the that the vehicle will drive faster or slower than the button. desired speed setting in some situations; for ex‐ ample, on downward or upward gradients. Cruise Control is resumed with the stored values. In the following instances, the stored speed is deleted and therefore cannot be called up again: Active Cruise Control with ▷ When the system is switched off. Stop&Go function ACC ▷ When drive-ready state is switched off. Principle Displays in the instrument This system allows you to set a desired speed cluster and a desired distance from the vehicle in front, using the buttons on the steering wheel. Display in the speedometer When the road ahead is clear, the system main‐ ▷ Green indicator: system is ac‐ tains the desired speed. The vehicle accelerates tive, the indicator shows the or brakes automatically. desired speed. If there is a vehicle driving in front, the system ▷ Grey mark: system is interrup‐ adapts the speed of your vehicle in order to ted; the mark shows the maintain the set distance from the vehicle ahead. stored speed. The speed is adapted as far as the given situa‐ ▷ No marker: system is switched off. tion allows. General Indicator lamp Depending on the vehicle setting, the character‐ ▷ Green indicator lamp: the system is istics of Cruise Control may change in certain active. areas; for example, acceleration may change de‐ ▷ Grey indicator lamp: the system is in‐ pending on the driving mode. terrupted. The distance can be set in several stages and for ▷ No indicator lamp: the system is switched off. safety reasons is dependent on the respective speed.
255 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 256
CONTROLS Driver Assistance Systems
If the vehicle ahead brakes to a standstill and sets off again shortly afterwards, the system is WARNING able to recognise this as far as the given condi‐ There is a risk of accident if the difference in tions allow. speed relative to other vehicles is excessively high. This may occur, for example, in the Safety notes following situations: ▷ When quickly approaching a slowly mov‐ WARNING ing vehicle. The system does not relieve you of your per‐ ▷ If another vehicle suddenly veers into the sonal responsibility to assess the traffic situa‐ vehicle's own lane. tion correctly. Due to system limitations, it can‐ ▷ When quickly approaching stationary vehi‐ not respond independently and appropriately in cles. all traffic conditions. There is a risk of accident. There is a risk of injury or even death. Observe Adapt your driving style to the traffic conditions. the traffic situation and intervene actively if the Observe the traffic situation and intervene ac‐ situation warrants it. tively if the situation warrants it.
Overview WARNING An unsecured vehicle can start moving and roll‐ Buttons on the steering wheel ing away. There is a risk of accident. Before leaving the vehicle, secure it to prevent it from Button Function rolling away. With steering and lane control assis‐ Observe the following to ensure that the vehi‐ tant: cle is secured against rolling away: Cruise Control on/off. ▷ Apply the parking brake. With steering and lane control assis‐ ▷ Turn the front wheels towards the kerb on tant: upward or downward gradients. Select the function. ▷ Additionally secure the vehicle on upward or downward gradients, for example with a Without steering and lane control as‐ chock. sistant: Cruise Control on/off.
WARNING Store current speed. The desired speed may be set incorrectly by Speed Limit Assist: adopt the sug‐ mistake or called up accidentally. There is a risk gested speed manually. of accident. Adjust the desired speed to the With steering and lane control assis‐ traffic conditions. Observe the traffic situation tant: and intervene actively if the situation warrants it. To interrupt Cruise Control. To resume Cruise Control with last setting.
256 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 257
Driver Assistance Systems CONTROLS
Button Function Switching Cruise Control on/off and interrupting Without steering and lane control as‐ sistant: With steering and lane control To resume Cruise Control with last assistant: Assisted Driving Mode setting.
Without steering and lane control as‐ General sistant: The button is used to switch the set To interrupt Cruise Control. function on and off. Increase the distance. The button is used to set the primary Switch distance control on/off. function. Reduce the distance. Switch distance control on/off. Setting the function
Rocker switch: When the system is active, press the button until the desired function is se‐ Set the speed. lected in the toolbar. The Assisted Driving Mode function bar is shown at the bottom of the instru‐ Sensors ment cluster. The system is controlled using the following sen‐ sors: Symbol Function ▷ Cameras behind the windscreen. Cruise control with distance control. ▷ Front radar sensor. For further information: Depending on equipment, cruise Sensors of the vehicle, see page 47. control with distance control and steering and lane control assistant. Use The system can be used to optimum effect on well-constructed roads. The minimum speed that can be set is The selected function is shown in green. 30 km/h/20 mph. The setting is saved for the current driver profile. The maximum speed which can be set is limited and depends on the vehicle and its equipment, Switching on for example. With steering and lane control assistant: After toggling the Cruise Control without dis‐ tance control, even higher desired speeds can 1. Press the button on the steering be selected when driving with the internal com‐ wheel. bustion engine.
The system can also be activated when the vehi‐ 2. Set Cruise Control if necessary. cle is at a standstill. Without steering and lane control assistant:
257 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 258
CONTROLS Driver Assistance Systems
Press the button on the steering wheel. ▷ If Dynamic Traction Control DTC is activated or Dynamic Stability Control DSC deactiva‐ The indicator lamps are illuminated in the instru‐ ted. ment cluster and the marker in the speedometer ▷ If Dynamic Stability Control DSC intervenes. is positioned at the current speed. ▷ If the vehicle is stationary and the seat belt is Cruise Control is active. The driven speed is unfastened and the driver's door is opened. maintained and stored as the desired speed. ▷ If the system has not detected any objects for Dynamic Stability Control DSC is switched on, if an extended period of time, for example on necessary. roads with little traffic and without defined boundaries. Switching off ▷ If the detection zone of the radar is disrupted, When switching off with the vehicle at a stand‐ for example due to contamination or heavy still, depress the brake pedal at the same time. rainfall. Press the button on the steering wheel: ▷ After an extended stationary period, if the ve‐ hicle was decelerated to a standstill by the With steering and lane control assistant. system.
Without steering and lane control assis‐ Setting the speed tant.
The displays turn off. The stored desired speed Maintaining and saving the speed is deleted.
Interrupting manually With the system active, press the button on the steering wheel: With steering and lane control assistant.
Without steering and lane control assis‐ tant. While the system is interrupted, press the rocker switch up or down once. The system is activa‐ If interrupting the system when the vehicle is at a ted. standstill, depress the brake pedal at the same time. The current speed is maintained and stored as the desired speed. Interrupting automatically The stored speed is displayed on the speedom‐ The system is interrupted automatically in the eter. following situations: Dynamic Stability Control DSC is switched on, if ▷ If the driver brakes. necessary. ▷ If the selector lever is moved out of posi‐ The speed can also be stored by pressing the tion D. button. Press the button.
258 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 259
Driver Assistance Systems CONTROLS
Changing the speed weather conditions and comply with the pre‐ scribed safe distance by braking if necessary.
Reducing the distance Press the button repeatedly until the desired distance is set.
The selected distance is displayed in the instru‐ ment cluster.
Press the rocker switch repeatedly up or down Increasing the distance until the desired speed is set. Press the button repeatedly until the If the system is active, the displayed speed is desired distance is set. stored and the vehicle adjusts to the stored speed when the road is clear. The selected distance is displayed in the instru‐ ment cluster. ▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed to the resistance point, the desired speed is in‐ Adapting distance automatically creased or decreased by 1 km/h, 1 mph. Depending on the equipment and national-mar‐ ▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed be‐ ket version: the system can be configured so that yond the resistance point, the desired speed the distance is adapted automatically within the changes to the next multiple of 10 km/h on set distance setting according to the traffic situa‐ the km/h display or the next multiple of 5 mph tion or environmental factors, for example poor on the mph display in the speedometer. visibility. To repeat an action, hold the rocker switch in the The adaptation of the distance is indicated in the relevant position. instrument cluster display. Adjusting the distance 1. "CAR" 2. "Settings" General 3. "Driver assistance" The distance setting is saved for the current 4. If necessary, "Driving" driver profile. 5. "Speed Assistant" Safety note 6. "Adjust distance acc. to situation" Resuming Cruise Control WARNING If Cruise Control is interrupted, it can be resumed The system does not relieve you of your per‐ by calling up the stored speed. sonal responsibility. System limitations may mean that braking is performed too late. There Before calling up the stored speed, make sure is a risk of accident or material damage. Pay that the difference between the current speed close attention to the traffic conditions at all and the stored speed is not too great. Otherwise, times. Adapt the distance to suit traffic and there may be unintentional braking or accelera‐ tion.
259 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 260
CONTROLS Driver Assistance Systems
With the system interrupted, press the button on the steering wheel: ▷ Press the button. A Check Control message is then displayed. With steering and lane control assistant. Displays in the instrument Without steering and lane control assis‐ tant. cluster
Cruise Control is resumed with the stored values. General In the following instances, the stored speed is Depending on the vehicle's equipment, the dis‐ deleted and therefore cannot be called up again: plays in the instrument cluster may vary. ▷ When the system is switched off. Display in the speedometer ▷ When drive-ready state is switched off. ▷ Green indicator: system is ac‐ Switching between Cruise tive, the indicator shows the Control with/without distance desired speed. control ▷ Grey mark: system is interrup‐ ted; the mark shows the Safety note stored speed. ▷ No marker: system is switched off.
WARNING Vehicle distance The system does not respond to traffic travel‐ ling in front of you, but instead maintains the The selected distance to the vehicle ahead is stored speed. There is a risk of accident or ma‐ displayed. terial damage. Adjust the desired speed to the Symbol Description traffic conditions and brake if necessary. Distance 1.
Switching the Cruise Control mode Switch Cruise Control without distance control on and off: Distance 2. ▷ Press and hold the button.
▷ Press and hold the button. With steering and lane control assistant: switch on distance control: Distance 3. Press the button. Corresponds to approximately half of the value of the speed‐ Without steering and lane control assistant: ometer reading, expressed in switch on distance control: metres. Selected when the sys‐ tem is switched on for the first ▷ Press the button. time.
260 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 261
Driver Assistance Systems CONTROLS
Symbol Description Symbol Description
Distance 4. Grey symbol: System interrupted.
Symbol flashes grey: The requirements for system No display of distance control operation are no longer being because the accelerator pedal is met. being pressed. The system has been deactiva‐ ted but will continue to brake until you actively take over by depressing the brake or acceler‐ Detected vehicle ator pedal. Vehicle symbol flashes red and Symbol Description an acoustic signal sounds: Green symbol: Brake and take evasive action if Vehicle ahead detected. necessary.
Alternative displays
Symbol Description When the distance to the detected vehicle in‐ creases, the vehicle symbol in the distance dis‐ Green indicator lamp: the sys‐ play moves away. tem is active. If necessary, drive off yourself, for example by No indicator lamp: the system is pressing the accelerator pedal or rocker switch. switched off.
Indicator and warning lamps Vehicle symbol flashes: The requirements for system Symbol Description operation are no longer being met. White vehicle symbol: The system has been deactiva‐ No display of distance control ted but will continue to brake because the accelerator pedal is until you actively take over by being pressed. depressing the brake or acceler‐ Green symbol: ator pedal. Vehicle ahead detected. The vehicle symbol goes out if no vehicle in front is detected. Vehicle symbol flashes green: Preceding vehicle has driven off.
261 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 262
CONTROLS Driver Assistance Systems
Symbol Description The setting applies to speeds over 80 km/h/50 mph. Vehicle symbol and distance bar If the set speed is significantly higher than the flash red and an acoustic signal speed in the adjacent lane, it may be possible to sounds: pass or overtake other vehicles even if the func‐ Brake and take evasive action if tion is switched on. necessary. At speeds below 80 km/h/50 mph, vehicles on System interrupted. motorways are only overtaken with an adapted differential speed. The driver can overtake or accelerate at any time by pressing the accelerator pedal. Switching the function on/off: Displays in the Head-Up Display 1. "CAR" 2. "Settings" Desired speed 3. "Driver assistance" Some information from the system can also be 4. If necessary, "Driving" shown in the Head-Up Display. 5. "Speed Assistant" The symbol is displayed when the set 6. ▷ "Avoid overtaking at the left side" desired speed has been reached. ▷ "Avoid overtaking on the right"
Distance information System limits The symbol is shown if the distance from the vehicle in front is too close. System limits of the sensors For further information: The distance information is active under the ▷ Cameras, see page 47. following circumstances: ▷ Radar sensors, see page 48. ▷ Active Cruise Control switched off. ▷ Display in the Head-Up Display selected. Detection range Head-Up Display, see page 196. ▷ Distance too close. ▷ Speed above approximately 70 km/h, 40 mph.
Preventing overtaking This function helps to prevent inadvertent over‐ taking on motorways. Depending on the equipment and the national- The system's detection capability and automatic market version, the system can be configured to braking capacity are limited. prevent overtaking in the slower driving lane.
262 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 263
Driver Assistance Systems CONTROLS
For example two-wheeled vehicles may not be Cornering detected.
Deceleration The system does not decelerate in the following situations: ▷ For pedestrians or similarly slow road users. ▷ Depending on the equipment, at red traffic lights.
▷ For crossing traffic. If the desired speed is too high for cornering, it ▷ For oncoming vehicles. will be reduced slightly in the bend. However, the system may not detect bends in advance, so Vehicles cutting in moderate your speed when cornering. The system has a limited detection range. Situa‐ tions can arise on tight bends where a vehicle driving in front will not be detected or will be de‐ tected very late.
If another vehicle suddenly cuts in front of you, the system might not be able to restore the se‐ lected distance automatically. In some circum‐ stances, it may also not be possible to restore the selected distance if you are driving signifi‐ cantly faster than vehicles in front, for example When your vehicle is approaching a bend, the when rapidly approaching a lorry. If a vehicle is angle of the bend may cause the system to re‐ clearly detected in front of you, the system spond temporarily to vehicles in the other lane. If prompts you to intervene by braking, and if nec‐ the system responds by decelerating the vehicle, essary by taking evasive action. you may compensate for this by accelerating briefly. When the accelerator pedal is released again, the system will resume control of the vehi‐ cle's speed.
Driving off The vehicle cannot drive off automatically in some situations, for example: ▷ On steep upward gradients. ▷ Before bumps or rises in the road. ▷ When towing a heavy trailer.
263 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 264
CONTROLS Driver Assistance Systems
In such cases, press the accelerator pedal. Traffic light detection: Speed Limit Assist con‐ trols the speed when the vehicle approaches red Weather traffic lights. The following restrictions may apply if the weather or lighting conditions are unfavourable: Safety notes ▷ Impaired detection of vehicles. ▷ Brief interruptions when vehicles have already WARNING been detected. The system does not relieve you of your per‐ Pay attention when driving and respond to the sonal responsibility to assess the traffic situa‐ prevailing traffic conditions. If necessary, inter‐ tion correctly. Due to system limitations, it can‐ vene actively, for example by braking, steering or not respond independently and appropriately in taking evasive action. all traffic conditions. There is a risk of accident. Adapt your driving style to the traffic conditions. Drive power Observe the traffic situation and intervene ac‐ tively if the situation warrants it. The desired speed is also maintained when driv‐ ing downhill. The vehicle may drive slower than the desired speed on uphill gradients if there is not enough drive power. WARNING Depending on the driving mode, it is possible The desired speed may be set incorrectly by that the vehicle will drive faster or slower than the mistake or called up accidentally. There is a risk desired speed setting in some situations; for ex‐ of accident. Adjust the desired speed to the ample, on downward or upward gradients. traffic conditions. Observe the traffic situation and intervene actively if the situation warrants it. Speed Limit Assist Overview
Principle Buttons on the steering wheel When the systems in the vehicle, for example Speed Limit Info, detect a change in the speed Button Function limit, it is possible to adopt this new speed limit value for the following systems: Adopt the suggested speed manually. ▷ Manual Speed Limiter. Traffic light detection: accept the de‐ tected traffic lights manually. ▷ Cruise Control. ▷ Active Cruise Control with Stop&Go function Rocker switch: ACC. Set the speed; see Cruise Control. The speed value is proposed as a new desired speed for adopting. The relevant system must Switching on/off be activated for the speed value to be adopted. 1. "CAR" Depending on the equipment, the destination 2. "Settings" system and the national-market version, it may be possible for the value to be adopted automati‐ 3. "Driver assistance" cally. 4. If necessary, "Driving"
264 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 265
Driver Assistance Systems CONTROLS
5. "Speed Assistant" Symbol Function 6. "Speed limits" Depending on the vehicle equip‐ 7. Select the desired setting: ment, the indicator lamp illumi‐ ▷ "Adjust automatically": the detected nates green, together with the speed limit is adopted automatically. symbol for a cruise control system: Traffic light detection: detected traffic Speed Limit Assist is active and lights are accepted automatically if possi‐ detected speed limits can be ble. adopted manually for the displayed ▷ "Adjust manually": the detected speed system. limit can be adopted manually. Detected change in speed limit de‐ Traffic light detection: detected traffic tected with immediate effect. lights can be accepted manually. Distance information shown along‐ ▷ "Show anticipation": detected speed lim‐ side the symbol indicates there its are displayed in the instrument cluster might be a change in the speed without being adopted. limit up ahead.
▷ "Off": Speed Limit Assist is switched off. Indicator lamp is illuminated green: Other proactive comfort functions – the the detected speed limit can be route-ahead assistant, for example – may adopted with the SET button. be switched off. Traffic light detection: the detected traffic lights can be accepted with Displays in the instrument the SET button. cluster A green tick is displayed once it A message is displayed in the instrument cluster has been adopted. if the system and Cruise Control are switched on. Automatic adoption In automatic mode, a detected speed limit is au‐ tomatically adopted for Cruise Control. Press the button to switch back to the last value set.
Traffic light detection: detected traffic lights are accepted automatically if possible.
Manual adoption A detected speed limit can be applied to Cruise Control manually. Traffic light detection: detected traffic lights can be accepted manually. When the SET symbol is illuminated, press the button.
265 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 266
CONTROLS Driver Assistance Systems
Speed adjustment Adjusting 1. "CAR" Principle 2. "Settings" It is possible to set whether the speed limit will 3. "Driver assistance" be accepted exactly, or with a tolerance. 4. If necessary, "Driving" General 5. "Speed Assistant" It is possible to set a speed adjustment for all 6. "Adjust to route" speeds and an additional speed adjustment for speeds up to 60 km/h/40 mph. Traffic light detection The additional speed adjustment for speeds up to 60 km/h/40 mph can be activated or deactiva‐ Principle ted. Speed Limit Assist controls the speed when the vehicle approaches red traffic lights. Adjusting 1. "CAR" General 2. "Settings" The camera near the interior mirror is used to detect red traffic lights. 3. "Driver assistance" If necessary, the system also takes into account 4. If necessary, "Driving" information that has been saved in the navigation 5. "Speed Assistant" system. 6. Perform the desired setting: Detected red traffic lights are displayed in the in‐ ▷ "Adjust speed limits": set tolerance for strument cluster and, depending on the setting, speed adjustment with an effect on all can be taken into account by Speed Limit Assist speeds. either manually or automatically during the jour‐ ▷ "2nd adjustment up to": activate or deac‐ ney. tivate additional speed adjustment. Overview ▷ "Adjust speed limits": if additional speed adjustment is activated, set a tolerance for Sensors speeds up to 60 km/h/40 mph. The system is controlled using the following sen‐ Adapting to the route sors: ▷ Cameras behind the windscreen. Principle For further information: The system can be set so that it adapts the Sensors of the vehicle, see page 47. speed automatically to the route. For example, the speed is reduced in the Operating requirements following situations if necessary: ▷ Active Cruise Control with Stop&Go function ▷ Before turning off. ACC is activated. ▷ Before a roundabout. ▷ Speed up to approx. 80 km/h, approx. ▷ Before a bend. 50 mph.
266 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 267
Driver Assistance Systems CONTROLS
▷ The function must be available in the country Displays in the instrument cluster in which the vehicle is being driven. Symbol Meaning Activating/deactivating Red traffic light detected. 1. "CAR" As soon as it has been 2. "Settings" adopted and a green tick is 3. "Driver assistance" displayed, the vehicle 4. "Driving" brakes to a standstill. 5. "Speed Assistant" Green traffic light detected. 6. Select the desired setting: ▷ "Consider traffic lights" Green traffic light: the sys‐ tem is interrupted. Additional settings If the grey traffic light is dis‐ 1. "CAR" played with a red cross, this 2. "Settings" cannot be offered as an 3. "Driver assistance" option for adopting. 4. "Driving" 5. "Traffic light recognition" System limits 6. Select the desired settings: Speed Limit Assist based on the Speed Limit Info system. ▷ "Display traffic light phases": when the ve‐ hicle is stopped at traffic lights, the detec‐ Take into account the Speed Limit Info system ted phase of the lights can be displayed in limits. the instrument cluster. Depending on the country, information on speed ▷ "Drive off reminder": when the drive off limits ahead may not be available for acceptance reminder is activated, a visual and, where or may only be available to a limited extent, for applicable, an acoustic indication is provi‐ example with speed information from the naviga‐ ded as soon as the traffic light turns to tion system. green and it is possible to continue driv‐ Cruise Control without distance control: depend‐ ing. ing on the system, it may not be possible to adopt speed limits automatically. Speed limits that are ahead may only be adopted for Active Cruise Control ACC. The system may not respond properly to the route if the position of the vehicle cannot be clearly determined by the navigation system. The traffic light detection system may have limi‐ ted functionality in the following situations, for example: ▷ If traffic lights are concealed, for example by other vehicles.
267 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 268
CONTROLS Driver Assistance Systems
▷ At a road junction with multiple lanes where Overview there are several sets of traffic lights. For further information: Buttons on the steering wheel ▷ Limits of the Speed Limit Information system, see page 193. Button Function ▷ System limits of the sensors, see page 47. Steering and lane control assistant in‐ cluding traffic jam assistant on/off. Steering and lane control Set the function. assistant Sensors Principle The system is controlled using the following sen‐ The system helps the driver keep the vehicle in sors: lane. To do this, the system assists by perform‐ ▷ Cameras behind the windscreen. ing steering movements, for example when cor‐ ▷ Front radar sensor. nering. ▷ Side radar sensors, front. General ▷ Side radar sensors, rear. Depending on the speed, the system orientates For further information: itself using the lane markings and vehicles driving Sensors of the vehicle, see page 47. in front. Sensors on the steering wheel detect whether Operating requirements the steering wheel is being touched. ▷ Speed under 210 km/h/130 mph. ▷ The driving path is sufficiently wide. Safety note ▷ Above 70 km/h, 43 mph: lane demarcations are detected on both sides. WARNING ▷ Below 70 km/h, 43 mph: lane markings on The system does not relieve you of your per‐ both sides or a vehicle driving in front is/are sonal responsibility to assess the traffic situa‐ detected. tion correctly. Due to system limitations, it can‐ ▷ Hands on the steering wheel. not respond independently and appropriately in all traffic conditions. There is a risk of accident. ▷ Sufficient corner radius. Adapt your driving style to the traffic conditions. ▷ Driving in the centre of the lane. Observe the traffic situation and intervene ac‐ ▷ Turn indicator switched off. tively if the situation warrants it. ▷ The sensor system calibration process is complete. ▷ Cruise Control with distance control active. ▷ Seat belt on the driver's side fastened. ▷ Collision warning active. ▷ Pedestrian warning active. ▷ Side collision warning active.
268 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 269
Driver Assistance Systems CONTROLS
Switching on/off The system activates automatically when all op‐ erating requirements are met. Assisted Driving Mode Steering wheel symbol illuminates green. The system is active. General The button is used to switch the set When the system switched on, the person warn‐ function on and off. ing with light braking function and the side colli‐ sion warning are active. The button is used to set the primary function. Switching off Press the button on the steering wheel. Setting the function When the system is active, press the The display is no longer illuminated. button until the desired function is se‐ The system does not execute any supporting lected in the toolbar. The Assisted Driving Mode steering movements. function bar is shown at the bottom of the instru‐ ment cluster. Interrupting automatically The system is interrupted automatically in the Symbol Function following situations: Cruise control with distance control. ▷ At a speed above 210 km/h/130 mph. ▷ When the steering wheel is released.
Depending on equipment, cruise ▷ If the driver brakes. control with distance control and ▷ When the steering wheel is turned sharply. steering and lane control assistant. ▷ When leaving your own lane. ▷ With the turn indicator switched on. ▷ When the lane is too narrow. ▷ If no lane marking has been detected for a The selected function is shown in green. certain time and there is no vehicle driving in The setting is saved for the current driver profile. front. ▷ If Active Cruise Control ACC is interrupted. Switching on ▷ If the seat belt on the driver's side is unfas‐ tened. 1. Press the button on the steering wheel. Steering wheel symbol illuminates grey. System is on standby and does not make 2. Adjust the steering and lane control any steering movements. assistant if necessary. The system activates automatically when all op‐ Steering wheel symbol illuminates grey. erating requirements are met. System is on standby and does not make any steering movements.
269 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 270
CONTROLS Driver Assistance Systems
Displays in the instrument Alternative displays cluster Depending on the vehicle's equipment, the dis‐ plays in the instrument cluster may vary and are Symbol Description indicated as follows: Steering wheel symbol grey: Symbol Description
System on standby. Steering wheel symbol grey: Steering wheel symbol green: System on standby.
System is activated. Steering wheel symbol green: The system is helping the driver System is activated. keep the vehicle in lane. Depending on the equipment, Yellow flashing steering wheel steering wheel symbol flashes symbol: yellow: Lane marking driven over. Lane marking driven over. The steering wheel vibrates The steering wheel vibrates where applicable. where applicable. Yellow steering wheel symbol Yellow steering wheel symbol and an acoustic signal, if applica‐ and an acoustic signal, if applica‐ ble: ble: System interruption is imminent. System interruption is imminent. Steering wheel symbol flashes Depending on the equipment, red, signal sounds: steering wheel symbol flashes System is switching off. red, signal sounds: Steering wheel symbol yellow: System is switching off. Hands are not around the steer‐ Green steering wheel symbol ing wheel. System remains ac‐ and lane marking symbol: tive. The system is helping the driver Red steering wheel symbol, keep the vehicle in lane. acoustic signal: Hands are not around the steer‐ ing wheel. System interruption is imminent. The system reduces the speed to a standstill if applicable. It is possible that the system will not execute any supporting steering movements.
270 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 271
Driver Assistance Systems CONTROLS
Symbol Description Displays in the Head-Up Display
Steering wheel symbol yellow: All the system information can also be displayed in the Head-Up Display. Hands are not around the steer‐ ing wheel. System remains ac‐ System limits tive. General Red steering wheel symbol, acoustic signal: The system cannot be activated or used sensibly in certain situations. Hands are not around the steer‐ ing wheel. System interruption is imminent. Safety note It is possible that the system will not execute any supporting WARNING steering movements. The system may not respond at all, or may re‐ With Active Cruise Control the spond too late, incorrectly or without justifica‐ system will reduce the speed if tion due to system limitations. There is a risk of applicable. accident or material damage. Observe the in‐ formation on the system limits and intervene actively if necessary. Displays on the steering wheel
System limits of the sensors For further information: ▷ Cameras, see page 47. ▷ Radar sensors, see page 48.
Hands on the steering wheel In the following situations, contact between the The two LEDs above the button fields are illumi‐ driver's hands and the steering wheel is not de‐ nated in the same way as the displays in the in‐ tected by the sensors: strument cluster: ▷ Driving when wearing gloves. ▷ Yellow: system interruption is imminent. ▷ Covers on the steering wheel. ▷ Red: system is deactivated. Narrow lanes The steering wheel displays can be switched The system cannot be activated or used sensibly on/off if required. when driving in narrow lanes, for example in the 1. "CAR" following situations: 2. "Settings" ▷ At road works. 3. "Driver assistance" ▷ Depending on the equipment, where there are emergency lanes. 4. "Feedback via steering wheel" ▷ In built-up areas. 5. "Lighting elements"
271 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 272
CONTROLS Driver Assistance Systems
Weather Safety note The following restrictions may apply if the weather or lighting conditions are unfavourable: WARNING ▷ Impaired detection of vehicles and lane mark‐ The system does not relieve you of your per‐ ings. sonal responsibility to assess the traffic situa‐ ▷ Brief interruptions when vehicles have already tion correctly. Due to system limitations, it can‐ been detected. not respond independently and appropriately in Pay attention when driving and respond to the all traffic conditions. There is a risk of accident. prevailing traffic conditions. If necessary, inter‐ Adapt your driving style to the traffic conditions. vene actively, for example by braking, steering or Observe the traffic conditions, be ready to take taking evasive action. over steering and braking at any time, and ac‐ tively intervene if the situation warrants it. Driver Attention Camera The information for the steering and lane control Pay attention to the traffic conditions at all times. assistant also applies. The Driver Attention Camera detects that the For further information: driver is looking at the traffic. Steering and lane control assistant, see The Driver Attention Camera may have limited page 268. functionality in the following situations, for exam‐ ple: Operating requirements ▷ If the Driver Attention Camera is covered by the steering wheel rim. ▷ Operating requirements of the steering and lane control assistant are met. ▷ If the driver is wearing sunglasses that block infrared light. Operating requirements, see page 268. ▷ The steering and lane control assistant is ac‐ tive. Assisted Driving Plus ▷ The function is only available on certain road types, for example motorways. Principle ▷ Driving on a road without pedestrians or cy‐ Assisted Driving Plus helps the driver to control clists. the vehicle in traffic queues. ▷ The driving path is sufficiently wide. Steering assistance takes place without the ▷ Lane markings and a vehicle ahead are de‐ driver actively steering. tected. ▷ Speed under approximately 60 km/h/approx. General 40 mph. The system uses the sensors of the steering and ▷ The Driver Attention Camera in the instru‐ lane control assistant. ment cluster detects that the driver is looking at the traffic. ▷ During journeys in countries outside the vehi‐ cle's country of origin, Assisted Driving Plus must be available in the country in question.
272 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 273
Driver Assistance Systems CONTROLS
Switching on Displays on the steering wheel As soon as all of the operating require‐ ments have been met, Assisted Driving Plus is displayed as an additional symbol in the function bar. The function bar is shown at the bottom of the instrument cluster.
Select Assisted Driving Plus with the button on the steering wheel. The symbol for Assisted Driving Plus is shown in The two LEDs above the button fields are illumi‐ green. nated in the same way as the displays in the in‐ Two green LEDs are illuminated on the steering strument cluster: wheel. ▷ Green: the system is active. The indicator lamp is shown in green in the in‐ ▷ Yellow: the system has been interrupted. strument cluster. ▷ Red: the system is deactivated. The system starts to help the driver to control the vehicle. System limits Displays in the instrument The system limits for the steering and lane con‐ trol assistant apply. cluster
Symbol Description Depending on the Green indicator lamp: the sys‐ equipment version: lane tem is active. change assistant White indicator lamp: the system is ready. Principle The system provides the driver with additional Grey indicator lamp: the system support when changing lanes on multi-lane is interrupted. roads.
Alternative displays General The system uses the sensors of the steering and Depending on the vehicle's equipment, the dis‐ lane control assistant. plays in the instrument cluster may vary and are indicated as follows:
Indicator Description lamp
Green indicator lamp: the sys‐ tem is active.
273 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 274
CONTROLS Driver Assistance Systems
Safety note Changing lanes 1. Ensure that the traffic situation permits a lane WARNING change. The system does not relieve you of your per‐ 2. Push the turn indicator lever in the desired di‐ sonal responsibility to assess the traffic situa‐ rection as far as the resistance point to indi‐ tion correctly. Due to system limitations, it can‐ cate briefly. not respond independently and appropriately in After a short period, steering assistance in all traffic conditions. There is a risk of accident. the desired direction is noticeable. Adapt your driving style to the traffic conditions. Observe the traffic situation and intervene ac‐ tively if the situation warrants it.
The information for the steering and lane control assistant also applies. For further information: Steering and lane control assistant, see page 268. After the lane change, the system helps the Operating requirements driver keep the vehicle in lane. ▷ Operating requirements of the steering and lane control assistant are met. Cancelling a lane change Operating requirements, see page 268. The lane change can be cancelled by steering in ▷ Driving on a road without pedestrians or cy‐ the opposite direction. clists and with physical barriers to oncoming vehicles, for example crash barriers. ▷ Lane marking detected. ▷ Maximum speed 180 km/h, 110 mph. ▷ The minimum speed is country-specific.
Switching lane change assistance on/off 1. "CAR" 2. "Settings" 3. "Driver assistance" 4. If necessary, "Driving" 5. "Steering Assistant" 6. "Lane Change Assistant"
274 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 275
Driver Assistance Systems CONTROLS
Displays in the instrument Symbol Description cluster Green steering wheel symbol.
Symbol Description Grey line for lane marking on the appropriate side. Green steering wheel symbol. Green arrow symbol for lane- Green arrow symbol for lane- changing. changing. The system carries out a lane The system carries out a lane change. change. Green steering wheel symbol. Green steering wheel symbol. Grey line for lane marking on the Grey line for lane marking on the appropriate side. appropriate side. No arrow symbol for lane- The system detected the lane changing on the display. change request. Lane change The system detected the lane not currently possible. change request. Lane change Depending on country specifica‐ not currently possible. tions: Depending on country specifica‐ Green steering wheel symbol. tions: Grey arrow symbol for lane- Green steering wheel symbol. changing. Grey line for lane marking on the Lane change not possible; oper‐ appropriate side. ating requirements not met. Grey arrow symbol for lane- changing. Alternative displays Lane change not possible; oper‐ Depending on the vehicle's equipment, the dis‐ ating requirements not met. plays in the instrument cluster may vary and are indicated as follows: System limits The system limits for the steering and lane con‐ trol assistant apply.
275 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 276
CONTROLS Driver Assistance Systems
Depending on the ▷ Traffic queue detected. equipment version: ▷ Driving on a motorway or a similar road. ▷ Lane boundary detected. automatic formation of ▷ The function must be available in the country emergency lane in which the vehicle is being driven.
Principle Activating/deactivating The system can help the driver to form an emer‐ 1. "CAR" gency lane in the event of traffic queues on mo‐ 2. "Settings" torways or similar roads. 3. "Driver assistance" As soon as the system detects a traffic queue, a 4. "Driving" Check Control message appears on the control 5. "Steering Assistant" display. Depending on the situation, the vehicle will be steered to the right or left within the cur‐ 6. "Emergency Corridor Assistant" rent driving lane in order to form an emergency lane. Displays in the instrument cluster General Depending on the equipment and national-mar‐ The system uses the sensors of the steering and ket version, the situations for the automatic for‐ lane control assistant. mation of emergency lanes are displayed in the Assisted Driving View in the instrument cluster. Safety note For further information: Assisted Driving View, see page 172. WARNING The system does not relieve you of your per‐ System limits sonal responsibility to assess the traffic situa‐ The system limits for the steering and lane con‐ tion correctly. Due to system limitations, it can‐ trol assistant apply. not respond independently and appropriately in all traffic conditions. There is a risk of accident. Adapt your driving style to the traffic conditions. Depending on the Observe the traffic situation and intervene ac‐ equipment version: lane tively if the situation warrants it. change with active route The information for the steering and lane control guidance assistant also applies. For further information: Principle Steering and lane control assistant, see The system supports the driver when it is neces‐ page 268. sary to change lanes in order to reach a destina‐ tion. Operating requirements ▷ Steering and lane control assistant is activa‐ ted.
276 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 277
Driver Assistance Systems CONTROLS
General The system prepares for this lane change. To do this, the system identifies a suitable gap in The system uses the sensors of the steering and the flow of traffic in the adjacent lane. lane control assistant. 2. When a gap has been found, the speed is Safety note adapted so the vehicle stays level with the gap. 3. A lane change suggestion is displayed with a WARNING Check Control message. The system does not relieve you of your per‐ 4. If the traffic situation permits a lane change, sonal responsibility to assess the traffic situa‐ the driver can steer the vehicle into the adja‐ tion correctly. Due to system limitations, it can‐ cent lane. not respond independently and appropriately in all traffic conditions. There is a risk of accident. If the vehicle is equipped with the lane Adapt your driving style to the traffic conditions. change assistant: once the Check Control Observe the traffic situation and intervene ac‐ message has been displayed, a lane change tively if the situation warrants it. can be initiated by operating the turn indica‐ tor. The information for the Active Cruise Control Depending on the national-market version and the steering and lane control assistant also and the traffic situation, the system will carry applies. out the subsequent lane changes. For further information: Display in the instrument cluster ▷ Active Cruise Control, see page 255. The suggestion for the lane change is displayed ▷ Steering and lane control assistant, see and a green tick indicates that the function is ac‐ page 268. tive. Operating requirements Depending on the equipment and national-mar‐ ket version, the traffic situation is displayed in the ▷ Active Cruise Control is activated. Assisted Driving View in the instrument cluster. ▷ Driving on a motorway or a similar road. For further information: ▷ Lane boundary detected on the side of the Assisted Driving View, see page 172. desired lane change. ▷ Navigation system: route guidance is activa‐ Switching on adaptation to route ted. details ▷ Adaptation to the route details is switched on. 1. "CAR" ▷ The function must be available in the country 2. "Settings" in which the vehicle is being driven. 3. "Driver assistance" Changing lanes 4. If necessary, "Driving" 1. One or more lane changes are required in or‐ 5. "Speed Assistant" der to reach a destination. 6. "Adjust to route"
277 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 278
CONTROLS Driver Assistance Systems
System limits Depending on the equipment: obstacles at the side of the vehicle that are detected by the side The system limits for the Active Cruise Control ultrasonic sensors may also be reported by the and the steering and lane control assistant apply. lateral parking aid function. Park assistance systems General The range of the system is approximately 2 m, Principle 6 ft, depending on the obstacle and environmen‐ tal factors. The park assistance systems support the driver An acoustic warning is given when the vehicle is when parking and manoeuvring. approx. 70 cm, 27 in away from an object and a collision is imminent. General For objects behind the vehicle, the acoustic The parking assistance systems include the warning is given sooner, at a distance of approx. following individual systems. 1.50 m, 5 ft. For further information: ▷ Park Distance Control, PDC, see page 278. Safety notes ▷ Depending on the equipment version: emer‐ gency braking function, Active PDC, see WARNING page 281. The system does not relieve you of your per‐ ▷ Lateral parking aid, see page 282. sonal responsibility to assess the traffic situa‐ ▷ Without Surround View: Reversing Assist tion correctly. Due to system limitations, it can‐ camera, see page 283. not respond independently and appropriately in ▷ Park Assistant, see page 286. all traffic conditions. There is a risk of accident. Adapt your driving style to the traffic conditions. ▷ Park Assist, leaving a parking space, see Observe the traffic situation and intervene ac‐ page 290. tively if the situation warrants it. ▷ Reversing assistant, see page 291. ▷ Surround View with Reversing Assist camera, see page 293. WARNING ▷ Panorama View, see page 298. If the vehicle is travelling at high speed when ▷ Remote 3D View, see page 300. Park Distance Control PDC is activated, the ▷ Crossing traffic warning, see page 301. warning may be delayed due to the physical conditions. There is a risk of injury or material damage. Avoid approaching an object at speed. Park Distance Control PDC Avoid moving off at speed while Park Distance Control PDC is not yet active. Principle PDC provides assistance when parking the vehi‐ cle. Objects in front of or behind the vehicle as it slowly approaches are indicated by means of acoustic signals and a display on the Control Dis‐ play.
278 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 279
Driver Assistance Systems CONTROLS
Overview 3. "Driver assistance" 4. "Parking and manoeuvring" Button in the vehicle 5. If necessary, "Automatic PDC activation" 6. "Automatic PDC activation" The setting is saved for the current driver profile. Depending on the equipment version, a respec‐ tive camera view is switched on additionally.
Automatic deactivation when moving forwards The system switches off once a certain distance or speed is exceeded. Park Assistant button Switch the system back on if necessary.
Sensors Switching on/off manually The system is controlled using the following sen‐ Press the Park Assistant button. sors: ▷ Ultrasonic sensors in the front/rear bumpers. ▷ On: the LED is illuminated. ▷ Depending on the equipment: side ultrasonic ▷ Off: the LED is extinguished. sensors. The image from the rear-view camera is shown For further information: when reverse gear is engaged and the Park As‐ Sensors of the vehicle, see page 47. sistant button is pressed. Depending on the equipment, the system cannot Switching on/off be switched off manually when reverse gear is engaged. Automatic activation The system switches on automatically in the Warning following situations: Acoustic signals ▷ If selector lever position R is engaged while the engine is running. General ▷ Depending on the equipment version: when An intermittent sound indicates that the vehicle approaching detected obstacles, if the speed is approaching an object. For instance, if an ob‐ is below approximately 4 km/h, 2.5 mph. The ject is identified to the rear left of the vehicle, the distance from the obstacle at which the sys‐ acoustic signal is emitted from the rear left loud‐ tem activates depends on the individual sit‐ speaker. uation. The shorter the distance to an object, the shorter Automatic activation on detection of obstacles the intervals become. can be enabled and disabled. A continuous tone sounds if the distance to a 1. "CAR" detected object is less than approximately 2. "Settings" 20 cm, 8 in.
279 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 280
CONTROLS Driver Assistance Systems
If there are objects in front of and behind the ve‐ If the rear-view camera image is shown, it is pos‐ hicle at the same time, and they are at a distance sible to change over to PDC or, if required, to an‐ of less than approximately 20 cm, 8 in, an alter‐ other view with obstacle markings: nating continuous tone sounds. 1. If necessary, push the Controller to the left. Steptronic transmission: the intermittent tone 2. For example "Parking sensors" and the continuous tone are switched off when selector lever position P is engaged. Crossing traffic warning: depending on the equipment, the PDC display also warns of vehi‐ The intermittent sound switches off a short while cles approaching from the sides at the front and after the vehicle comes to a standstill. rear. Volume control For further information: The PDC acoustic signal volume can be adjus‐ Crossing traffic warning, see page 301. ted. System limits 1. "CAR" 2. "Settings" Safety note 3. "Driver assistance" 4. "Parking and manoeuvring" WARNING 5. "Volume PDC signal" The system may not respond at all, or may re‐ 6. Set the desired value. spond too late, incorrectly or without justifica‐ The setting is saved for the current driver profile. tion due to system limitations. There is a risk of accident or material damage. Observe the in‐ Visual warning formation on the system limits and intervene actively if necessary.
Towing a trailer The rear PDC functions are switched off when the trailer socket is in use or when towing a trailer. A white symbol is shown. Depending on the equipment, the detec‐ The vehicle's approach to an object is shown on tion range of the sensors is shown dark the Control Display. Objects that are further away on the Control Display. are already displayed before an acoustic signal is given. System limits of the sensors The display appears as soon as PDC is activated. For further information: The recording range of the sensors is shown in ▷ Ultrasonic sensors, see page 49. green, yellow and red if obstacles are detected within the range. Driving path lines are displayed for better estima‐ tion of the space required.
280 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 281
Driver Assistance Systems CONTROLS
Limits of the ultrasound General measurement Due to the system limits, a collision cannot be Certain conditions and objects may push ultra‐ prevented under all circumstances. sound measurement to its physical limits, includ‐ The function is available at speeds below walking ing the following: speed when driving or rolling in reverse. ▷ Obstacles and people at the edge of the lane. Pressing the accelerator pedal interrupts the ▷ Low objects already indicated, for example brake intervention. kerbs, may enter the sensors' blind areas be‐ After emergency braking to a stop, it is possible fore or after a continuous tone is given. to continue a slow approach to the obstacle. To approach, lightly depress the accelerator pedal False alarms and release it again. If the system is approaching its limits, false If the accelerator pedal is depressed for longer, alarms may occur. the vehicle pulls away. Manual braking is possible To reduce false alarms, for example in car at any time. washes, switch off automatic activation of Park The system uses the ultrasonic sensors of Park Distance Control PDC when obstacles are de‐ Distance Control PDC and Park Assist. tected if necessary. Safety note Malfunction A Check Control message is shown. WARNING A white symbol is shown and the moni‐ The system does not relieve you of your per‐ toring range of the sensors is shown in sonal responsibility to assess the traffic situa‐ dark colour on the control display. tion correctly. There is a risk of accident. Adapt your driving style to the traffic conditions. Addi‐ Park Distance Control PDC has failed. Have the tionally, look directly to check the traffic situa‐ system checked by a Service Partner of the tion and the area around the vehicle and inter‐ manufacturer or another qualified Service Partner vene actively where appropriate. or a specialist workshop.
The Safety Information for the Park Distance Depending on the Control PDC and Park Assist also applies. equipment version: For further information: emergency braking ▷ Park Distance Control, PDC, see page 278. ▷ Park Assistant, see page 286. function, Active PDC Temporary switch-off Principle The emergency braking function can be The emergency brake function of PDC initiates switched off temporarily: emergency braking if there is an imminent risk of Confirm the message on the control display. a collision. If the journey is continued in these environmental conditions, no further emergency braking is per‐ formed.
281 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 282
CONTROLS Driver Assistance Systems
Settings tion and the area around the vehicle and inter‐ vene actively where appropriate. It is possible to set which areas of the vehicle are protected by the system. The Safety Information for the Park Distance 1. "CAR" Control PDC and Park Assist also applies. 2. "Settings" For further information: 3. "Driver assistance" ▷ Park Distance Control, PDC, see page 278. 4. "Parking and manoeuvring" ▷ Park Assistant, see page 286. 5. "Active PDC emergency interv." 6. Select the desired setting. Display The setting is saved for the current driver profile.
System limits The system limits of the Park Distance Control PDC and the Park Assist apply. The system cannot be used in the following sit‐ uations, for example: ▷ When driving with a trailer. If necessary, deactivate the system via iDrive Obstacle markings are displayed at the sides of where applicable. the vehicle to protect the vehicle's flanks. ▷ Coloured markings: warning that obstacles With Parking Assistant: have been detected. ▷ Grey markings, hatched surface: no obstacles lateral parking aid have been detected. ▷ No markings, black surface: the area adjacent Principle to the vehicle has not yet been detected. The system warns about obstacles at the side of the vehicle. Lateral parking aid limits The system only shows stationary obstacles that General were previously detected by the sensors when The system uses the ultrasonic sensors of Park driving past. Distance Control PDC and Park Assist. The system does not detect whether an obstacle subsequently moves. The markings are shown in Safety note black after a certain time when the vehicle is sta‐ tionary. The area next to the vehicle needs to be WARNING scanned again. The system does not relieve you of your per‐ The lateral parking aid is not available when the sonal responsibility to assess the traffic situa‐ trailer socket is in use or when trailer operation is tion correctly. There is a risk of accident. Adapt activated. your driving style to the traffic conditions. Addi‐ The system limits of the Park Distance Control tionally, look directly to check the traffic situa‐ PDC and the Park Assist also apply.
282 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 283
Driver Assistance Systems CONTROLS
Without Surround View: ▷ Rear-view camera. rear-view camera For further information: Sensors of the vehicle, see page 47.
Principle Switching on/off The rear-view camera provides assistance when reverse parking or manoeuvring. It does this by Automatic activation showing an image of the area behind the vehicle The system automatically switches on when se‐ on the Control Display. lector lever position R is engaged while the en‐ Assistance functions, for example auxiliary lines, gine is running. can also be shown on the display. Automatic deactivation when Safety note moving forwards The system switches off once a certain distance WARNING or speed is exceeded. The system does not relieve you of your per‐ Switch the system back on if necessary. sonal responsibility to assess the traffic situa‐ tion correctly. There is a risk of accident. Adapt Depending on the equipment: your driving style to the traffic conditions. Addi‐ switching on/off manually tionally, look directly to check the traffic situa‐ Press the Park Assistant button. tion and the area around the vehicle and inter‐ vene actively where appropriate. ▷ On: the LED is illuminated. ▷ Off: the LED is extinguished. Overview The parking assistance functions are shown on the Control Display. Depending on the equipment: button in the vehicle Switching the view via iDrive If the rear-view camera view is not displayed, change the view via iDrive:
1. If necessary, tilt the Controller to the side. 2. "Rear view camera" The image from the rear-view camera is shown.
Operating requirements ▷ The tailgate is completely closed. Park Assistant button ▷ Keep the detection range of the camera clear. Projecting loads, carrier systems or trailers can restrict the detection range of the Sensors camera. The system is controlled using the following sen‐ sors:
283 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 284
CONTROLS Driver Assistance Systems
Display on the control display The driving path lines are dependent on the steering angle and continuously adapt to steer‐ Toolbars ing wheel movements. Assistance functions can be activated manually using the function bars on the sides of the Con‐ Turning circle lines trol Display. 1. If necessary, tilt the Controller to the right. 2. With the corresponding equipment: "Camera picture" 3. ▷ "Parking guide lines". Driving path lines and turning circle lines are shown. ▷ "Obstacle mark.". Depending on the equipment, the obsta‐ The turning circle lines can only be shown in the cles detected by Park Distance Control camera image together with driving path lines. PDC are displayed by markings. The turning circle lines show the trajectory of the Zoom to the trailer tow hitch: smallest possible turning circle on a level road surface. 1. If necessary, tilt the Controller to the left. Once the steering wheel has been turned be‐ 2. "Tow hitch". yond a certain angle, only one turning circle line A zoomed-in image of the trailer tow hitch is is displayed. displayed. A number of assistance functions can be active Parking with the help of driving path and simultaneously. turning circle lines 1. Position the vehicle so that the red turning Parking guidance lines circle line is within the boundaries of the park‐ ing space. Driving path lines 2. Turn the steering wheel so that the green driving path line covers the corresponding turning circle line.
The driving path lines help you to estimate the space required when parking and manoeuvring on a level road surface.
284 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 285
Driver Assistance Systems CONTROLS
Obstacle marker Adjusting brightness and contrast via iDrive With rear-view camera switched on: 1. If necessary, tilt the Controller to the right. 2. "Camera picture" 3. Perform the desired setting: ▷ "Brightness" ▷ "Contrast"
Depending on the equipment, obstacles behind System limits the vehicle are detected by the Park Distance Control PDC sensors. System limits of the sensors Obstacle markers can be shown in the image from the rear-view camera. For further information: The colour grading of the obstacle markings is ▷ Cameras, see page 47. the same as the Park Distance Control PDC markings. Deactivated camera If the camera is deactivated, for example when the tailgate is opened, the camera image is dis‐ Zoom to trailer tow hitch played as grey hatching. To assist with connecting up a trailer, it is possi‐ ble to zoom in on the area around the trailer tow Detection of objects hitch. Very low obstacles and higher, protruding ob‐ jects such as ledges cannot be detected by the system. Depending on the equipment, some assistance functions also take account of Park Distance Control PDC data. Observe the notes in the chapter on Park Dis‐ tance Control PDC. The objects shown in the Control Display may be closer than they appear. Do not estimate the dis‐ Two static circle segments show the distance tance to objects based on the display. between the trailer and the trailer tow hitch. A docking line dependent on the steering angle assists you in lining up the trailer tow hitch with the trailer. When zooming in, remember that the view might no longer show certain obstacles.
285 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 286
CONTROLS Driver Assistance Systems
With Parking Assistant: ▷ Steering. Park Assist ▷ Accelerating and braking. ▷ Changing gear. Principle The parking operation takes place automatically. Safety notes
WARNING The system does not relieve you of your per‐ sonal responsibility to assess the traffic situa‐ tion correctly. Due to system limitations, it can‐ not respond independently and appropriately in all traffic conditions. There is a risk of accident. The system supports the driver in the following Adapt your driving style to the traffic conditions. situations: Observe the traffic situation and intervene ac‐ tively if the situation warrants it. ▷ When parking sideways parallel to the road: parallel parking. ▷ When reverse parking perpendicular to the WARNING road: perpendicular parking. The system lines up with the middle of the parking space when When the trailer tow hitch is in use, the driver parking perpendicular to the road. assistance system could cause damage if its sensors are obstructed. There is a risk of acci‐ ▷ Depending on the equipment version: when dent or material damage. Do not use the driver leaving parallel parking spaces assistance system during trailer operation or when using the trailer tow hitch, for example General with a bicycle carrier.
Operation Operation of Park Assistant is divided into three NOTE steps: Park Assistant may steer across or up onto ▷ Switching on and activating. kerbs. There is a risk of material damage. Ob‐ ▷ Parking space search. serve the traffic situation and intervene actively ▷ Parking. if the situation warrants it. The status of the system and the actions re‐ In addition, the safety notes apply for Park Dis‐ quired are shown on the control display. tance Control PDC. Ultrasonic sensors measure parking spaces on For further information: both sides of the vehicle. Park Distance Control, PDC, see page 278. Steptronic transmission Park Assist calculates the ideal parking line and takes over the following functions during a park‐ ing operation:
286 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 287
Driver Assistance Systems CONTROLS
Overview ▷ Minimum length of gap between two objects: own vehicle length plus approximately 0.8 m, Button in the vehicle 2.6 ft. ▷ Minimum depth: approximately 1.5 m, 5 ft. Perpendicular parking: ▷ Minimum length of gap: own vehicle width plus approximately 0.7 m, 2.3 ft. ▷ Minimum depth: own vehicle length. Drivers must estimate the depth of perpen‐ dicular parking spaces themselves. Due to technical limits, the system is only able to gauge the depth of perpendicular parking Park Assistant button spaces approximately.
For parking Sensors ▷ Doors and tailgate are closed. The system is controlled using the following sen‐ Steptronic transmission: sors: ▷ Driver's seat belt is fastened. ▷ Ultrasonic sensors in the front/rear bumpers. ▷ Side ultrasonic sensors. Switching on with the button For further information: Press the Park Assistant button. Sensors of the vehicle, see page 47. The LED is illuminated.
Operating requirements It is possible to display the current status of the parking space search on the Control Display. For measuring parking spaces Park Assistant is automatically activated. ▷ The vehicle must be driving forwards in a straight line at speeds up to approximately Switching on with reverse gear 35 km/h, 22 mph. 1. Engage reverse gear. ▷ Maximum distance from the row of parked It is possible to display the current status of vehicles: 1.5 m, 5 ft. the parking space search on the Control Dis‐ play. Suitable parking space 2. Activate if necessary: "Park Assist" General: ▷ Gap behind an object that is at least 0.5 m, Switching on via iDrive 1.7 ft long. Rear-view camera display or PDC view must be ▷ Gap between two objects, each at least active. 0.5 m, 1.7 ft long. 1. Tilt the Controller to the right. Parking parallel to the road: 2. Activate the Park Assistant on the Control Display: "Park Assist"
287 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 288
CONTROLS Driver Assistance Systems
Display on the control display ▷ Parking operation active. The system takes over the steering. System is activated/deactivated ▷ The parking space search is active whenever the vehicle is driving forwards at low speed, Sym‐ Meaning even if the system is deactivated. If the sys‐ bol tem is deactivated, the displays on the Con‐ trol Display may be shown in grey. Grey: system is not available. White: system is available but not ac‐ Switching the acoustic signal for tivated. suitable parking spaces on/off System is activated. 1. "CAR" Parking space search is active. 2. "Settings" 3. "Driver assistance" Parking operation is active. The sys‐ tem takes over the steering. 4. "Parking and manoeuvring" 5. "Park Assist" Parking space search and system 6. "Alert if parking space detected" status The setting is saved for the current driver profile.
Park Distance Control PDC acoustic signals During an automatic parking manoeuvre, Park Distance Control PDC does not emit an intermit‐ tent tone. A continuous tone sounds if the distance to a detected object is less than approximately 20 cm, 8 in. ▷ The Park Assistant is activated and park‐ ing space search is active. Parking with Park Assistant ▷ Suitable parking spaces are shown on the control display along the edge of the road Driving into a parking space next to the vehicle symbol. When Park Assist 1. Switch on and activate Park Assistant. is active, suitable parking spaces are highligh‐ ted and an acoustic signal sounds. For this, engage reverse gear or press the Park Assist button and activate the system on ▷ When perpendicular or parallel parking the control display if necessary. spaces are clearly detected, the system auto‐ matically selects the appropriate parking Park Assist is activated. method. A selection menu is displayed for 2. Drive forwards past the line of parked vehi‐ parking spaces that are large enough for both cles at a speed up to approximately 35 km/h, parallel and perpendicular parking. In this 22 mph and at a distance of maximum 1.5 m, case, select the desired parking method 5 ft. manually.
288 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 289
Driver Assistance Systems CONTROLS
The status of the parking space search and ▷ When doors are open. possible parking spaces are shown on the ▷ If the parking brake is applied. control display. ▷ When accelerating. 3. Confirm the suggested parking space for the ▷ If the brake pedal remains pressed for a rela‐ parking process: select the parking space on tively long period when the vehicle is station‐ the Control Display. ary. The system takes control of the steering. ▷ When the driver's seat belt is unfastened. 4. Follow the instructions on the control display. A Check Control message is shown. Steptronic transmission: When parking is complete, selector lever po‐ Resuming sition P is engaged. You can continue a cancelled parking operation if Completion of parking is indicated on the applicable. Control Display. To do this, reactivate the Park Assistant and fol‐ 5. Adjust the parking position yourself if neces‐ low the instructions on the Control Display. sary. Switching off Cancelling manually The system can be switched off manually: You can cancel Park Assistant at any time: Press the Park Assistant button. ▷ Press the Park Assistant button.
▷ "Park Assist": select the symbol on the System limits Control Display. Safety note Cancelling automatically The system automatically cancels in the WARNING following situations: The system may not respond at all, or may re‐ ▷ If the driver grips the steering wheel or steers spond too late, incorrectly or without justifica‐ the vehicle. tion due to system limitations. There is a risk of ▷ On snow-covered or slippery road surfaces, if accident or material damage. Observe the in‐ necessary. formation on the system limits and intervene ▷ If it encounters objects that are difficult to ne‐ actively if necessary. gotiate, for example kerbs. ▷ If objects appear suddenly. No parking assistance ▷ If Park Distance Control PDC shows gaps Park Assistant does not provide assistance in the that are too small. following situations: ▷ When a maximum number of parking at‐ ▷ On sharp bends. tempts or the parking time is exceeded. ▷ When towing a trailer. ▷ If other functions are selected on the Control Display. ▷ In angled parking spaces. Steptronic transmission: ▷ With the tailgate open.
289 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 290
CONTROLS Driver Assistance Systems
System limits of the sensors General For further information: ▷ Ultrasonic sensors, see page 49. Steptronic transmission Park Assist calculates the optimum line to take Functional limitations when driving out of the space and takes over the following functions during the manoeuvre: The system may have limited functionality in the following situations, for example: ▷ Steering. ▷ On uneven road surfaces, for example gravel ▷ Accelerating and braking. roads. ▷ Changing gear. ▷ On slippery surfaces. The vehicle manoeuvres automatically until it is ▷ On steep upward or downward gradients. in a position where the driver can drive out of the space without any further steering movements. ▷ If leaves have collected or snow has drifted or been piled up in the parking space. Safety notes ▷ If there is a change in a measured parking space. ▷ If there are ditches or sudden drops, for ex‐ WARNING ample a quayside. The system does not relieve you of your per‐ ▷ In some cases, parking spaces may be detec‐ sonal responsibility to assess the traffic situa‐ ted that are not suitable or suitable parking tion correctly. Due to system limitations, it can‐ spaces may not be detected. not respond independently and appropriately in all traffic conditions. There is a risk of accident. Malfunction Adapt your driving style to the traffic conditions. Observe the traffic situation and intervene ac‐ A Check Control message is shown. tively if the situation warrants it. Park Assistant has failed. Have the system checked by a Service Partner of the manufac‐ turer or another qualified Service Partner or a WARNING specialist workshop. When the trailer tow hitch is in use, the driver assistance system could cause damage if its Depending on the sensors are obstructed. There is a risk of acci‐ dent or material damage. Do not use the driver equipment version: leaving assistance system during trailer operation or a parking space with Park when using the trailer tow hitch, for example Assist with a bicycle carrier. The Safety Information for the Park Distance Principle Control PDC and Park Assist also applies. The system makes it easier to leave parallel park‐ For further information: ing spaces. ▷ Park Distance Control, PDC, see page 278. ▷ Park Assistant, see page 286.
290 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 291
Driver Assistance Systems CONTROLS
Operating requirements With Parking Assistant: ▷ The vehicle has been parked manually and reversing assistant objects are detected in front of and behind the vehicle. The distance to a detected kerb is at least 15 cm, approx. 6 in. Principle ▷ The vehicle has been parked using the Park The system supports the driver when reversing, Assistant and an object is detected in front of for example when driving out of tight or blind the vehicle. parking spaces or narrow roads. ▷ The parking space is at least 0.8 m, 2.6 ft lon‐ The vehicle saves the driving movements for the ger than the vehicle. last stretch of road. The vehicle can reverse ▷ The vehicle has been reverse-bay parked. along this saved stretch with automated steering.
Leaving a parking space General 1. Switch on drive-ready state. The system takes over the steering when revers‐ ing along the saved stretch. 2. Steptronic transmission: The driver is responsible for operating the accel‐ When the vehicle is stationary, press the Park erator pedal and the brake. Assist button or engage reverse gear to switch on Park Assist. The reversing assistant uses the control func‐ tions and the sensors of the Park Distance Con‐ 3. Tilt the Controller to the right as applicable trol PDC and Park Assist. and activate the Park Assistant on the Control Display: "Park Assist" For further information: 4. On the Control Display, confirm the required ▷ Park Distance Control, PDC, see page 278. direction for leaving the parking space. ▷ Park Assistant, see page 286. 5. Steptronic transmission: Safety notes The system takes over the manoeuvre. A message is displayed at the end of the ma‐ noeuvre. WARNING 6. Make sure that it is safe to leave the parking The system does not relieve you of your per‐ space in the current traffic situation and drive sonal responsibility to assess the traffic situa‐ off as usual. tion correctly. Due to system limitations, it can‐ The Park Assistant is switched off automati‐ not respond independently and appropriately in cally. all traffic conditions. There is a risk of accident. Adapt your driving style to the traffic conditions. System limits Observe the traffic situation and intervene ac‐ tively if the situation warrants it. The system limits of the Park Distance Control PDC and the Park Assist apply.
WARNING When the trailer tow hitch is in use, the driver assistance system could cause damage if its sensors are obstructed. There is a risk of acci‐ dent or material damage. Do not use the driver
291 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 292
CONTROLS Driver Assistance Systems
assistance system during trailer operation or At the end of the saved stretch of road, a sig‐ when using the trailer tow hitch, for example nal sounds and a message appears prompt‐ with a bicycle carrier. ing you to take over control of the vehicle.
The Safety Information for the Park Distance Cancelling the system Control PDC and Park Assist also applies. The system automatically cancels in situations For further information: such as the following: ▷ Park Distance Control, PDC, see page 278. ▷ If the driver grips the steering wheel or steers ▷ Park Assistant, see page 286. the vehicle. ▷ When a forward gear is engaged. Operating requirements ▷ When drive control systems or Driver Assis‐ ▷ To save the stretch of road, drive forwards tance Systems are activated or intervening. without interruption. ▷ If the vehicle is stationary for several minutes. ▷ A maximum of 50 metres/ 55 yards can be ▷ If the vehicle leaves the stored lane during re‐ saved. versing; for example, at the maximum steer‐ ▷ To save the stretch of road, do not drive ing angle. faster than 36 km/h/ 22 mph. ▷ When the display on the Control Display is ▷ Dynamic Stability Control DSC is activated. hidden by messages, for example due to in‐ coming calls. Reversing with automated steering System limits 1. When the vehicle is stationary and the drive- ▷ When you reach normal road traffic or if you ready state is switched on, engage reverse encounter an obstacle, stop immediately and gear or press the Park Assistant button. take over control of the vehicle. 2. Tilt the Controller to the right. ▷ The maximum speed when reversing is limi‐ ted to approximately 9 km/h/ 6 mph. 3. "Reversing Assistant" If the maximum speed is exceeded, a warning The system takes over the steering. is issued and the function may be cancelled. 4. Follow the instructions on the Control Display ▷ The system limits of the Park Distance Con‐ as applicable. trol PDC and the Park Assist also apply. 5. Take your hands off the steering wheel and Various factors can result in sideways deviations carefully drive off using the accelerator pedal when reversing along the saved stretch of road. and brake. These factors include, for example: When reversing, pay attention to the vehicle ▷ Steering wheel movements when the vehicle surroundings and, if you encounter an obsta‐ is stationary during the process of saving the cle, stop immediately and take over control of stretch. the vehicle. Pay attention to the information on Park Distance Control PDC. ▷ The speed is not adapted to the stretch of road in question. 6. Stop when you reach normal road traffic at the latest and take over control of the vehicle, ▷ Road conditions, for example gradients or for example by engaging a forward gear. slopes.
292 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 293
Driver Assistance Systems CONTROLS
With Parking Assistant Safety note Plus: Surround View WARNING Principle The system does not relieve you of your per‐ sonal responsibility to assess the traffic situa‐ The system provides assistance with parking and tion correctly. There is a risk of accident. Adapt manoeuvring. It does this by displaying an image your driving style to the traffic conditions. Addi‐ of the area all around the vehicle on the Control tionally, look directly to check the traffic situa‐ Display. tion and the area around the vehicle and inter‐ vene actively where appropriate. General Several cameras capture the area from various selectable perspectives. Overview The following camera perspectives can be dis‐ played: Buttons in the vehicle ▷ Automatic camera perspective: the system automatically shows the appropriate camera perspective depending on the particular driv‐ ing situation. ▷ Rear-view camera: for showing the areas be‐ hind the vehicle. ▷ Flank view right and left: for showing the areas to the side of the vehicle. ▷ Camera perspective freely movable using iDrive. Park Assistant button ▷ Panorama View: for representing crossing traffic, for example at junctions and exits, de‐ Panorama View pending on which gear is currently engaged. Depending on the view, the vehicle's surround‐ Sensors ings or a partial area are displayed. The system is controlled using the following sen‐ Assistance functions, for example auxiliary lines, sors: are also shown on the display. ▷ Front camera. A number of assistance functions can be active simultaneously. ▷ Top view cameras. Some assistance functions can be activated ▷ Rear-view camera. manually. For further information: The following assistance functions are shown Sensors of the vehicle, see page 47. automatically: ▷ Lateral parking aid. ▷ Door opening angle.
293 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 294
CONTROLS Driver Assistance Systems
Switching on/off 3 Flank view 4 Automatic camera perspective Automatic activation 5 Movable, free camera perspective The system automatically switches on when se‐ 6 Toolbar, right lector lever position R is engaged while the en‐ gine is running. 7 Rear-view camera The camera perspective appropriate for the cur‐ 8 Selection window rent driving situation is shown. For further information: Toolbar, left Park Distance Control, switching on/off, see It is possible to select various views directly using page 279. iDrive and the function bar on the left. To do this, tilt the Controller to the left if necessary. Switching on/off manually ▷ "Car wash". Press the Park Assistant button. ▷ "Parking": around the vehicle. ▷ "3D view": free camera. ▷ On: the LED is illuminated. ▷ "Tow hitch". ▷ Off: the LED is extinguished. Depending on the equipment, the Reversing As‐ Flank view sist camera cannot be switched off when reverse Flank view can be selected for the right or left gear is engaged. side of the vehicle. This view displays the area at the side to assist Automatic deactivation when with positioning the vehicle at the kerb or along‐ moving forwards side any other obstacles. The system switches off once a certain distance Flank view looks from the rear to the front. If or speed is exceeded. there is a hazard, it automatically focuses on pos‐ Switch the system back on if necessary. sible obstacles.
Display on the control display Automatic camera perspective The automatic camera perspective displays a Overview steering angle-dependent view looking towards the vehicle's direction of travel. This perspective adapts to the current driving sit‐ uation. As soon as obstacles are detected, the view switches to a fixed display of the area in front or behind the bumper or, if necessary, to a flank view.
Movable, free camera perspective 1 Toolbar, left If the movable camera perspective is selected, a 2 Camera image circular path is shown on the control display.
294 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 295
Driver Assistance Systems CONTROLS
By turning the Controller or using the touch func‐ Parking guidance lines tion, defined perspectives along the circular path can be selected. Driving path lines The current perspective is identified by a camera symbol. To exit the function, tilt the Controller to the side and select a different camera function.
Toolbar, right Assistance functions can be activated and set‐ tings made using iDrive and the function bar on the right. To do this, tilt the Controller to the right if necessary. The driving path lines help you to estimate the ▷ "Park Assist". space required when parking and manoeuvring on a level road surface. ▷ "Reversing Assistant". The driving path lines are dependent on the ▷ "Camera picture": steering angle and continuously adapt to steer‐ ▷ "Brightness". ing wheel movements. ▷ "Contrast". ▷ "Parking guide lines". Turning circle lines ▷ "Obstacle mark.". ▷ "Settings": to perform settings, for exam‐ ple to use the activation points with Panor‐ ama View.
Rear-view camera This view shows the image from the rear-view camera.
Selection window The turning circle lines can only be shown in the In the selection window, the individual camera camera image together with driving path lines. perspectives can be selected using iDrive. The turning circle lines show the trajectory of the smallest possible turning circle on a level road surface. Once the steering wheel has been turned be‐ yond a certain angle, only one turning circle line is displayed.
295 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 296
CONTROLS Driver Assistance Systems
Parking with the help of driving path and Zoom to trailer tow hitch turning circle lines To assist with connecting up a trailer, it is possi‐ 1. Position the vehicle so that the red turning ble to zoom in on the area around the trailer tow circle line is within the boundaries of the park‐ hitch. ing space. 2. Turn the steering wheel so that the green driving path line covers the corresponding turning circle line.
Obstacle marker
Two static circle segments show the distance between the trailer and the trailer tow hitch. A docking line dependent on the steering angle assists you in lining up the trailer tow hitch with the trailer. When zooming in, remember that the view might Obstacles behind the vehicle are detected by the no longer show certain obstacles. Park Distance Control PDC sensors. Obstacle markings can be shown in the camera Lateral parking aid image. The colour grading of the obstacle markings is Principle the same as the Park Distance Control PDC The system warns about obstacles at the side of markings. the vehicle.
Washing bay view Display
The washing bay view provides assistance when Obstacle markings are displayed at the sides of driving into washing bays by displaying the vehi‐ the vehicle to protect the vehicle's flanks. cle's own tyre tracks. ▷ No markings: no obstacles have been detec‐ ted.
296 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 297
Driver Assistance Systems CONTROLS
▷ Coloured markings: warning that obstacles objects, bear in mind the following when parking have been detected. beside other objects: The perspective means that protruding objects Lateral parking aid limits located higher up may be closer than they ap‐ pear on the Control Display. The system only shows stationary obstacles that were previously detected by the sensors when driving past. Setting the brightness and The system does not detect whether an obstacle contrast subsequently moves. Consequently, the mark‐ When Surround View or Panorama View is ings will no longer be shown on the display after switched on, it is possible to adjust the bright‐ the vehicle has been stationary for a while. The ness and contrast. area next to the vehicle needs to be scanned 1. If necessary, tilt the Controller to the right. again. 2. "Camera picture" Door opening angle 3. Perform the desired setting: ▷ "Brightness" Principle ▷ "Contrast" If obstacle marking is activated, the system shows any fixed, stationary obstacles that are re‐ Functional limitations stricting the opening angle of the doors. The system can only be used to a limited extent The system does not issue warnings about ap‐ in the following situations: proaching road users. ▷ In poor light conditions. ▷ If the cameras are dirty. ▷ With a door open. ▷ With the tailgate open. ▷ With the exterior mirrors folded in. Grey hatched areas with a symbol, for example an open door, in the camera display identify areas that are not currently shown.
Steptronic transmission: the maximum door System limits opening angles are displayed when the selector lever is in position P. Once the vehicle moves off, System limits of the sensors the parking assistance lines are displayed instead of the opening angles. For further information: ▷ Cameras, see page 47. Limits of the display Non-visible areas For technical reasons, the display of the area around the vehicle is distorted. Due to the angle of view, the area under the ve‐ hicle cannot be seen by the cameras. Even if the symbols for the door opening angles on the Control Display are not covering any other
297 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 298
CONTROLS Driver Assistance Systems
Detection of objects To provide a better view, the front and rear cam‐ Very low obstacles and higher, protruding ob‐ eras scan the areas to the side for traffic. jects such as ledges cannot be detected by the Yellow lines on the screen image indicate the system. front and rear ends of the vehicle. Some assistance functions also take account of The camera image is subject to varying levels of Park Distance Control PDC data. distortion in some areas and is thus not suitable Observe the notes in the chapter on Park Dis‐ for estimating distances. tance Control PDC. Depending on the equipment, the function can The objects shown in the Control Display may be only be used when a forward gear is engaged. closer than they appear. Do not estimate the dis‐ For further information: tance to objects based on the display. Surround View, see page 293. For further information: Park Distance Control, PDC, see page 278. Safety note
Malfunction WARNING The failure of a camera is shown on the Control The system does not relieve you of your per‐ Display. sonal responsibility to assess the traffic situa‐ A yellow symbol is shown and the cap‐ tion correctly. There is a risk of accident. Adapt ture area of the failed camera is shown in your driving style to the traffic conditions. Addi‐ black on the Control Display. tionally, look directly to check the traffic situa‐ tion and the area around the vehicle and inter‐ vene actively where appropriate. With Parking Assistant Plus: Panorama View Overview
Button in the vehicle Principle
The system provides you with an advance view Panorama View of crossing traffic at blind exits and junctions. Sensors General The system is controlled using the following sen‐ Road users hidden by obstacles at the side may sors: not be seen from the driver's seat until very late.
298 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 299
Driver Assistance Systems CONTROLS
▷ Front camera. Where possible, activation points are saved with ▷ Depending on the equipment: Reversing As‐ the town/city and street, otherwise with the GPS sist camera. coordinates. For further information: Using activation points Sensors of the vehicle, see page 47. Use of activation points can be switched on and off. Display on the control display
Press the button with the engine running. 1. Press the button. 2. Tilt the Controller to the right. The image from the relevant camera is displayed, 3. "Settings" depending on the driving direction: 4. "Panorama View, GPS-based" ▷ "Front": image from the front camera. 5. "Panorama View is displayed automatically ▷ "Rear": image from the rear camera. when set activation points are reached." Depending on the vehicle equipment, the cross‐ ing traffic warning can warn about approaching Displaying activation points vehicles by means of radar sensors. For further information: 1. Press the button. Crossing traffic warning, see page 301. 2. Tilt the Controller to the right. 3. "Manage points" With navigation system: A list of all activation points is shown. activation points Renaming or deleting activation Principle points Locations where Panorama View is to switch on automatically can be saved as activation points 1. Press the button. provided that a GPS signal is being received. 2. Tilt the Controller to the right. General 3. "Manage points" Up to ten activation points can be saved. A list of all activation points is shown. Activation points can be used for the front cam‐ 4. Select an activation point if necessary. era when driving forward. 5. Perform the desired setting: ▷ "Rename" Saving activation points ▷ "Delete activation point" 1. Drive to the location at which the system is to ▷ "Delete all activation points" be switched on, and stop. Functional limitations 2. Press the button. The functional limitations of Surround View ap‐ 3. Tilt the Controller to the right. ply. 4. "Activation point" For further information: The current location is shown. Surround View, see page 293. 5. "Save activation point" 299 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 300
CONTROLS Driver Assistance Systems
System limits Switching the function on/off The system limits of Surround View apply. Switching on/off with other For further information: functions Surround View, see page 293. 1. "CAR" 2. "Settings" With Parking Assistant 3. "General settings" Plus: Remote 3D View 4. "Data privacy" 5. Select the desired setting: Principle ▷ "All services incl. analysis" With the corresponding equipment, the BMW ▷ "All vehicle services" Connected app and the images from the Sur‐ round View cameras enable the vehicle sur‐ Switching on/off individually roundings to be displayed on a mobile device. The function shows a view of the current situa‐ Pre-adjustment tion. 1. "CAR" 2. "Settings" Sensors 3. "General settings" The system is controlled using the following sen‐ 4. "Data privacy" sors: 5. "Select services individually" ▷ Front camera. 6. "Connected app and cust. portal" ▷ Top view cameras. 7. "Remote 3D View" ▷ Rear-view camera.
For further information: Switching on/off Sensors of the vehicle, see page 47. 1. "CAR" 2. "Settings" Operating requirements 3. "General settings" ▷ Data transfer must be activated. 4. "Data privacy" Data protection, see page 79. 5. "Individual selection" ▷ The BMW Connected App must be installed on the mobile device. System limits of the sensors ▷ ConnectedDrive countries: a driver profile For further information: with an existing ConnectedDrive account must be activated. ▷ Cameras, see page 47. Driver profiles, see page 80. Functional limitations The system may have limited functionality or may not be available at all in the following situa‐ tions, for example:
300 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 301
Driver Assistance Systems CONTROLS
▷ With a door or the tailgate open. Dark areas in Safety note the display indicate areas that are not detec‐ ted by the system. WARNING ▷ With the exterior mirrors folded in. The system does not relieve you of your per‐ ▷ When other camera functions are run in the sonal responsibility to assess the visibility con‐ vehicle. ditions and traffic situation correctly. There is a ▷ If the vehicle is moving faster than at walking risk of accident. Adapt your driving style to the speed. traffic conditions. Observe the traffic situation ▷ It may not be possible to use the function in and intervene actively if the situation warrants it. all countries. ▷ For reasons related to data protection, the function can only be run three times in two Overview hours. Button in the vehicle Crossing traffic warning
Principle At blind exits or when leaving bay parking spaces, the system detects other road users ap‐ proaching from the side earlier than is possible from the driver's seat.
General Park Assistant button
Sensors The system is controlled using the following sen‐ sors: ▷ Side radar sensors, rear. ▷ Depending on the equipment: side radar sen‐ sors, front. For further information: Two radar sensors in the rear bumper monitor Sensors of the vehicle, see page 47. the area behind the vehicle. The system indicates when other road users are approaching.
Depending on the equipment, the area in front of the vehicle is also monitored. For this purpose, two further radar sensors are located in the front bumper.
301 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 302
CONTROLS Driver Assistance Systems
Switching on/off Warning
Activating/deactivating the system General The Control Display shows the corresponding With the button image, an acoustic signal sounds, if necessary, and the light in the exterior mirror flashes. 1. Press the Park Assistant button. 2. Tilt the Controller to the right. Light in the exterior mirror 3. "Settings" 4. "Cross-traffic alert" 5. "Activate function"
Via iDrive 1. "CAR" 2. "Settings" 3. "Driver assistance" 4. "Parking and manoeuvring" The light in the exterior mirror flashes if other ve‐ 5. "Cross-traffic alert" hicles are detected by the rear sensors when the vehicle is reversing. 6. "Activate function"
Automatic activation Display in the Park Distance Control If the system was activated on the Control Dis‐ PDC view play, it is switched on automatically as soon as Park Distance Control PDC or Panorama View is active and a gear is engaged. The system is switched on at the rear when re‐ verse gear is engaged. Depending on the equipment, the system is switched on at the front when a forward gear is engaged.
Switching off automatically In the Park Distance Control PDC view, the rele‐ vant boundary area flashes red if the sensors de‐ The system switches off automatically in the tect vehicles. following situations: ▷ If walking speed is exceeded. ▷ When a certain distance is exceeded. ▷ When Park Assistant is actively parking the vehicle.
302 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 303
Driver Assistance Systems CONTROLS
Display in the camera view
The relevant boundary area, arrow 1, in the cam‐ era view flashes red if the sensors detect vehi‐ cles. Yellow lines, arrow 2, indicate the bumper of your vehicle.
Acoustic warning In addition to the visual display, a warning signal sounds when your own vehicle is moving in the corresponding direction.
System limits
System limits of the sensors For further information: ▷ Radar sensors, see page 48.
Functional limitations The system may have limited functionality in the following situations, for example: ▷ On sharp bends. ▷ If crossing objects are moving very slowly or very quickly. ▷ If there are other objects in the field of view of the sensors that conceal the crossing traffic. If the trailer socket is occupied, for example when operating with a trailer or a bicycle carrier, cross‐ ing traffic warning is not available for the area be‐ hind the vehicle.
303 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 304
CONTROLS Driving comfort
Driving comfort
Vehicle equipment The shock absorber settings are assigned to the different driving modes of the Driving Experience Control. This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ cific and optional equipment available for the For further information: model series. It may therefore describe equip‐ Driving Experience Control, see page 155. ment and functions which are not installed in your vehicle, for example on account of the spe‐ cial equipment selected or the country specifica‐ Performance Control tion. This also applies to safety-relevant func‐ tions and systems. Please comply with the Performance Control increases the agility of the relevant laws and regulations when using the vehicle. corresponding functions and systems. Individual wheels are braked to increase agility for a sporty driving style. Suspension components Engine sound The suspension components have been opti‐ mised for the vehicle and its area of use, thus en‐ Depending on the equipment and the national- suring the best possible driving experience. market version, it may be possible to configure the sound of the electric motor if necessary. Adaptive M suspension 1. "CAR" 2. "Settings" Principle 3. "General settings" The Adaptive M suspension is a controllable 4. "Engine sound" sports suspension. 5. Select the desired setting. The system reduces unwanted vehicle move‐ The setting is saved for the current driver profile. ments when a sporty driving style is used or when driving on uneven roads.
General Depending on road conditions and driving style, driving dynamics and driving comfort are en‐ hanced.
Configuration The system offers various shock absorber set‐ tings, from comfortable travel to sporty driving.
304 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 305
Air conditioning CONTROLS
Air conditioning
Vehicle equipment Automatic air conditioning
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ Overview cific and optional equipment available for the model series. It may therefore describe equip‐ Buttons in the vehicle ment and functions which are not installed in your vehicle, for example on account of the spe‐ cial equipment selected or the country specifica‐ tion. This also applies to safety-relevant func‐ tions and systems. Please comply with the relevant laws and regulations when using the corresponding functions and systems.
Interior air quality
The air quality in the vehicle is improved by the Climate functions following components: ▷ Emissions-tested interior. Button Function ▷ Microfilter. Temperature. ▷ Air-conditioning system for regulating tem‐ perature, air flow and recirculated-air mode. Air-conditioning mode. Depending on the equipment version: ▷ Microfilter/activated carbon filter. Maximum cooling. ▷ Automatic air recirculation control AUC. ▷ Independent ventilation. AUTO programme.
Recirculated-air mode.
Switch off.
Air distribution, manual.
Defrost the windscreen and re‐ move condensation.
Rear window heating.
305 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 306
CONTROLS Air conditioning
Button Function 4. "Heating/ventilation" 5. "Driver" Seat heating, see page 134. 6. "Temperature:" 7. Set the desired temperature. Air flow, manual. Avoid switching between different temperature settings in rapid succession. The automatic air Individual functions – for example, temperature – conditioning may not have sufficient time to ad‐ can also be operated using spoken commands. just to the set temperature.
Switching on/off Cooling function
Switching on Principle Press any button, with the following exceptions: Interior air is cooled and dried and then heated again depending on the temperature setting. ▷ Switch off. The interior can be cooled when the drive-ready ▷ Rear window heating. or standby state is switched on. ▷ Lower side of air flow button. ▷ Seat heating. Switching on/off Press the button. Switching off Complete system: Depending on the weather conditions, the wind‐ Press the button until the control illumi‐ screen and the side windows may mist over for a nates. short time when the drive-ready state has been switched on. Temperature The cooling function is switched on automati‐ cally in the AUTO programme. Principle When the automatic air conditioning is in opera‐ tion, condensation develops and exits under‐ The automatic air conditioning adjusts to the set neath the vehicle. temperature as quickly as possible, using maxi‐ mum cooling or heating power if necessary. The temperature is then maintained. Maximum cooling effect
Adjusting Principle Using the button: When the standby or drive-ready state is switched on, the system is set to lowest temper‐ Press the upper or lower side of the ature, optimum amount of air and air recirculation button to set the desired temperature. function. Via iDrive: General 1. "CAR" The function is available at an outside tempera‐ 2. "Settings" ture above approximately 0 ℃/32 ℉ and when 3. "Climate comfort" drive-ready state is switched on.
306 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 307
Air conditioning CONTROLS
Switching on/off Recirculated-air mode Press the button. Principle The LED is illuminated when the sys‐ tem is switched on. If the air outside the vehicle has an unpleasant odour or contains pollutants, the air supply to the The air flows from the side nozzles for the upper interior of the vehicle can be shut off. The air in‐ body area. Therefore open the side nozzles. side the vehicle is then recirculated. The air flow can be adapted when the pro‐ gramme is active. Operation Using the button: AUTO programme Press the button. Principle The LED is illuminated when recircula‐ ted-air mode is switched on. The outside air sup‐ The AUTO program cools, ventilates or heats ply is shut off. the interior automatically. When recirculated-air mode is switched off, fresh It does this by automatically regulating the air air is directed into the vehicle's interior. flow, air distribution and temperature depending on the interior temperature and the selected Via iDrive: temperature setting. 1. "CAR" Switching on/off 2. "Settings" Using the button: 3. "Climate comfort" 4. "Air quality" Press the button. 5. Select the desired setting: The LED is illuminated when the AUTO programme is switched on. ▷ "Air recirculation" ▷ "Automatic" Via iDrive: ▷ "Fresh air" 1. "CAR" The recirculated-air mode automatically switches 2. "Settings" off after a given time depending on the ambient 3. "Climate comfort" conditions, to avoid condensation. 4. "Heating/ventilation" Continuous use of recirculated-air mode wor‐ sens air quality inside the vehicle and increases 5. "Automatic" condensation on the windows. Depending on the selected temperature and ex‐ If there is condensation, shut down recirculated- ternal influences, the air is directed towards the air mode or remove the condensation. windscreen, the side windows the upper body and into the footwell. Air flow, manual The cooling function is switched on automati‐ cally in the AUTO programme. Principle Point the side nozzles at the side windows. The air flow for air conditioning can be set man‐ The AUTO programme is automatically switched ually. off when the air distribution is set manually.
307 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 308
CONTROLS Air conditioning
General Switching on/off To be able to adjust the air flow manually, first Press the button. switch off the AUTO programme. The LED is illuminated when the sys‐ tem is switched on. Adjusting Press upper or lower side of button: re‐ The air flow can be adjusted manually when the duce or increase air flow. system is switched on. If there is condensation on the window, Selected air flow is shown on the climate display. press the button or switch on the cool‐ In order to protect the battery the air flow rate is ing function. Ensure that air can flow towards the reduced, if necessary. windscreen.
Adjusting the air distribution Rear window heating manually Press the button. The LED is illumina‐ Principle ted. The air distribution for air conditioning can be set The function is available when drive-ready state manually. is switched on. The rear window heating is switched off auto‐ Adjusting matically after a while. Press the button repeatedly to select a programme: Microfilter
▷ Windows, upper body area and footwell. The microfilter traps dust and pollen in the in‐ coming air. ▷ Upper body area and footwell. Have this filter replaced during maintenance of ▷ Footwell. the vehicle. ▷ Windows and footwell. ▷ Windows. ▷ Windows and upper body. ▷ Upper body area. Selected air distribution is shown on the climate display.
Defrosting the windscreen and removing condensation
Principle Ice and condensation are quickly removed from the windscreen and the front side windows.
308 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 309
Air conditioning CONTROLS
Automatic air conditioning Button Function with extended functionality Seat heating, see page 134.
Overview Air-conditioning mode. Call up the air conditioning Buttons in the vehicle menu for the following settings, for example: upper body tem‐ perature adjustment, independ‐ ent ventilation, cooling function.
Individual functions – for example, temperature – can also be operated using spoken commands.
Calling up the air conditioning menu Press the button. Climate functions
The air conditioning menu is displayed. Button Function Air conditioning functions such as the following Temperature. are available via the Climate menu: ▷ Air quality. Recirculated-air mode. ▷ Heating/ventilation. ▷ Independent ventilation/Auxiliary heating. Maximum cooling. ▷ Cooling function. It is possible to make individual settings for some AUTO programme. air conditioning functions; for example, switching on/off, setting the intensity. Air flow, manual. Switch off. Switching on/off AUTO programme intensity. Switching on Air distribution, manual. Press any button, with the following exceptions: ▷ Menu/air conditioning mode. Defrost the windscreen and re‐ move condensation. ▷ Rear window heating. ▷ Lower side of air flow button. Rear window heating. ▷ Seat heating.
309 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 310
CONTROLS Air conditioning
Switching off The ventilation air flow in the upper body area provides noticeable heating or cooling depend‐ Hold down the button until the control ing on the set temperature. shuts down. The set interior temperature for driver and front seat passenger is not changed by this. Temperature Adjusting Principle 1. "CAR" The automatic air conditioning adjusts to the set 2. "Settings" temperature as quickly as possible, using maxi‐ mum cooling or heating power if necessary. The 3. "Climate comfort" temperature is then maintained. 4. "Heating/ventilation" 5. "Temperature adjustment" Adjusting 6. Set the desired temperature. Using the button: Press the upper or lower side of the Cooling function button to set the desired temperature. Principle Via iDrive: Interior air is cooled and dried and then heated 1. "CAR" again depending on the temperature setting. 2. "Settings" The interior can be cooled when the drive-ready 3. "Climate comfort" or standby state is switched on. 4. "Heating/ventilation" Switching on/off 5. "Driver" or "Front passenger" Using the button: 6. "Temperature:" Press the button. 7. Set the desired temperature.
8. "OK" Via iDrive: Avoid switching between different temperature 1. "CAR" settings in rapid succession. The automatic air conditioning may not have sufficient time to ad‐ 2. "Settings" just to the set temperature. 3. "Climate comfort" 4. "Heating/ventilation" Ventilation temperature 5. "Climate control (A/C)" General Depending on the weather conditions, the wind‐ screen and the side windows may mist over for a The temperature of the ventilation in the upper short time when the drive-ready state has been body area can be adjusted. switched on. The temperature is adjusted on an individual ba‐ The cooling function is switched on automati‐ sis, for example towards the blue for colder and cally in the AUTO programme. towards the red for warmer.
310 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 311
Air conditioning CONTROLS
When the automatic air conditioning is in opera‐ Via iDrive: tion, condensation develops and exits under‐ 1. "CAR" neath the vehicle. 2. "Settings" Maximum cooling effect 3. "Climate comfort" 4. "Heating/ventilation" Principle 5. "Driver" When the standby or drive-ready state is 6. "Automatic" switched on, the system is set to lowest temper‐ ature, optimum amount of air and air recirculation Depending on the selected settings and external function. influences, the air is directed towards the wind‐ screen, the side windows, the upper body and General into the footwell. The cooling function is switched on automati‐ The function is available at an outside tempera‐ cally in the AUTO program. ture above approximately 0 ℃/32 ℉ and when drive-ready state is switched on. Point the side nozzles at the side windows. A condensation sensor also controls the pro‐ Switching on/off gramme so that window condensation is avoided as much as possible. Press the button. The AUTO programme is automatically switched The LED is illuminated when the sys‐ off when the air distribution is set manually. tem is switched on.
The air flows from the side nozzles for the upper Intensity body area. Therefore open the side nozzles. With the AUTO programme switched on, the in‐ The air flow can be adapted when the pro‐ tensity can be adjusted. This changes the auto‐ gramme is active. matic control for the air flow. Using the button: AUTO programme Press top or bottom side of button: re‐ duce or increase intensity. Principle The AUTO program cools, ventilates or heats Via iDrive: the interior automatically. 1. "CAR" The air flow, air distribution and temperature are 2. "Settings" regulated automatically depending on the interior temperature, the selected temperature setting 3. "Climate comfort" and the selected intensity setting. 4. "Heating/ventilation" 5. "Driver" Switching on/off 6. "Level" Using the button: 7. Set the desired intensity. Press the button. The selected intensity is shown on the climate The LED is illuminated when the AUTO display. programme is switched on.
311 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 312
CONTROLS Air conditioning
Automatic air recirculation The LED is illuminated when recirculated-air control AUC mode is switched on. The outside air supply is shut off. Principle When recirculated-air mode is switched off, fresh air is directed into the vehicle's interior. Automatic air recirculation control AUC detects pollutants in the outside air. The supply of out‐ Via iDrive: side air is shut off and the interior air is recircula‐ ted. 1. "CAR" 2. "Settings" General 3. "Climate comfort" When the system is activated, a sensor detects 4. "Air quality" pollutants in the outside air and controls shut-off 5. Select the desired setting: automatically. ▷ "Air recirculation" When the system is deactivated, outside air flows into the interior continuously. ▷ "Fresh air" Continuous use of recirculated-air mode wor‐ The recirculated-air mode automatically switches sens air quality inside the vehicle and increases off after a given time depending on the ambient condensation on the windows. conditions, to avoid condensation. Continuous use of recirculated-air mode wor‐ Switching on/off sens air quality inside the vehicle and increases 1. "CAR" condensation on the windows. 2. "Settings" If there is condensation, shut down recirculated- air mode or remove the condensation. 3. "Climate comfort" 4. "Air quality" Air flow, manual 5. "Automatic" If there is condensation, shut down recirculated- Principle air mode or remove the condensation. The air flow for air conditioning can be set man‐ ually. Recirculated-air mode General Principle To be able to adjust the air flow manually, first If the air outside the vehicle has an unpleasant switch off the AUTO programme. odour or contains pollutants, the air supply to the interior of the vehicle can be shut off. The air in‐ Adjusting side the vehicle is then recirculated. Press upper or lower side of button: re‐ duce or increase air flow. Adjusting Using the button: The selected air flow is shown on the climate display. Press the button. In order to protect the battery the air flow rate is reduced, if necessary.
312 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 313
Air conditioning CONTROLS
Adjusting the air distribution Defrosting the windscreen and manually removing condensation
Principle Principle The air distribution for air conditioning can be set Ice and condensation are quickly removed from manually. the windscreen and the front side windows.
Adjusting Switching on/off Press the button repeatedly to select a Press the button. programme: The LED is illuminated when the sys‐ tem is switched on. ▷ Windows, upper body area and footwell. ▷ Upper body area and footwell. The air flow can be adjusted manually when the ▷ Footwell. system is switched on. ▷ Windows and footwell. If there is condensation, press the but‐ ▷ Windows. ton or switch on the cooling function to use the condensation sensor. Ensure that air can ▷ Windows and upper body. flow towards the windscreen. ▷ Upper body area. The selected air distribution is shown on the cli‐ Rear window heating mate display. Press the button. The LED is illumina‐ SYNC program ted. The function is available when drive-ready state Principle is switched on. The following settings on the driver's side can be The rear window heating is switched off auto‐ transferred to the front passenger's side: matically after a while. ▷ Temperature. ▷ Air flow. Microfilter/active carbon filter ▷ Air distribution. The microfilter traps dust and pollen in the in‐ ▷ AUTO programme. coming air. The activated carbon filter also removes gaseous Switching on/off pollutants from the outside air entering the vehi‐ 1. "CAR" cle. 2. "Settings" Have this combined filter replaced during main‐ tenance of the vehicle. 3. "Climate comfort" 4. "Synchronise" The program is automatically switched off if the settings are changed on the front passenger side.
313 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 314
CONTROLS Air conditioning
Ventilation Ventilation in the rear, centre
Principle The direction of the various air flows can be set individually.
Setting the ventilation
General
The direction of the air flows can be set for direct ▷ Lever for changing the air flow direction, ar‐ or indirect ventilation. rows 1. Open the side nozzles and position them in a ▷ Knurled wheel for steplessly opening and way that ensures effective climate control. closing the side nozzles, arrow 2. Direct ventilation Align the air flow directly onto the vehicle occu‐ Rear automatic air pants. The air flow provides noticeable heating or cooling depending on the set temperature. conditioning
Indirect ventilation Overview Do not align the air flow directly onto the vehicle occupants. The vehicle interior is cooled or Buttons in the vehicle heated indirectly depending on the set tempera‐ ture.
Ventilation at front
Climate functions
Button Function
▷ Lever for changing the air flow direction, ar‐ Temperature. rows 1.
▷ Knurled wheel for steplessly opening and AUTO programme. closing the side nozzles, arrows 2.
Air distribution, manual.
314 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 315
Air conditioning CONTROLS
Button Function Press the left or right side of the button to set the desired temperature. Seat heating, see page 134. Via iDrive: Switch off. 1. "CAR" 2. "Settings" 3. "Climate comfort" Switching on/off 4. "Heating/ventilation" Via iDrive 5. "Second row of seats" 1. "CAR" 6. "Temperature" 2. "Settings" 7. Set the desired temperature. 3. "Climate comfort" The selected temperature is shown on the cli‐ mate display. 4. "Heating/ventilation" Avoid switching between different temperature 5. "Second row of seats" settings in rapid succession. The automatic air 6. "Activate heating/cooling" conditioning may not have sufficient time to ad‐ The rear automatic air conditioning is not opera‐ just to the set temperature. tional if the automatic air conditioning is switched off or the following function is active: defrost the AUTO programme windows and remove condensation. Principle Using the button: switch on The air flow, air distribution and temperature are Press any button, with the following exceptions: automatically regulated. ▷ Switch off. ▷ Seat heating. Switching on/off Using the button: Using the button: switch off Press the button. Press the button. The LED is illuminated when the AUTO programme is switched on. Temperature Via iDrive: 1. "CAR" Principle 2. "Settings" The automatic air conditioning adjusts to the set 3. "Climate comfort" temperature as quickly as possible, using maxi‐ mum cooling or heating power if necessary. The 4. "Heating/ventilation" temperature is then maintained. 5. "Second row of seats" 6. "Automatic" Adjusting Depending on the selected temperature, the in‐ Using the button: tensity of the AUTO programme and external in‐
315 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 316
CONTROLS Air conditioning
fluences, the air is directed towards the upper side temperature. Any snow and ice can be eas‐ body and into the footwell. ier to remove.
Adjusting the air distribution General manually The standing air conditioning can be switched on and off directly or for a preselected departure Principle time. The air distribution for air conditioning can be set The air automatically flows out of the air outlets manually. to the windscreen, side windows, upper body area and the footwell. Adjusting The system is switched off automatically after a Press the button repeatedly to select a certain period of time. programme: If the standing air conditioning is used during charging, less air conditioning power will be re‐ ▷ Upper body area. quired during the journey. This optimises the ▷ Upper body area and footwell. range. ▷ Footwell. Operating requirements Disabling control functions ▷ Vehicle is in rest or standby state and not in drive-ready state. Principle ▷ High-voltage battery is adequately charged or The control functions for rear automatic air con‐ charging cable is connected. ditioning can be disabled. With a discharged high-voltage battery, it may take some time after connecting the charging Activating/deactivating cable before the standing air conditioning is 1. "CAR" ready to function. 2. "Settings" ▷ Direct operation or preselected departure time: depends on the inside, outside and set 3. "Climate comfort" desired temperature. 4. "Heating/ventilation" Ensure that the date and time are set cor‐ 5. "Second row of seats" rectly in the vehicle. 6. "Disable controller" ▷ To ensure the vehicle can be started, the standing air conditioning may be switched off automatically, for example after switching on Standing air conditioning several times or due to the high-voltage bat‐ tery being insufficiently charged. Following Principle switch-off due to insufficient charging, charge the high-voltage battery. The stationary air Standing air conditioning cools or warms the in‐ conditioning will be available again. terior to a comfortable temperature before start‐ ing to drive. ▷ Open the outlets to allow the air to enter the passenger compartment. In addition, the system cools, ventilates or heats automatically depending on the inside and out‐
316 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 317
Air conditioning CONTROLS
Switching on/off directly Press the button on the vehicle key.
Principle The system shuts down automatically after ap‐ The system can be switched on or off in various proximately 30 minutes or by activating the drive- ways. ready state. The system switches off automatically after ap‐ For further information: prox. 30 minutes. For settings, see page 113.
Using the button Display symbol on the automatic air conditioning sig‐ General nals that the system is switched on. If the vehicle is in standby state, the system can be switched on or off via the buttons of the auto‐ Air conditioning for departure matic air conditioning. time
Switching on Principle Press any button, except: To ensure a pleasant interior temperature in the ▷ Rear window heating. vehicle at the start of the journey, it is possible to ▷ Lower side of air flow button. set different departure times. ▷ Seat heating. The switch-on time is automatically determined from the temperature. Switching off Departure time with day of the week: the time Press and hold the down button. and day of the week can be set. The system is switched on in good time before The system switches itself off when you leave the set departure time on the required days of the vehicle. the week. Switch-off takes place automatically a few mi‐ Via iDrive nutes after the set departure time. The system can be switched on or off using Preselection of departure time is done in two iDrive. stages:
1. "CAR" ▷ Set the departure times. 2. "Settings" ▷ Activate the departure time. 3. "Climate comfort" At least 10 minutes should pass between adjust‐ ing/activating the departure time and the sched‐ 4. "Auxiliary climate control" uled departure time, so the climate control has 5. "Start now" enough time to work.
Via vehicle key The system can be switched on using the vehi‐ cle key. The stationary air conditioning function must be set for the button on the vehicle key.
317 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 318
CONTROLS Air conditioning
Setting the departure time Activating with the BMW Connected App Via iDrive With a corresponding BMW app with remote 1. "CAR" function, the system can be switched on at a 2. "Settings" preselected departure time or directly. 3. "Climate comfort" 4. "Auxiliary climate control" 5. "Departure schedule" 6. Select the required departure time. 7. Set the departure time. 8. Select the day of the week if necessary.
Activating the departure time
Operating requirements If a departure time should influence activation of the standing air conditioning, the relevant depar‐ ture time must be activated first.
Via iDrive 1. "CAR" 2. "Settings" 3. "Climate comfort" 4. "Auxiliary climate control" 5. Activate "Preconditioning for departure". 6. "Departure schedule" 7. Select the required departure time. 8. Set the departure time. 9. Select the day of the week if necessary. 10."Activate departure"
Display Symbol on the automatic air conditioning sys‐ tem signals that a departure time has been acti‐ vated. symbol on the automatic air conditioning sig‐ nals that the system is switched on.
318 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 319
Interior equipment CONTROLS
Interior equipment
Vehicle equipment Ashtrays
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ Front centre console cific and optional equipment available for the model series. It may therefore describe equip‐ Opening ment and functions which are not installed in your vehicle, for example on account of the spe‐ 1. Press the cover. cial equipment selected or the country specifica‐ tion. This also applies to safety-relevant func‐ tions and systems. Please comply with the relevant laws and regulations when using the corresponding functions and systems.
Sun visor
Glare protection 2. The ashtray is located in one of the cup hold‐ Fold the sun visor downwards or upwards. ers. Fold the cover of the ashtray upwards.
Protection from glare at the side
Folding out 1. Fold down the sun visor. 2. Unhook the sun visor from its holder and pivot it sideways to the side window.
Folding up To close the sun visor, proceed in reverse order. Emptying Vanity mirror A vanity mirror is located behind a cover in the sun visor. The mirror light switches on when the cover is opened.
With the cover closed, pull the ashtray out of the cup holder.
319 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 320
CONTROLS Interior equipment
Lighter Operation Press in the lighter. Safety notes The lighter can be removed when it pops back out. WARNING Contact with the hot heating element or the hot socket of the lighter can cause burns. Flamma‐ ble materials can catch fire if the lighter is drop‐ Sockets ped or is held against objects. There is a risk of fire and injury. There is a risk of material dam‐ Principle age. Take hold of the lighter by its handle. En‐ The cigarette lighter attachment can be used as sure that children do not use the lighter. a socket for electrical devices when standby state or drive-ready state is switched on.
NOTE General If metallic objects fall into the socket, they can The total load of all sockets must not exceed cause a short circuit. There is a risk of material 140 watts at 12 volts. damage. After using the socket, re-fit the lighter or socket cover. To avoid damage to the socket, do not insert an incompatible plug.
Front centre console Safety notes
WARNING Devices and cables, for example portable navi‐ gation devices, that are located in the deploy‐ ment range of the airbags may impede airbag deployment or be thrown around the vehicle in‐ terior when the airbag is deployed. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that devices and cables are not in the deployment range of the airbags. Press the cover.
NOTE Battery chargers for the vehicle battery may operate with high voltages and high currents which can overload or damage the 12-volt on- board network. There is a risk of material dam‐ age. Only connect battery chargers for the ve‐ hicle battery to the starting aid terminals in the engine compartment.
The lighter is located between the cupholders.
320 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 321
Interior equipment CONTROLS
USB port NOTE If metallic objects fall into the socket, they can General cause a short circuit. There is a risk of material damage. After using the socket, re-fit the Please comply with the notes on connecting mo‐ lighter or socket cover. bile devices to the USB port in the chapter on USB connections. For further information: Front centre console USB connections, see page 91. 1. Press the cover. In the centre armrest
2. The socket is located between the cuphold‐ ers. Pull off the cover. There is a USB port in the centre armrest. Properties: ▷ USB port type C. ▷ For charging mobile devices. ▷ Charging current: max. 3 A. ▷ With navigation system: for data transfer.
In the front centre console
Inside the luggage compartment NOTE Objects in the storage compartment, for exam‐ ple large USB connectors, can block or damage the cover on opening and closing. There is a risk of material damage. When opening and closing, make sure that the area of movement of the cover is kept clear.
There is a socket on the right side of the luggage compartment. Open the cap.
321 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 322
CONTROLS Interior equipment
▷ Charge current: maximum 3 A per port.
Wireless charging dock
Principle The wireless charging dock permits the following functions to be performed wirelessly: Press the cover. ▷ Charging of Qi-compatible mobile phones or other mobile devices which support the Qi standard. ▷ Connection of the mobile telephone to the external aerial. This ensures better network reception and a consistent reproduction quality, depending on the country.
General There is a USB port in the centre console. When inserting the mobile telephone, make sure there are no objects between it and the wireless Properties: charging dock. ▷ USB port type A. During charging, the surface of the dock and the ▷ For charging mobile devices and transferring mobile telephone can become hot. At higher data. temperatures, the charging current through the ▷ Charge current: maximum 1.5 A. mobile telephone may be reduced; in exceptional cases, the charging process is temporarily inter‐ rupted. Observe the relevant information in the In the rear centre console operating instructions for the mobile telephone. The charge indicator shows on the Control Display whether a mobile telephone with Qi ca‐ pability is being charged.
Safety notes
WARNING When charging a Qi-compatible device in the There are two USB ports in the rear centre con‐ wireless charging dock, any metal objects loca‐ sole. ted between the device and the dock can be‐ come very hot. If storage media or electronic Properties: cards, for example smart cards, cards with ▷ USB port type C. magnetic strips or cards for transmitting sig‐ ▷ For charging mobile devices. nals, are placed between the device and the
322 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 323
Interior equipment CONTROLS
dock, this may impair card function. There is a erwise the charging function may be im‐ risk of injury and material damage. When charg‐ paired. ing mobile devices, make sure there are no ob‐ ▷ The mobile telephone to be charged is loca‐ jects between the device and the dock. ted in the middle of the dock.
Operation NOTE The dock is designed for mobile telephones up Inserting the mobile telephone to a certain size. Using excessive force when TThe maximum size for the mobile phone is ap‐ inserting the mobile telephone may damage proximately 154.5 x 80 x 18 mm, 6.06 x 3.1 x the dock or the mobile telephone. There is a 0.7 in. risk of material damage. Observe the maximum dimensions for the mobile telephone. Do not 1. Open the cover of the dock. force the mobile telephone into the dock. 2. Place the mobile telephone in the centre of the dock with the display facing upwards. 3. Close the cover of the dock. Overview Tray in the centre console: Removing the mobile telephone 1. Open the cover of the dock. 2. Remove the mobile telephone.
LED displays
Col‐ Meaning our
Blue The mobile telephone is charging. 1 LED The blue LED stays illuminated once 2 Storage area the inserted Qi-compatible mobile tel‐ ephone is fully charged.
Operating requirements Or‐ The mobile telephone is not charging. ange The mobile phone may be exposed to ▷ The mobile telephone must support and be excessively high temperatures or there compatible with the required Qi standard. may be foreign bodies in the charging If the mobile telephone does not support the dock. Qi standard, the mobile telephone can be charged using a special Qi-compatible charg‐ Red The mobile telephone is not charging. ing pad. Contact a Service Partner of the manu‐ ▷ Standby state is switched on. facturer or another qualified Service Partner or a specialist workshop. ▷ Note the maximum dimensions of the mobile telephone. ▷ Only use protective sleeves and covers up to a maximum thickness of 2 mm, 0.07 in, oth‐
323 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 324
CONTROLS Interior equipment
Forgotten phone warning
General If the vehicle is equipped with the forgotten phone warning function, a warning can be output if a mobile telephone with Qi capability has been left in the wireless charging dock when exiting the vehicle. The forgotten phone warning is shown in the in‐ strument cluster.
Activating 1. "CAR" 2. "Settings" 3. "General settings" 4. "Wireless charging tray" 5. Activate reminder.
System limits If the mobile phone or the vehicle interior is ex‐ posed to excessively high temperatures, the charging functions of the mobile telephone might be restricted and functions might no lon‐ ger work.
324 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 325
Storage compartments CONTROLS
Storage compartments
Vehicle equipment Glove compartment on the passenger side This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ cific and optional equipment available for the model series. It may therefore describe equip‐ Safety note ment and functions which are not installed in your vehicle, for example on account of the spe‐ WARNING cial equipment selected or the country specifica‐ tion. This also applies to safety-relevant func‐ The glove compartment protrudes into the in‐ tions and systems. Please comply with the terior when it is open. Objects in the glove relevant laws and regulations when using the compartment may be thrown around the inte‐ corresponding functions and systems. rior during the journey, for example in the event of an accident or when braking or taking eva‐ sive action. There is a risk of injury. Immediately Storage facilities close the glove compartment after using it.
General Opening The vehicle interior contains multiple storage compartments for stowing objects.
Safety notes
WARNING Loose objects or devices connected by a cable to the vehicle, for example mobile telephones, may be thrown around the interior during the journey, for example in the event of an accident Pull the handle. or when braking or carrying out an evasive ma‐ The lighting in the glove compartment comes noeuvre. There is a risk of injury. Ensure that on. loose objects or devices connected by cable to the vehicle are secured in place in the interior. Closing Shut the lid. NOTE Anti-slip mats can damage the instrument panel. There is a risk of material damage. Do not use anti-slip mats.
325 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 326
CONTROLS Storage compartments
Glove compartment on Safety note driver's side WARNING Safety note Breakable objects, for example glass bottles or glasses, may get broken in the event of an acci‐ dent or when braking or taking evasive action. WARNING Shards may scatter throughout the interior. The glove compartment protrudes into the in‐ There is a risk of injury or material damage. Do terior when it is open. Objects in the glove not use breakable objects during a journey. compartment may be thrown around the inte‐ Only stow breakable objects in closed storage rior during the journey, for example in the event compartments. of an accident or when braking or taking eva‐ sive action. There is a risk of injury. Immediately close the glove compartment after using it. Storage compartment in the centre console Opening Opening
Pull the handle.
Press the cover. Closing Shut the lid. Closing Pull back the cover on the handle strip. Pockets in the doors Storage compartment in General the rear of the centre There are storage compartments in the doors. console
Depending on the vehicle equipment, there may be a storage compartment on the back of the centre console.
326 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 327
Storage compartments CONTROLS
Front centre armrest Opening
General There is a storage compartment in the centre armrest between the seats.
Opening
Press the cover.
Press the button.
Closing Push the cover down until it engages. There are two cup holders in the centre console.
Cup holder front Closing Pull back the cover on the handle strip. Safety note Cup holder rear WARNING Unsuitable containers placed in the cupholders Safety notes may damage the cupholders or be flung into the interior, for example in the event of an acci‐ dent or when braking or carrying out evasive WARNING manoeuvres. Spilt liquids can distract the driver Unsuitable containers placed in the cupholders from the road and lead to an accident. Hot bev‐ may damage the cupholders or be flung into erages may damage the cup holders or cause the interior, for example in the event of an acci‐ scalding. There is a risk of injury or material dent or when braking or carrying out evasive damage. Do not force objects into the cup manoeuvres. Spilt liquids can distract the driver holder. Use lightweight, sealable and shatter‐ from the road and lead to an accident. Hot bev‐ proof containers. Do not transport hot drinks. erages may damage the cup holders or cause scalding. There is a risk of injury or material damage. Do not force objects into the cup
327 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 328
CONTROLS Storage compartments
holder. Use lightweight, sealable and shatter‐ Safety notes proof containers. Do not transport hot drinks.
WARNING
NOTE Items of clothing on the coat hooks can impair visibility when driving. There is a risk of acci‐ If the cup holder is open, the centre armrest dent. Hang items of clothing from the coat cannot be folded back. There is a risk of mate‐ hooks so that they do not obstruct visibility rial damage. Push back the covers before fold‐ when driving. ing up the centre armrest.
WARNING Incorrect use of the coat hooks can present a Opening danger, for example if objects are thrown 1. Pull centre armrest forward with the loop. around as a result of braking or evasive action. There is a risk of injury and material damage. 2. To open the cupholder, press the button. Only hang lightweight objects, for example items of clothing, on the coat hooks.
Closing Push both covers back in one after the other and fold back the centre armrest.
Coat hooks
General The coat hooks are located on the grab handles in the rear.
328 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 329
Luggage compartment CONTROLS
Luggage compartment
Vehicle equipment WARNING This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ Loose objects or devices connected by a cable cific and optional equipment available for the to the vehicle, for example mobile telephones, model series. It may therefore describe equip‐ may be thrown around the interior during the ment and functions which are not installed in journey, for example in the event of an accident your vehicle, for example on account of the spe‐ or when braking or carrying out an evasive ma‐ cial equipment selected or the country specifica‐ noeuvre. There is a risk of injury. Ensure that tion. This also applies to safety-relevant func‐ loose objects or devices connected by cable to tions and systems. Please comply with the the vehicle are secured in place in the interior. relevant laws and regulations when using the corresponding functions and systems. WARNING Loads Incorrectly stowed objects may slip or be thrown into the interior, for example in the event of an accident or when braking or carry‐ Safety notes ing out an evasive manoeuvre. Vehicle occu‐ pants could be struck and injured. There is a risk of injury. Stow and secure objects and the WARNING load correctly. A high gross vehicle weight can make the tyres overheat, causing internal damage and a sud‐ den loss of tyre inflation pressure. Handling NOTE characteristics may be adversely affected, for example reduced directional stability, longer Liquids in the luggage compartment may cause stopping distance and altered steering charac‐ damage. There is a risk of material damage. teristics. There is a risk of accident. Please Ensure that no liquids leak out into the luggage comply with the permitted load index of the compartment. tyre, and do not exceed the permitted gross ve‐ hicle weight. Stowing and securing loads in the vehicle WARNING ▷ Wrap protective material around any sharp If the permitted total weight and the permitted corners and edges on the load. axle loads are exceeded, the operational safety ▷ Heavy loads: stow as far forward and as low of the vehicle is no longer guaranteed. There is down as possible, ideally directly behind the a risk of accident. Do not exceed the permitted rear backrests. total weight and permitted axle loads. ▷ Very heavy loads: stow as far forward as pos‐ sible, low down and directly behind the rear seat backrests. If there are no passengers on
329 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 330
CONTROLS Luggage compartment
the back seat, insert both outer seat belts into Safety note the respective opposite buckles. ▷ Fully fold down the rear backrests if a large WARNING load is to be stowed. Incorrect use of the bag holders can present a ▷ Do not stack load items above the upper danger, for example if objects are flung around edge of the backrests. in the event of braking and evasive manoeu‐ ▷ Small and lightweight loads: secure with ten‐ vres. There is a risk of injury and material dam‐ sioning straps or, depending on the equip‐ age. Only hang light objects, for example shop‐ ment, a luggage compartment net or other ping bags, on the bag holders. Only transport suitable straps. heavy luggage in the luggage compartment if ▷ Large and heavy loads: secure with lashing suitably secured. straps. Folding down Lashing eyes in the luggage compartment
General Load-securing equipment, for example lashing straps, tensioning straps or luggage nets, must be secured to the lashing eyes in the boot.
Lashing eyes Fold open the bag holder until it detectably en‐ gages in the lower position.
Side storage compartment, left
General There is a storage compartment on the left side Four lashing eyes are located in the luggage of the luggage compartment. compartment for securing loads.
Bag holders
General There is a bag holder on the right side in the lug‐ gage compartment.
330 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 331
Luggage compartment CONTROLS
Opening Through-loading system
Principle The boot can be expanded by folding down the rear seat backrests.
General The rear backrest is split 40–20–40. The rear seat backrests on each side and the middle part can be folded down individually. Pull the tab. Depending on the equipment, the rear backrests can be folded down from the rear or from the Storage compartment boot. under the luggage Safety notes compartment floor WARNING General Risk of entrapment when folding down the rear There is a storage compartment under the lug‐ backrest. There is a risk of injury or material gage compartment floor. damage. Before folding down, make sure that the area of movement of the rear backrest and Opening the head restraint is kept clear.
WARNING If a rear seat backrest is not locked, unsecured cargo may be flung into the interior, for example in the event of an accident or during braking or evasive manoeuvres. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that the rear seat backrest is locked after it has been folded back.
Pull the handle and fold the luggage compart‐ ment floor upwards. WARNING If the seat is not adjusted properly or the child Closing seat has been installed incorrectly, the child re‐ Push the luggage compartment floor down until straint system may have limited stability or may it engages. not be stable at all. There is a risk of injury or even death. Make sure that the child restraint system rests firmly against the backrest. Wher‐ ever possible, adapt the backrest angle of all the relevant seat backrests and adjust the seats
331 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 332
CONTROLS Luggage compartment
correctly. Make sure that the seats and their Folding back the rear backrest backrests are correctly engaged or locked. If Fold the rear seat backrest back into seat posi‐ possible, adjust the height of the head re‐ tion and engage. Ensure that the seat belt is not straints, or remove them. jammed. The red mark behind the recess disap‐ pears completely.
WARNING Folding down the rear backrest Once the rear backrest has been folded down, electrically the locking bracket protrudes into the interior. There is a risk of material damage. When the From the luggage compartment rear seat backrest is folded down, watch out for the protruding locking bracket and keep this area clear.
NOTE Vehicle parts can be damaged when folding down the rear backrest. There is a risk of mate‐ rial damage. When folding down, make sure that the area of movement of the rear backrest Pull switch in the luggage compartment. including head restraint is kept clear. ▷ Top switch: right rear backrest folds forwards. ▷ Bottom switch: left and middle rear backrests Folding down the rear backrest fold forwards. manually Folding down the middle part From the rear 1. Fold down the middle head restraint. 1. If necessary, remove the corresponding head restraint. 2. Pull the lever and fold the middle part for‐ wards. 2. Pull the lever in the recess and fold the rear seat backrest forwards.
332 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 333
Luggage compartment CONTROLS
Luggage compartment front area of the luggage compartment cover up‐ wards. cover Before closing the rear window or tailgate, push the luggage compartment cover downwards until Safety notes it clicks.
WARNING Removing The cover can be removed for stowing bulky Loose objects or devices connected by a cable items. to the vehicle, for example mobile telephones, may be thrown around the interior during the journey, for example in the event of an accident or when braking or carrying out an evasive ma‐ noeuvre. There is a risk of injury. Ensure that loose objects or devices connected by cable to the vehicle are secured in place in the interior.
WARNING If the boot cover is not inserted correctly, it may Press the release button, arrow 1, and pull the be thrown around the interior during the jour‐ case for the luggage compartment cover to‐ ney, for example in the event of an accident or wards the rear, arrow 2. during braking or evasive manoeuvres. There is The luggage compartment cover can be stowed a risk of injury and material damage. Make sure in the storage compartment under the luggage that the luggage compartment cover is en‐ compartment floor. gaged securely in the brackets. Stowing away Closing 1. Open the storage compartment under the luggage compartment floor. 2. Open the side storage compartment and re‐ move the lid. Side storage compartment, left, see page 330.
Remove luggage compartment cover, arrow 1, and hang on the brackets on both sides, arrow 2.
Raising For loading, the withdrawn luggage compart‐ ment cover can be raised. To do this, push the
333 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 334
CONTROLS Luggage compartment
3. Insert the left side of the luggage compart‐ 2. Grip the loop and pull the luggage net out of ment cover into the holder under the side its case. trim panel, arrow 1. 3. Insert the rods on both sides upwards into the brackets on the headliner and push for‐ wards.
4. Lower the right side of the luggage compart‐ ment cover, arrow 2. 5. Close the storage compartments. When the luggage net is no longer needed, re‐ verse the procedure. Inserting Slide the case for the luggage compartment With the rear backrest folded cover into the mounts on the side trim panel. down Make sure that the case audibly engages on both sides. Moving the luggage compartment separating net forwards Luggage net 1. Fold the rear seat backrests forwards. 2. Remove the luggage compartment cover. General Removing, see page 333. 3. Press the button, arrow 1, to unlock the case The luggage net can be installed in two different of the luggage compartment separating net positions in the vehicle. at both sides. Safety note
WARNING Injuries or damage can occur when the luggage net rolls closed rapidly. There is a risk of injury or material damage. Do not permit the luggage net to roll rapidly closed.
4. Remove the case upwards from both side With the rear backrest upright brackets, arrow 2. Take care not to get the 1. Fold open rear covers on the headliner until case jammed. they audibly engage.
334 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 335
Luggage compartment CONTROLS
5. Position the case at the rear of the backrests, backrests, until the case engages on both arrows 1. sides. The red warning zones on the buttons disappear. 3. Fold the rear seat backrests back.
Stowing away The luggage net can be stowed under the lug‐ gage compartment floor. 1. Open the storage compartment under the luggage compartment floor.
6. Push the case to the left until the guides 2. Open the side storage compartment and re‐ reach their limit position, arrow 2. Make sure move the lid. that the red mark on the backrest is no longer Side storage compartment, left, see visible. page 330. 3. Fit the case into the mounts. Hooking on the luggage net 4. Pull the luggage compartment separating net 1. Fold open front covers on the headliner. out a little and fold downwards. 2. Swiftly pull out the luggage net. Insert the two side rods into the front brackets on the head‐ liner and push forwards, as in a normal lug‐ gage compartment with the rear seat back‐ rest upright. If removal is blocked, push luggage compartment separating net back in and smoothly remove again. With the rear seat backrest upright, see page 334. 5. Close the storage compartments. Moving the luggage net backwards 1. Remove the case with the luggage net: press the button, arrow 1, and pull out the case, ar‐ row 2.
2. Push the case from above into both brackets in the side trim panel behind the rear seat
335 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 336
DRIVING HINTS Driving precautions
Driving precautions
Vehicle equipment Up to 2000 km, 1200 miles Do not exceed the maximum engine revs and This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ speed: cific and optional equipment available for the ▷ With petrol engines, 4500 rpm and 160 km/h, model series. It may therefore describe equip‐ 100 mph. ment and functions which are not installed in Generally avoid kick-down and driving under full your vehicle, for example on account of the spe‐ load. cial equipment selected or the country specifica‐ tion. This also applies to safety-relevant func‐ From 2000 km, 1200 miles onwards tions and systems. Please comply with the relevant laws and regulations when using the Engine and road speeds can be gradually in‐ corresponding functions and systems. creased.
Tyres Running in Due to the manufacturing process, new tyres do not achieve their full road grip immediately. General Drive moderately for the first 300 km, 200 miles. Moving parts need to adjust to each other. The following notes will help to maximise the ve‐ Brake system hicle's lifetime and efficiency. Brake discs and pads only achieve their full ef‐ Do not use Launch Control when running in. fectiveness after approximately 500 km, 300 miles. Drive moderately during this running- Safety note in period. After fitting new parts WARNING Please comply with the running-in procedures New parts and components can cause safety again if the components previously referred to and Driver Assistance Systems to respond with are renewed. a delay. There is a risk of accident. After new parts have been installed or if the vehicle is new, drive moderately and take action promptly if necessary. Please comply with running-in procedures for the corresponding parts and components.
Engine, gearbox and differential
General The revolution counter is available in SPORT driving mode or in the M/S sport program.
336 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 337
Driving precautions DRIVING HINTS
General driving information WARNING Closing the rear window and If flammable materials, for example leaves or grass, come into contact with hot parts of the tailgate exhaust system, these materials can catch fire. There is a risk of fire and injury. Never remove Safety note the heat shields fitted here or apply underseal to them. Make sure that when driving, idling or WARNING parking, no flammable materials can come into contact with hot vehicle parts. An open rear window or tailgate projects be‐ yond the vehicle, and in the event of an acci‐ dent, braking or evasive manoeuvres, it can en‐ Exhaust gas particle filter danger vehicle occupants and other road users, or damage the vehicle. There is also a risk of Principle exhaust fumes entering the interior of the vehi‐ cle. There is a risk of injury or material damage. The exhaust gas particle filter collects soot parti‐ Do not drive with the rear window or tailgate cles. The soot particles are burned at high tem‐ open. peratures to clean the exhaust gas particle filter as necessary.
Driving with the rear window and General tailgate open The cleaning process takes a few minutes, dur‐ If there is no alternative to driving with the tail‐ ing which the following may occur: gate open: ▷ The engine may temporarily run a little ▷ Close all the windows and the glass sunroof. roughly. ▷ Adjust the blower to a high setting. ▷ A slightly higher engine speed may be re‐ quired to achieve the usual power output. ▷ Maintain a moderate speed. ▷ There may be a small amount of smoke from Hot exhaust system the exhaust, even after stopping the engine. ▷ Noise, for example caused by the radiator fan running, may be heard, even some minutes WARNING after stopping the engine. High temperatures may occur under the vehicle It is normal for the radiator fan to keep running body during driving, for example because of the for several minutes, even after short trips. exhaust system. Contact with the exhaust sys‐ tem can lead to burns. There is a risk of injury. Cleaning the exhaust gas particle Do not touch the hot exhaust system, including filter while driving the exhaust pipe. Various driver profiles ensure that the exhaust gas particle filter is self-cleaning. If, in addition to the self-cleaning function, the exhaust gas parti‐ cle filter needs to be actively cleaned while driv‐ ing, a Check Control message is displayed.
337 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 338
DRIVING HINTS Driving precautions
Proceed as follows the next time you drive out‐ This situation, known as aquaplaning, means that side of built-up areas for around 30 minutes. the tyre can actually lose contact completely with With petrol engine: the road surface and the vehicle can neither be steered, nor the brakes properly applied. ▷ Deactivate cruise Control systems. ▷ Take your foot off the accelerator repeatedly Driving through water and allow the vehicle to roll in overrun mode. For further information: General Make use of overrun mode, see page 349. Please comply with the following when driving ▷ If possible, drive at alternating speeds. through water: ▷ Deactivate the Automatic Start/Stop function. Radio signals ▷ Only drive through still water. ▷ Only drive through water up to a max. depth WARNING of 25 cm, 9.8 in. Certain vehicle functions may be affected by in‐ ▷ Drive through water at a walking speed of no terference from high-frequency radio signals. more than 5 km/h, 3 mph. Such signals are output from a series of trans‐ mission systems, for example from air traffic Safety note beacons or relay stations for mobile telecom‐ munications. NOTE We recommend you consult your Service Cen‐ tre should you experience any difficulties. Driving through excessively deep water too fast can result in water entering the engine com‐ partment, electrical system or transmission. Mobile communication in the There is a risk of material damage. When driv‐ vehicle ing through water, do not exceed the maximum water depth and speed specified above.
WARNING There is a possibility of reciprocal interference Safe braking between the vehicle electronics and mobile radio devices. Radiation is generated when mo‐ General bile radio devices are transmitting. There is a The vehicle is equipped with an Anti-lock Brake risk of injury or material damage. If possible, System ABS as standard. only use mobile radio devices, for example mo‐ Perform full braking in situations that require it. bile telephones, in the interior if they are con‐ The vehicle remains steerable. Any obstacles nected directly to an external aerial in order to can be avoided by steering as smoothly as possi‐ eliminate reciprocal interference and to divert ble. the radiation away from the vehicle's interior. A pulsing of the brake pedal and hydraulic regu‐ lating sounds indicate that the Anti-lock Brake Aquaplaning System ABS is functioning. On wet or slushy roads, a wedge of water can In certain braking situations, the perforated brake form between the tyres and the road. discs can cause functional noise. However, the
338 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 339
Driving precautions DRIVING HINTS
functional noises have no effect on the efficiency Safety notes and operational safety of the brakes. WARNING Objects in the range of movement of the pedals Even slight but continuous pressure on the brake pedal can cause overheating, brake pad wear or even brake system failure. There is a WARNING risk of accident. Avoid excessive loads on the Objects in the driver's footwell can restrict the brake. pedal travel or block a pedal that has been pressed. There is a risk of accident. Ensure that items in the vehicle are stowed securely and WARNING cannot get into the driver's footwell. Only use When idling, in the ECO PRO drive mode or floor mats that are suitable for the vehicle and with the drive-ready state switched off, safety- can be securely fastened to the floor. Do not relevant functions are restricted or no longer use loose floor mats, and do not place several available, for example the braking effect of the floor mats on top of one another. Make sure engine or power assistance for the braking that there is sufficient space for the pedals. En‐ force and steering. There is a risk of accident. sure that floor mats are securely reattached af‐ Do not drive at idle speed, in the ECO PRO ter removal, for example for cleaning. drive mode or with the drive-ready state switched off. Wet roads In wet weather, on gritted roads and in heavy Corrosion of the brake discs rain, apply the brakes lightly every few kilome‐ Corrosion of the brake discs and contamination tres/miles. of the brake pads increase in the following cir‐ Ensure that you do not obstruct other road users cumstances: when doing so. ▷ Low mileage. The heat generated by braking dries the brake ▷ Extended periods when the vehicle is not discs and brake pads and protects them against used. corrosion. ▷ Infrequent use of the brakes. This helps to maintain the brake power so that it is available immediately when needed. ▷ Aggressive, acidic or alkaline cleaning agents. During braking, corroded brake discs may cause Downhill gradients brake judder which usually cannot be eliminated.
General Condensation when vehicle is When driving on long or steep downhill parked stretches, use the gear in which the least braking When the automatic air conditioning is in opera‐ is required. Otherwise the brake system can tion, condensation develops and exits under‐ overheat and the braking effect is reduced. neath the vehicle. Engine braking effect can be additionally in‐ creased by manually shifting down, even into first gear, if applicable.
339 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 340
DRIVING HINTS Driving precautions
Roof rack ▷ Do not allow objects to protrude into the swing range of the tailgate. ▷ Drive cautiously and avoid sudden accelera‐ General tion, braking or cornering. Fitting only possible with roof railing. Roof racks are available as special equipment. Rear luggage rack Safety note Principle WARNING The ball linkage of the trailer tow hitch can be used as a mount for rear luggage racks; for ex‐ When driving with a roof load, for example with ample bicycle rack systems. a roof rack, the higher centre of gravity can mean that driving safety is no longer guaran‐ teed in critical driving situations. There is a risk General of accident or material damage. Do not deacti‐ Rear luggage racks that have been classified as vate Dynamic Stability Control DSC when driv‐ suitable by the vehicle manufacturer are available ing with a roof load. as special equipment. Bicycle rack systems for up to three bicycles can be used. Fitting Follow the installation instructions for the roof Fitting rack. Follow the installation instructions for the rear Make sure that there is sufficient space to raise luggage rack. and open the glass sunroof. Loads Loads A loaded roof rack alters the vehicle's road be‐ haviour and steering response by shifting its cen‐ tre of gravity. When loading and driving, bear the following in mind: ▷ Do not exceed the permitted roof and axle loads or the permitted gross weight. ▷ Make sure that there is sufficient space to raise and open the glass sunroof. The permitted gross weight of the rear luggage ▷ Distribute the roof load evenly. rack when loaded depends on how far its centre of gravity is from the ball linkage. ▷ The roof load must not be spread over a large area. ▷ If the centre of gravity is up to 30 cm, 11.8 in ▷ Place heavy items of luggage at the bottom. from the ball linkage, the gross weight of the rear luggage rack must not exceed ▷ Securely fasten the luggage, for example with 75 kg/165 lbs. tensioning straps.
340 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 341
Driving precautions DRIVING HINTS
▷ If the centre of gravity is 60 cm, 23.5 in from The higher mechanical and thermal loads in‐ the ball linkage, the gross weight of the rear volved in driving on racing tracks lead to in‐ luggage rack must not exceed 35 kg/77 lbs. creased wear. This wear is not covered by the ▷ Stow heavy loads as close as possible to the warranty. ball linkage. Before and after driving on a racing track, have ▷ Fasten loads securely to the rear luggage the vehicle checked at a Service Partner of the rack and secure them against sliding around. manufacturer or another qualified Service Partner or a specialist workshop. Before a journey Before beginning the journey, check that the rear lights on the rear luggage rack are working. The maximum output of the rear luggage rack rear lights must not exceed the values for trailer rear lights. To prevent functional limitations and malfunc‐ tions affecting driver assistance systems, activate towing a trailer operation. For further information: ▷ Power consumption, see page 343. ▷ Activating trailer operation, see page 345.
Driving with a rear luggage rack When laden, the rear luggage rack alters the ve‐ hicle's handling and steering response due to the centre of gravity having been shifted. When loading and driving, bear the following in mind: ▷ Do not exceed the permitted axle load or the permitted gross weight. ▷ Drive smoothly and avoid sudden accelera‐ tion and braking or fast cornering.
Driving on a racing track
WARNING The vehicle is not designed for use in motor‐ sport competitions or similar. There is a risk of accident. Do not use the vehicle in motorsport competitions or similar.
341 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 342
DRIVING HINTS Towing a trailer
Towing a trailer
Vehicle equipment towbar-mounted carrying device, such as, for ex‐ ample, a bicycle carrying rack. This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ As all BMW Group towbar assemblies are de‐ cific and optional equipment available for the signed, tested and approved as a single unit, the model series. It may therefore describe equip‐ practice of modifying or replacing the BMW sup‐ ment and functions which are not installed in plied towball mount assembly is not approved. your vehicle, for example on account of the spe‐ Use only the genuine BMW towball mount as‐ cial equipment selected or the country specifica‐ sembly. tion. This also applies to safety-relevant func‐ BMW Group Australia does not recommend or tions and systems. Please comply with the support the installation and use of a Weight Dis‐ relevant laws and regulations when using the tribution Hitch or Load Levelling Device on any corresponding functions and systems. BMW Group vehicle. The use of such devices may affect the vehicle's warranty status. We recommend you consult your Authorised General BMW Dealer for any further advice or clarifica‐ tion. The permitted trailer loads, axle loads, trailer nose weights and gross vehicle weight rating are specified in the technical data. Before a journey Consult a Service Partner of the manufacturer or another qualified Service Partner or a specialist Trailer nose weight workshop about options for increasing the loads. The trailer nose weight should not be less than The vehicle is equipped with reinforced springs the minimum trailer nose weight of 25 kg, 55 lb. on the rear axle and, depending on the type, with Utilise the maximum trailer nose weight as far as a more powerful cooling system. possible. The weight of the trailer tow hitch and the nose For Australia/New Zealand: weight reduce the maximum load of the towing vehicle. The nose weight increases the vehicle note weight. Do not exceed the permitted total weight of the towing vehicle. Towing The Australian/New Zealand Standards AS Loads 4177.1-2004 Caravan and light Towing a trailer Distribute the load as evenly as possible over the components – trailer tow hitches and towing loading area. brackets contains the following statement, which Stow the load as low as possible and as close as is hereby accepted by the BMW Group Australia: possible to the trailer axle. A low centre of trailer FOR TOWING ONLY. The trailer tow hitch sup‐ gravity makes the car/trailer combination much plied with your BMW vehicle should only be used more stable and safe to drive. for towing purposes, the trailer tow hitch assem‐ The permitted total weight of the trailer and the bly should not be used in conjunction with any permitted trailer load of the vehicle must not be
342 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 343
Towing a trailer DRIVING HINTS
exceeded. The lower value is the limit which When towing a caravan, keep the activation should be adhered to. times of power consumers short to avoid placing an excessive load on the vehicle battery. Tyre inflation pressure Check the vehicle's and the trailer's tyre inflation Not Australia/New Zealand: Trailer pressures carefully. rear lights On the vehicle, the tyre inflation pressure for The power output of the trailer's rear lights must higher loads applies. not exceed the following values: For the trailer, the regulations of the manufac‐ ▷ Turn indicators: 42 watt per side. turer apply. ▷ Tail lights: 50 watt per side. For further information: ▷ Brake lights: 84 watt total. Tyre inflation pressure information, see ▷ Rear fog lights: 42 watt total. page 368. ▷ Reversing lights: 42 watt total.
Runflat indicator RPA Australia/New Zealand: Trailer rear Initialise the runflat indicator after the tyre infla‐ lights tion pressure has been corrected or a trailer has ▷ Turn indicators: 54 watt per side. been attached or detached. ▷ Tail lights: 100 watt in total. For further information: ▷ Brake lights: 108 watt total. Runflat indicator RPA, see page 386. ▷ Reversing lights: 54 watt total. Tyre Pressure Monitor Reset the Tyre Pressure Monitor after the tyre Towing a trailer inflation pressure has been corrected or a trailer has been attached or detached. General For further information: When the trailer socket is in use, some driver as‐ Tyre Pressure Monitor, see page 379. sistance systems are unavailable, or available to a limited extent. A Check Control message is Exterior mirror shown where applicable. Two exterior mirrors which bring both rear cor‐ In order to avoid malfunctions, activate towing a ners of the trailer into your field of view are re‐ trailer mode. quired by law. Mirrors of this type are available as For further information: special equipment from a Service Partner of the manufacturer or another qualified Service Partner Activating trailer operation, see page 345. or a specialist workshop.
Power consumption
General Before beginning your journey, check the func‐ tion of the trailer rear lights.
343 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 344
DRIVING HINTS Towing a trailer
Safety notes The parking brake is engaged. 2. To drive off, press the accelerator pedal with sufficient force. WARNING Speeds in excess of approximately 80 km/h, Downhill gradients 50 mph, can be enough to produce snaking motion, depending on the design of trailers and On downward gradients, a car/trailer combination the loads they are carrying. There is a risk of tends to start snaking earlier. accident or material damage. Before the downward gradient, shift down man‐ Keep to an appropriate speed when towing a ually to the next-lowest gear and drive down‐ trailer. If the trailer starts to snake, brake imme‐ wards slowly. diately and make the necessary steering cor‐ rections as carefully as possible. Trailer Stability Control
WARNING Principle The tyre inflation pressure must be adapted The system helps you to neutralise a trailer's because of the increased axle load when tow‐ tendency to swing from side to side. ing a trailer. Driving with inadequate tyre infla‐ Trailer Stability Control detects snaking move‐ tion pressure can damage the tyres. There is a ments and promptly brakes the vehicle so that risk of accident or material damage. Do not ex‐ road speed falls to below the critical range and ceed a speed of 100 km/h / 60 mph. Increase the car/trailer combination is stabilised. the tyre inflation pressure of the towing vehicle by 0.2 bar. Note the maximum possible tyre in‐ General flation pressure stated on the tyre. If the power socket for the trailer is in use but no trailer is attached, for example when using a bicy‐ Upward gradients cle carrier with lighting, the system may become active in extreme driving situations. General Operating requirements In the interest of safety and to avoid holding up other traffic, do not attempt to climb upward gra‐ The system is operational from a speed of ap‐ dients steeper than 12 % when towing a trailer. proximately 65 km/h, 40 mph, when towing a trailer and with the trailer socket in use. If higher trailer loads have been retrospectively approved, the limit is 8%. System limits Driving off on upward gradients The system is unable to intervene or intervenes too late, in the following situations for example: The parking brake is automatically released when the accelerator pedal is operated. ▷ If a trailer folds instantly, for example on slip‐ pery or loose road surfaces. To prevent the vehicle from rolling back when driving off, use the parking brake. ▷ If a trailer with a high centre of gravity tips over before snaking is detected.
1. Shortly before driving off, pull and re‐ ▷ If Dynamic Stability Control DSC is deactiva‐ lease the switch. ted or has malfunctioned.
344 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 345
Towing a trailer DRIVING HINTS
▷ If the power consumption of a trailer is too If the ball linkage is not properly locked, the low to be detected by the system, for exam‐ LED in the button illuminates red. ple due to LED rear lights.
Activating towing a trailer NOTE The trailer tow hitch is intended to be used with mode a trailer. If the ball linkage of the trailer tow hitch has been swivelled out, it may become jammed Principle when driving without a trailer or load carrier. There is a risk of material damage. Swivel the When driving with a trailer or load carrier and the ball linkage back in when driving without a trailer socket occupied, some driver assistance trailer or load carrier. systems may have functional limitations or may malfunction. In order to avoid malfunctions, acti‐ vate towing a trailer mode. Overview Activating 1. "CAR" 2. "Settings" 3. "General settings" 4. "Trailer mode" 5. "Trailer mode"
Not for Australia/New The button for swinging the swivel-mounted ball Zealand: Trailer tow hitch linkage in and out is in the luggage compartment. with electrically swivellable Operating requirements trailer hitch The following requirements must be met in order to swivel the ball linkage: General ▷ Vehicle is standing on level ground. The swivel-mounted ball linkage for the trailer ▷ The tailgate is open. tow hitch is located on the underside of the vehi‐ ▷ The trailer socket is not occupied. cle. ▷ Trailer towing is not activated. Safety notes ▷ Adequate charge state of the vehicle battery. The LED in the button illuminates green if the system is operational. WARNING If the ball linkage is not locked, unstable driving conditions or accidents can result. There is a risk of accident or material damage. Before a journey with a trailer or load carrier, check that the ball linkage is correctly locked.
345 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 346
DRIVING HINTS Towing a trailer
Swivelling out the ball linkage 2. Press the button in the luggage com‐ 1. Open the luggage compartment. partment and hold it until the ball linkage has 2. Step out of the swivelling range of the ball moved completely in or out. linkage behind the vehicle. If necessary, repeat the swivel movement with the button pressed and the engine running. 3. Press the button in the luggage com‐ The LED in the button illuminates green when partment. the ball linkage has reached an end position. The ball linkage swivels outwards. The LED In the event of repeated interruptions in the in the button flashes in green. swivel movement, contact a Service Partner of 4. Wait until the ball linkage has reached the the manufacturer or another qualified Service end position. Partner or a specialist workshop.
Swivelling the ball linkage back Trailer socket in 1. Disconnect the trailer or load carrier. 2. Remove any fittings for the track-stabilising devices. 3. Pull the power supply connector for the trailer and any adapters out of the socket.
4. Press the button in the luggage com‐ partment. The ball linkage swivels inwards. The LED in The trailer socket is located on the trailer tow the button flashes in green. hitch. 5. Wait until the ball linkage has reached the Fold the cover downwards. end position. Eye for securing cable Interrupting or reversing the swivel movement
General The swivel movement is interrupted, might be reversed or is not performed if electrical current limits are exceeded, for example at very low tem‐ peratures, or if mechanical resistance is encoun‐ tered. The LED in button illuminates red. There is an eye on the trailer tow hitch for fasten‐ Repeating the swivel movement with ing the trailer securing cable. the engine running 1. Switch on the drive-ready state via the Start/ For increased safety when towing a trailer, attach Stop button. the trailer securing cable to the eye.
346 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 347
Towing a trailer DRIVING HINTS
Check that the securing cable can move freely and is not dragging on the ground.
Operating rear luggage racks
The ball linkage of the trailer tow hitch can be used as a mount for rear luggage racks; for ex‐ ample bicycle rack systems. Note the information on rear luggage racks when operating the rear luggage rack. For further information: Rear luggage rack, see page 340.
347 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 348
DRIVING HINTS Saving fuel
Saving fuel
Vehicle equipment Close windows and the glass sunroof This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ An open glass sunroof or open window increase cific and optional equipment available for the drag and consequently fuel consumption. model series. It may therefore describe equip‐ ment and functions which are not installed in Tyres your vehicle, for example on account of the spe‐ cial equipment selected or the country specifica‐ General tion. This also applies to safety-relevant func‐ tions and systems. Please comply with the Tyres can have differing effects on consumption relevant laws and regulations when using the figures. Consumption can be affected by the size corresponding functions and systems. of the tyres, for example.
Check tyre inflation pressure Reducing fuel consumption regularly Check and, if necessary, correct the tyre inflation General pressures at least twice a month and before set‐ ting off on a longer journey. The vehicle possesses wide-ranging technolo‐ gies for reducing consumption and emission lev‐ Insufficient tyre inflation pressure enlarges the els. rolling resistance and thus increases fuel con‐ sumption and tyre wear. Fuel consumption depends on various factors. Observe the correct tyre inflation pressure and A number of measures, such as a moderate driv‐ the ECO tyre inflation pressure where applicable. ing style and regular maintenance, can influence fuel consumption and reduce the burden on the For further information: environment. Tyre inflation pressure information, see page 368. Remove unnecessary loads Extra weight increases fuel consumption. Drive off immediately Do not warm up the engine with the vehicle at a Remove mounted parts after use standstill, but instead set off straight away, driv‐ ing at moderate engine speeds. If no longer required, remove auxiliary mirrors, roof racks and rear-mounted racks after use. This brings the cold engine up to operating tem‐ perature as quickly as possible. Add-on accessories on the vehicle can adversely affect its aerodynamic performance and increase fuel consumption. Think ahead Anticipating the road situation and adopting a smooth driving style will reduce fuel consump‐ tion. Avoid accelerating and braking unnecessarily.
348 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 349
Saving fuel DRIVING HINTS
Keep an appropriate distance from the vehicle ELECTRIC INDIVIDUAL driving mode, deactiva‐ ahead. tion of comfort functions must be set first.
Avoid high engine speeds Have maintenance work carried Driving at low engine speeds reduces fuel con‐ out sumption and wear. Have the vehicle serviced regularly to achieve Pay attention to the optimum shift indicator in optimal economy and lifetime. BMW recom‐ the vehicle, if fitted. mends having maintenance work carried out by a BMW Service Partner. Make use of overrun mode Please also see the BMW Maintenance System. When approaching a red traffic light, take your foot off the accelerator and allow the vehicle to roll. Using the hybrid system On downward stretches, take your foot off the efficiently accelerator and allow the vehicle to roll. The fuel supply is interrupted in overrun mode. Principle The high-voltage battery is charged. The hybrid system of the vehicle works automat‐ ically. By precautionary driving, the hybrid prop‐ Regular charging erties are used efficiently, in other words fuel Charge up the vehicle as often as possible at a consumption and energy recuperation are opti‐ charging facility. This reduces fuel consumption mised. further by using electrical energy. Optimising energy recuperation Switch off the engine if stopping for longer periods Types of energy recuperation The energy recuperation is for charging the high- When you stop the vehicle for longer periods, for voltage battery. Energy recuperation is important example at traffic lights, railway crossings or in for supplying the electrical components and traffic jams, switch off the engine. therefore is a requirement for saving fuel. Switch off functions which are The energy recuperation function acts in three not currently required stages when you are rolling and braking: ▷ Slight energy recuperation: when rolling with‐ Functions such as seat heating or rear window out pressing the brake. heating require a great deal of energy and in‐ crease fuel consumption, especially in city traffic ▷ Moderate energy recuperation: slight decel‐ and stop-and-go traffic. eration by gently pressing the brake. Switch these functions off if they are not re‐ ▷ Maximum energy recuperation: by pressing quired. the brake somewhat more strongly, as long as the needle is still moving in the middle The HYBRID ECO PRO and ELECTRIC INDI‐ range of the CHARGE display of the instru‐ VIDUAL driving modes support the energy-sav‐ ment cluster. ing use of comfort functions. In HYBRID ECO PRO driving mode, the performance offered by the comfort functions is reduced automatically. In
349 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 350
DRIVING HINTS Saving fuel
Optimum energy recuperation ▷ Set the properties of the hybrid system to Driving with foresight and decelerating in due ELECTRIC or ELECTRIC INDIVIDUAL using time help to optimise energy recuperation. Driving Experience Control. As soon as the display shows the maximum en‐ Driving Experience Control, see page 155. ergy recuperation, the brake pedal can then be ▷ Comply with the displays for electric driving in pressed more firmly only if the situation requires the instrument cluster. Further information: it. electric driving: ELECTRIC and ELECTRIC INDIVIDUAL. Example drive situations for saving Displays of the hybrid system, see page 177. fuel The hybrid system allows particularly efficient Using the navigation system energy management in many traffic situations. regularly ▷ Stop-and-go traffic: Use the navigation system even for routes that The internal combustion engine is automati‐ you are used to driving regularly. With active cally started or stopped by the hybrid system. route guidance of the navigation system, the hy‐ brid system uses the navigation data available. ▷ Driving at constant speed: The section of the route ahead is analysed. The The electric motor temporarily relieves the in‐ hybrid engine adapts to the specific sections of ternal combustion engine by automatically the route. switching in. The function may be limited if the navigation data is invalid, outdated or not available, for example. Optimising fuel consumption
Charging the vehicle regularly Driving modes for Regularly charge the vehicle fully at a suitable optimising consumption charging device. This reduces fuel consumption by using electrical energy. Principle The load state of the high-voltage battery may be reduced by longer periods standing still. The HYBRID ECO PRO and ELECTRIC INDI‐ VIDUAL driving modes support a fuel-efficient Using the stationary air conditioning driving style. For this purpose, comfort functions regularly such as air conditioning and, where applicable, engine control are adjusted. In ELECTRIC INDI‐ Activate preliminary air conditioning in the vehicle VIDUAL driving mode, deactivation of comfort during charging before starting the trip. This functions must be set first. helps to optimise the range. The engine is disconnected from the gearbox Stationary air conditioning, see page 316. and the engine stopped in selector lever posi‐ tion D under certain circumstances. Selector Avoid using the internal combustion lever position D remains engaged. engine In addition, context-sensitive information, ECO Comply with the following notes to avoid using PRO tips, can be displayed in HYBRID ECO PRO the internal combustion engine: driving mode to assist with an efficient driving style.
350 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 351
Saving fuel DRIVING HINTS
General 2. "Configure ELECTRIC INDIVIDUAL" The system comprises the following EfficientDynamics functions and Via iDrive EfficientDynamics displays: 1. "CAR" ▷ ECO PRO seat air conditioning. 2. "Settings" ▷ ECO PRO air conditioning. 3. "Driving mode" ▷ ECO PRO light and sight. 4. "ELECTRIC INDIVIDUAL" ▷ HYBRID ECO PRO: route-ahead assistant. 5. "Configure ELECTRIC INDIVIDUAL" ▷ HYBRID ECO PRO: driving style analysis. 6. Select the desired setting. The setting is saved for the current driver profile. Overview Enabling/disabling ECO PRO functions The following ECO PRO functions can be activa‐ ted/deactivated: ▷ "ECO PRO seat heating" ▷ "ECO PRO climate control" ▷ "ECO PRO light and sight" The settings are saved for the current driver pro‐ file. HYBRID button ECO PRO seat air conditioning ELECTRIC button The output from the seat heating is reduced when ECO PRO is activated. Activating HYBRID ECO PRO The output from the seat heating and, if applica‐ ble, the seat ventilation is reduced when ELEC‐ TRIC INDIVIDUAL is activated. 1. Press the button. 2. "ECO PRO" ECO PRO air conditioning Activating ELECTRIC The air conditioning is adjusted for efficient con‐ sumption. INDIVIDUAL To achieve this, the set temperature is adjusted slightly and the interior is heated or cooled more 1. Press the button. slowly to reduce consumption. 2. "INDIVIDUAL" ECO PRO light and sight Configuring ELECTRIC The power output of the exterior mirror and the INDIVIDUAL rear window heating is reduced. Depending on the equipment, the dynamic ECO Via the Driving Experience Control light function is activated additionally. 1. Activate ELECTRIC INDIVIDUAL.
351 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 352
DRIVING HINTS Saving fuel
Resetting settings 6. "Speed limits" Reset ECO PRO INDIVIDUAL to the default set‐ 7. Select the desired setting. ting: For further information: "Reset" Speed Limit Assist, see page 264.
HYBRID ECO PRO: route- Display ahead assistant Display in the instrument cluster An alert regarding a section of the route Principle ahead is given as a recommendation to al‐ The function helps to save fuel and supports an low the vehicle to roll. anticipatory driving style. Using the navigation An additional symbol shows the detected section data, certain sections of the route ahead can be of the route: detected early and information can be shared with the driver. Symbol Section of the road in front
Speed limit or town entrance. General The recognised sections of the route, such as built-up areas or bends ahead, for example, re‐ Junction or turn, exit from a fast quire a reduction in speed. road. The alert is also given if the section of the route ahead cannot yet be detected when driving. Corner. The alert is shown until the section of the route is reached. Roundabout. If an alert is given, vehicle speed can then be re‐ duced in an efficient way by removing your foot from the accelerator and allowing the vehicle to roll until the section of road is reached. Display in the Head-Up Display The advance notice alert can also be Operating requirements shown in the Head-Up Display. ▷ HYBRID ECO PRO driving mode is activated. ▷ The function must be available in the country Display on the control display in which the vehicle is being driven. An alert is shown in the driving style analysis dis‐ Activating/deactivating play on the Control Display if there is a corre‐ sponding section of the route. 1. "CAR" 1. "CAR" 2. "Settings" 2. "Driving information" 3. "Driver assistance" 3. "Driving style analysis" 4. If necessary, "Driving" 5. "Speed Assistant"
352 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 353
Saving fuel DRIVING HINTS
Using route-ahead assistant ▷ HYBRID ECO PRO driving mode is activated. A section of the route ahead is shown: ▷ Dynamic Stability Control DSC is activated.
1. Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. System limits 2. Allow the vehicle to roll until you reach the ▷ In the case of navigation data that is invalid, section of road displayed. outdated or not available. 3. Adjust the speed by braking as necessary. ▷ During country-dependent restrictions on map-based route sections. System limits ▷ With a temporary and variable speed limit, The function is not available in the following sit‐ such as at road works. uations: ▷ With Active Cruise Control. ▷ The speed is below the minimum speed. ▷ If the sensors are faulty, soiled or covered. ▷ With a temporary and variable speed limit, such as at road works. ▷ In the case of navigation data that is invalid, HYBRID ECO PRO: driving outdated or not available. style analysis ▷ With Active Cruise Control. ▷ When towing a trailer. Principle The function helps you to develop a particularly Adaptive recuperation efficient driving style and to save fuel. To do this, the driving style is analysed. The eval‐ Principle uation is performed in various categories and is shown on the Control Display. Adaptive recuperation supports an anticipatory Using this display, the individual driving style can and comfort-oriented driving style. Map data and be adjusted to save fuel. various sensors analyse the current driving situa‐ tion, for example the distance to the vehicle in front. General The current trip is evaluated. General To support an efficient driving style, ECO PRO Based on the situation, the system decides tips are shown during the journey. whether and the extent to which energy is recov‐ Adapting the driving style can increase the range ered through recuperation, or how the vehicle of the vehicle. rolls. Depending on the extent of recuperation, the vehicle is decelerated at different rates dur‐ Operating requirements ing rolling. The function is available in HYBRID ECO PRO driving mode. Operating requirements The system is active under the following condi‐ Calling up the driving style tions: analysis ▷ Brake not pressed. 1. "CAR" ▷ Accelerator pedal not activated.
353 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 354
DRIVING HINTS Saving fuel
2. "Driving information" 3. "Driving style analysis"
Display on the control display The display of the driving style analysis shows the efficiency of the driving style. The more efficient the driving style, the more bars are shown in colour. If the driving style is inefficient, on the other hand, a reduced number of bars are shown.
354 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 355
Saving fuel DRIVING HINTS
355 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 356
MOBILITY Charging vehicle
Charging vehicle
Vehicle equipment Before the first charging process, have the following components of your own charging point checked by a qualified electrician at the This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ charging location: cific and optional equipment available for the model series. It may therefore describe equip‐ ▷ Charging cable. ment and functions which are not installed in ▷ Charging station. your vehicle, for example on account of the spe‐ ▷ Domestic socket outlet and connected cir‐ cial equipment selected or the country specifica‐ cuits. tion. This also applies to safety-relevant func‐ tions and systems. Please comply with the relevant laws and regulations when using the WARNING corresponding functions and systems. Damaged or worn charging fixtures, for exam‐ ple worn contacts, can heat up. There is a risk General of fire. Only use a charging fixture that is in per‐ fect condition. Vehicle can be recharged with various charging cables at charging stations or domestic socket outlets. WARNING The charging process is controlled and moni‐ If no sufficient safety distance is maintained tored fully automatically. The charging current in‐ from inflammable materials, filling up and tensity can be set using iDrive. charging at the same time can lead to a danger of fire. There is a risk of injury or material dam‐ age. Do not fill up and charge the vehicle at the Safety notes same time.
WARNING WARNING Working with electric current incorrectly can Touching live components can result in an cause an electric shock due to high voltages or electric shock. There is high voltage at the powerful current. There is a risk of fire or fatal charging connection. There is a risk of injury or injury. Follow the general safety regulations even death. Have work on the charging con‐ when working with electric current. nection, for example cleaning, performed by a Service Partner of the manufacturer or another qualified Service Partner or a specialist work‐ WARNING shop. A defective and wrongly configured charging point at the charging location may damage to the vehicle and overload the power system at the charging location. There is a risk of fire and injury.
356 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 357
Charging vehicle MOBILITY
High-voltage battery Current limitation
The high-voltage battery serves as an energy General store. The high-voltage battery can be charged Current limitation for charging via the mode 2 during the journey by energy recuperation or charging cable can be set. from the electrical mains. The vehicle is charged at different charge current To optimally operate the high-voltage battery, intensities depending on the mains network. The charge the vehicle regularly and fully on a suita‐ charging current limit is set to the lowest level as ble charging fixture. standard. The following different options are available for charging from the mains: Setting current limitation ▷ Domestic socket outlet. 1. "CAR" ▷ AC charging station. 2. "Plan charg./climate" The battery can be charged at a domestic socket 3. Tilt the Controller to the right. outlet in a voltage range from 100 V to 240 V. 4. "Settings" For optimum use of energy from the grid, charg‐ 5. "AC settings" ing at a charging station, for example BMW Wall‐ 6. "Current limit" box, is recommended. 7. Select the desired setting. The setting is saved. When charging the charg‐ Charge current ing location, change the setting accordingly. For foreign domestic sockets, set the charging General current intensity to the lowest level. Charging current intensity is specified in amps. The vehicle cannot automatically detect the max‐ Maintaining the charge imum permitted charge current intensity of the grid when charging at a domestic socket outlet. state
Charging at a domestic socket If it is necessary to save a certain electric range for a later point in the journey, for example, the outlet BATTERY CONTROL function can maintain or Before charging for the first time at your own do‐ raise the current charge state of the high-voltage mestic socket outlet, and when charging at other battery. domestic socket outlets, first find out the permit‐ ted charge current intensity, for example by con‐ sulting a qualified electrician. Charging cable The current limitation for the charging current in‐ tensity can be set using iDrive. General To charge the vehicle, use a mode 2 charging cable, a mode 3 charging cable or a fixed cable of a charging station. Depending on the country, different charging ca‐ bles can be required. 357 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 358
MOBILITY Charging vehicle
It may be possible to make settings on the The mode 2 charging cable is also referred to as charging cable. Do not change the default set‐ a standard charging cable. ting on the charging cable. Mode 3 charging cable Safety notes Depending on the national-market version, a mode 3 charging cable may be included in the WARNING delivery specification of the vehicle. Incompatible charging cables or unsuitable The mode 3 charging cable enables fast charg‐ charging stations can heat up and cause dam‐ ing at sockets of designated AC charging sta‐ age to the vehicle. There is a risk of fire. For tions through a special connector. Alternating charging, use charging cables or charging sta‐ current is used to charge at designated AC tions that have been classified as suitable for charging stations. The charging process can be the corresponding type of vehicle. completed faster than with domestic socket out‐ lets. Information on suitable charging cables can be asked for at the Service Partner of the manu‐ A charge current intensity of up to maxi‐ facturer. mum 16 A is possible. If necessary, the charging cable is permanently installed on the charging station. WARNING The mode 3 charging cable is also referred to as Incorrect use of the charging cable can prevent an AC quick charge cable. the charging process and lead to damage, for example cable fire. There is a risk of fire. Only Storage use the charging cable for charging the vehicle On delivery, the charging cable is stowed in the and do not extend it with a cable or adapter. luggage compartment, for example under the luggage compartment floor or in a bag. Put the charging cable back in the same place WARNING after use. Damaged charging cables can heat up or cause If the charging cable is stowed in a bag, secure an electric shock. There is a risk of fire or injury. the bag to a free lashing eye in the luggage com‐ Only use undamaged charging cables. partment. If necessary, store the charging cable with at‐ tached plug cover to avoid moisture in the charg‐ Mode 2 charging cable ing cable plug. Depending on the national-market version, a mode 2 charging cable may be included in the delivery specification of the vehicle. The mode 2 charging cable permits charging at domestic socket outlets with protective earth. The power supply at a domestic socket outlet uses alternating current to charge the vehicle. When using the mode 2 charging cable, the effi‐ ciency values may differ from those of the en‐ ergy label.
358 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 359
Charging vehicle MOBILITY
Connecting Removing
Charge point flap General During the charging process, the charging cable is automatically locked. Unlock the charging ca‐ ble before removing. Before pulling off, clean the area between the charge point flap and charging connection, for example to remove snow.
Removing a charging cable 1. Press the release button on the vehicle key or The charge point flap is located on the left of the operate the door handle. vehicle. Charging process is interrupted. Keep charge point flap clean and clear. The charging cable is unlocked for a short Keep the charge point flap closed when the time. charge point is not being used. 2. Hold the charging cable by the gripping areas. Connecting a charging cable 3. Remove charging cable from the charge To connect, engage selector lever position P, point, arrow. deactivate drive-ready state and unlock the vehi‐ cle. Apply parking brake if necessary. 1. To open the charge point flap, push on the upper edge, arrow. The charge point flap opens.
4. Press on the charge point flap until it en‐ gages. 5. Fit cover on charging cable connector if nec‐ essary. 6. If necessary, disconnect the mode 2 charging 2. Connect the mode 2 charging cable to the cable from the domestic socket outlet or the domestic socket outlet or the mode 3 charg‐ mode 3 charging cable from the connection ing cable to the connection point on the AC point on the AC charging station. charging station. 7. Store charging cable. 3. Position the charging cable connector on the Plug in a fixed charging cable at a charging charging socket and push it in as far as it will station in the place provided for it. go.
359 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 360
MOBILITY Charging vehicle
Emergency unlocking Safety notes The charging cable is locked when the vehicle is locked and during the charging process. WARNING Charging cable can be unlocked manually if there Incorrect use of the power system connection is electrical defect. can lead to damage, for example cable fire. 1. Open bonnet. There is a risk of injury or material damage. Only use the charging cable for charging the 2. Release the knob from the holder. vehicle and do not extend it with a cable or 3. Pull the knob. adapter. Charging cable is manually unlocked.
WARNING If the charging current intensity is set incor‐ rectly, the power system of the domestic socket can be overloaded and overheat. There is a risk of fire. Before charging at domestic socket outlets, adapt the charging current in‐ tensity to the power system. Set to the lowest level if the power system is unknown. 4. Remove charging cable. Removing, see page 359. WARNING After the charging cable has been unlocked in an emergency, have the locking system of the An incorrectly connected charging cable can charging connection checked at a Service Part‐ lead to damage, for example cable fire. There is ner of the manufacturer or another qualified a risk of injury or material damage. Ensure that Service Partner or a specialist workshop. the charging cable plug has been fully inserted into the socket. Charging Starting charging General 1. Engage the selector lever in position P. Apply parking brake if necessary. At high or low outside temperatures, preheating/ 2. Plan the charging process. precooling of the high-voltage battery can result in longer charging times. Planning to charge, see page 361. If the mode 2 charging cable is exposed to high 3. Switch off drive-ready state. temperatures and direct sunlight, this may inter‐ 4. If necessary, connect the mode 2 charging rupt the charging process. Charging resumes au‐ cable to the domestic socket outlet or the tomatically. mode 3 charging cable to the connection The charging process will be interrupted or will point on the AC charging station. not be started when a Remote Software Up‐ 5. Open charge point flap. grade is installed. The charging process may not 6. Connect charging cable to the vehicle. be continued automatically after successful in‐ stallation.
360 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 361
Charging vehicle MOBILITY
Connecting a charging cable, see page 359. The blue indicator lamp flashes continuously 7. Lock the vehicle if necessary. while the vehicle is unlocked. The other indicator lamps are extinguished after some time. The charging cable is automatically locked if all the general conditions are complied with, for ex‐ To check the charge state, press the button ample the AC charging station has authorised on the vehicle key. The charge state is shown on the charging. Charging can only be started if the the indicator lamp. The vehicle may be locked. charging cable is locked. If the charging cable is Additional messages about the charging status not locked, pull off the charging cable if it is not can be displayed in the instrument cluster, on the already disconnected, and reconnect it. BMW display key or via the BMW Connec‐ ted app on a smartphone. Charging status display Planning to charge Indicator lamp on the charge point The charging status for charging with a charging General cable is indicated by the charging socket indica‐ Charging can be adapted to boundary condi‐ tor lamp. tions, for example, electricity costs, available electricity source or low ambient temperature. The vehicle controls the charging so that the charging is completed if possible by a departure time. To do so, a departure time must be set. The following functions are available: ▷ Charge immediately. ▷ Charge in the time window. If the drive-ready state is switched off, changes can be made using iDrive. Settings for standing air conditioning and loading process are accep‐ Charge state ted for planned departure times too.
Light Charge state 1. Switch off drive-ready state.
White Charging cable can be connec‐ 2. "Charge immediately once" ted or removed. For further information:
Flashes yel‐ Charging process is being pre‐ Departure time, see page 363. low pared. Setting the charging mode Blue Charging process paused. 1. "CAR" Flashes blue Charging process active. 2. "Plan charg./climate" Flashes red Fault in charging process. 3. "Charging mode:" 4. Select the desired settings: Green Charging process completed. ▷ "Charge immediately": charging starts as soon as the charging cable is connected. The indicator lamp is no longer illuminated after some time when the vehicle is locked.
361 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 362
MOBILITY Charging vehicle
▷ "Charging in time slot": if a departure time Stopping charging is set, a time window with a favourable Charging is interrupted when the vehicle is un‐ electricity tariff can be set for charging. locked and automatically continued again after a short time when it is locked. Charge in the time window The charging process can be terminated at any General time by removing the charging cable, and re‐ sumed at a later point by connecting the charg‐ During the charging process, a time window with ing cable. For example, so that other consumers a favourable electricity tariff can be set for charg‐ can use the power connection in the meantime ing. or to avoid high power output levels simultane‐ To set a time window for favourable charging, a ously from a number of consumers. departure time must be set. For further information: If the drive-ready state is switched off, changes Removing, see page 359. can be made using iDrive. Resuming charging Setting the time window for favourable charging If charging is interrupted, for example, by unlock‐ ing the vehicle or due to a temporary power fail‐ If a departure time is set, a time window with a ure, charging is automatically continued after the favourable electricity tariff can be set for charg‐ interruption. ing. 1. "CAR" Ending charging 2. "Plan charg./climate" 1. Remove charging cable from the vehicle. 3. Tilt the Controller to the right. Removing, see page 359. 4. "Settings" 2. Store charging cable if necessary. 5. "AC settings" 3. Press on the charge point flap until it en‐ 6. "Charging time slot" gages. 7. Select the desired setting: 4. Lock vehicle as appropriate. ▷ "From:": set start of tariff. ▷ "Until:": set end of tariff. Displays in the instrument The vehicle can also start the charging process before the selected time window begins or end it cluster after the selected time window finishes. The When the standby state is switched on, the starting point of the charging process is adjusted charge state indicator shows the charge state of so the vehicle can be charged as much as possi‐ the high-voltage battery in the instrument clus‐ ble and, if applicable, be climate controlled right ter. If all bars are filled in, the high-voltage battery up to the departure time. is completely charged. If the drive-ready state is switched off, changes Even if no bar is filled in, the high-voltage battery can be made using iDrive. is always under high voltage. The set time window can be ignored for the next The charge screen displays information about charging process: "Charge immediately once" the charging process.
362 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 363
Charging vehicle MOBILITY
Display Meaning Departure time Plug blue: charging process active or completed. Principle White plug: charging procedure inter‐ For optimum range and air conditioning, the de‐ rupted. parture time can be set before stopping the vehi‐ cle. Time for end of charging. Set departure time. General Charge continuation bar. With a set departure time, the vehicle is prehea‐ ted or precooled if climate control is set. The following settings for departure time are Display in blue: charged electrical possible: range. ▷ Air conditioning for departure time. Display in white: current maximum ▷ Planning up to three regular departure times. available electric range when high- ▷ Planning a one-time departure time. voltage battery is fully charged. If the drive-ready state is switched off, changes Maximum current limitation or cur‐ can be made using iDrive. Settings for acclimati‐ rent limitation that is actually set. sation and loading process are accepted for planned departure times too. Departure time set. Air conditioning for departure time Air conditioning activated for depar‐ 1. "CAR" ture time. 2. "Plan charg./climate" Flashing: ventilation active. 3. Tilt the Controller to the right. 4. "Precond. departure"
Flashing: heating active. Setting the departure time 1. "CAR" Flashing: cooling active. 2. "Plan charg./climate" 3. Tilt the Controller to the right. 4. "Departure schedule" For further information: 5. Select the required departure time. Charge screen, see page 176. 6. Set the time and day of the week. Up to three regular departure times can be set and a one-time departure time can be set.
363 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 364
MOBILITY Charging vehicle
Activating the departure time It is not possible to operate the vehicle with a discharged vehicle battery. 1. "CAR" 2. "Plan charg./climate" Making the vehicle operable 3. Tilt the Controller to the right. If the vehicle battery is discharged, the internal 4. "Departure schedule" combustion engine can be started from another 5. Select the required departure time. vehicle's battery using two jump leads. 6. "Activate departure" For further information: Up to three regular departure times or a one- Starting aid, see page 417. time departure time can be activated. The set departure time is deactivated if the de‐ parture time is not observed three times in suc‐ cession.
Air conditioning
General The following settings for air conditioning the ve‐ hicle are possible: ▷ Activate stationary air conditioning immedi‐ ately. With standing air conditioning activated and no charging cable connected, the range is re‐ duced. ▷ Planned climate control at the set departure time. For further information: Stationary air conditioning, see page 316.
Discharged high-voltage and vehicle battery
General As well as high-voltage battery the vehicle has a 12 Volt vehicle battery which is required to oper‐ ate the on-board electronics. If the internal combustion is started when the high-voltage battery is discharged, the air condi‐ tioning may be limited.
364 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 365
Refuelling MOBILITY
Refuelling
Vehicle equipment Safety notes
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ WARNING cific and optional equipment available for the If no sufficient safety distance is maintained model series. It may therefore describe equip‐ from inflammable materials, filling up and ment and functions which are not installed in charging at the same time can lead to a danger your vehicle, for example on account of the spe‐ of fire. There is a risk of injury or material dam‐ cial equipment selected or the country specifica‐ age. Do not fill up and charge the vehicle at the tion. This also applies to safety-relevant func‐ same time. tions and systems. Please comply with the relevant laws and regulations when using the corresponding functions and systems. NOTE If the range drops below 50 km, 30 miles, the Notes when refuelling engine may no longer be supplied with suffi‐ cient fuel. Engine function is no longer ensured. General There is a risk of material damage. Refuel in good time. Before refuelling, observe the notes on the fuel grade. At least 10 litres, 3 gal of fuel should be refuelled NOTE so as to guarantee all engine functions even in unfavourable situations such as a very steep ve‐ Fuels are poisonous and aggressive substan‐ hicle inclination. ces. Overfilling the fuel tank can damage the fuel system. If fuel comes into contact with When refuelling, insert the filler nozzle fully into paintwork, it can damage it. The environment is the filler neck. Lifting the filler nozzle during refu‐ polluted. There is a risk of material damage. elling results in the following: Avoid overfilling. ▷ The supply of fuel is stopped too soon. ▷ Fuel vapour recovery is less effective. The fuel tank is full when the filler nozzle cuts out Tank aeration for the first time. Please comply with the safety regulations dis‐ played at filling stations. Principle The vehicle is equipped with a special fuel tank. For further information: The fuel tank is designed for special require‐ Fuel quality, see page 396. ments arising from hybrid operation of the vehi‐ cle, in other words, alternating drive with internal combustion engine or electric motor.
365 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 366
MOBILITY Refuelling
General 1. To open the fuel tank filler flap, push on the upper edge, arrow. The fuel tank filler flap An overpressure may form in the fuel tank as a opens. result of petrol vapours which is dissipated be‐ fore fuel tank cap is opened.
Overview
2. Turn the fuel tank cap anticlockwise.
The button is located in the driver's door storage compartment.
Tank ventilation 1. Switch off drive-ready state.
2. Press button to start aerating. 3. Place the fuel tank cap in the holder on the The tank aeration status is shown in the in‐ fuel filler flap. strument cluster. In rare cases, the tank aera‐ tion may take several minutes. When the tank aeration has finished, a mes‐ sage is displayed in the instrument cluster. The fuel tank filler flap is released for open‐ ing. 3. Open fuel filler flap. If it is not possible to open the fuel filler flap after tank aeration, press the button again.
If it is still not possible to open the fuel filler For further information: flap even after the button has been pressed Tank ventilation, see page 365. again, unlock the fuel filler flap manually. Emergency release, see page 367.
Fuel tank cap
Opening Before opening allow air to escape from tank.
366 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 367
Refuelling MOBILITY
Closing 4. Carefully open the fuel tank cap. An overpres‐ sure can be formed in the fuel tank due to petrol vapours. WARNING 5. Refuel the vehicle in the usual way. It is possi‐ The retaining strap of the fuel tank cap may be‐ ble for residual pressure to make the refuel‐ come trapped and crushed when turning the ling procedure difficult, for example because cap to close it. It will then not be possible to the filler nozzle cuts out frequently. close the cap properly. Fuel or fuel vapours can Immediately have the vehicle checked by a Serv‐ leak out. There is a risk of injury or material ice Partner of the manufacturer or another quali‐ damage. Make sure that the retaining strap fied Service Partner or a specialist workshop. does not get trapped and crushed when clos‐ ing the cap.
1. Fit the fuel filler cap and turn clockwise until it is clearly heard to click into place. 2. Press on the fuel tank filler flap until it en‐ gages.
Emergency release In certain situations, it may be necessary to un‐ lock the fuel tank filler flap manually, for example if there is an electrical fault. The unlocking mechanism is in the luggage compartment.
1. Remove the cover from the right-hand trim panel.
2. Pull the green tag with the fuel pump symbol. Fuel tank filler flap is unlocked without mak‐ ing any noise. 3. To open the fuel tank filler flap, push on the upper edge, arrow. The fuel tank filler flap opens.
367 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 368
MOBILITY Wheels and tyres
Wheels and tyres
Vehicle equipment Tyre inflation pressure information This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ cific and optional equipment available for the On the door pillar model series. It may therefore describe equip‐ ment and functions which are not installed in your vehicle, for example on account of the spe‐ cial equipment selected or the country specifica‐ tion. This also applies to safety-relevant func‐ tions and systems. Please comply with the relevant laws and regulations when using the corresponding functions and systems.
Tyre inflation pressure The tyre inflation pressure information is shown on the door pillar of the driver's door. General The tyre inflation pressure data is valid for the tyre sizes and recommended tyre makes which A tyre's condition and inflation pressure influence have been rated by the vehicle manufacturer as the following: suitable for the vehicle concerned. ▷ Lifetime of the tyre. The tyre inflation pressures stated for the re‐ ▷ Driving safety. spective load conditions apply depending on the ▷ Driving comfort. vehicle's actual load condition. Example: for a partially loaded vehicle, the optimum tyre inflation ▷ Fuel consumption. pressure is the one stated for a partially loaded vehicle. Safety note When the vehicle is partially loaded, the lowest possible fuel consumption can be achieved with WARNING the ECO tyre inflation pressure. A tyre with too little or no tyre inflation pressure More information regarding wheels and tyres can can heat up significantly and sustain damage. be obtained from a Service Partner of the manu‐ Handling characteristics, for example steering facturer or another qualified Service Partner or a and braking, will be impaired as a result. There specialist workshop. is a risk of accident. Check the tyre inflation pressure regularly and adjust as necessary, for example twice a month or before any long jour‐ ney.
368 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 369
Wheels and tyres MOBILITY
For Australia/New Zealand Checking using tyre inflation pressure inscriptions on the door WARNING pillar The inflation pressures on the tyre label are ap‐ 1. Determine the specified tyre inflation pres‐ plicable only for tyres explicitly mentioned on sures for the tyres installed on the vehicle. the label. Inflation pressures for tyres that may 2. Check the tyre inflation pressure in all four be covered by the label – by size, speed cate‐ tyres, using a pressure gauge, for example. gory and load rating/load index – but not explic‐ 3. Correct the tyre inflation pressure if the cur‐ itly mentioned on the label may be different. rent tyre inflation pressure deviates from the Please obtain adequate inflation pressures in specified tyre inflation pressure. accordance with the tyre manufacturer's speci‐ 4. Check whether all valve caps are screwed fications from your tyre dealer. onto the tyre valves. The tyre inflation pressure information on the On the control display tyre inflation pressure plate on the door pillar only relates to cold tyres or tyres at the same temper‐ The current tyre inflation pressure values and the ature as the ambient temperature. specified tyre inflation pressure values for the mounted tyres can be displayed on the Control Only check the tyre inflation pressures when the Display. tyres are cold, i.e.: To ensure that they are displayed correctly, the ▷ If the vehicle has been driven a distance of no tyre sizes must be stored in the system and must more than 2 km, 1.25 miles. have been set for the fitted tyres. ▷ If the vehicle has not moved again for at least The current tyre inflation pressure value is shown 2 hours after a journey. on each tyre. The specified tyre inflation pressure value is lo‐ Checking using the tyre inflation cated towards the bottom of the Control Display. pressure information on the control display Checking the tyre inflation 1. "CAR" pressure 2. "Vehicle status" 3. "Tyre Pressure Monitor" General 4. Check if the current tyre inflation pressures Tyres heat up while driving. The tyre inflation match the specified tyre pressure value. pressure increases with the temperature of the 5. Correct the tyre inflation pressure if the cur‐ tyre. rent tyre inflation pressure deviates from the Tyres have a natural, uniform loss of tyre inflation specified tyre inflation pressure. pressure. Inflating devices can display a pressure that may After adjusting the tyre inflation be up to 0.1 bar too low. pressure For runflat indicator RPA: Reinitialise the runflat indicator RPA. With the Tyre Pressure Monitor:
369 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 370
MOBILITY Wheels and tyres
The corrected tyre inflation pressures are applied Minimum tread depth automatically. Make sure that the correct tyre settings have been made. For tyres that cannot be found in the tyre infla‐ tion pressure information on the control display, reset the Tyre Pressure Monitor.
Speed code
Designation Maximum speed
Q up to 160 km/h, 100 mph Wear indicators are distributed around the cir‐ cumference of the tyre. These wear indicators R up to 170 km/h, 106 mph have the legally prescribed minimum height of S up to 180 km/h, 112 mph 1.6 mm, 0.06 in.
T up to 190 km/h, 118 mph The positions of the wear indicators are identi‐ fied on the tyre's side wall by TWI, Tread Wear H up to 210 km/h, 131 mph Indicator. F up to 240 km/h, 150 mph W up to 270 km/h, 167 mph Tyre damage Y up to 300 km/h, 186 mph General (Y) above 300 km/h/186 mph Inspect tyres regularly for damage, the presence of foreign bodies and wear. Tyre tread Vehicle behaviour that may indicate tyre damage or other faults: Summer tyres ▷ Unusual vibrations. The tyre tread depth should not be less than ▷ Unusual tyre or running noises. 3 mm, 0.12 in, otherwise there is a high risk of ▷ Unusual vehicle response, such as pro‐ aquaplaning. nounced pulling to the left or right. Damage can be caused by the following situa‐ Winter tyres tions, for example: The tyre tread depth should not be less than ▷ Driving over kerbs. 4 mm, 0.16 in, its suitability for winter use is limi‐ ▷ Road damage. ted. ▷ Insufficient tyre inflation pressure. ▷ Overloading the vehicle. ▷ Incorrect tyre storage.
370 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 371
Wheels and tyres MOBILITY
Safety notes Replacement of wheels and tyres WARNING If the tyres are damaged, the tyre inflation pres‐ Fitting and balancing sure may be reduced, which in turn could cause you to lose control of the vehicle. There Have the wheel fitted and balanced by a Service is a risk of accident. If you suspect tyre damage Partner of the manufacturer or another qualified while you are driving, immediately reduce Service Partner or a specialist workshop. speed and bring the vehicle to a stop. Have the wheels and tyres checked. To do so, carefully Wheel/tyre combination drive to a Service Partner of the manufacturer or another qualified Service Partner or a spe‐ General cialist workshop. If necessary, have the vehicle Information on the correct wheel/tyre combina‐ towed or transported there. Do not repair dam‐ tion and rim designs for the vehicle can be ob‐ aged tyres. Have them replaced. tained from a Service Partner of the manufac‐ turer or another qualified Service Partner or a specialist workshop. WARNING Tyres can become damaged by running over Safety notes obstacles, for example kerbs or road damage, at high speed. Larger wheels have a smaller WARNING tyre cross-section. The smaller the tyre cross- Wheels and tyres that are not suitable for the section, the higher the risk of tyre damage. vehicle can damage parts of the vehicle. For ex‐ There is a risk of accident and material dam‐ ample they could come into contact with the age. If possible, drive around obstacles or drive bodywork on account of their dimensional tol‐ over them slowly and carefully. erances, despite having the same nominal size. There is a risk of accident. The manufacturer of the vehicle recommends using wheels and Age of tyres tyres that have been rated as suitable for the vehicle concerned. Recommendation Irrespective of the tyre tread depth, change tyres WARNING after 6 years at the latest. Mounted steel wheels can lead to technical problems, for example wheel studs may work Date of manufacture loose and brake discs may be damaged. There The date of manufacture of the tyre is indicated is a risk of accident. Do not install steel wheels. on the tyre sidewall.
Designation Date of manufacture
DOT … 3820 38th week of 2020
371 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 372
MOBILITY Wheels and tyres
Retreaded tyres WARNING
Incorrect wheel and tyre combinations impair WARNING the vehicle's driving characteristics and inter‐ fere with the proper functioning of various sys‐ Retreaded tyres may have different tyre car‐ tems, such as the Anti-lock Brake System ABS casses. Their durability may be reduced due to or Dynamic Stability Control DSC. There is a their advanced age. There is a risk of accident. risk of accident. To maintain good vehicle han‐ Do not use retreaded tyres. dling, always fit tyres of the same make and tread pattern to all wheels. The manufacturer of The vehicle manufacturer advises against the the vehicle recommends using wheels and use of retreaded tyres. tyres that have been rated as suitable for the vehicle concerned. After a tyre has been dam‐ Winter tyres aged, refit the same wheel/tyre combination as the original. General Winter tyres are recommended if driving in winter conditions. Recommended makes of tyre Although tyres known as all-season tyres with an M+S label have better winter characteristics than summer tyres, they do not normally match the performance of winter tyres.
Maximum speed of winter tyres If the vehicle is capable of maximum speeds higher than the speed permitted for the winter tyres, an information label stating the maximum permitted speed for the tyres fitted must be dis‐ Certain makes of tyre are recommended by the played in the driver's field of view. The label is manufacturer of the vehicle for each tyre size. available from a Service Partner of the manufac‐ The tyre brands can be identified by a star on the turer or another qualified Service Partner or a side wall of the tyre. specialist workshop. If winter tyres are fitted, observe and do not ex‐ New tyres ceed the respectively permitted maximum speed. Due to the manufacturing process, new tyres do not achieve their full road grip immediately. Replacing run-flat tyres Drive moderately for the first 300 km, 200 miles. When changing from run-flat tyres to standard tyres, make sure that a spare wheel or a flat tyre kit is available in the vehicle. Additional informa‐ tion is available from a Service Partner of the manufacturer or another qualified Service Partner or a specialist workshop.
372 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 373
Wheels and tyres MOBILITY
Rotating wheels between axles General The wheels are fitted with tyres which are self- WARNING supporting to a limited degree. They may also have special rims. Swapping of wheels between axles on vehicles with differently sized tyres or rims on the front The reinforced side wall means that the tyre and rear cause tyre damage and damage to the keeps the vehicle mobile to a degree even if tyre vehicle. There is a risk of accident. Do not swap inflation pressure has been lost. over wheels between axles on vehicles with dif‐ Observe the notes on continuing to drive with a ferently sized tyres or rims on the front and flat tyre. rear. Safety notes Depending on the individual operating condi‐ tions, the tyre tread wears differently on the front and rear wheels. To achieve even wear, the tyres WARNING can be swapped over in pairs between the axles. A run-flat tyre with too little or no tyre inflation Additional information is available from a Service pressure will change the vehicle's handling Partner of the manufacturer or another qualified characteristics, for example there may be re‐ Service Partner or a specialist workshop. After duced directional stability when braking, longer swapping over, check the tyre inflation pressure stopping distances and different self-steering and adjust if necessary. characteristics. There is a risk of accident. Drive with care and do not exceed a speed of Storing tyres 80 km/h, 50 mph.
Tyre inflation pressure Do not exceed the maximum tyre inflation pres‐ WARNING sure indicated on the tyre's side wall. Continuing to drive with a flat tyre can result in heavy trailers starting to slalom. There is a risk Tyre storage of accident or material damage. When driving ▷ Store wheels and tyres in a cool, dry and dark with a trailer and a flat tyre, do not exceed the place when not in use. speed of 60 km/h, 35 mph. If the trailer starts to snake, brake immediately and make the neces‐ ▷ Protect the tyres against contamination from sary steering corrections as carefully as possi‐ oil, grease and solvents. ble. ▷ Do not leave tyres in plastic bags. ▷ Remove dirt from the wheels or tyres.
Run-flat tyres
Principle In the event of a complete loss of tyre inflation pressure, run-flat tyres enable you to continue driving, with certain restrictions.
373 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 374
MOBILITY Wheels and tyres
Label General ▷ Please observe the notes on the application of the Mobility System which are on the com‐ pressor and the sealant container. ▷ Applying the Mobility System can be ineffec‐ tive for tyre damage larger than approximately 4 mm. ▷ Contact a Service Partner of the manufac‐ turer or another qualified Service Partner or a specialist workshop if you are unable to put The tyres are identified by Runflat System Com‐ the tyre back in operation. ponent RSC on the tyre's side wall. ▷ Foreign bodies that have penetrated the tyre should remain inside the tyre. Only remove foreign objects if they are visibly protruding Remedying flat tyres from the tyre. ▷ Remove the speed limit sticker from the seal‐ Safety measures ant container and attach to the steering wheel. ▷ Park the vehicle on a firm surface and as far away from moving traffic as possible. ▷ Using sealants can damage the wheel elec‐ tronics. In this case, have the electronics re‐ ▷ Switch on the hazard warning lights. placed at the next opportunity. ▷ Apply the parking brake to prevent the vehi‐ ▷ The compressor can be used to check the cle rolling away. tyre inflation pressure. ▷ Engage the steering wheel lock with the wheels in the straight-ahead position. Overview ▷ Have all vehicle occupants get out of the ve‐ hicle and guide them out of the danger area, Storage for example behind the crash barrier. ▷ Set up the warning triangle an appropriate distance away.
Mobility System
Principle With the Mobility System, minor tyre damage can be quickly sealed, to allow you to drive on. The Mobility System is located in a bag in the left For this purpose, liquid sealant is pumped into storage compartment of the boot. To remove it, the tyres which encloses the damage from the loosen the tensioning strap. inside when it hardens.
374 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 375
Wheels and tyres MOBILITY
Sealant container ▷ Engage the steering wheel lock with the wheels in the straight-ahead position. ▷ Have all vehicle occupants get out of the ve‐ hicle and guide them out of the danger area, for example behind the crash barrier. ▷ Set up the warning triangle an appropriate distance away.
Filling with sealing compound
▷ Sealant container, arrow 1. Safety notes ▷ Filler hose, arrow 2. Note the use-by date on the sealant container. DANGER A blocked exhaust pipe or inadequate ventila‐ Compressor tion can allow harmful exhaust fumes to enter the vehicle. The exhaust fumes contain pollu‐ tants which are colourless and odourless. In en‐ closed spaces, exhaust fumes can also build up outside the vehicle. There is a risk of death. Keep the exhaust pipe clear and ensure suffi‐ cient ventilation.
NOTE The compressor can overheat if operated for 1 Unlocking sealant container too long. There is a risk of material damage. Do 2 Sealant container holder not let the compressor run for longer than 3 Tyre inflation pressure indicator 10 minutes. 4 Reduce tyre inflation pressure button 5 On/Off button Filling 6 Compressor 1. Shake the sealant container. 7 Plug/cable for socket 8 Connecting hose
Safety measures ▷ Park the vehicle on a firm surface and as far away from moving traffic as possible. ▷ Switch on the hazard warning lights. ▷ Apply the parking brake to prevent the vehi‐ cle rolling away.
375 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 376
MOBILITY Wheels and tyres
2. Pull filler hose completely from the cover of 5. Insert the plug into the socket in the vehicle the sealant container. Do not kink the hose. interior while the compressor is switched off.
3. Push the sealant container into the bracket 6. Switch on the compressor with standby state on the compressor housing, until it audibly or drive-ready state switched on. engages.
Let the compressor run for a maximum of 10 mi‐ 4. Screw the filler hose of the sealant container nutes to fill the sealing compound and achieve a onto the tyre valve of the faulty wheel. tyre inflation pressure of approximately 2.0 bar. The tyre inflation pressure may rise to approxi‐ mately 5 bar during the filling process of the sealing compound. Do not switch off the com‐ pressor during this step.
Checking and adjusting the tyre inflation pressure
Checking 1. Switch off compressor. 2. Read off the tyre inflation pressure as shown on the tyre pressure indicator. To be able to continue the journey, a tyre infla‐ tion pressure of at least 2 bar must be reached.
376 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 377
Wheels and tyres MOBILITY
Removing and storing the sealant If the tyre inflation pressure of at least 2 bar is container not reached, contact a Service Partner of the manufacturer or a qualified Service Partner or 1. Unscrew the filler hose of the sealant con‐ a specialist workshop. tainer from the tyre valve. If the tyre inflation pressure of at least 2 bar is 2. Press the red unlocking device. reached, see Minimum tyre inflation pressure 3. Remove the sealant container from the com‐ is reached. pressor. 6. Unscrew the connecting hose of the com‐ 4. Pack and store the sealant container to avoid pressor from the tyre valve. soiling the boot. 7. Unplug the connector from the socket in the vehicle interior. Minimum tyre inflation pressure is not reached 8. Store Mobility System in the vehicle. 1. Unplug the connector from the socket in the Minimum tyre inflation pressure is vehicle interior. reached 2. Drive forwards and backwards by 10 m, 1. Unscrew the connecting hose of the com‐ 400 inches, to distribute the sealant in the pressor from the tyre valve. tyre. 2. Unplug the connector from the socket in the 3. Screw the connecting hose of the compres‐ vehicle interior. sor directly onto the tyre valve. 3. Store Mobility System in the vehicle. 4. Immediately drive for approximately 10 km/5 mi to evenly distribute the sealing compound in the tyre. Do not exceed a speed of 80 km/h/50 mph. If possible, do not drive slower than 20 km/h/12 mph.
Adjusting 4. Insert the plug into the socket in the vehicle 1. Stop in a suitable area. interior. 2. Screw the connecting hose of the compres‐ sor directly onto the tyre valve.
5. Switch on the compressor with standby state or drive-ready state switched on.
377 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 378
MOBILITY Wheels and tyres
3. Insert the plug into the socket in the vehicle Snow chains interior. Safety notes
WARNING If snow chains are fitted to unsuitable tyres, the snow chains can come into contact with parts of the vehicle. There is a risk of accident or ma‐ terial damage. Only fit snow chains on tyres which have been approved by the manufacturer 4. Correct tyre inflation pressure to at least as being suitable for snow chains. 2.0 bar: ▷ To increase the tyre inflation pressure: switch on the compressor with standby WARNING state or drive-ready state switched on. Insufficiently tensioned snow chains can dam‐ ▷ To reduce tyre inflation pressure: press age tyres and vehicle components. There is a the button on the compressor. risk of accident or material damage. Ensure that 5. Unscrew the connecting hose of the com‐ snow chains are always adequately tensioned. pressor from the tyre valve. Re-tension them if necessary in accordance with the snow chain manufacturer's instruc‐ 6. Unplug the connector from the socket in the tions. vehicle interior. 7. Store Mobility System in the vehicle. Fine-link snow chains Resuming a journey The vehicle manufacturer recommends using Do not exceed maximum permitted speed of fine-link snow chains. Certain fine-link snow 80 km/h, 50 mph. chains have been tested, found safe for use in Reinitialise the runflat indicator RPA. traffic and rated as suitable by the manufacturer of the vehicle. Reset the Tyre Pressure Monitor. Information regarding suitable snow chains is Have the punctured tyre and the sealant con‐ available from a Service Partner of the manufac‐ tainer of the Mobility System replaced as soon as turer or another qualified Service Partner or a possible. specialist workshop. For further information: ▷ Runflat indicator RPA, see page 386. Use ▷ Tyre Pressure Monitor, see page 379. Snow chains may only be used in pairs on the rear wheels with tyres of the following sizes: ▷ 225/50 R17. ▷ 225/45 R18. Observe the snow chain manufacturer's instruc‐ tions.
378 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 379
Wheels and tyres MOBILITY
Do not initialise the runflat indicator RPA with Safety note snow chains fitted, as it may give incorrect read‐ ings. WARNING Do not reset the Tyre Pressure Monitor with snow chains fitted, as it may give incorrect read‐ The display showing the specified tyre inflation ings. pressures does not replace the tyre inflation pressure information on the vehicle. If incorrect When driving with snow chains fitted, activate data has been entered into the tyre settings, Dynamic Traction Control DTC briefly as re‐ the specified tyre inflation pressures will also be quired in order to optimise traction. incorrect. As a result, reliable signalling of a loss of tyre inflation pressure can no longer be guar‐ Maximum speed with snow anteed. There is a risk of injury and material chains damage. Make sure that the tyre sizes of the When snow chains are fitted, do not exceed fitted tyres are displayed correctly and that they 50 km/h, 30 mph. match the specifications on the tyres and in the tyre inflation pressure information. Tyre Pressure Monitor Operating requirements Principle The following requirements must be met for the system, otherwise reliable signalling of a loss of The system monitors the tyre inflation pressure tyre inflation pressure is not ensured: in the four tyres installed on the vehicle. The sys‐ tem warns if the tyre inflation pressure in one or ▷ After each tyre or wheel change, the system more tyres has dropped. has detected the fitted tyres, updated the rel‐ evant information and, after a short journey, General shown it on the Control Display. If the system does not detect the tyres auto‐ Sensors in the tyre valves measure the tyre infla‐ matically, enter the specifications for the fit‐ tion pressure and tyre temperature. ted tyres in the tyre settings. The system detects the fitted tyres automati‐ ▷ The Tyre Pressure Monitor only becomes ac‐ cally. The system shows the preset specified tive after a journey of several minutes: pressures on the Control Display and compares them to the current tyre inflation pressures. ▷ After changing a tyre or wheel. If the vehicle is fitted with tyres which are not lis‐ ▷ After a reset, in the case of tyres with spe‐ ted in the tyre inflation pressure information on cial approval. the vehicle, for example tyres with special appro‐ ▷ After changing the tyre setting. val, the system must be actively reset. The cur‐ ▷ In the case of tyres with special approval: rent tyre inflation pressures are then accepted as ▷ After every tyre or wheel change, a reset the specified values. must be carried out when the tyre inflation When operating the system, please also comply pressures are correct. with the information and notes in the chapter on ▷ A reset must be carried out after the tyre tyre inflation pressure. inflation pressure has been adjusted to a For further information: new value. Tyre inflation pressure, see page 368. ▷ Wheels with wheel electronics.
379 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 380
MOBILITY Wheels and tyres
Tyre settings Status display
General Current status If the system does not detect the tyres automati‐ The status of the system, for example whether cally, the specifications for the fitted tyres can be the system is active, can be shown on the Con‐ entered in the tyre settings. trol Display. The tyre sizes of the fitted tyres can be found in 1. "CAR" the tyre inflation pressure information on the ve‐ 2. "Vehicle status" hicle or directly on the tyres. 3. "Tyre Pressure Monitor" The tyre data does not have to be re-entered if the tyre inflation pressure is corrected. The current status is displayed. For summer and winter tyres, the tyre data last entered for each type is saved. This means that Current tyre inflation pressure the settings can be retrieved again after a tyre or The current tyre inflation pressure is displayed wheel change. for each tyre. The current tyre inflation pressures can vary de‐ Adjusting the settings pending on vehicle operation or outside temper‐ 1. "CAR" ature. 2. "Vehicle status" Current tyre temperature 3. "Tyre Pressure Monitor" Depending on the model, the current tyre tem‐ 4. "Tyre settings" peratures are shown. 5. "Tyre selection" The current tyre temperatures can change as a 6. "Manual" result of vehicle operation or the outside temper‐ 7. "Tyre type" ature. ▷ "Summer" Specified pressure ▷ "Winter/all-season" The specified pressure for the tyres on the front 8. Select the type of tyre mounted on the rear and rear axle is displayed. axle. The calculated pressure takes account of the In the case of tyres with special approval: temperature effects caused by vehicle operation "Other tyres". and the outside temperature. The appropriate See the Performing a reset section for how to specified pressure is always displayed irrespec‐ proceed. tive of the weather conditions, tyre temperatures and length of journey. 9. Select the load status of the vehicle once tyre size has been selected. The displayed specified pressure may vary and differ from the value stated in the tyre inflation 10."Save tyre settings" pressure information on the door pillar of the The measurement of the current tyre inflation driver's door. The tyre inflation pressure can thus pressure is started. The progress of the meas‐ be corrected to the value of the displayed speci‐ urement is shown. fied pressures. The specified pressure is adjusted immediately if the load status is changed in the tyre settings.
380 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 381
Wheels and tyres MOBILITY
Tyre statuses 6. Reset the tyre inflation pressure: "Perform reset". General 7. Drive off. The status of the system and tyres is indicated The wheels are shown grey and the following ap‐ by the wheel colour and a message on the Con‐ pears on the display: "Resetting tyre trol Display. pressure…". If applicable, existing messages are not deleted if After driving for several minutes, the set tyre in‐ the nominal pressure is not reached on correc‐ flation pressures are accepted as the specified tion of the tyre inflation pressure. tyre inflation pressures. The reset is completed automatically during the journey. All wheels green If the reset was successful, the wheels are ▷ The system is active and refers to the nomi‐ shown in green on the Control Display and the nal pressures for the warning. following appears: "Reset successful." ▷ In the case of tyres with special approval: the You can interrupt your journey at any time. The system is active and is using the tyre inflation reset resumes automatically when you continue pressures saved during the last reset for the your journey. warning. Messages: for tyres without One to four wheels yellow special approval There is a flat tyre or major loss of tyre inflation pressure in the tyres shown. General Dynamic Stability Control DSC will be activated if Wheels grey necessary as soon as a message for low tyre in‐ Tyre pressure losses might not be detected. flation pressure appears. Possible causes: Safety note ▷ Malfunction. ▷ The tyre inflation pressure is being measured, after confirmation of the tyre settings. WARNING ▷ In the case of tyres with special approval: a A damaged standard tyre with too little or no system reset is being performed. tyre inflation pressure impairs driving character‐ istics, for example steering and braking. Tyres Tyres with special approval: with run-flat properties allow a limited level of stability to be maintained. There is a risk of ac‐ performing a reset cident. Do not continue driving if the vehicle is 1. "CAR" fitted with standard tyres. Comply with the 2. "Vehicle status" notes on run-flat tyres and continuing to drive with these tyres. 3. "Tyre Pressure Monitor" 4. Make sure that the correct tyre settings have been made. Tyre settings, see page 380. 5. Switch on drive-ready state but do not drive off.
381 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 382
MOBILITY Wheels and tyres
If a tyre inflation pressure check is If there is a significant loss of tyre required inflation pressure
Message Message A symbol with a Check Control message is A yellow warning lamp is illuminated in shown on the Control Display. the instrument cluster. Symbol Possible cause In addition, a symbol with the affected tyre is The tyre was not inflated properly, shown in a Check Control message on the Con‐ for example insufficient air was trol Display. added or there was a natural, even Symbol Possible cause loss of tyre inflation pressure. There is a flat tyre or substantial loss Action of tyre inflation pressure. Check the tyre inflation pressure and adjust as necessary. Action 1. Reduce your speed and carefully stop the ve‐ If the tyre inflation pressure is hicle. Avoid heavy braking and sudden steer‐ insufficient ing manoeuvres. 2. Check whether the vehicle is equipped with Message standard tyres or run-flat tyres. A yellow warning lamp is illuminated in The symbol identifying run-flat tyres is a cir‐ the instrument cluster. cle with the letters RSC on the tyre sidewall. In addition, a symbol with a Check Control mes‐ Run-flat tyres, see page 373. sage is shown on the Control Display. 3. Follow the description of what to do when the vehicle gets a flat tyre. Symbol Possible cause What to do in the event of a flat tyre, see There has been a loss of tyre infla‐ page 384. tion pressure. Messages: in the case of tyres Action with special approval 1. Reduce speed. Do not exceed a speed of 130 km/h, 80 mph. General 2. At the next opportunity, for example at a filling Dynamic Stability Control DSC will be activated if station, check the tyre inflation pressure in all necessary as soon as a message for low tyre in‐ four tyres and correct if necessary. flation pressure appears.
382 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 383
Wheels and tyres MOBILITY
Safety note If the tyre inflation pressure is too low WARNING Message A damaged standard tyre with too little or no tyre inflation pressure impairs driving character‐ A yellow warning lamp is illuminated in istics, for example steering and braking. Tyres the instrument cluster. with run-flat properties allow a limited level of In addition, a symbol with a Check Control mes‐ stability to be maintained. There is a risk of ac‐ sage is shown on the Control Display. cident. Do not continue driving if the vehicle is fitted with standard tyres. Comply with the Symbol Possible cause notes on run-flat tyres and continuing to drive with these tyres. There has been a loss of tyre infla‐ tion pressure. No reset has been performed on the If a tyre inflation pressure check is system. The system is using the tyre required inflation pressures saved during the last reset for the warning. Message A symbol with a Check Control message is Action shown on the Control Display. 1. Reduce speed. Do not exceed a speed of Sym‐ Possible cause 130 km/h, 80 mph. bol 2. At the next opportunity, for example at a filling station, check the tyre inflation pressure in all The tyre was not inflated properly, for four tyres and correct if necessary. example insufficient air was added. 3. Perform a reset of the system. The system has detected a wheel change, but no reset has been per‐ If there is a significant loss of tyre formed. inflation pressure The tyre inflation pressure has drop‐ ped compared to the last reset. Message No reset has been performed on the A yellow warning lamp is illuminated in system. The system is using the tyre the instrument cluster. inflation pressures saved during the last reset for the warning. In addition, a symbol with the affected tyre is shown in a Check Control message on the Con‐ Action trol Display. 1. Check the tyre inflation pressure and adjust as necessary. 2. Perform a reset of the system.
383 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 384
MOBILITY Wheels and tyres
Symbol Possible cause The use of sealant, for example a flat tyre kit, can damage the wheel electronics. Have the elec‐ There is a flat tyre or substantial loss tronics replaced at the next opportunity. of tyre inflation pressure. No reset has been performed on the Run-flat tyres system. The system is using the tyre inflation pressures saved during the Safety notes last reset for the warning. WARNING Action A run-flat tyre with too little or no tyre inflation 1. Reduce your speed and carefully stop the ve‐ pressure will change the vehicle's handling hicle. Avoid heavy braking and sudden steer‐ characteristics, for example there may be re‐ ing manoeuvres. duced directional stability when braking, longer 2. Check whether the vehicle is equipped with stopping distances and different self-steering standard tyres or run-flat tyres. characteristics. There is a risk of accident. Drive The symbol identifying run-flat tyres is a cir‐ with care and do not exceed a speed of cle with the letters RSC on the tyre sidewall. 80 km/h, 50 mph. Run-flat tyres, see page 373. 3. Follow the description of what to do when the WARNING vehicle gets a flat tyre. Continuing to drive with a flat tyre can result in What to do in the event of a flat tyre, see heavy trailers starting to slalom. There is a risk page 384. of accident or material damage. When driving with a trailer and a flat tyre, do not exceed the What to do in the event of a flat speed of 60 km/h, 35 mph. If the trailer starts to tyre snake, brake immediately and make the neces‐ sary steering corrections as carefully as possi‐ Standard tyres ble. 1. Identify the damaged tyre. Check the tyre inflation pressure in all four Maximum speed tyres, for example using the tyre pressure in‐ If a tyre is damaged you can continue your jour‐ dicator of a flat tyre kit. ney, but do not exceed a maximum speed of In the case of tyres with special approval: if all 80 km/h, 50 mph. four tyres are inflated to the correct tyre infla‐ tion pressures, the Tyre Pressure Monitor Continuing a journey with a flat tyre might not have been reset. Perform a reset. Note the following if you continue a journey with If no tyre damage can be found, contact a a flat tyre: Service Partner of the manufacturer or an‐ other qualified Service Partner or a specialist 1. Avoid heavy braking and sudden steering workshop. manoeuvres. 2. Repair the flat tyre, for example using a flat 2. Do not exceed a speed of 80 km/h, 50 mph. tyre kit or by changing the wheel. 3. As soon as there is an opportunity, check the tyre inflation pressure in all four tyres.
384 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 385
Wheels and tyres MOBILITY
Possible driving distance with a deflated The pressure decreases when the tyre tempera‐ tyre ture drops. The possible driving distance varies depending Due to the system's inherent warning thresholds, on the load and stresses the vehicle is subjected therefore, this behaviour may cause a warning to to, for example speed, the nature of the road sur‐ be triggered when significant temperature drops face, outside temperature. The driving distance occur. may be shorter but can also be increased by After a temperature-related warning, the speci‐ adopting a more careful driving style. fied pressures are displayed again on the Control If the vehicle is moderately loaded and subjected Display after driving a short distance. to low stress, it is possible to travel up to 80 km, 50 miles. Sudden loss of tyre inflation pressure Driving properties with damaged tyres No warning can be given in the event of extreme, On a journey with damaged tyres, handling char‐ sudden tyre failure caused by external factors. acteristics change and lead to the following sit‐ uations, for example: Reset not carried out ▷ The vehicle losing traction more quickly. Tyres with special approval: the system will not ▷ Longer stopping distances. function correctly if a reset has not been carried ▷ Different self-steering characteristics. out, for example, a flat tyre may be reported even though the tyre pressure is correct. Adapt your driving style. Avoid abrupt steering or driving over obstacles, for example kerbs or pot‐ holes. Malfunction
Final tyre failure Message Vibration or loud noises during the journey may The yellow warning lamp flashes and be an indication that the tyre has finally failed. then illuminates continuously. A Check Reduce your speed and stop the vehicle. Parts of Control message is shown. Tyre pres‐ the tyre may detach, which might lead to an acci‐ sure losses may not be detected. dent. Do not continue driving, but instead contact a Action Service Partner of the manufacturer or another ▷ A wheel without wheel electronics is moun‐ qualified Service Partner or a specialist work‐ ted: have the wheels checked if necessary. shop. ▷ Fault due to systems or devices with the same radio frequency: the system is auto‐ System limits matically reactivated upon leaving the field of interference. Temperature ▷ In the case of tyres with special approval: the The tyre inflation pressure depends on the tem‐ system was unable to complete the reset. perature of the tyre. Perform a system reset again. The pressure increases as the temperature of Malfunction: have the system checked. the tyre increases, for example while driving or when exposed to sunlight.
385 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 386
MOBILITY Wheels and tyres
Runflat indicator RPA Initialising Initialisation saves the set tyre inflation pressures Principle as reference values for subsequent detection of a flat tyre. Initialisation is started by confirming The system identifies a loss of tyre inflation pres‐ the correct tyre inflation pressures. sure by comparing the rotational speeds of the When driving with snow chains fitted, do not initi‐ individual wheels during the journey. alise the system. If a tyre loses inflation pressure, its diameter changes. This in turn alters the rotational speed 1. "CAR" of the corresponding wheel. The discrepancy will 2. "Vehicle status" be detected and reported as a flat tyre. 3. "Flat Tyre Monitor" The system does not measure the tyre inflation 4. Switch on drive-ready state but do not drive pressure as such. off. Operating requirements 5. Start the initialisation: "Perform reset" 6. Drive off. The following requirements must be met for the system, otherwise reliable signalling of a loss of Initialisation is completed during the journey; this tyre inflation pressure is not ensured: process can be interrupted at any time. ▷ After every tyre or wheel change, an initialisa‐ Initialising resumes automatically when you con‐ tion must be carried out once the tyre infla‐ tinue your journey. tion pressures are correct. ▷ An initialisation must be carried out after the Messages tyre inflation pressure has been adjusted to a new value. General Dynamic Stability Control DSC is activated if Status display necessary as soon as the message for a flat tyre appears. It is possible to display the current status of the runflat indicator RPA, for example to check whether the RPA is active. Safety note
1. "CAR" WARNING 2. "Vehicle status" A damaged standard tyre with too little or no 3. "Flat Tyre Monitor" tyre inflation pressure impairs driving character‐ The status is displayed. istics, for example steering and braking. Tyres with run-flat properties allow a limited level of Initialisation required stability to be maintained. There is a risk of ac‐ An initialisation must be performed in the cident. Do not continue driving if the vehicle is following situations: fitted with standard tyres. Comply with the notes on run-flat tyres and continuing to drive ▷ After adjusting the tyre inflation pressure. with these tyres. ▷ After a tyre or wheel change.
386 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 387
Wheels and tyres MOBILITY
Flat tyre message Run-flat tyres A yellow warning lamp is illuminated in Safety notes the instrument cluster.
In addition, a symbol with a Check Control mes‐ WARNING sage is shown on the Control Display. A run-flat tyre with too little or no tyre inflation Symbol Possible cause pressure will change the vehicle's handling characteristics, for example there may be re‐ There is a flat tyre or substantial loss duced directional stability when braking, longer of tyre inflation pressure. stopping distances and different self-steering characteristics. There is a risk of accident. Drive Action with care and do not exceed a speed of 80 km/h, 50 mph. 1. Reduce your speed and carefully stop the ve‐ hicle. Avoid heavy braking and sudden steer‐ ing manoeuvres. WARNING 2. Check whether the vehicle is equipped with standard tyres or run-flat tyres. Continuing to drive with a flat tyre can result in heavy trailers starting to slalom. There is a risk The symbol identifying run-flat tyres is a cir‐ of accident or material damage. When driving cle with the letters RSC on the tyre sidewall. with a trailer and a flat tyre, do not exceed the Run-flat tyres, see page 373. speed of 60 km/h, 35 mph. If the trailer starts to snake, brake immediately and make the neces‐ What to do in the event of a flat sary steering corrections as carefully as possi‐ tyre ble.
Standard tyres Maximum speed 1. Identify the damaged tyre. If a tyre is damaged you can continue your jour‐ To do this, check the tyre inflation pressure in ney, but do not exceed a maximum speed of all four tyres, for example using the tyre pres‐ 80 km/h, 50 mph. sure indicator of a flat tyre kit. If all four tyres are inflated to the correct tyre Continuing a journey with a flat tyre inflation pressures, the runflat indicator RPA Note the following if you continue a journey with might not have been initialised. In this case a flat tyre: initialise the system. 1. Avoid heavy braking and sudden steering If it is not possible to identify tyre damage, manoeuvres. contact a Service Partner of the manufacturer or another qualified Service Partner or a spe‐ 2. Do not exceed a speed of 80 km/h, 50 mph. cialist workshop. 3. As soon as there is an opportunity, check the 2. Repair the flat tyre, for example using a flat tyre inflation pressure in all four tyres. tyre kit or by changing the wheel. If all four tyres are inflated to the correct tyre inflation pressures, the runflat indicator might not have been initialised. In this case initialise the system.
387 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 388
MOBILITY Wheels and tyres
Possible driving distance with a deflated ▷ No warning can be given in the event of sud‐ tyre den tyre failure caused by external factors. The possible driving distance varies depending ▷ The system has not been initialised. on the load and stresses the vehicle is subjected ▷ When driving on snow-covered or slippery to, for example speed, the nature of the road sur‐ surfaces. face, outside temperature. The driving distance ▷ Dynamic driving style: drive wheels slipping, may be shorter but can also be increased by high lateral acceleration. adopting a more careful driving style. ▷ When driving with snow chains. If the vehicle is moderately loaded and subjected to low stress, it is possible to travel up to 80 km, 50 miles. Wheel change Driving properties with damaged tyres On a journey with damaged tyres, handling char‐ General acteristics change and lead to the following sit‐ For run-flat tyres or when using a flat tyre kit, it is uations, for example: not always necessary to change a wheel immedi‐ ▷ The vehicle losing traction more quickly. ately if tyre inflation pressure is lost due to a flat tyre. ▷ Longer stopping distances. If required, the tools for changing wheels are ▷ Different self-steering characteristics. available as optional accessories from a Service Adapt your driving style. Avoid abrupt steering or Partner of the manufacturer, another qualified driving over obstacles, for example kerbs or pot‐ Service Partner or a specialist workshop. holes. Safety notes Final tyre failure Vibration or loud noises during the journey may DANGER be an indication that the tyre has finally failed. The jack is only intended for raising the vehicle Reduce your speed and stop the vehicle. Parts of briefly during a wheel change. Even if the safety the tyre may detach, which might lead to an acci‐ measures are complied with, there is a risk of dent. the raised vehicle falling over due to the jack Do not continue driving, but instead contact a slipping. There is a risk of injury or even death. Service Partner of the manufacturer or another If the vehicle is raised with the jack, do not lie qualified Service Partner or a specialist work‐ underneath the vehicle and do not start the en‐ shop. gine. System limits In the following situations, the system could be DANGER slow to respond or operate incorrectly: Supports such as wooden blocks under the ▷ A natural, even loss of tyre inflation pressure jack can prevent it from achieving its load ca‐ in all four tyres that occurs over time will not pacity due to the restricted height. The load ca‐ be detected. Therefore check the tyre infla‐ pacity of the wooden blocks may be exceeded, tion pressure at regular intervals. causing the vehicle to tip over. There is a risk of
388 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 389
Wheels and tyres MOBILITY
injury or even death. Do not place supports un‐ der the vehicle jack. WARNING A vehicle raised with a jack can fall from the jack if lateral forces are applied. There is a risk WARNING of injury and material damage. If the vehicle is The jack, issued by the vehicle manufacturer, is raised, do not apply any lateral forces to the ve‐ provided in order to perform a wheel change in hicle or pull the vehicle with sudden move‐ the event of a breakdown. The jack is not de‐ ments. Have any wheel that is jammed re‐ signed for frequent use; for example, changing moved by a Service Partner of the from summer to winter tyres. Using the jack manufacturer or another qualified Service Part‐ frequently may cause it to become jammed or ner or a specialist workshop. damaged. There is a risk of injury and material damage. Only use the jack to change an emer‐ gency wheel or a spare wheel when the vehicle WARNING gets a flat tyre. The jack can damage the base of the vehicle if operated incorrectly, thereby exposing high- voltage components. There is a risk of injury or WARNING material damage. When extending, make sure On soft, uneven or slippery ground, for example that the jack is guided into the jacking point ad‐ snow, ice, tiles or similar, the jack may slip. jacent to the wheelhouse. Ensure that no parts There is a risk of injury. Perform the wheel of the underbody trim are damaged. change on a level, firm and non-slip surface if at all possible. Protecting the vehicle against rolling WARNING General The jack is only optimised for raising the vehi‐ cle and for use with the jacking points on the The vehicle manufacturer recommends that the vehicle. There is a risk of injury. Do not lift an‐ vehicle should additionally be protected against other vehicle or other items with the jack. rolling away during a wheel change. On a level surface WARNING If the jack has not been guided into the jacking point provided, the vehicle might be damaged when the jack is extended, or the jack could slip. There is a risk of injury or material damage. When extending, make sure that the jack is gui‐ ded into the jacking point adjacent to the wheelhouse.
Place chocks or other suitable objects in front of and behind the wheel directly opposite to the one being changed.
389 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 390
MOBILITY Wheels and tyres
On a slight downhill slope 3. After unscrewing the wheel stud, remove the adapter again.
Screwing on 1. Place the adapter on the locking wheel bolt. If necessary, turn the adapter until it fits on the locking wheel bolt. 2. Screw on the locking wheel bolt. The tighten‐ ing torque is 140 Nm. 3. After screwing on the wheel stud, remove the If it is necessary to change a wheel on a slight adapter again and stow it. downhill slope, place chocks and other suitable objects, for example stones, under the wheels of Preparing the vehicle the front and rear axles against the direction of ▷ Park the vehicle on firm and non-slip ground roll. at a safe distance from traffic. ▷ Switch on the hazard warning lights. Locking wheel bolts ▷ Apply the parking brake. Principle ▷ Engage a gear or select selector lever posi‐ tion P. The wheel locking bolts have a special coding. ▷ As soon as the traffic permits, have all vehicle The blots can only be released with the adapter occupants get out of the vehicle and guide that matches the coding. them out of the danger area, for example be‐ hind the crash barrier. Overview ▷ Depending on the equipment, take the wheel The adapter of the locking wheel bolts can be change tools and, if necessary, the spare found in the on-board tool kit or in an oddments wheel out of the vehicle. tray in the on-board tool kit. ▷ If applicable, set up warning triangle or flash‐ ing light at the correct distance. ▷ Additionally protect the vehicle against rolling away. ▷ Undo the wheel studs by half a turn.
▷ Locking wheel bolt, arrow 1. ▷ Adapter, arrow 2.
Unscrewing 1. Place the adapter on the locking wheel bolt. 2. Unscrew the locking wheel bolt.
390 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 391
Wheels and tyres MOBILITY
Jacking points Raising vehicle
WARNING Your hands or fingers could get trapped when using the jack. There is a risk of injury. Keep your hands in the described position when us‐ ing the jack, and do not change this position.
1. Hold the jack with one hand, arrow 1, and grasp the jack crank or lever with your other The jacking points are located in the marked po‐ hand, arrow 2. sitions.
2. Guide the jack into the rectangular recess of the jacking point closest to the wheel to be changed.
3. Turn the jack crank or lever clockwise to ex‐ tend the jack.
391 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 392
MOBILITY Wheels and tyres
4. Remove your hand from the jack as soon as studs belonging to the wheels may also have the jack is under load and continue to turn to be used. the jack crank or lever with one hand. 4. Tighten the remaining wheel studs until fin‐ 5. Make sure that the base of the vehicle jack is ger-tight and then tighten all the wheel studs extended perpendicular to and at right angles crosswise. underneath the jacking point. 5. Turn the jack crank anticlockwise to retract the jack and lower the vehicle. 6. Remove the jack and stow it securely.
After changing the wheel 1. Tighten the wheel studs crosswise. The tightening torque is 140 Nm, 101 lb ft. 2. Stow the faulty wheel in the luggage com‐ partment, if necessary.
6. Make sure that the base of the jack is exten‐ Due to its size, the faulty wheel cannot be ac‐ ded perpendicular to and at right angles be‐ commodated under the luggage compart‐ low the jacking point. ment floor. 3. Check tyre inflation pressure at the next op‐ portunity and correct as necessary. 4. Reinitialise the runflat indicator RPA. Reset the Tyre Pressure Monitor. 5. Check the tight fit of the wheel bolts using a calibrated torque wrench. 6. Drive to the nearest Service Partner of the manufacturer or another qualified Service Partner or a specialist workshop to have the 7. Raise by cranking until the jack is supported damaged tyre replaced. on the ground with its entire surface and the wheel in question is at most 3 cm, 1.2 inches off the ground.
Fitting a wheel Only fit one spare wheel at most, as required.
1. Unscrew the wheel studs. 2. Remove the wheel. 3. Put on the new wheel or emergency wheel and tighten at least two wheel studs cross‐ wise until finger-tight. If non-original light alloy wheels not from the vehicle manufacturer are fitted, the wheel
392 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 393
Engine compartment MOBILITY
Engine compartment
Vehicle equipment your vehicle, for example on account of the spe‐ cial equipment selected or the country specifica‐ tion. This also applies to safety-relevant func‐ This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ tions and systems. Please comply with the cific and optional equipment available for the relevant laws and regulations when using the model series. It may therefore describe equip‐ corresponding functions and systems. ment and functions which are not installed in
Overview
1 Starting aid, positive battery terminal 5 Engine coolant tank 2 Oil filler neck 6 Vehicle identification number 3 Manual unlocking, charging cable 7 Filler neck for washing fluid 4 Additional coolant tank cooling 8 Starting aid, negative battery terminal
393 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 394
MOBILITY Engine compartment
Bonnet WARNING Safety notes Parts of the body can become trapped when opening and closing the bonnet. There is a risk of injury. When opening and closing, make sure WARNING that the area of movement of the bonnet is Incorrectly performed work in the engine com‐ kept clear. partment can damage components and poses a safety risk. There is a risk of accident or mate‐ rial damage. Have work in the engine compart‐ NOTE ment undertaken by a Service Partner of the Wipers which are folded away from the wind‐ manufacturer or another qualified Service Part‐ screen can become trapped if the front flap is ner or a specialist workshop. opened. There is a risk of material damage. Be‐ fore opening the bonnet, make sure that the wipers are fitted with wiper blades and are in WARNING contact with the windscreen. The engine compartment contains moving components. Certain components in the en‐ gine compartment can also move when the ve‐ NOTE hicle is switched off, for example the radiator When closing, the front flap must lock into fan. There is a risk of injury. Do not reach into place on both sides. Applying additional pres‐ an area where there are moving parts. Keep ar‐ sure can damage the front flap. There is a risk ticles of clothing and hair away from moving of material damage. Open the front flap again parts. and close it firmly. Avoid applying additional pressure.
WARNING The front flap has protruding parts on the in‐ Opening side, for example locking hooks. There is a risk 1. Pull the lever, arrow 1. of injury. When the front flap is open, watch out Front flap is unlocked. for protruding parts and keep these areas clear.
WARNING If the bonnet is not correctly locked, it can come open during the journey and impair visi‐ bility. There is a risk of accident. Stop immedi‐ ately and close the bonnet correctly.
2. After releasing the lever, pull the lever again, arrow 2. The front flap can be opened.
394 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 395
Engine compartment MOBILITY
3. Watch out for any protruding parts on the front flap.
Closing
Allow the front flap to drop from a height of ap‐ proximately 50 cm, approx. 20 in. The front flap must engage on both sides.
395 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 396
MOBILITY Operating fluids
Operating fluids
Vehicle equipment The engine has knock control. This means that different petrol grades can be used. This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ cific and optional equipment available for the Safety notes model series. It may therefore describe equip‐ ment and functions which are not installed in NOTE your vehicle, for example on account of the spe‐ The fuel system and engine can be damaged cial equipment selected or the country specifica‐ by the wrong fuel, even in small quantities, and tion. This also applies to safety-relevant func‐ by the wrong fuel additives. In addition, the cat‐ tions and systems. Please comply with the alytic converter will be permanently damaged. relevant laws and regulations when using the There is a risk of material damage. For petrol corresponding functions and systems. engines, do not refuel with or add the following: ▷ Leaded petrol. Fuel grade ▷ Metallic additives, for example manganese or iron. General After filling with the wrong fuel, do not press the start/stop button. Contact a Service Partner Depending on the region, many filling stations of the manufacturer or another qualified Service sell fuel that is adapted to winter or summer con‐ Partner or a specialist workshop. ditions. Fuel that is sold in winter helps with cold starting, for example.
Petrol NOTE Fuel below the specified minimum quality can General adversely affect engine function or lead to en‐ gine damage. There is a risk of material dam‐ For optimal fuel consumption, the petrol should age. Do not refuel below the specified mini‐ be sulphur-free or have a low sulphur content. mum quality. Fuels labelled on the pump as containing metal must not be used.
You can fill up with fuels with a maximum ethanol NOTE content of 25 %, for example E10 or E25. Incorrect fuels can damage the fuel system and engine. There is a risk of material damage. Do not refuel with fuel with a higher ethanol con‐ tent than recommended. Do not refuel with fuel containing methanol, for example M5 to M100.
Petrol grade The engine is designed to run on petrol as per DIN EN 228.
396 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 397
Operating fluids MOBILITY
Super, RON 95. Use this fuel to achieve the rated performance NOTE and consumption figures. Too much engine oil can damage the engine or the catalytic converter. There is a risk of mate‐ Minimum grade rial damage. Do not add too much engine oil. If Unleaded petrol, RON 91. there is too much engine oil, have the engine oil level corrected by a Service Partner of the manufacturer or another qualified Service Part‐ ner or a specialist workshop.
Electronic oil measurement
General Electronic oil measurement uses two measuring procedures: ▷ Monitoring. Engine oil ▷ Detailed measurement. When frequently making short journeys or using General a sporty driving style, for example fast cornering, perform a detailed measurement at regular inter‐ Engine oil consumption depends on the driving vals. style and operating conditions. Therefore check the engine oil level regularly Monitoring each time you fill up with fuel by taking a detailed measurement. Principle Engine oil consumption may increase due to the The engine oil level is monitored electronically following, for example: during the journey and can be shown on the ▷ Dynamic driving style. Control Display. ▷ While running in the engine. If the engine oil level is outside its permissible ▷ Engine idling. operating range, a Check Control message is shown. ▷ Use of engine oil grades rated as unsuitable.
Different Check Control messages are shown on Operating requirements the Control Display, depending on the engine oil A current measurement is available after approxi‐ level. mately 30 minutes of normal driving with the in‐ ternal combustion engine running. Safety notes Displaying the engine oil level NOTE 1. "CAR" Too little engine oil causes engine damage. 2. "Vehicle status" There is a risk of material damage. Top up with 3. "Engine oil level" engine oil immediately. The engine oil level is displayed.
397 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 398
MOBILITY Operating fluids
System limits Adding engine oil When frequently making short journeys or using a sporty driving style, it may not be possible to General obtain a measured value. In this case, the meas‐ Do not top up engine oil unless a message is dis‐ urement for the last, sufficiently long journey is played in the instrument cluster. The top-up displayed. amount is specified in the message on the Con‐ trol Display. Detailed measurement Only replenish with suitable types of engine oil. Principle Safely stop the vehicle and switch off drive-ready state before topping up with engine oil. The engine oil level is checked when the vehicle is stationary and is shown on a scale. Do not add too much engine oil. If the engine oil level is outside its permissible Safety notes operating range, a Check Control message is shown. WARNING General Service products, for example oils, greases, During measurement, the idle speed is increased coolants and fuels, can contain substances that slightly. are harmful to health. There is a risk of injury or even death. Please comply with the instructions Operating requirements on the containers. Do not allow service prod‐ ▷ Vehicle is standing on level ground. ucts to come into contact with clothing, skin or eyes. Do not pour service products into other ▷ In drive-ready state. bottles. Keep service products out of the reach ▷ Steptronic transmission: selector lever in se‐ of children. lector lever position N or P and accelerator pedal not pressed.
▷ The internal combustion engine is at operat‐ NOTE ing temperature. Too little engine oil causes engine damage. There is a risk of material damage. Top up with Carrying out a detailed measurement engine oil immediately. 1. "CAR" 2. "Vehicle status" 3. "Engine oil level" NOTE 4. "Engine oil level measurement" Too much engine oil can damage the engine or 5. "Start measurement" the catalytic converter. There is a risk of mate‐ rial damage. Do not add too much engine oil. If The engine oil level is checked and shown on a there is too much engine oil, have the engine scale. oil level corrected by a Service Partner of the manufacturer or another qualified Service Part‐ ner or a specialist workshop.
398 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 399
Operating fluids MOBILITY
Overview The oil filler neck is in the engine compartment. NOTE For further information: Using the wrong engine oil can result in engine malfunctions and damage. There is a risk of Overview, see page 393. material damage. When selecting the engine oil, make sure that it is the correct specification. Adding engine oil 1. Open bonnet. Opening, see page 394. Suitable engine oil grades 2. Turn the cap anticlockwise to open. Engine oils with the following oil specifications can be used. Oil specification
BMW Longlife-04.
BMW Longlife-12 FE.
BMW Longlife-17 FE+.
Alternative engine oil grades 3. Add engine oil. If suitable engine oils are not available, up to 1 li‐ tre, 2 pints, of an engine oil with the following oil 4. Tighten cap. specification can be used for topping up: Engine oil grades for topping up Oil specification ACEA C2. General Engine oil quality is a critical factor in the service ACEA C3. life of the engine. Only replenish with the types of engine oil that Viscosity classes are listed. When selecting an engine oil, make sure that the Some engine oil grades may not be available in engine oil belongs to one of the following viscos‐ all countries. ity classes: Viscosity classes Safety notes SAE 0W-20.
NOTE SAE 5W-20. Oil additives can damage the engine. There is a SAE 0W-30. risk of material damage. Do not use oil addi‐ tives. SAE 5W-30. SAE 0W-40.
SAE 5W-40.
399 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 400
MOBILITY Operating fluids
Viscosity classes with a high viscosity grade can Safety notes increase fuel consumption. Further information on suitable engine oil specifi‐ WARNING cations and viscosity classes can be obtained from a Service Partner of the manufacturer or an‐ If the cooling system is opened when the en‐ other qualified Service Partner or a specialist gine is hot, coolant can escape and cause workshop. scalding. There is a risk of injury. Only open the cooling system when the engine has cooled Oil change down.
NOTE WARNING If the engine oil is not changed at the correct Additives are harmful to health and using the time, engine wear may increase which could wrong additives can damage the engine. There cause engine damage. There is a risk of mate‐ is a risk of injury and material damage. Do not rial damage. Do not exceed the service date in‐ allow additives to come into contact with cloth‐ dicated in the vehicle. ing, skin or eyes, and do not swallow them. Only use suitable additives. The manufacturer of the vehicle recommends having the engine oil changed by a Service Part‐ ner of the manufacturer or another qualified Coolant level Service Partner or a specialist workshop. General Depending on the motorisation, there will be one or two coolant expansion tank(s) in the engine compartment. Check the coolant levels and top up. The coolant level is shown by the Max. mark in the filler neck of the coolant tank. For further information: Overview, see page 393.
Coolant To check the coolant level 1. Allow the engine to cool down. General 2. Open bonnet. Coolant is a mixture of water and an additive. Opening, see page 394. Not all commercially available additives are suita‐ 3. Turn cap on coolant tank slightly anticlock‐ ble for the vehicle. Do not mix additives of differ‐ wise, then allow the pressure to escape. ent colours. Comply with the 50:50 mixing ratio 4. Open cap on coolant tank. of water to additive. Information regarding suita‐ ble additives is available from a Service Partner of the manufacturer or another qualified Service Partner or a specialist workshop.
400 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 401
Operating fluids MOBILITY
5. The coolant level is correct if it is just below Safety notes the Max. mark in the filler neck.
WARNING Some antifreezes can contain toxic substances, and are flammable. There is a risk of fire and in‐ jury. Please comply with the instructions on the containers. Keep antifreezes away from sour‐ ces of combustion. Do not pour service prod‐ ucts into other bottles. Keep service products out of the reach of children.
6. Tighten cap. WARNING Replenishing the coolant Washer fluid can ignite on contact with hot 1. Allow the engine to cool down. parts of the engine and catch fire. There is a 2. Open bonnet. risk of injury or material damage. Only top up Opening, see page 394. washer fluid when the engine has cooled down. Then fully close the cap of the washer fluid res‐ 3. Turn cap on coolant tank slightly anticlock‐ ervoir. wise, then allow the pressure to escape. 4. Open cap on coolant tank.
5. If necessary, slowly top up to the correct NOTE level; do not overfill. Silicone additives mixed with the washer fluid 6. Tighten cap. for their water beading effect on the windows 7. Have the cause of coolant loss rectified as may damage the washer system. There is a risk soon as possible. of material damage. Do not add silicone addi‐ tives to the washer fluid. Disposal When disposing of coolant and coolant additives, comply with the relevant envi‐ NOTE ronmental protection regulations. Mixing different screenwash concentrates or antifreezes may damage the washer system. There is a risk of material damage. Do not mix Washer fluid different screenwash concentrates or antifree‐ zes. Please comply with the instructions and mixing ratios stated on the containers. General All washer jets are supplied from one reservoir. Use a mixture of tap water and screenwash con‐ centrate for the windscreen washer system, if necessary with the addition of antifreeze. Recommended minimum fill level: 1 litre, 1.7 Imp. pints.
401 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 402
MOBILITY Operating fluids
Overview
The reservoir for the washer fluid is located in the engine compartment.
Malfunction Using undiluted screenwash concentrate or anti‐ freeze based on alcohol may result in false read‐ ings at low temperatures below -15 ℃/+5 ℉.
402 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 403
Maintenance MOBILITY
Maintenance
Vehicle equipment General Information on service requirements can be This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ shown on the control display. cific and optional equipment available for the For further information: model series. It may therefore describe equip‐ Service requirements, see page 189. ment and functions which are not installed in your vehicle, for example on account of the spe‐ cial equipment selected or the country specifica‐ Service data in the vehicle key tion. This also applies to safety-relevant func‐ Information on maintenance requirements is tions and systems. Please comply with the continuously stored in the vehicle key. The Serv‐ relevant laws and regulations when using the ice Partner can read out this data and suggest a corresponding functions and systems. programme of maintenance for your vehicle. It is therefore important to give the service advi‐ sor the vehicle key that was last used to drive the BMW Maintenance System vehicle.
The maintenance system indicates what mainte‐ Periods out of use nance measures are required and thereby assists in maintaining the road safety and operational Periods when the vehicle is out of use with its safety of the vehicle. battery disconnected are not taken into account. The exact work required and the maintenance in‐ In such cases, have any time-dependent mainte‐ tervals may vary depending on the national-mar‐ nance procedures, for example those concerning ket version. Labour, spare parts, operating mate‐ the brake fluid and, where applicable, the engine rials and wear materials are charged separately. oil and microfilter/activated charcoal filter, upda‐ Additional information is available from a Service ted by a Service Partner of the manufacturer or Partner of the manufacturer or another qualified another qualified Service Partner or a specialist Service Partner or a specialist workshop. workshop.
Condition Based Service Service history CBS Maintenance and repairs Principle Have maintenance and repairs carried out by a Service Partner of the manufacturer or another Sensors and special algorithms monitor the con‐ qualified Service Partner or a specialist work‐ ditions in which the vehicle is used. CBS uses shop. this information to determine what maintenance is required. Entries The system therefore allows the scope of the The maintenance work carried out is entered in maintenance work to be adapted to the individual the maintenance records and the vehicle data. usage profile.
403 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 404
MOBILITY Maintenance
As with a service booklet, the entries provide evi‐ Socket for on-board dence of regular maintenance. If an entry is made in the electronic service his‐ diagnosis OBD tory of the vehicle, service-relevant data is saved both in the vehicle and in the central IT systems General of BMW AG, Munich. Devices connected to the OBD socket trigger After a change of vehicle ownership, the new ve‐ the alarm system when the vehicle is locked. Re‐ hicle owner will be able to view the data entered move any devices connected to the OBD socket in the electronic service history. Similarly, a Serv‐ before locking the vehicle. ice Partner of the manufacturer or another quali‐ fied Service Partner or a specialist workshop can Safety note also view the data entered in the electronic serv‐ ice history. NOTE Objection Incorrect use of the OBD on-board diagnosis socket can cause malfunctions in the vehicle. The vehicle owner has the right to contact a There is a risk of material damage. Only have Service Partner of the manufacturer or another service and maintenance work involving the qualified Service Partner or a specialist workshop OBD on-board diagnosis socket carried out by and request that no entries are made in the elec‐ a Service Partner of the manufacturer or an‐ tronic service history and that no data relating to other qualified Service Partner or a specialist his/her time as owner is subsequently stored in workshop or other authorised persons. Only the vehicle or transmitted to the vehicle manu‐ connect devices that have been tested and facturer. In such cases, no entries will be made in found to be safe for use with the OBD on- the electronic service history of the vehicle. board diagnosis socket. Displays Services that have been entered can be dis‐ Position played on the control display. For further information: Service requirements, see page 189.
For Australia/New Zealand: maintenance
No maintenance work other than normal mainte‐ nance is required to keep the emission levels of The OBD socket for checking emissions-rele‐ your vehicle within the design limits. vant components is located on the driver's side.
Engine warning light ▷ When the warning light flashes: There is an engine malfunction that could damage the catalytic converter.
404 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 405
Maintenance MOBILITY
Have the vehicle checked as soon as possible. ▷ When the warning light illuminates: This indicates a deterioration in exhaust emissions. Have the vehicle checked as soon as possible.
Vehicle recycling
The manufacturer of the vehicle recommends returning the vehicle to a collection point nomi‐ nated by the manufacturer at the end of its life cycle. The regulations concerning the returning of end-of-life vehicles may vary from country to country. Additional information is available from a Service Partner of the manufacturer or another qualified Service Partner or a specialist work‐ shop.
High-voltage battery recycling
The vehicle manufacturer recommends having a Service Partner of the manufac‐ turer or another qualified Service Partner or specialist workshop dispose of high-voltage batteries that are at the end of their useful life or are defective. The regulations concerning the returning of end- of-life vehicles may vary from country to country. Additional information is available from a Service Partner of the manufacturer or another qualified Service Partner or a specialist workshop. For more information, see www.bmw.com.
405 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 406
MOBILITY Replacing parts
Replacing parts
Vehicle equipment NOTE This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ Wipers which are folded away from the wind‐ cific and optional equipment available for the screen can become trapped if the front flap is model series. It may therefore describe equip‐ opened. There is a risk of material damage. Be‐ ment and functions which are not installed in fore opening the bonnet, make sure that the your vehicle, for example on account of the spe‐ wipers are fitted with wiper blades and are in cial equipment selected or the country specifica‐ contact with the windscreen. tion. This also applies to safety-relevant func‐ tions and systems. Please comply with the relevant laws and regulations when using the Replacing the front wiper blades corresponding functions and systems. 1. To replace the wiper blades, move the wipers to the fold-out position. Fold-out position of the wipers, see On-board tool kit page 164. 2. Fold out the wiper arm and hold firm. 3. Press together securing spring, arrow 1, and fold out the wiper blade, arrow 2.
The on-board tool kit is located in the left storage compartment of the boot.
4. Take the wiper blade forwards out of the fit‐ Wiper blades ting. 5. Insert the new wiper blade in the opposite se‐ Safety notes quence ensuring that it clips into place. 6. Fold in the wipers. NOTE The windscreen may sustain damage if a wiper falls onto it without the wiper blade fitted. There is a risk of material damage. Hold the wiper firmly when changing the wiper blade. Do not fold in or switch on the wiper without a wiper blade installed.
406 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 407
Replacing parts MOBILITY
Replacing the rear wiper blade Safety notes The wiper blade is engaged on the end of the wiper arm. WARNING 1. Pull the wiper up fully and pull off the wiper Concentrated laser light can cause irritation or blade, arrow. lasting damage to the retina of the eye. There is a risk of injury. The manufacturer of the vehi‐ cle recommends having work on the lighting system, including bulb replacement, performed by a Service Partner of the manufacturer or an‐ other qualified Service Partner or a specialist workshop.
WARNING 2. Insert new wiper blade. The wiper blade must Intense brightness can irritate or harm the ret‐ engage audibly. ina of the eye. There is a risk of injury. Do not look directly into the headlights or other light 3. Fold in the wipers. sources. Do not remove covers from LEDs.
Bulbs and lights Headlight glass During cool or humid weather, the headlight General glass can mist over on the inside. When driving Lights and bulbs are an important aspect of driv‐ with the lights switched on, the condensation ing safety. disappears after a short time. There is no need to All headlights and other lights use LED or laser replace the headlight glass. technology. If moisture increases for example if there are wa‐ Some equipment versions have light-emitting di‐ ter droplets in the lamp despite the headlights odes behind a cover as a light source. These being switched on, have the headlights checked. light-emitting diodes are similar to conventional lasers and are classified by legislation as Class 1 light-emitting diodes. Vehicle battery In the case of a defect, the manufacturer of the vehicle recommends having respective work car‐ General ried out by a Service Partner of the manufacturer The battery is maintenance-free. or another qualified Service Partner or a special‐ More information regarding the battery can be ist workshop. obtained from a Service Partner of the manufac‐ turer or another qualified Service Partner or a specialist workshop.
407 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 408
MOBILITY Replacing parts
Safety notes Hazard symbols The following hazard symbols can be found on DANGER the vehicle battery: Touching live components can result in an Symbol Meaning electric shock. There is a risk of injury or even No smoking, no naked flames, death. Do not touch any components that no sparks. could be live.
Wear protective goggles.
WARNING Vehicle batteries that are classified as unsuita‐ Keep away from children. ble may damage systems or result in functions no longer being carried out. There is a risk of injury or material damage. Only use vehicle bat‐ Risk of acid burns: wear gloves, teries that have been classified as suitable by do not tilt the battery. the vehicle manufacturer. Rinse any splashes of acid with water immediately. If acid comes WARNING into contact with eyes or is swal‐ lowed, seek medical attention If a vehicle battery is old or has been subjected immediately. to excessive stress for several years, it is no longer possible to guarantee all systems, for ex‐ No direct sunlight, no frost. ample steering assistance, will function cor‐ rectly. There is a risk of accident or material damage. Replace the vehicle battery after the Follow the user manual. Check Control message is displayed.
Explosive gas mixture. Do not Registering the battery with the seal any openings on the bat‐ vehicle tery. The manufacturer of the vehicle recommends having a Service Partner of the manufacturer or Replacing the battery another qualified Service Partner or an author‐ ised workshop register the vehicle battery with General the vehicle after the battery has been replaced. The manufacturer of the vehicle recommends Once the battery has been registered again, all only having the vehicle battery replaced by a comfort functions will be available without re‐ Service Partner of the manufacturer or another striction and any Check Control messages relat‐ qualified Service Partner or an authorised work‐ ing to the comfort functions will no longer be dis‐ shop. If the battery is not replaced correctly, the played. vehicle may not recognise it properly and perfect functioning cannot be guaranteed.
408 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 409
Replacing parts MOBILITY
Notes on removal ▷ If the vehicle is not used for a period of one Observe the following notes on removing the ve‐ month or longer. hicle battery: Safety note ▷ Park the vehicle and switch off consumers. ▷ First disconnect the power at the negative terminal. Then disconnect the power at the NOTE positive terminal. Battery chargers for the vehicle battery may operate with high voltages and high currents Notes on installation which can overload or damage the 12-volt on- Observe the following notes on installing the ve‐ board network. There is a risk of material dam‐ hicle battery: age. Only connect battery chargers for the ve‐ hicle battery to the starting aid terminals in the ▷ Remove any foreign bodies from the battery engine compartment. holder. ▷ Only install the battery in the intended posi‐ tion in the vehicle. Battery charger ▷ Keep the battery and vehicle connection con‐ Battery chargers developed especially for the ve‐ tacts clean. hicle and suitable for the on-board network can ▷ First connect the power at the positive termi‐ be obtained from a Service Partner of the manu‐ nal. Then connect the power at the negative facturer or another qualified Service Partner or a terminal. specialist workshop. ▷ Use the connections, connectors and covers Charging the battery provided. Only charge the battery via the starting aid termi‐ ▷ Connect a hose to the gas outlet opening if nals in the engine compartment and with the en‐ necessary. gine switched off. Initial operation For further information: Starting aid terminals, see page 418. The battery is operational. No special precau‐ tions are required for start-up. Power failure Charging the battery Following an electrical power failure, some equipment will have to be reinitialised or individ‐ General ual settings will need to be updated, for example: Ensure the battery is sufficiently charged to ▷ With memory function: save positions again. guarantee the entire lifetime of the battery. ▷ Time: update. Charge the battery under the following situations: ▷ Date: update. ▷ If the inspection glass on the top of the bat‐ ▷ Glass sunroof: initialise system. tery is black. ▷ If there is insufficient starting power. Storing the battery The following conditions can have a negative ef‐ Observe the following information on storing ve‐ fect on battery performance: hicle batteries: ▷ Frequently driving short distances. ▷ Store the battery in a cool and dry place.
409 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 410
MOBILITY Replacing parts
▷ Protect the battery from direct sunlight and Safety note frost. ▷ Only clean the battery with a damp, anti-static WARNING cloth. Incorrect or repaired fuses can overload electri‐ ▷ Store the battery upright and secure it cal cables and components. There is a risk of against falling over. fire. Do not repair blown fuses or replace them ▷ Install the oldest batteries first. with fuses with a different colour or amp rating. ▷ Do not remove the protective cap from the contacts. ▷ Charge or install the battery by the date on In the interior the battery label at the latest. Once fully The fuses are located in the interior, behind a charged, the battery will work for another cover in the front seat passenger footwell. 10 months.
Disposing of the old battery Dispose of old batteries at a Service Partner of the manufacturer or another qualified Service Partner or a specialist workshop or hand them in to an authorised col‐ lecting point. Batteries filled with acid should be transported upright. Protect batteries against falling over Undo fastenings, arrow, and open cover. when in transit. The fuse box is located at the front right.
Warranty Inside the luggage compartment See the vehicle purchase contract for informa‐ The fuses are located behind a cover on the tion on the battery warranty. right-hand side in the luggage compartment.
Fuses
General The fuses are located at different positions in the vehicle.
Remove the cover from the right-hand trim panel.
The fuse box may be located behind sound insu‐ lation.
410 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 411
Replacing parts MOBILITY
Information on the fuse types and locations, as well as the positions of any other fuse boxes, is available on the Internet: www.bmw.com/fuse‐ card. Where applicable, information on the fuse types and locations is also found on a separate sheet in the fuse box.
Other fuse boxes There are other fuse boxes in the vehicle. In the event of a fault, contact a Service Partner of the manufacturer or another qualified Service Partner or a specialist workshop.
Replacing fuses The vehicle manufacturer recommends having fuses changed by a Service Partner of the manu‐ facturer or another qualified Service Partner or a specialist workshop.
411 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 412
MOBILITY Help in case of a breakdown
Help in case of a breakdown
Vehicle equipment Warning triangle
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ The warning triangle is located in the tailgate. cific and optional equipment available for the 1. Turn the twist lock in the tailgate by 90°, ar‐ model series. It may therefore describe equip‐ row 1, and fold open the trim panel, arrow 2. ment and functions which are not installed in your vehicle, for example on account of the spe‐ cial equipment selected or the country specifica‐ tion. This also applies to safety-relevant func‐ tions and systems. Please comply with the relevant laws and regulations when using the corresponding functions and systems.
Hazard warning lights 2. To remove it, slide the warning triangle to the side.
The button is located in the centre console.
First-aid kit
General Some items in the kit have a limited life. Check the use-by dates of the contents regularly and replace any items that have expired in good time.
412 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 413
Help in case of a breakdown MOBILITY
Storage Operating requirements ▷ Activated ConnectedDrive contract, equip‐ ment with intelligent emergency call or BMW ConnectedDrive services. ▷ Mobile reception. ▷ Standby state is switched on.
Starting manually When equipped with Teleservices, support is provided first through Teleservice Diagnosis and The first-aid kit is located in the compartment then by Teleservice Assistance if required. under the luggage compartment floor. Fold up luggage compartment floor. 1. "APPS" 2. "Installed apps" 3. "BMW Assistance" BMW Roadside Assistance 4. If necessary, "BMW Roadside Assistance" A voice connection is established. Principle BMW Group Roadside Assistance can be con‐ Teleservice Diagnosis tacted if you require help in the event of a break‐ Teleservice Diagnosis enables the detailed vehi‐ down. cle data required for diagnosis to be transferred via mobile communications. This data is transfer‐ General red automatically. It may be necessary to ap‐ In the case of a breakdown, data on the vehicle prove this on the Control Display. condition can be transferred to the BMW Road‐ side Assistance. It is possible that malfunctions Teleservice Assistance can be remedied directly. Teleservice Assistance is a country-specific fea‐ There are various ways of contacting BMW ture that allows BMW Roadside Assistance to Roadside Assistance. carry out a more in-depth diagnosis of the vehi‐ cle via mobile communications. ▷ Via a Check Control message. Teleservice Assistance can be started after a re‐ Supplementary text messages, see quest by BMW Roadside Assistance. page 180. ▷ Calling with a mobile phone. 1. Park the vehicle safely. ▷ Via the BMW Connected app. 2. Apply the parking brake. Depending on the national-market version and 3. Control Display is switched on. vehicle type, a different Roadside Assistance 4. Confirm Teleservice Assistance. provider can be assigned via the ConnectedDrive customer portal if necessary.
413 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 414
MOBILITY Help in case of a breakdown
BMW Accident Assistance For further information: Check Control, see page 179. Principle Starting manually BMW Group Accident Assistance can be contac‐ BMW Accident Assistance can also be contac‐ ted if help is required in the event of an accident. ted independently of the automatic accident de‐ tection function. General 1. "APPS" If the vehicle sensors detect a minor to moder‐ ately severe accident, which did not trigger any 2. "Installed apps" airbags, a Check Control message is displayed in 3. "BMW Assistance" the instrument cluster. A corresponding text 4. "BMW Accident Assistance" message also appears on the Control Display. Follow the displays on the control display. A When BMW Accident Assistance is activated, voice connection is established. data on the vehicle condition is transferred to BMW. Depending on the national-market version and Emergency call vehicle type, a different accident assistance pro‐ vider can be assigned via the ConnectedDrive Statutory emergency call customer portal if necessary. Principle Operating requirements The system can be used to trigger an emer‐ ▷ Activated ConnectedDrive contract, equip‐ gency call automatically or manually in emer‐ ment with intelligent emergency call or BMW gency situations. ConnectedDrive services. ▷ Mobile reception. General ▷ Standby state is switched on. Press the SOS button in an emergency only. The emergency call establishes a connection to Starting BMW Accident a public emergency call number. Assistance This depends on factors such as the specific mobile telephone network and national regula‐ If an accident is detected tions. automatically The emergency call is placed using the SIM card A text message prompting the driver to call integrated in the vehicle and cannot be switched BMW Accident Assistance is shown on the Con‐ off. trol Display. For technical reasons, it might not be possible to The connection can be established directly: make an emergency call in highly adverse condi‐ "Contact accident assistance" tions. The Check Control message for BMW Accident Assistance can also be called up from the saved Check Control messages for a certain length of time.
414 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 415
Help in case of a breakdown MOBILITY
Overview In the case of an emergency call, data is sent to the public rescue coordination centre in or‐ der to decide what rescue measures are re‐ quired. The data may include, for example, the current position of the vehicle, if this can be determined. For information on data transfer and storage: Statutory emergency call system, see page 15. Even if the vehicle occupants can no longer SOS button. hear the rescue coordination centre through the loudspeakers, the rescue coordination centre may still be able to hear the vehicle Operating requirements occupants speak. ▷ Standby state is switched on. The rescue coordination centre ends the emer‐ gency call. ▷ Emergency call system is functional. ▷ If the vehicle is equipped with intelligent Malfunction emergency call: the SIM card integrated in The emergency call function may be impaired. the vehicle is activated. The LED near the emergency call button illumi‐ Automatic triggering nates for approximately 30 seconds. A Check Control message is shown. In certain circumstances, for example deploy‐ ment of the airbags, an emergency call may be Have checks performed by a Service Partner of placed automatically immediately after an acci‐ the manufacturer or another qualified Service dent of appropriate severity. An automatic emer‐ Partner or a specialist workshop. gency call is not affected by pressing the SOS button. Intelligent emergency call
Manual triggering Principle 1. Tap on cover flap. The system can be used to trigger an emer‐ gency call automatically or manually in emer‐ 2. Press and hold the SOS button until the LED gency situations. in the button area is illuminated green. ▷ The LED is illuminated green when the emer‐ General gency call has been activated. Press the SOS button in an emergency only. If a cancellation request is displayed on the Control Display, the emergency call can be The intelligent emergency call system estab‐ cancelled. lishes a connection with the BMW emergency call centre. If the situation permits, wait in the vehicle un‐ til voice contact has been established. Even if no emergency call through BMW is pos‐ sible, in some cases an emergency call may still ▷ The LED flashes green when the connection be established to a public emergency call num‐ to the emergency number has been estab‐ ber. This depends on factors such as the specific lished.
415 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 416
MOBILITY Help in case of a breakdown
mobile telephone network and national regula‐ If the situation permits, wait in the vehicle un‐ tions. til voice contact has been established. For technical reasons, it might not be possible to ▷ The LED flashes green when the connection make an emergency call in highly adverse condi‐ to the emergency number has been estab‐ tions. lished. When an emergency call is made via BMW, Overview data, for example the vehicle's position if this can be determined, is sent to the public emergency call centre in order to decide what rescue measures are required. If questions asked by the emergency call centre remain unanswered, rescue measures are implemented automatically. Even if the vehicle occupants can no longer hear the emergency call centre through the loudspeakers, the emergency call centre may SOS button. still be able to hear the vehicle occupants speak. The emergency call centre ends the emergency Operating requirements call. ▷ Standby state is switched on. ▷ Emergency call system is functional. Fire extinguisher ▷ If the vehicle is equipped with intelligent emergency call: the SIM card integrated in the vehicle is activated. Principle The fire extinguisher can be used to put out vehi‐ Automatic triggering cle fires. In certain circumstances, for example deploy‐ ment of the airbags, an emergency call may be General placed automatically immediately after an acci‐ Depending on the vehicle's equipment and the dent of appropriate severity. An automatic emer‐ country variant, the vehicle may have a fire extin‐ gency call is not affected by pressing the SOS guisher. button. Safety note Manual triggering 1. Tap on cover flap. WARNING 2. Press and hold the SOS button until the LED Incorrect use of the fire extinguisher can cause in the button area is illuminated green. injury. There is a risk of injury. Observe the in‐ ▷ The LED is illuminated green when the emer‐ formation below when using the fire extin‐ gency call has been activated. guisher: If a cancellation request is displayed on the Control Display, the emergency call can be cancelled.
416 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 417
Help in case of a breakdown MOBILITY
▷ Do not inhale the extinguishing agent. If Conduct after an accident the extinguishing agent is inhaled, move the casualty out into the fresh air. If the casualty experiences breathing difficulties, General contact a doctor immediately. After an accident, take the following safety ▷ Do not allow the extinguishing agent to measures regarding the high-voltage system: come into contact with the skin. Pro‐ ▷ Secure the area where the accident has longed contact with the extinguishing taken place. agent can cause the skin to dry out. ▷ Inform the fire, police or ambulance service ▷ Do not allow the extinguishing agent to immediately that it involves a vehicle with a come into contact with the eyes. In the high-voltage system. event of contact with the eyes, rinse them ▷ Put the selector lever into position P, apply immediately with plenty of water. In case the parking brake and switch off or deactivate of prolonged discomfort, contact a doctor. standby state or drive-ready state. ▷ Lock the vehicle when you leave it. Overview ▷ Do not inhale any gases from the high-volt‐ The fire extinguisher is located at the front of the age battery and keep away from the vehicle front passenger seat. as appropriate.
Removing the fire extinguisher Safety notes Open the buckles on the retaining strap. WARNING Using the fire extinguisher Touching live components can result in an To use the fire extinguisher, follow the manufac‐ electric shock. There is a risk of injury or even turer's instructions on the fire extinguisher and death. After an accident, do not touch any high- the information supplied with it. voltage components, for example orange high- voltage cables or parts which are in contact Stowing the fire extinguisher with exposed high-voltage cables. 1. Insert the fire extinguisher into the holder. 2. Hook in and close the buckles. WARNING Maintenance and refilling Fluids in the high-voltage battery are corrosive. There is a risk of injury. Do not touch fluid from Have the fire extinguisher checked every 2 years the high-voltage battery. by a Service Partner of the manufacturer or an‐ other qualified Service Partner or a specialist workshop. Make a note of the next maintenance date for Starting aid the fire extinguisher. Replace the fire extinguisher after use or have it General refilled. If the vehicle battery is discharged, the engine can be started from another vehicle's battery us‐
417 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 418
MOBILITY Help in case of a breakdown
ing two jump leads. Only use jump leads with A special connection on the body serves as the fully insulated terminal clamps. negative battery terminal in the engine compart‐ Vehicles with hybrid drive cannot provide starting ment. aid. For further information: Overview of the engine compartment, see Safety notes page 393. Open the lid of the positive battery terminal. DANGER Touching live components can result in an Connecting the cables electric shock. There is a risk of injury or even Before starting, switch off all unnecessary power death. Do not touch any components that consumers, for example the radio, on both vehi‐ could be live. cles.
1. Open the cover of the jump-starting connec‐ tion. WARNING 2. Connect a terminal clamp on the positive/+ Connecting the jump leads in the wrong se‐ jump lead to the positive terminal of the bat‐ quence can cause sparks. There is a risk of in‐ tery or the corresponding jump-starting con‐ jury. Please comply with the correct sequence nection on the other vehicle. when connecting. 3. Connect the second terminal clamp to the battery's positive terminal or to the corre‐ sponding jump-starting connection on the NOTE vehicle being started. Contact between the bodywork of the two ve‐ 4. Connect a terminal clamp on the negative/– hicles can result in a short circuit during starting jump lead to the negative terminal of the bat‐ aid. There is a risk of material damage. Make tery or the corresponding engine or body sure there is no contact between the body‐ earth connection on the other vehicle. work. 5. Connect the second terminal clamp to the negative terminal of the battery or to a corre‐ Preparations sponding engine or body earth connection on the vehicle being started. 1. Check whether the battery in the other vehi‐ cle shows 12 volts. Information about the Establishing drive-ready state voltage is provided on the battery. 1. Start the engine of the other vehicle and al‐ 2. Switch off the engine of the other vehicle. low it to run for a few minutes at a slightly 3. Switch off any power consumers in both ve‐ higher idle speed. hicles. 2. Establish drive-ready state in the normal way in the vehicle to be started. Jump-starting connections If an initial attempt to start the engine fails, The jump-starting connection in the engine wait a few minutes before trying again to al‐ compartment serves as the positive battery ter‐ low the discharged battery to recharge. minal. 3. Disconnect the jump leads in reverse order to connection.
418 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 419
Help in case of a breakdown MOBILITY
Check the battery and have it recharged if nec‐ Pushing the vehicle essary. To remove a broken-down vehicle from danger, it can be pushed for a short distance. Tow-starting/towing away For further information: Rolling or pushing the vehicle, see page 166. Safety note Towing truck
WARNING Due to system limitations, individual functions may not work properly when tow-starting/ towing with activated Intelligent Safety Sys‐ tems. There is a risk of accident. Switch off all Intelligent Safety Systems before tow-starting/ towing.
Steptronic transmission: Only have the vehicle transported on a truck bed. transporting the vehicle Towing other vehicles General Do not have the vehicle towed. General Switch on the hazard warning lights in line with Safety notes local regulations. If the electrical system of the vehicle being NOTE towed has failed, the vehicle must be made iden‐ tifiable to other road users, for instance by plac‐ If the vehicle is towed with one axle raised, the ing a sign or the warning triangle in the rear win‐ vehicle can be damaged. There is a risk of ma‐ dow. terial damage. Only have the vehicle transpor‐ ted on a truck bed. With Safe Share function: to remove a broken- down vehicle from a dangerous area, it can be towed over a short distance at a maximum speed of 10 km/h, approx. 6 mph. NOTE The vehicle may be damaged when raising and Safety notes securing it. There is a risk of material damage. WARNING ▷ Raise the vehicle with suitable equipment. If the gross vehicle weight of the towing vehicle ▷ Do not raise or secure the vehicle by its is less than that of the vehicle being towed, the towing eye, body parts or chassis parts. towing eye may be torn off or it may not be possible to control the vehicle. There is a risk of accident. Make sure that the gross vehicle
419 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 420
MOBILITY Help in case of a breakdown
weight of the towing vehicle is greater than the Towing eye weight of the vehicle being towed. General
NOTE If the tow bar or the towing rope is not attached correctly, other vehicle parts can be damaged. There is a risk of material damage. Attach the tow bar or towing rope to the towing eye cor‐ rectly.
Tow bar Always keep the screw-on towing eye in the ve‐ The towing eyes of both vehicles should be on hicle. the same side. The towing eye can be screwed in at the front or If it is impossible to avoid attaching the tow bar at rear of the vehicle. an angle, note the following: The towing eye is located in the toolkit. ▷ Clearance may be limited when cornering. ▷ Only use the towing eye supplied with the ve‐ ▷ Lateral forces will be generated if the tow bar hicle and make sure that it is screwed in fully is installed at an angle. and is tight. Towing rope ▷ Only use the towing eye for towing on paved roads. Note the following if using a towing rope: ▷ Avoid transverse loads on the towing eye, for ▷ Use nylon ropes or straps that will allow the example do not raise the vehicle by the tow‐ vehicle to be towed smoothly. ing eye. ▷ Fasten the towing rope so it is not twisted. ▷ Check the towing eye fastening regularly. ▷ Check the towing eye and towing rope fas‐ tening regularly. For further information: ▷ Do not exceed a towing speed of 50 km/h, On-board tool kit, see page 406. 30 mph. Safety note ▷ Do not exceed a towing distance of 5 km, 3 miles. ▷ Ensure that the towing rope is taut when the NOTE towing vehicle drives off. If the towing eye is not used as intended, the vehicle or towing eye may be damaged. There is a risk of material damage. Observe the notes on using the towing eye.
420 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 421
Help in case of a breakdown MOBILITY
Thread for towing eye
Press the marking on the edge of the cover to push it out. For covers which have an opening instead of a marking, pull the cover out by the opening.
Tow-starting Do not attempt to tow-start the vehicle. If necessary, start the engine using the starting aid. Have the cause of the starting problems rectified by a Service Partner of the manufacturer or an‐ other qualified Service Partner or a specialist workshop. For further information: Starting aid, see page 417.
421 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 422
MOBILITY General care
General care
Vehicle equipment Distances and temperature ▷ Maximum temperature: 60 ℃/140 ℉. This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ ▷ Minimum distance to sensors, cameras, cific and optional equipment available for the seals: 30 cm, 12 in. model series. It may therefore describe equip‐ ▷ Minimum distance to the glass sunroof: ment and functions which are not installed in 80 cm, 31.5 in. your vehicle, for example on account of the spe‐ cial equipment selected or the country specifica‐ tion. This also applies to safety-relevant func‐ Automatic car washes tions and systems. Please comply with the relevant laws and regulations when using the Safety note corresponding functions and systems. NOTE Washing the vehicle The vehicle can be damaged if automatic washing bays or car washes are used incor‐ rectly. There is a risk of material damage. Ob‐ General serve the following notes: Regularly remove foreign bodies, for example ▷ Textile car washes or systems using soft leaves, from the area below the windscreen with brushes are preferable, to avoid damage the bonnet raised. to the paintwork. Wash the vehicle frequently, especially in winter. ▷ Do not drive into automatic car washes Heavy soiling and road salt can cause damage to washing or washing bays with guide rails the vehicle. higher than 10 cm, 4 in, to avoid damage to the body. Steam-jet cleaners and high- ▷ Note the maximum tyre width of the guide pressure cleaners rail to avoid damage to tyres and rims. ▷ Fold in the exterior mirrors to avoid dam‐ Safety note aging them. ▷ Deactivate the wipers and the rain sensor NOTE (if fitted) to avoid damage to the wiper sys‐ When cleaning with high-pressure cleaners, ex‐ tem. cessive pressure or excessive temperatures can damage various components. There is a risk of material damage. Maintain a sufficient distance and do not spray for an extended pe‐ riod of time. Comply with the instructions for the high-pressure cleaner.
422 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 423
General care MOBILITY
Entering a car wash with a generated by braking dries the brake discs and Steptronic transmission brake pads and protects them against corrosion. Completely remove residues on the windscreens Safety note to avoid affecting visibility due to smearing and to reduce wiping noise and wiper blade wear. NOTE Selector lever position P is automatically en‐ Vehicle care gaged when standby state is switched off. There is a risk of material damage. Do not switch off standby state in car washes. Care products
General General BMW recommends using care and cleaning The vehicle must be able to roll freely whilst in products from BMW. Suitable care products are the car wash. available from a Service Partner of the manufac‐ Some car washes require you to get out of the turer or another qualified Service Partner or a vehicle. It is not possible to lock the vehicle from specialist workshop. the outside in selector lever position N. If an at‐ tempt is made to lock the vehicle, a signal Safety note sounds. For further information: WARNING Rolling or pushing the vehicle, see page 166. Cleaning agents can contain hazardous sub‐ stances or constitute a health risk. There is a Exiting from a car wash risk of injury. When cleaning the interior, open Make sure that the vehicle key is in the vehicle. the doors or windows. Use only products that are intended for cleaning the vehicle's interior. Switch on drive-ready state. Observe the notes on the packaging. For further information: Drive-ready state, see page 52. Vehicle paintwork Headlights General Do not rub wet headlights dry and do not use abrasive or corrosive cleaning agents. Regular care promotes driving safety and pre‐ serves your vehicle's value. Environmental ef‐ Soak impurities such as insect residues with fects in areas with high air pollution or natural shampoo and wash off with water. contaminants, for example tree resin or pollen, Remove ice with a de-icer spray; do not use an may affect the vehicle paintwork. Take such fac‐ ice scraper. tors into consideration when deciding on the fre‐ quency and scope of vehicle care measures. After washing the vehicle Immediately remove aggressive substances, for After the vehicle has been washed, briefly apply example spilled fuel, oil, grease or bird droppings the brakes to dry them, otherwise braking effec‐ to prevent paintwork damage and discolouration. tiveness may be temporarily reduced. The heat
423 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 424
MOBILITY General care
Matt paintwork Care of special parts Only use cleaning and care products that are suitable for vehicles with matt paintwork. Light alloy wheels When cleaning the wheels while they are instal‐ Leather care led on the vehicle, only use neutral rim cleaner Remove dust from the leather at regular intervals with a pH value between 5 and 9. Do not use with a cloth or vacuum cleaner. abrasive cleaners or steam cleaners above 60 ℃/140 ℉. Observe the manufacturer's in‐ Dust and road dirt will otherwise become worked structions. into pores and folds, resulting in considerable abrasion and causing the leather surface to be‐ Corrosive, acidic or alkaline cleaners may destroy come prematurely brittle. the protective coatings of adjacent parts, for ex‐ ample brake discs. In order to protect against discolouration, for ex‐ ample from clothing, clean and care for the After cleaning, briefly apply the brakes to dry leather approximately every two months. them. The heat generated by braking dries the brake discs and brake pads and protects them Clean light-coloured leather more frequently as it against corrosion. has the tendency to soil faster. Use leather cleaner, otherwise dirt and grease Chrome surfaces will attack the protective coating of the leather. Carefully clean chrome-like surfaces with plenty of water and add shampoo if need be, particularly Care of upholstery fabrics if they have been exposed to road salt.
General Rubber parts Regularly clean the upholstery with a vacuum The surfaces of rubber parts can be contamina‐ cleaner. ted or lose their shine due to environmental influ‐ In the event of heavy soiling, for example stains ences. Only use water and suitable care prod‐ caused by drinks, use a soft sponge or a lint-free ucts for cleaning. microfibre cloth with suitable interior cleaning Rubber parts subjected to high wear and tear agents. should be treated regularly with rubber care Clean the upholstery up to the seams using wide products. Do not use silicone-based care prod‐ wiping actions. Avoid rubbing vigorously. ucts for treating rubber seals, otherwise these could be damaged and become a source of Safety note noise.
Fine wood parts NOTE Clean fine wood trims and fine wood parts with a Open Velcro fasteners on articles of clothing damp cloth only. Then dry them with a soft cloth. can damage the seat covers. There is a risk of material damage. Make sure that any Velcro fasteners on your clothing are closed. Kenaf Treat parts made from kenaf fibres with a suita‐ ble care product only.
424 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 425
General care MOBILITY
Plastic parts floor mats on top of one another. Make sure that there is sufficient space for the pedals. En‐ sure that floor mats are securely reattached af‐ NOTE ter removal, for example for cleaning. Cleaning agents containing alcohol or solvents, such as nitro thinners, cold cleaners, fuel or Floor mats can be removed from the vehicle to similar can damage plastic parts. There is a risk enable the interior to be cleaned more thor‐ of material damage. Clean with a microfibre oughly. cloth. Lightly moisten the cloth with water if In the event of heavy soiling, clean floor carpets necessary. using a microfibre cloth and water or textile cleaner. Rub back and forth in the direction of Clean with a microfibre cloth. travel to prevent matting. Lightly moisten the cloth with water if necessary. Do not soak the headliner. Sensors and camera lenses Clean sensors or camera lenses using a cloth Seat belts moistened with a small amount of glass cleaner.
WARNING Displays, screens and protective glass of the Head-Up Display Chemical cleaners can cause irreparable dam‐ age to the fabric of the seat belts. The protec‐ tive function of the seat belts will be lost. There NOTE is a risk of injury or even death. Only use a mild Chemical cleaners, moisture or fluids of all soap and water solution for cleaning the seat kinds can damage the surface of displays and belts. screens. There is a risk of material damage. Clean with a clean, anti-static microfibre cloth. Dirt on the belt straps can interfere with the ac‐ tion of the reel and is a safety hazard.
Only clean the belt straps with a mild soap solu‐ NOTE tion while still fitted to the vehicle. Incorrect cleaning can damage the surfaces of Do not allow seat belts to retract until they are displays. There is a risk of material damage. dry. Avoid applying excessive pressure and do not use abrasive materials. Carpets and foot mats Clean with a clean, anti-static microfibre cloth. WARNING Clean the protective glass of the Head-Up Dis‐ Objects in the driver's footwell can restrict the play with a microfibre cloth and commercially pedal travel or block a pedal that has been available dishwashing liquid. pressed. There is a risk of accident. Ensure that items in the vehicle are stowed securely and cannot get into the driver's footwell. Only use floor mats that are suitable for the vehicle and can be securely fastened to the floor. Do not use loose floor mats, and do not place several
425 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 426
MOBILITY General care
High-voltage battery, long stationary periods
Principle When the vehicle is standing around for several weeks, where possible stop with a fully-charged high-voltage battery. Do not place the vehicle in storage for longer than 14 days if the electric range has been used up. For phases of standing of up to three months, where possible park the vehicle plugged into a suitable power source or virtually fully charged.
General A Service Partner of the manufacturer or another qualified Service Partner or a specialist workshop will be pleased to advise you on the measures that should be taken when placing the vehicle in storage for longer than three months.
Safety note
NOTE Excessive discharging can damage the high- voltage battery. There is a risk of material dam‐ age. Before standing for a long time, ensure that the high-voltage battery is fully charged. During the stationary phase, connect the vehi‐ cle to a suitable charging location with a charg‐ ing station. The high-voltage battery is charged automatically as needed. Ensure that the charging process can be carried out. Check the charge state regularly. Do not leave the vehicle standing for more than three months with a charge level less than ap‐ proximately 50 %.
426 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 427
General care MOBILITY
427 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 428
REFERENCE Technical data
Technical data
Vehicle equipment your vehicle, for example on account of the spe‐ cial equipment selected or the country specifica‐ tion. This also applies to safety-relevant func‐ This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ tions and systems. Please comply with the cific and optional equipment available for the relevant laws and regulations when using the model series. It may therefore describe equip‐ corresponding functions and systems. ment and functions which are not installed in
General
The technical data and specifications in the tion plates on the vehicle or can be requested Owner's Handbook are reference figures. Data from a Service Partner of the manufacturer or an‐ relating to a specific vehicle can deviate from other qualified Service Partner or a specialist this, for example, due to selected optional equip‐ workshop. ment, national-market versions or country-spe‐ The information in the vehicle documents always cific measurement methods. Detailed values can takes precedence over the information in the be found in the permit documents, on informa‐ Owner's Handbook.
Dimensions
Dimensions can vary depending on the model spoiler. The heights can deviate, for example, version, equipment or country-specific measure‐ due to selected optional equipment, tyres, loads ment method. and suspension design. The heights specified do not take into account add-on parts such as a roof aerial, roof railing or
BMW 3 Series Touring plug-in hybrid
Width with mirrors mm (in) 2068 (81.4)
Width without mirrors mm (in) 1827 (71.9)
Height mm (in) 1442 (56.8)
Length mm (in) 4709 (185.4)
Wheelbase mm (in) 2851 (112.2)
Smallest turning circle dia. m (ft) 12.0 (39.4)
428 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 429
Technical data REFERENCE
Weights
320e
Kerb weight ready for road, with 75 kg, 165 lb, load, kg (lb) 1900 (4189) tank 90 % full, no optional extras
Permitted gross weight kg (lb) 2355 (5192)
Payload kg (lb) 530 (1168)
Front axle load limit kg (lb) 1050 (2315)
Rear axle load limit kg (lb) 1380 (3042)
Roof load kg (lb) 75 (165)
330e
Kerb weight ready for road, with 75 kg, 165 lb, load, kg (lb) 1905 (4200) tank 90 % full, no optional extras
Permitted gross weight kg (lb) 2355 (5192)
Payload kg (lb) 525 (1157)
Front axle load limit kg (lb) 1050 (2315)
Rear axle load limit kg (lb) 1380 (3042)
Roof load kg (lb) 75 (165)
320e xDrive
Kerb weight ready for road, with 75 kg, 165 lb, load, kg (lb) 1955 (4310) tank 90 % full, no optional extras
Permitted gross weight kg (lb) 2425 (5346)
Payload kg (lb) 545 (1202)
Front axle load limit kg (lb) 1100 (2425)
Rear axle load limit kg (lb) 1405 (3097)
Roof load kg (lb) 75 (165)
429 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 430
REFERENCE Technical data
330e xDrive
Kerb weight ready for road, with 75 kg, 165 lb, load, kg (lb) 1965 (4332) tank 90 % full, no optional extras
Permitted gross weight kg (lb) 2425 (5346)
Payload kg (lb) 535 (1179)
Front axle load limit kg (lb) 1100 (2425)
Rear axle load limit kg (lb) 1405 (3097)
Roof load kg (lb) 75 (165)
Towing a trailer
320e
Towing loads according to EU operating permit. Consult a Service Partner of the manufacturer or another qualified Service Partner or a specialist workshop about options for increasing the loads.
Unbraked trailer load kg (lb) 750 (1653)
Trailer load with brake on upward gradient up to 12 % kg (lb) 1500 (3307)
Trailer load with brake on upward gradient up to 8 % kg (lb) 1500 (3307)
Maximum trailer nose weight kg (lb) 75 (165)
Minimum trailer nose weight kg (lb) 25 (55)
Rear axle load limit, towing vehicle kg (lb) 1485 (3274)
Total weight, towing vehicle kg (lb) 2430 (5357)
330e
Towing loads according to EU operating permit. Consult a Service Partner of the manufacturer or another qualified Service Partner or a specialist workshop about options for increasing the loads.
Unbraked trailer load kg (lb) 750 (1653)
Trailer load with brake on upward gradient up to 12 % kg (lb) 1500 (3307)
Trailer load with brake on upward gradient up to 8 % kg (lb) 1500 (3307)
Maximum trailer nose weight kg (lb) 75 (165)
Minimum trailer nose weight kg (lb) 25 (55)
430 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 431
Technical data REFERENCE
330e
Rear axle load limit, towing vehicle kg (lb) 1485 (3274)
Total weight, towing vehicle kg (lb) 2430 (5357)
320e xDrive
Towing loads according to EU operating permit. Consult a Service Partner of the manufacturer or another qualified Service Partner or a specialist workshop about options for increasing the loads.
Unbraked trailer load kg (lb) 750 (1653)
Trailer load with brake on upward gradient up to 12 % kg (lb) 1500 (3307)
Trailer load with brake on upward gradient up to 8 % kg (lb) 1500 (3307)
Maximum trailer nose weight kg (lb) 75 (165)
Minimum trailer nose weight kg (lb) 25 (55)
Rear axle load limit, towing vehicle kg (lb) 1510 (3329)
Total weight, towing vehicle kg (lb) 2500 (5512)
330e xDrive
Towing loads according to EU operating permit. Consult a Service Partner of the manufacturer or another qualified Service Partner or a specialist workshop about options for increasing the loads.
Unbraked trailer load kg (lb) 750 (1653)
Trailer load with brake on upward gradient up to 12 % kg (lb) 1500 (3307)
Trailer load with brake on upward gradient up to 8 % kg (lb) 1500 (3307)
Maximum trailer nose weight kg (lb) 75 (165)
Minimum trailer nose weight kg (lb) 25 (55)
Rear axle load limit, towing vehicle kg (lb) 1510 (3329)
Total weight, towing vehicle kg (lb) 2500 (5512)
Filling capacities
BMW 3 Series Touring plug-in hybrid
Fuel tank, approximately. Litres (gal) 40.0 (8.8)
431 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 432
REFERENCE Technical data
Observe the additional information on fuel grade, see page 396.
432 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 433
Seats for child restraint systems REFERENCE
Seats for child restraint systems
Vehicle equipment Information for manufacturers of child This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ cific and optional equipment available for the seats model series. It may therefore describe equip‐ ment and functions which are not installed in General your vehicle, for example on account of the spe‐ Information about which child restraint systems cial equipment selected or the country specifica‐ can be used on the seats in question in accord‐ tion. This also applies to safety-relevant func‐ ance with the ECE-R 16 and ECE-R 129 stand‐ tions and systems. Please comply with the ard. relevant laws and regulations when using the corresponding functions and systems.
Left-hand drive vehicles: Suitability of child restraint systems for
each vehicle seat
Seat position 1 3 - Air‐ 3 - Air‐ 4 5 6 bag ON bag OFF
Seat position suitable for No No Yes Yes Yes Yes universal fastening with a belt.
i-Size seat position. No No No Yes No Yes
Seat position suitable for No No No No No No side mounting: L1/L2.
Largest rear-facing No No No R3 No R3 mounting: R1/R2X/R2/R 3.
Largest front-facing No No No F3 No F3 mounting: F2X/F2/F3.
Largest suitable booster No No No B3 No B3 mount: B2/B3.
A seat position without i-Size approval is not compatible with an i-Size support stand. A seat position with lower ISOFIX anchors, but with no Top Tether, is not available. There are no seat belt buckles for adults between the two bottom ISOFIX anchors.
433 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 434
REFERENCE Seats for child restraint systems
Seat number Position in the vehicle Seat number Position in the vehicle
1 Front left 6 2nd seat row right
2 Front centre 7 3rd seat row left
3 Front right 8 3rd seat row centre
4 2nd seat row left 9 3rd seat row right
5 2nd seat row centre
Right-hand drive vehicles: suitability of child restraint systems for
each vehicle seat
Seat position 1 - Air‐ 1 - Air‐ 3 4 5 6 bag ON bag OFF
Seat position suitable for No Yes No Yes Yes Yes universal fastening with a belt.
i-Size seat position. No No No Yes No Yes
Seat position suitable for No No No No No No side mounting: L1/L2.
Largest rear-facing No No No R3 No R3 mounting: R1/R2X/R2/R 3.
Largest front-facing No No No F3 No F3 mounting: F2X/F2/F3.
Largest suitable booster No No No B3 No B3 mount: B2/B3.
A seat position without i-Size approval is not compatible with an i-Size support stand. A seat position with lower ISOFIX anchors, but with no Top Tether, is not available. There are no seat belt buckles for adults between the two bottom ISOFIX anchors.
Seat number Position in the vehicle Seat number Position in the vehicle
1 Front left 5 2nd seat row centre
2 Front centre 6 2nd seat row right
3 Front right 7 3rd seat row left
4 2nd seat row left
434 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 435
Seats for child restraint systems REFERENCE
Seat number Position in the vehicle
8 3rd seat row centre
9 3rd seat row right
435 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 436
REFERENCE Appendix
Appendix
General
Here is where any updates to the Owner's Handbook for the vehicle are listed.
Updates after going to press
After the copy deadline for the integrated Own‐ er's Handbook in the vehicle, the following chap‐ ters were updated in the printed Owner's Handbook: ▷ Operation: opening and closing: BMW Digital Key. ▷ Operation: lights: rear fog light: fog light. ▷ Driving hints: observe when driving: roof rack: safety information.
License Texts and Certifications
Remote Control
Serbia
И00520
436 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 437
Appendix REFERENCE
437 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 438
REFERENCE Everything from A to Z
Everything from A to Z
Index
0-9 Additives, engine oil grades 399 Adjusting the engine sound 304 3D View, see Surround View 293 Adjusting the sound of the engine 304 Age of tyres 371 A Airbags 208 Airbags, indicator/warning lamp 209 ABS Anti-lock Brake System 247 Airbag switch, see Key switch 210 Acceleration assistant, see Launch Control 169 Air conditioning 305 Accessories and parts 9 Air conditioning function, air conditioning 310 Accident, conduct 417 Air distribution, manual 308, 313 Accident prevention, see Active Protection 244 Air outlets, see Ventilation 314 ACC, see Active Cruise Control 255 Air pressure, tyres 368 Acoustic protection for pedestrians 151 Air quality 305 AC quick charge cable, see Mode 3 charging ca‐ Alarm system 115 ble 358 All-season tyres, see Winter tyres 372 Activated charcoal filter 313 Amazon Alexa Car Integration 66 Activation, airbags 210 Ambient lighting 206 Activation, towing a trailer 345 Amount of air, automatic air condition‐ Active Cruise Control with Stop&Go function ing 307, 312 ACC 255 Android Auto, connection to vehicle 91 Active front flap, see Active pedestrian protec‐ Android Auto preparation, connection to vehi‐ tion 211 cle 91 Active Guard Plus, see Intelligent Safety 212 Android Auto preparation, smartphone integra‐ Active Guard, see Intelligent Safety 212 tion 91 Active PDC, see Emergency braking func‐ Angle, backrest 124 tion 281 Antifreeze protection, see Washer fluid 401 Active pedestrian protection 211 Antifreeze, see Washer fluid 401 Active Protection 244 Anti-lock Brake System ABS 247 Active shock absorber adjustment, see Adaptive Anti-theft alarm system, see Alarm system 115 M suspension 304 Anti-theft security system, locking wheel Adapting the content, iDrive 60 bolts 390 Adaptive brake assist 247 Anti-theft system, locking 94 Adaptive brake light, see Dynamic brake Anti-trap mechanism, glass sunroof 120 lights 242 Anti-trap mechanism, windows 117 Adaptive energy management 154 Apple CarPlay preparation, connection to vehi‐ Adaptive Headlights 202 cle 90 Adaptive hybrid mode 154 Apple CarPlay preparation, smartphone integra‐ Adaptive M suspension 304 tion 90 Adaptive recuperation 353 Apps, see Owner's Handbook for Navigation, En‐ ADAPTIVE, see Driving Experience Control 157 tertainment, Communication 6
438 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 439
Everything from A to Z REFERENCE
Aquaplaning 338 B Arrival time, on-board computer 175 Artificial engine noise, see Acoustic protection Backrest angle 124 for pedestrians 151 Backrest contour, see Lumbar support 124 Ashtray 319 Backrest, seats 122 Assistant for leaving a parking space 290 Backrest width 125 Assisted Driving Mode, see Steering and lane Bag holders 330 control assistant 268 Ball linkage electrically swivellable 345 Assisted Driving Plus 272 Bar for tow-starting/towing 420 Assisted Driving View 172 Battery changing, vehicle key 96 Attention camera for driver, see Driver Attention Battery, charge status display 177 Camera 76 Battery charging, see Charging the vehicle 356 Attentiveness assistant 245 BATTERY CONTROL button 149 AUC automatic air recirculation control AUC 312 BATTERY CONTROL, electric driving 149 Audio, see Owner's Handbook for Navigation, Battery, disposing of 410 Entertainment, Communication 6 Battery for high-voltage system, long stationary AUTO H button, see Parking brake 158 periods 426 Automatic activation, see Regulation climate Battery, vehicle 407 control 135 Belts, see Seat belts 125 Automatic air conditioning 305, 309 Black ice, see Outside temperature warning 187 Automatic air recirculation control AUC 312 Blower, see Amount of air 307, 312 Automatic car wash 422 Bluetooth connection 87 Automatic dimming, see High beam assis‐ Blu-ray, see Owner's Handbook for Navigation, tant 203 Entertainment, Communication 6 Automatic driving lights control 199 BMW Accident Assistance 414 Automatic formation of emergency lane 276 BMW Digital Key 99 Automatic gearbox, see Steptronic transmis‐ BMW Drive Recorder 242 sion 165 BMW eDRIVE 149 Automatic Hold, see Parking brake 158 BMW Gesture Control 69 Automatic locking 114 BMW Intelligent Personal Assistant 67 Automatic parking function, exterior mirror 132 BMW Maintenance System 403 Automatic rear air-conditioning system, disabling BMW Roadside Assistance 413 operating elements 316 BMW Services, see Owner's Handbook for Navi‐ Automatic Start/Stop function 151 gation, Entertainment, Communication 6 Automatic start-stop function 151 Bonnet 394 Automatic time setting 75 Boot, extending 331 Automatic unlocking 114 Boot, see Luggage compartment 329 Automating habits, BMW Intelligent Personal As‐ Bottle holder, see Cupholder 327 sistant 67 Bottleneck support, see Steering and lane con‐ AUTO program, automatic air condition‐ trol assistant 268 ing 307, 311 Brake assist 247 AUTO program, intensity 311 Brake assist, adaptive 247 Average consumption, see Journey data 194 Brake discs, see Brake system 336 Avoidance assistant 217 Brake lights, adaptive, see Dynamic brake Avoiding false warnings 116 lights 242 Axle loads, permitted 429 Brake lights, dynamic 242
439 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 440
REFERENCE Everything from A to Z
Brake pads, see Brake system 336 Central key, see Vehicle key 93 Brake system 336 Central locking system 104 Braking, notes 338 Central screen, see Control display 58 Braking safely 338 Centre armrest, front 327 Breakdown, help 412 Centre console 45 Break recommendations, see Attentiveness as‐ Changes, technical, see Your own safety 8 sistant 245 Changing bulbs, see Lights and bulbs 407 Brightness, Control Display 77 Changing gear, Steptronic transmission 165 Bulbs and lights 407 Changing, wheels and tyres 371 Buttons on the steering wheel 42 CHARGE, energy recuperation 153 Button SOS, see Intelligent emergency call 415 Charge screen 176 Button SOS, see Statutory emergency call 414 Charge status display, high-voltage battery 177 Button, start/stop 151 Charging a smartphone, see Wireless charging dock 322 C Charging cables, stowing, see Storage 358 Charging cable, unlocking manually 360 Camera-based assistance systems, see Intelli‐ Charging dock for smartphones, see Wireless gent Safety 212 charging dock 322 Camera lenses, care 425 Charging, see Charging the vehicle 356 Camera, rear-view camera, see Surround Charging status, see Charging status dis‐ View 293 play 361 Camera, rear-view camera, without Surround Charging the battery, see Charging the vehi‐ View 283 cle 356 Camera, see Surround View 293 Charging the vehicle 356 Cameras, see Sensors of the vehicle 47 Charging to save fuel 349 CANCEL button, Active Cruise Control 255 Charging, vehicle 356 CANCEL button, cruise control 253 Chassis number, see Vehicle identification num‐ Can holder, see Cupholder 327 ber 18 Care 422 Check Control 179 Care, Head-Up Display 425 Child locks 147 Care, light-alloy wheels 424 Child restraint systems, i-Size 139 Care of upholstery fabrics 424 Child restraint systems, see Carrying children Care products 423 safely 136 Care, vehicle 423 Child safety seat fasteners, ISOFIX 139 Caring Car, BMW Intelligent Personal Assis‐ Child seat classes, see ISOFIX child restraint tant 68 systems 139 Caring for displays, monitors 425 Child seat mounting 137 Car key, see Vehicle key 93 Child seats, see Carrying children safely 136 Carpet, care 425 Chrome-plated surfaces, care 424 CarPlay, connection to vehicle 90 Chrome surfaces, care 424 Carrying children 136 Cigarette lighter 320 Carrying children safely 136 Cleaning displays, monitors 425 Car wash 422 Cleaning, Head-Up Display 425 Car wash, automatic 422 Closing during rain, see Closing the glass sun‐ Catalytic converter, see Hot exhaust system 337 roof automatically 115 CBS Condition Based Service 403 Closing the glass sunroof automatically 115
440 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 441
Everything from A to Z REFERENCE
Closing with a smartphone, see BMW Digital Cooling system 400 Key 99 Cornering light 203 Closing with the Key Card 98 Corrosion of brake discs 339 Coasting 153 Crossing traffic warning 301 Coat hooks 328 Cruise Control, active with Stop&Go func‐ Collision warning with braking function 214 tion 255 Comfort Access 104 Cruise control, see Active Cruise Control 255 Comfort closing, vehicle key 95 Cruise Control, see Cruise Control 253 Comfort opening, vehicle key 94 Cruise Control with distance control, see Active Communication, see Owner's Handbook for Cruise Control 255 Navigation, Entertainment, Communication 6 Cruise Control without distance control, see Compass 175 Cruise Control 253 Compatible devices, see Suitable devices 85 Cupholder 327 Compressor 375 Cup holder, front 327 Concierge Service, see Owner's Handbook for Cup holder, rear 327 Navigation, Entertainment, Communication 6 Current consumption 173, 175 Condensation when vehicle is parked 339 Customer support, see Owner's Handbook for Condensation, windscreen 308, 313 Navigation, Entertainment, Communication 6 Condition Based Service CBS 403 ConnectedDrive, see Owner's Handbook for D Navigation, Entertainment, Communication 6 Connecting a device 84 Damage, tyres 370 Connecting electrical devices, see Sockets 320 Dash cam, see BMW Drive Recorder 242 Connecting, mobile devices 84 Data protection, settings 79 Connection point, starting aid 418 Data, see Deleting personal data 79 Connections, Screen Mirroring 89 Data storage medium, see Vehicle data and data Consumption display, widget in the instrument protection 9 cluster 173, 175 Data, technical 428 Consumption, see Current consump‐ Date 75 tion 173, 175 Daytime running lights 201 Consumption, see Journey data 194 DCC, see Cruise Control 253 Contactless opening and closing of the tail‐ Deactivation, airbags 210 gate 107 Deactivation, hybrid system 20 Contacts, see Owner's Handbook for Navigation, Defrosting, see Defrosting the wind‐ Entertainment, Communication 6 screen 308, 313 Contact with water, hybrid system 20 Defrosting, windscreen 308, 313 Continuing a journey with a flat tyre 384, 387 Deleting personal data 79 Control display 58 Departure schedule, see Standing air condition‐ Control Display, brightness 77 ing 316 Controller 58 Departure times, stationary air conditioning 317 Control systems, driving stability 247 Desired speed, see Active Cruise Control 255 Converting the headlights, see Right-hand/left- Destination distance, on-board computer 175 hand traffic 205 Destination entry, see Owner's Handbook for Coolant 400 Navigation, Entertainment, Communication 6 Coolant level 400 Detecting traffic lights 266 Cooling effect, maximum 306, 311 Device list 85
441 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 442
REFERENCE Everything from A to Z
Diagnosis connection 404 Driving 149 Digital Key, see BMW Digital Key 99 Driving Assistant, see Intelligent Safety 212 Dimensions 428 Driving comfort 304 Dimming exterior mirror 132 Driving Experience Control 155 Dimming rear-view mirror 132 Driving hints 337 Dipping headlights, see High beam assis‐ Driving information, general 337 tant 203 Driving information, running in 336 Direction indicators, see Turn indicators 161 Driving instructions, hybrid system 349 Direct selection buttons, see Functional book‐ Driving lights control, automatic 199 marks 57 Driving path lines, rear-view camera 284 Disabling operating elements, automatic rear air- Driving path lines, Surround View 294 conditioning system 316 Driving Stability Control Systems 247 Display, iDrive 55 Driving style analysis, HYBRID ECO PRO 353 Displaying notifications, BMW Intelligent Per‐ Driving through water 338 sonal Assistant 67 Driving with hybrid drive, HYBRID 149 Display in the windscreen, see Head-Up Dis‐ Driving with internal combustion engine, play 196 POWER 149 Display lighting, see Instrument lighting 206 Drying air, see Air conditioning function 310 Display of charging status 361 DSC Dynamic Stability Control 247 Displays 171 DTC, Dynamic Traction Control 248 Displays and symbols 7 Dynamic brake lights 242 Disposal, coolant 401 Dynamic damping, see Adaptive M suspen‐ Disposal, vehicle battery 410 sion 304 Disposing of the old battery 410 Dynamic ECO lighting function 202 Distance to destination, on-board computer 175 Dynamic Stability Control DSC 247 Distance warning, see PDC 278 Dynamic Traction Control DTC 248 Door handle lighting, see Welcome light 201 Door opening angle, Surround View 294 E Downhill gradients 339 Drive mode, see Driving Experience Control 155 eASSIST, support for the internal combustion Drive-off assistant 247 engine 154 Driver activity, see Driver Attention Camera 76 eBOOST, support for the internal combustion Driver assistance, driving, see Intelligent engine 154 Safety 212 ECO lighting function, dynamic 202 Driver assistance, parking, see Parking assis‐ Efficiency display, widget in the instrument clus‐ tance systems 278 ter 173, 175 Driver assistance, see Intelligent Safety 212 Efficient4x4, see xDrive 249 Driver Assistance Systems 251 Electrical power window switches 116 Driver Attention Camera 76 ELECTRIC button 149 Drive-ready state, electric 52 Electric drive-ready state 52 Drive-ready state, engine start 52 Electric driving, BATTERY CONTROL 149 Drive-ready state, rest state and standby Electric driving, ELECTRIC 149 state 51 Electric driving, ePOWER 149 Driver profiles 80 ELECTRIC, electric driving 149 Driver profile, setting up 80 Electric glass sunroof 118 Driver profiles, welcome screen 80
442 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 443
Everything from A to Z REFERENCE
ELECTRIC INDIVIDUAL, see Driving Experience Equipment, interior 319 Control 155 ESP, Electronic Stability Program, see DSC 247 ELECTRIC, see Driving Experience Control 155 Exchanging, wheels and tyres 371 Electronic oil measurement 397 Exhaust gas particle filter 337 Electronic Stability Program, ESP, see DSC 247 Exhaust, see Exhaust system 337 E-mail, see Owner's Handbook for Navigation, Exhaust system 337 Entertainment, Communication 6 Experience Modes, BMW Intelligent Personal Emergency assistance, see BMW Accident As‐ Assistant 68 sistance 414 Exterior lights when unlocking 94 Emergency assistance, see BMW Roadside As‐ Exterior lights with the vehicle locked 95 sistance 413 Exterior mirror 131 Emergency brake, see Emergency stop assis‐ Exterior mirror, automatically dimming 132 tant 240 Exterior mirror, automatic parking function 132 Emergency braking function when parking, Ac‐ Exterior mirror internal 132 tive PDC 281 Exterior mirrors, malfunction 131 Emergency braking, see PostCrash – iBrake 245 External start, see Starting aid 417 Emergency call 414 Eye for securing cable, towing a trailer 346 Emergency release, charging cable 360 Eye for towing 420 Emergency release, fuel tank filler flap 367 Eyes, see Lashing eye in the boot 330 Emergency release, transmission lockout 169 Emergency running properties, tyres 373 F Emergency service, see BMW Accident Assis‐ tance 414 Factory settings, see Resetting vehicle configu‐ Emergency stop assistant 240 ration 78 Energy recuperation, CHARGE 153 Failure message, see Check Control 179 Engine, automatic start-stop function 151 False warnings, see Avoiding false warnings 116 Engine compartment 393 Fan run-on, see Exhaust gas particle filter 337 Engine coolant 400 Fastening seat belts, see Seat belts 125 Engine noise, artificial, see Acoustic protection Fatigue warning function 245 for pedestrians 151 Fault displays, see Check Control 179 Engine oil change 400 Favourites buttons, see Functional book‐ Engine oil filler neck 398 marks 57 Engine oil grades for topping up 399 Filler neck for engine oil 398 Engine oil level, checking electronically 397 Filter, see Microfilter 308 Engine oil, topping up 398 Filter, see Microfilter/activated charcoal filter 313 Engine start, see Drive-ready state 52 Finding charging stations, see Owner's Engine start, see Starting aid 417 Handbook for Navigation, Entertainment, Com‐ Entering an address, Navigation, see Owner's munication 6 Handbook for Navigation, Entertainment, Com‐ Fine wood parts, care 424 munication 6 Fire extinguisher 416 Entering letters and numbers 56 First-aid kit 412 Entertainment, see Owner's Handbook for Navi‐ First steps, see Setup assistant 80 gation, Entertainment, Communication 6 Flat tyre, continuing a journey 384, 387 Entertainment, selection list in the instrument Flat tyre, flat tyre monitor RPA 386 cluster 193 Flat tyre message, RPA 386 ePOWER, electric driving 149 Flat tyre message, Tyre Pressure Monitor 382
443 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 444
REFERENCE Everything from A to Z
Flat tyre monitor RPA 386 Functional bookmarks, iDrive 57 Flat tyre, remedying 374 Functions, hybrid system 149 Flat tyre, see Tyre Pressure Monitor 379 Fuses 410 Flat tyre warning lamp, RPA 386 Flat tyre warning light, Tyre Pressure Moni‐ G tor 382 Flat tyre, wheel change 388 Gearbox, see Steptronic transmission 165 Flood, driving through 338 General driving information 337 Floor carpet, care 425 General settings 75 Fog lights, replacing, see Lights and bulbs 407 Gesture Control 69 Fold-out position, windscreen wiper 164 Gestures, see BMW Gesture Control 69 Foot brake 338 Give way warning 235 Foot mats, care 425 Glare protection, see Sun visor 319 Fording depth, water 338 Glass sunroof, electric 118 Four-wheel drive, see xDrive 249 Glass sunroof, initialising system 121 Front airbags 208 Glove compartment 325 Front collision warning, see Collision warn‐ G meter, widget in the instrument cluster 173 ing 214 GPS, navigation, see Owner's Handbook for Front collision warning, see Intelligent Navigation, Entertainment, Communication 6 Safety 212 Front collision warning, see Junction warn‐ H ing 219 Front collision warning, see Pedestrian warn‐ Handbrake, see Parking brake 158 ing 222 Hands-free system, see Owner's Handbook for Front-collision warning, see Road priority warn‐ Navigation, Entertainment, Communication 6 ing 235 Hazard warning lights 412 Front-end collision warning with City braking Head airbags 208 function 214 Head Light, adaptive 202 Front fog lights 205 Headlight courtesy delay feature 201 Front head rests 128 Headlight flasher 161 Front neck supports, see Front head rests 128 Headlight glass 407 Front passenger's side exterior mirror, tilting Headlights, care 423 down, see Automatic parking function 132 Headliner 46 Front passenger airbags, deactivation/activa‐ Head restraints and seats 122 tion 210 Head-Up Display 196 Front passenger airbags, indicator lamp 211 Head-Up Display, care 425 Front seats 122 Head-Up Display, saving position, see Memory Fuel 396 function 133 Fuel filler flap 366 Heavy transported loads, stowing 329 Fuel gauge 185 Height, vehicle 428 Fuel quality 396 Help in case of a breakdown 412 Fuel recommendation 396 Help in driving off, see Drive-off assistant 247 Fuel tank cap 366 High beam assistant 203 Fuel tank capacity 431 High-beam headlights 161 Fuel tank filler flap, manual release 367 High-voltage battery, charge status display 177 Fuel tank, see Capacities 431
444 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 445
Everything from A to Z REFERENCE
High-voltage battery, long stationary peri‐ Individual settings, see Driver profiles 80 ods 426 Inductive charging, smartphone, see Wireless High-voltage battery, recycling 405 charging dock 322 Hill Start Assist, see Drive-off assistant 247 Inflation pressure, tyres 368 Holder for beverages 327 Inflation pressure warning RPA, tyres 386 Holding charge state, BATTERY CON‐ Information window, Control Display 77 TROL 149 Initialising, runflat indicator RPA 386 Home lights, switching on 96 Input comparison 56 Home lights, vehicle key 114 Input, iDrive 55 Home page, see Internet 6 Instrument cluster 171 Horn 42 Instrument cluster switch, see Turn indica‐ Hotel function, see Parking service mode 112 tors 161 Hot exhaust system 337 Instrument cluster switch, see Wiper sys‐ HYBRID button 149 tem 161 HYBRID COMFORT, see Driving Experience Instrument lighting 206 Control 155 Integrated key 102 HYBRID, driving with hybrid drive 149 Integrated Owner's Handbook in the vehicle 21 HYBRID ECO PRO, driving style analysis 353 Intelligent anticipation 154 HYBRID ECO PRO, route-ahead assistant 352 Intelligent emergency call 415 HYBRID ECO PRO, see Driving Experience Con‐ Intelligent Personal Assistant 67 trol 155 Intelligent Safety 212 HYBRID STANDARD, see Driving Experience Intended use 8 Control 155 Intensity, AUTO program 311 Hybrid system, adjusting to the route 154 Interior camera, see Driver Attention Camera 76 Hybrid system, automatic deactivation 20 Interior equipment 319 Hybrid system, contact with water 20 Interior light 206 Hybrid system indicators 177 Interior lights when unlocking 94 Hybrid system, safety 20 Interior light with the vehicle locked 95 Hybrid system, see BMW eDRIVE 149 Interior mirror 132 Hybrid system, using efficiently 349 Interior mirror, external 131 Hybrid system, working on 20 Interior movement detector 116 Internet connection 88 I Internet hotspot 88 Internet site 6 iBrake – PostCrash 245 Interval Display, see Service requirements 189 Ice warning, see Outside temperature warn‐ i-Size child restraint systems 139 ing 187 ISOFIX, child safety seat fasteners 139 Identification number, see Vehicle identification number 18 J iDrive 55 Ignition key, see Vehicle key 93 Jacking points 391 Important considerations 136 Journey data 194 Indicator and warning lamps 180 Joystick, Steptronic transmission 165 Indicator lamp, front passenger airbags 211 Jump starting, see Starting aid 417 Indicators of the hybrid system 177 Junction warning, see Road priority warning 235 Individual air distribution 308, 313 Junction warning with City braking function 219
445 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 446
REFERENCE Everything from A to Z
K Light in the exterior mirror, see Lane Change Warning 228 Kenaf, care 424 Lights 199 Key Card 98 Light switch 199 Keyless Go, see Comfort Access 104 LIM button, see Manual Speed Limiter 251 Key, mechanical 102 List, instrument cluster, see Selection lists 193 Key, see BMW Digital Key 99 List of all messages 78 Key, see Vehicle key 93 Loading 329 Key switch for front passenger airbags 210 Loading the boot, see Stowing transported Kick-down, Steptronic transmission 165 loads 329 Knee airbag 209 Locking, automatic 114 Locking, see Opening and closing 93 L Locking settings 113 Locking, vehicle key 94 Labelling of recommended tyres 372 Locking wheel bolts 390 Labelling of run-flat tyres 373 Lock, power window switches, see Safety Lane boundary, warning 225 switch 118 Lane change assistant 273 Lock, wheel bolts 390 Lane Change Warning 228 Logging on, mobile devices, see Connec‐ Lane control assistant, see Steering and lane tions 84 control assistant 268 Long stationary periods, high-voltage bat‐ Lane control assistant with active side collision tery 426 protection, see Side collision warning 231 Low-beam headlights 200 Lane Departure Warning 225 Luggage compartment 329 Language, setting 76 Luggage compartment cover 333 Laser high-beam headlights 205 Luggage net 334 Lashing eyes in the boot 330 Luggage rack, see Roof rack 340 Lashing straps, see Lashing eyes in the Lumbar support 124 boot 330 Lateral parking aid, Surround View 294 M Lateral parking aid without Surround View 282 Launch Control 169 Maintenance 403 Leather care 424 Maintenance requirement, see CBS Condition Leaving a parking space 290 Based Service 403 LED fog light, replacing, see Lights and Maintenance, see Service requirements 189 bulbs 407 Maintenance System, BMW 403 LED headlights, replacing, see Lights and Make-up mirror 319 bulbs 407 Malfunction displays, see Check Control 179 Left-hand traffic, light setting 205 Malfunction, vehicle key 97 Length, vehicle 428 Managing devices 85 Light-alloy wheels, care 424 Manual mode, Steptronic transmission 165 Lighter 320 Manual operation, air distribution 308, 313 Lighter, front 320 Manual operation, amount of air 307, 312 Light in exterior mirror, see Crossing traffic warn‐ Manual operation, fuel tank filler flap 367 ing 301 Map update, see Owner's Handbook for Naviga‐ Lighting 199 tion, Entertainment, Communication 6
446 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 447
Everything from A to Z REFERENCE
Matt paintwork, care 424 N Maximum cooling effect 306, 311 Maximum speed, display, see Speed Limit Navigation data, on-board computer 175 Info 190 Navigation, see Owner's Handbook for Naviga‐ Maximum speed, winter tyres 372 tion, Entertainment, Communication 6 Media of the Owner's Handbook 21 Net 334 Medical supplies, see First-aid kit 412 Neutral cleaner, see Light-alloy wheels, care 424 Memory function 133 New wheels and tyres 371 Menu, instrument cluster, see Selection No Passing Information, see Speed Limit lists 193 Info 190 Messages 78 Notes 6 Messages, see Check Control 179 Nylon rope for tow-starting/towing 420 Microfilter 308, 313 Minimum tread depth, tyres 370 O Mirror, vanity 319 Mobile communication in the vehicle 338 OBD on-board diagnosis 404 Mobile devices, managing 85 Obstacle marker, rear-view camera 284 Mobile phone, see Owner's Handbook for Navi‐ Obstacle marking, Surround View 294 gation, Entertainment, Communication 6 Octane number, see Petrol grade 396 Mobile Service, see BMW Accident Assis‐ Odometer, see Journey data 194 tance 414 Oil change 400 Mobile Service, see BMW Roadside Assis‐ Oil change interval, see Service require‐ tance 413 ments 189 Mobile telephone, connecting 84 Oil filler neck 398 Mobile telephone, see Owner's Handbook for Oil grades for topping up, engine 399 Navigation, Entertainment, Communication 6 Oil level, checking electronically 397 Mobility System 374 Oil, topping up 398 Mode 2 charging 356 On-board computer, see Journey data 194 Mode 2 charging cable 358 On-board diagnosis OBD 404 Mode 3 charging cable 358 On-board literature, printed 21 MODE button, see Active Cruise Control 255 On-board monitor, see Control display 58 Moisture in the headlights, see Headlight On-board tool kit 406 glass 407 Opening and closing 93 Monitor, see Control display 58 Opening with a smartphone, see BMW Digital Mounting child restraints 137 Key 99 MP3 player, see Owner's Handbook for Naviga‐ Opening with the Key Card 98 tion, Entertainment, Communication 6 Operating menus, iDrive 55 M suspension, adaptive, see Adaptive M suspen‐ Operating principle, iDrive 55 sion 304 Operation via voice control 63 Multifunction steering wheel, buttons 42 Optimum shift indicator 190 Multimedia, see Owner's Handbook for Naviga‐ Optional equipment, see Vehicle equipment 7 tion, Entertainment, Communication 6 Outside air, see AUC 312 Music track, gesture control 69 Outside temperature 187 Overtaking restrictions 190 Owner's Handbook on language, BMW Intelli‐ gent Personal Assistant 68
447 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 448
REFERENCE Everything from A to Z
Owner's Handbook, printed 21 Power failure 409 Powermeter, see Performance display 186 P Power window switches 116 Preliminary air conditioning, see Standing air Paintwork, vehicle care 423 conditioning 316 Panorama glass sunroof, see Electric glass sun‐ Pressure, tyres 368 roof 118 Pressure warning RPA, tyres 386 Panorama View 298 Printed on-board literature 21 Park Assistant 286 Profiles, see Driver profiles 80 Park Assistant Plus, see Surround View 293 Protection for pedestrians, acoustic 151 Park Assist, leaving a parking space 290 Protection function, glass sunroof, see Anti-trap Park Distance Control PDC 278 mechanism 120 Parking aid, see PDC 278 Protection function, windows, see Anti-trap Parking assistance systems 278 mechanism 117 Parking Assistant Plus, see Surround View 293 Parking Assistant, see Park Assistant 286 Q Parking, Automatic Hold, see Parking brake 158 Parking brake 158 Quick charge cable, see Mode 3 charging ca‐ Parking lights 200 ble 358 Parking service mode 112 Particle filter, see Exhaust gas particle filter 337 R Part replacement 406 Parts and accessories 9 Racing track 341 Payload, technical data 429 Radar sensors, see Sensors of the vehicle 47 PDC Park Distance Control 278 Radiator fan, see Exhaust gas particle filter 337 Pedestrian protection, active 211 Radio, see Owner's Handbook for Navigation, Performance Control 304 Entertainment, Communication 6 Performance display, instrument cluster 186 Radio signals 338 Personal data, deleting 79 Rain sensor 162 Personal profile, see Driver profiles 80 Range 188 Personal settings 79 Rear automatic air conditioning 314 Person warning with braking function 222 Rear collision prevention 234 Petrol 396 Rear collision warning, see Rear collision preven‐ Petrol grade 396 tion 234 Petrol particle filter, see Exhaust gas particle fil‐ Rear fog light 205 ter 337 Rear fog light, replacing, see Lights and Phone call, gesture control 69 bulbs 407 Place for children 136 Rear head rests 129 Plasters, see First-aid kit 412 Rear luggage rack 340 Plastic parts, care 425 Rear neck supports, see Rear head rests 129 Pockets, doors 326 Rear seat backrests, folding down 331 Possible gestures, gesture control 69 Rear-view camera, see Surround View 293 PostCrash – iBrake 245 Rear-view camera, without Surround View 283 Power display, see Sport displays 195 Rear-view mirror with automatic anti-dazzle func‐ POWER, driving with internal combustion en‐ tion 132 gine 149 Rear window heating 308, 313
448 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 449
Everything from A to Z REFERENCE
Rear wiper, operation 164 Reset, Tyre Pressure Monitor 381 Recirculated-air mode 307, 312 Restraint systems for children, see Carrying chil‐ Recirculating air filter, see Microfilter/activated dren safely 136 charcoal filter 313 Rest state, standby state and drive-ready Recirculation, see Recirculated-air state 51 mode 307, 312 RESUME button, Active Cruise Control 255 Recommended makes of tyre 372 RESUME button, cruise control 253 Recuperation, adaptive 353 Retreaded tyres 372 Recuperation, see Energy recuperation 153 Reuse, recycling 405 Recycling 405 Reversing assistant 291 Recycling, high-voltage battery 405 Revolution counter 186 Refuelling 365 Right-hand traffic, light setting 205 Regular charging 349 Road priority warning 235 Regulation climate control 135 Roadside Assistance, see BMW Roadside Assis‐ Remote 3D View 300 tance 413 Remote control for audio, see Owner's Roller cover 333 Handbook for Navigation, Entertainment, Com‐ Roller sunblinds, rear side windows 118 munication 6 RON, petrol grade 396 Remote control, see Vehicle key 93 Roof load, permitted 429 Remote services, app, see Owner's Handbook Roof rack 340 for Navigation, Entertainment, Communica‐ Rope for tow-starting/towing 420 tion 6 Roundabout light 203 Remote Software Upgrade 72 Route-ahead assistant 352 Replacement of parts 406 Route, navigation, see Owner's Handbook for Replacement, wheels and tyres 371 Navigation, Entertainment, Communication 6 Replacing bulbs, see Lights and bulbs 407 RPA flat tyre monitor 386 Replacing front lights, see Bulbs and lights 407 RSC Runflat System, see Run-flat tyres 373 Replacing headlights, see Bulbs and lights 407 RTTI, see Owner's Handbook for Navigation, En‐ Replacing laser headlights, see Bulbs and tertainment, Communication 6 lights 407 Rubber parts, care 424 Replacing light-emitting diodes, see Bulbs and Run Flat, see Run-flat tyres 373 lights 407 Run-flat tyres 373 Replacing lights, see Bulbs and lights 407 Running in 336 Replacing parts 406 Run-on of fan, see Exhaust gas particle filter 337 Replacing rear light, see Bulbs and lights 407 Replacing tail lights, see Bulbs and lights 407 S Replacing the wiper blades 406 RES CNCL button, Active Cruise Control, Safe seating position 122 ACC 255 Safe Share function, see BMW Digital Key 99 RES CNCL button, cruise control 253 Safety locks, doors and windows 147 Reserve warning, see Range 188 Safety of the hybrid system 20 Reservoir for washer fluid 401 Safety package, see Active Protection 244 Resetting settings, vehicle 78 Safety switch, windows 118 Resetting, Tyre Pressure Monitor 381 Safety systems, see Airbags 208 Resetting, vehicle configuration 78 Safety systems, see Intelligent Safety 212 Resetting, vehicle settings 78 Saving energy, see Optimum shift indicator 190
449 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 450
REFERENCE Everything from A to Z
Saving fuel 348 Side nozzles, see Ventilation 314 Saving mirror position, see Memory func‐ Side protection, Surround View, see Lateral park‐ tion 133 ing aid 294 Saving seat position, see Memory function 133 Side protection without Surround View, see Lat‐ Saving steering wheel position, see Memory eral parking aid 282 function 133 Signal horn, horn 42 Screen Mirroring, connection 89 Signals on unlocking, see Acknowledgement Screen, see Control display 58 signals 113 Sealant, see Mobility System 374 Sizes, see Dimensions 428 Seat belt reminder for driver and front passenger Sliding/tilting roof, see Electric glass sun‐ seat 127 roof 118 Seat belt reminder for rear seats 127 Smallest turning radius, vehicle 428 Seat belts 125 Smartphone, connecting 84 Seat belts, care 425 Smartphone integration, Android Auto prepara‐ Seat heating 134 tion 91 Seat heating, regulation climate control 135 Smartphone integration, Apple CarPlay prepara‐ Seats and head restraints 122 tion 90 Seats, front 122 Smartphone, operating via voice control 65 Securing, transported loads 329 Smartphone, see Owner's Handbook for Naviga‐ Selection list in the instrument cluster 193 tion, Entertainment, Communication 6 Selector lever, Steptronic transmission 165 Smokers package 319 Sensors, care 425 SMS, see Short messages, see Owner's Sensors of the vehicle 47 Handbook for Navigation, Entertainment, Com‐ Service history 189 munication 6 Service requirements 189 Snow chains 378 Service requirement, see CBS Condition Based Socket for on-board diagnosis OBD 404 Service 403 Sockets, electrical devices 320 Services, ConnectedDrive, see Owner's Software update, see Remote Software Up‐ Handbook for Navigation, Entertainment, Com‐ grade 72 munication 6 Software upgrade, see Remote Software Up‐ Service, see BMW Accident Assistance 414 grade 72 Service, see BMW Roadside Assistance 413 Software version, see Remote Software Up‐ SET button, Active Cruise Control 255 grade 72 SET button, cruise control 253 Soot particle filter, see Exhaust gas particle fil‐ Setting, Control Display 77 ter 337 Settings, general 75 SOS button, see Intelligent emergency call 415 Settings, locking/unlocking 113 SOS button, see Statutory emergency call 414 Settings, seats and head restraints 122 Sound output, see Owner's Handbook for Navi‐ Settings, steering wheel 133 gation, Entertainment, Communication 6 Setup assistant 80 Sound, see Owner's Handbook for Navigation, Shift paddles on the steering wheel 165 Entertainment, Communication 6 Shock absorber adjustment, active, see Adaptive Spanner, see On-board tool kit 406 M suspension 304 Speech recognition 63 Side airbag 208 Speed Limit Assist 264 Side collision warning 231 Speed Limit Device, Manual Speed Limiter 251 Side lights 200 Speed limit, display, see Speed Limit Info 190
450 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 451
Everything from A to Z REFERENCE
Speed limiter, manual 251 Storage, charge cables 358 Speed Limit Info 190 Storage compartment, centre console 326 Speed warning 77 Storage compartment, luggage compart‐ Sport displays 195 ment 330 SPORT INDIVIDUAL, see Driving Experience Storage compartments 325 Control 155 Storage facilities 325 Sport program, Steptronic transmission 165 Storage, tyres 373 SPORT STANDARD, see Driving Experience Stowing charging cables, see Storage 358 Control 155 Stowing, transported loads 329 Sport steering, variable 249 Suitable devices 85 Sport suspension, see Adaptive M suspen‐ Suitable mobile telephones 85 sion 304 Summer tyres, tread 370 Stability control systems 247 Sun visor 319 Standard charging cable, see Mode 2 charging Supplementary handbook 21 cable 358 Supplementary text message 180 Standard charging, see Mode 2 charging 356 Support of the internal combustion engine 154 Standard equipment, see Vehicle equipment 7 Surround View 293 Standby state, rest state and drive-ready Surround View, gesture control 69 state 51 Suspension, electronic, see Adaptive M suspen‐ Standing air conditioning 316 sion 304 Start/Stop button 151 Suspension settings, see Driving Experience Starting aid 417 Control 155 Starting aid terminals 418 Swinging of the trailer, see Trailer Stability Con‐ Starting assistance, see DSC 247 trol 344 Starting, see Drive-ready state 52 Switches, see Driving area 42 Starting the engine, see Drive-ready state 52 Switch for driving dynamics, see Driving Experi‐ Starting the engine with the Key Card 98 ence Control 155 Stationary air conditioning, setting 114 Symbols and displays 7 Stations, AM/FM, see Owner's Handbook for SYNC programme, automatic air condition‐ Navigation, Entertainment, Communication 6 ing 313 Status indicator, tyres 381 Status information, iDrive 56 T Status of the Owner's Handbook 8 Status, vehicle 196 Tailgate, contactless opening and closing 107 Statutory emergency call 414 Tailgate, vehicle key 95 Steering and lane control assistant 268 Tank aeration 365 Steering column adjustment 133 Tank display 185 Steering wheel, buttons 42 Tank unlocking, see Tank aeration 365 Steering wheel heating 133 Technical changes, see Your own safety 8 Steering wheel heating, regulation climate con‐ Technical data 428 trol 135 Telephone, connecting 84 Steering wheel, setting 133 Telephone, see Owner's Handbook for Naviga‐ Steptronic sport transmission, see Steptronic tion, Entertainment, Communication 6 transmission 165 Telephone, selection list in the instrument clus‐ Steptronic transmission 165 ter 193 Stopping the engine, see Drive-ready state 52
451 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 452
REFERENCE Everything from A to Z
Teleservices, see Owner's Handbook for Naviga‐ Traffic-queue assistant, see Assisted Driving tion, Entertainment, Communication 6 Plus 272 Television, TV, see Owner's Handbook for Navi‐ Trailer loads 430 gation, Entertainment, Communication 6 Trailer nose weight, technical data 430 Temperature, automatic air condition‐ Trailer Stability Control 344 ing 306, 310 Trailer tow hitch, ball linkage electrically swivella‐ Temperature display, see Outside tempera‐ ble 345 ture 187 Trailer tow hitch, rear-view camera view 284 Temperature preconditioning, see Standing air Trailer tow hitch, Surround View 294 conditioning 316 Transmission lockout, unlocking electroni‐ Tension belt, see Lashing eyes in the boot 330 cally 169 Text message, Check Control 180 Transported loads, stowing and securing 329 Thigh support 124 Tread, tyres 370 Third-party providers, voice assistant 66 Trip distance recorder, see Journey data 194 Through-loading system 331 Triple turn signal 161 Tilt alarm sensor 116 Turn indicator, indicator lamp 183 Tilting down the front passenger's side exterior Turn indicators, high-beam headlights, headlight mirror, see Automatic parking function 132 flasher 161 Time 75 Turn indicators, replacing bulbs, see Bulbs and Time setting, automatic 75 lights 407 Tools 406 Turning circle lines, rear-view camera 284 Top View, see Surround View 293 Turning circle lines, Surround View 294 Torque display, see Sport displays 195 Turning radius, vehicle 428 Total weight, permitted 429 TV, see Owner's Handbook for Navigation, En‐ Total weight, trailer operation 430 tertainment, Communication 6 Touchpad, Controller 61 Tyre damage 370 Tourist function, see Right-hand/left-hand traf‐ Tyre inflation pressure 368 fic 205 Tyre makes, recommendation 372 Tow bar 420 Tyre pressure 368 Tow fitting, see Towing eye 420 Tyre Pressure Monitor 379 Towing a trailer 342 Tyre pressure monitoring, see RPA 386 Towing a trailer, activation 345 Tyre Pressure Monitor, reset 381 Towing a trailer, technical data 430 Tyre Pressure Monitor, resetting 381 Towing away 419 Tyre pressure test, see Tyre Pressure Moni‐ Towing eye 420 tor 379 Towing rope 420 Tyre repair kit, see Mobility System 374 Towing, see Tow-starting and towing 419 Tyre replacement 371 Tow-starting 419 Tyres and wheels 368 Traction control 248 Tyre sealant, see Mobility System 374 TRACTION, driving dynamics 248 Tyre settings 380 Traffic information, see Owner's Handbook for Tyres with emergency running properties 373 Navigation, Entertainment, Communication 6 Tyre tread 370 Traffic jam assistant, see Assisted Driving Plus 272 Traffic light detection 266
452 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 453
Everything from A to Z REFERENCE
U Vents, see Ventilation 314 Video recording, see BMW Drive Recorder 242 Ultrasonic sensors, see Sensors of the vehi‐ Video, see Owner's Handbook for Navigation, cle 47 Entertainment, Communication 6 Units of measure 76 VIN, see Vehicle identification number 18 Units, see Units of measure 76 Voice assistant, third-party providers 66 Unloaded weight 429 Voice control 63 Unlock-button, Steptronic transmission 165 Voice control, see BMW Intelligent Personal As‐ Unlocking, automatic 114 sistant 67 Unlocking manually, charging cable 360 Voice control system 63 Unlocking, see Opening and closing 93 Voice input 63 Unlocking, settings 113 Voice input, gesture control 69 Unlocking, vehicle key 94 Volume, gesture control 69 Updates after going to press 8 Upgrade, see Remote Software Upgrade 72 W USB connection 91 USB port, position in the vehicle 321 Wake word 63 Use, intended 8 Warning and indicator lamps 180 Warning lamp in exterior mirror, see Crossing V traffic warning 301 Warning lamp in the exterior mirror, see Lane Valet parking mode, see Parking service Change Warning 228 mode 112 Warning messages, see Check Control 179 Vanity mirror 319 Warning of crossing traffic 301 Variable sport steering 249 Warnings, false 116 Vehicle acknowledgement signals 113 Warning triangle 412 Vehicle battery 407 Warranty 8 Vehicle breakdown, see Help in case of a break‐ Washer fluid 401 down 412 Washing bay view, Surround View 294 Vehicle care 423 Washing fluid, see Washer fluid 401 Vehicle configuration, resetting 78 Wash, vehicle 422 Vehicle data and data protection 9 Water, hybrid system 20 Vehicle equipment 7 Water on streets 338 Vehicle identification number 18 Water, see Condensation when vehicle is Vehicle key 93 parked 339 Vehicle key, additional 97 Website, see Internet 6 Vehicle key, changing batteries 96 Weights 429 Vehicle key, integrated key 102 Welcome Light Carpet, see Welcome light 201 Vehicle key, loss 97 Welcome lights 201 Vehicle key, malfunction 97 Welcome light when unlocking 94 Vehicle paintwork, care 423 Welcome screen, driver profiles 80 Vehicle, running in 336 Wheelbase, vehicle 428 Vehicle status 196 Wheel change 388 Vehicle wash 422 Wheel replacement 371 Ventilation 314 Wheels and tyres 368 Ventilation, see Standing air conditioning 316 Widgets, iDrive 56
453 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 Seite 454
REFERENCE Everything from A to Z
Widgets, instrument cluster 173, 174 Width, vehicle 428 Wi-Fi connection 88 Wi-Fi connection, see WLAN connection 88 Wi-Fi hotspot 88 Window, defrosting 308, 313 Windscreen, defrosting 308, 313 Windscreen washing system, see Wiper sys‐ tem 161 Windscreen wipers, see Wiper system 161 Winter tyres 372 Winter tyres, tread 370 Wiper, fold-out position 164 Wipers, see Wiper system 161 Wiper system 161 Wiping fluid, see Washer fluid 401 Wireless charging dock for smartphones 322 Wireless charging, smartphone, see Wireless charging dock 322 WLAN connection 88 Wood parts, care 424 Wordmatch principle, see Input comparison 56 Working on, hybrid system 20 Wrong-way driving warning 238
X
xDrive 249 XTRABOOST, see Driving Experience Con‐ trol 155
Y
Your own safety 8
454 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 *BL5A1EA5300W*
01405A1EA53 en
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20 The Ultimate Driving Machine
BMW DRIVER'S GUIDE APP.
Your customised vehicle information in an app. Optimised for smartphones & tablets. Can be used offline.
*BL5A1EA5300W*
01405A1EA53 en Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1EA53 - X/20